05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
SECTION 11500
SHOP EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide Shop Equipment as indicated on Drawings and
specified herein.
B.
Manufacturer's names and model numbers are indicated
for purposes of establishing relative quality, type,
size, and requirements.
C.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate
to this Section:
Motors and Control Equipment.........
Mechanical and Electrical Work
connected to the equipment...........
1.02
Section 16480
Division 15 &
Division 16
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
Provide
manufacturers'
model
number,
product
description and specifications for each equipment item
to be used on the project.
B.
NYSCA
Shop Drawings
1.
Provide complete shop drawings showing room
locations, model numbers, dimensions, attachment
details, etc., for all pieces of equipment.
2.
Approval shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility of the proper
fitting and construction of the Work in strict
accordance with the Contract requirements or from
the
necessity
of
furnishing
materials
and
workmanship
required
by
the
Drawings
and
Specification which may not be indicated on shop
drawings when approved.
Any materials which are
not
in
accordance
with
the
Drawings
and
Specification must be clearly indicated and a
specific and separate request for the approval of
such materials shall be made in each case.
3.
Do not order or deliver items until shop drawings
and product data have been approved by the
Authority.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 1
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
Quality Control Submittals
1.
D.
Samples
a.
The Contractor shall furnish for approval all
samples required as hereinafter specified;
also in all cases where material and quality
are not definitely specified, samples or
specimens shall be submitted to the Authority
for approval.
The Work shall be in
accordance with approved samples.
b.
To ensure prompt consideration of samples, a
letter, mailed on the date of shipment shall
contain a list of samples that have been
forwarded together with the brand and the
name of the manufacturer of the materials.
This letter must not be sent in the same
package with the samples.
Any sample
received in advance of such letter will be
held two weeks; if at the expiration of that
period
no
identifying
letter
has
been
received the package will be given no
consideration and will be discarded.
c.
All samples must be carefully packed so as to
ensure their delivery in good condition.
Each sample must have a label showing the
material
represented,
the
name
of
the
Contractor, the name of the manufacturer of
the material and the name or number of the
school and its location, for which sample is
intended.
d.
The approval of the samples is for quality,
finish, and general construction, and does
not
modify
the
requirements
of
the
Specification or Drawings as to dimensions or
design.
Quality Assurance
Provide manufacturer's certificate
stating
product
meets
applicable
requirements.
E.
for each item
OSHA
and
UL
Guarantees
As specified in Article 1.05
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 2
05/14/04
F.
1.03
B.
1.
Each item of Shop Equipment supplied shall be
provided with one (1) Instruction/Parts Manual
where applicable.
(To be transferred the
custodian).
2.
Furnish three (3) sets of lubrication data for
each machine stating type of lubricant used and
frequency of application.
Tape one set to the
machine
and
submit
the
other
two
to
the
Authority's Representative (one to be transferred
to the custodian).
Qualifications
1.
Manufacturer:
Company
specializing
in
the
manufacture of the listed product shall have a
minimum of five years experience.
2.
Installer:
Company
specializing
in
the
installation of each item of Shop Equipment shall
have a minimum of three years experience.
Regulatory Requirements
1.
Building Code: Work of this Section shall conform
to all requirements of the N.Y.C. Building Code
and
all
applicable
regulations
of
other
governmental authorities.
2.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): All
Shop Equipment supplied shall meet all current
requirements of the OSHA Act.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
NYSCA
Project Closeout
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
DESIGN NO. _____
General
1.
Each item of Shop Equipment supplied shall bear an
easily legible metal nameplate or other equivalent
permanent marking in a conspicuous place, giving
manufacturer's name and model number.
2.
Deliveries of machines, benches, tools, etc.,
shall be made to locations in building as
specified herein and/or as shown on Drawings.
3.
Where location of equipment is not specified nor
shown on Drawing, deliver equipment into locations
as directed by the Authority's Representative.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 3
05/14/04
B.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
All machines, tools, parts, etc., shall be
protected from possible damage due to handling or
exposure.
Machine parts shall be lubricated and
exposed surfaces coated with a thin layer of oil.
5.
All new machines, new equipment, etc., shall be
fully assembled, adjusted for use, properly oiled
and left in safe, first class operating condition.
6.
Any damage to school property caused in connection
with Work under this Section shall be repaired,
patched, and finished to match surrounding work.
7.
All deliveries of equipment, etc., shall be made
in suitable packages. A bill of lading, in
triplicate, with the complete list of items in the
package or crate shall be fastened to the package
or crate. The bill of lading shall have imprinted
thereon the name of the school, Specification and
Class Nos., reference number and the room number.
Each package or crate shall be delivered to the
school with all charges prepaid.
8.
Packages shall be stored in a safe convenient
location
as
directed
by
the
Authority's
Representative until such time as they can be
unpacked.
9.
The Contractor shall carefully uncrate and/or
unpack the machines, equipment, parts, etc.
10.
Adequate precautions shall be taken by the
Contractor to prevent damage to small tools,
parts, etc., due to oxidation. All machined
surfaces of small parts, etc., shall be coated
with a suitable lubricant.
Heavy Machines, Hoisting, Elevator Use, Etc.
1.
Heavy machines shall be supported on suitable
skids and doorways, stoops, stairways, floors,
etc., shall be protected from possible damage in
moving machines, etc., into building.
2.
Window sash shall be carefully removed and
replaced by the Contractor, where necessary, to
pass machinery through same.
Window frames and
sills, building cornices, floors of classrooms,
corridors, stairways, etc., shall be protected
with heavy planking during hoisting and moving
operations.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 4
05/14/04
C.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
For projects in which the building is fully or
partially occupied, approval must be obtained from
the Authority before hoisting or moving heavy
machinery, equipment, etc.
When such permission
has been given, the Contractor shall erect
temporary barriers wherever required to ensure the
safety of the occupants of the building or on the
premises.
4.
Use of Elevator
a.
Where Drawings or Specifications indicate
building has an elevator this Contractor
shall receive permission from the Authority
before using any elevator.
Such permission
may not be given if in the opinion of the
Authority it will create an unsafe condition
or it will violate any ordinance or code.
b.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to
deliver the equipment, etc., as part of the
Contract
regardless
of
whether
or
not
permission to use elevator is granted.
c.
The
Contractor
shall
confer
with
the
representative of the Authority who will
determine the hours that the Contractor may
make use of the elevator.
d.
The Contractor shall protect the elevator car
from damage during use by the use of
protective pads or other approved methods.
Roofing Protection
1.
The use
any use
must be
Bonding
manner.
of the roof for setting up rigging or for
in delivery is to be avoided and approval
obtained from the Authority and the Roof
Company before the roof can be used in any
2.
If the Work requires the Contractor to install,
place, carry or store materials on any roof of the
building, the Contractor shall do all things
necessary to maintain the integrity and continuity
of the existing roof bond in the areas he is
involved with.
The Contractor shall provide all
necessary items to the written satisfaction of the
Bonding Company and the firms who were the
guarantors and manufacturers of the present roofs.
Submit written revalidation of roof bond with
final requisition for payment.
The identity of
the
original
roof
bonding
agency
and
the
installing Contractor may be obtained from the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 5
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Borough Area Office of the Board of Education
and/or the Division of School Facilities.
1.05
GUARANTEES
A.
All equipment specified to be repaired shall be
guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year
against all defects in workmanship and quality of
materials used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
1
2.02
GENERAL
A.
Shop Equipment Reference Numbers (abbreviated as Ref.
No.); e.g. 12.04, 12.05, etc., correlate with the
numbering of Shop Equipment items shown on the
Drawings.
B.
Where Specification indicates wiring, starters, motors,
etc., refer to Section 16480.
SAFEGUARDS
A.
B.
General
1.
All new equipment to be provided shall have
approved safety guards as required by the
Industrial Safety Codes of the Department of Labor
of New York State and shall be approved by the
Department of Labor of New York State.
Where
specified herein an approved guard of higher
safety standards shall be provided.
2.
Special attention is called to belt guards, eye
shield guards at all wheels of all grinders,
guards at front of drill press spindles, finger
guard at printing presses, finger guard at cutters
and finger guard at shears.
There shall be no
exposed set screws and keys on moving parts and
all belt gear and chain drives on machines shall
completely enclosed in an approved manner.
3.
New safety guards specified for existing equipment
shall comply with the above paragraphs and as
specified herein.
Circular Saw
Unless otherwise specified, each circular saw shall be
provided with a saw guard.
Each guard shall be
provided with a kick back attachment and shall be fully
adjustable over the saw blade so as not to hinder any
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 6
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
of the operations performed except dadoing or routing
on the circular saw.Saw guard shall be capable of
acting as a hold down device and also capable of
providing horizontal pressure against rip fence.
Saw
guard shall be Rockwell Manufacturing Co. Model No. 34885. Circular saw guards shall be completely installed
on circular saws with all necessary brackets and
locating holes drilled and tapped in saw table.
C.
Squaring Shear
Unless otherwise specified, each squaring shear shall
be provided with a transparent finger guard as
specified in the appropriate Ref. No.
D.
E.
F.
Printing Press
1.
At each printing press, provide at each side
thereof, a pipe railing guard as specified in the
appropriate Ref. No.
2.
On each printing press, a gear and pinion guard, a
flywheel guard, a belt guard, a finger guard on
platen and a spring roller curtain guard between
platen and feed table, shall be provided as
specified in the appropriate Ref.No.
Paper Cutter
1.
On each paper cutter, furnish an approved twohanded control with related release device which
shall be installed on operating lever.
2.
The knife bar where the edge projects through the
frame at each side shall be completely enclosed in
cover pieces of No. 20 USS gage sheet steel
properly formed and securely fastened to machine
frame by self tapping screws.
Power Paper Cutter
Power paper cutter shall be provided with a two-hand
operated non-repeat approved safety device.
G.
Sewing Machine
On each sewing or embroidery machine, an approved
finger guard at needle and an approved belt guard shall
be provided.
H.
Proof Press
On each proof press, the rack and gear shall be covered
with approved No. 20 USS gage sheet steel guards, so
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 7
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
that it will be impossible to catch the fingers in
same.
I.
Grinder Wheels
Each separate grinder wheel shall be fully enclosed at
both sides and around circumference, except at front
tool rest, with approved cast iron casing as made up by
the various manufacturers or by an approved enclosure
made up of No. 12 USS gage sheet steel properly formed,
either riveted or welded together to suit conditions
and securely bolted to machine frame.
Each wheel
enclosure guard shall be provided with hinged and
latched or removable side piece at spindle end fastened
with self tapping screws set into double thickness of
metal, all easily removable for replacement of grinding
wheel. Each grinder wheel shall also be provided with
an approved shatter-proof glass (not wire glass) eye
shield, 5 x 7" size, in metal frame with an adjustable
bracket arm, long enough to locate eye shield directly
in front of grinding wheel face, securely fastened to
machine frame.
J.
Lockup Devices
On each machine having an exposed cutting knife
operated by a lever, and on each machine operated by a
foot treadle, an approved lockup device shall be
provided, consisting on each machine of a proper length
of steel machine chain No. 3, welded straight link and
an approved cast bronze padlock, 1-1/2" size shall be
Yale and Towne No. 831-1/2, keyed for use with size No.
47 key and provide each lock with two (2) keys.
The
padlock and chain shall be securely fastened to each
other and to the machine by riveted fastenings in such
a location and arrangement that the operating lever or
treadle can be securely locked in place when the
machine is not in use.
The lockup device shall be
furnished on all squaring shears, paper cutters, and
similar machines.
K.
Chuck Keys
Where chuck keys are required, they shall be safety
type self-ejecting as made by the Miracle Instruments
Co., in lieu of the standard chuck keys.
2.03
SHOP BENCH CONSTRUCTION
A.
General
1.
NYSCA
All
benches
furnished
shall
be
complete,
installed,
ready
for
use,
constructed
as
hereinafter specified and as indicated on Drawing.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 8
05/14/04
B.
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
Overall dimensions of bench height, length and
width shall be correct within 0.5."
3.
All material specified shall be the best of their
respective kinds for the purpose intended, and all
manufacturing methods shall conform to the latest
and best practice of industry except where
indicated otherwise.
Bench Materials
1.
Lumber:
Lumber shall be selected for uniformity
of color and texture and shall be of plain sawn
edge grain, first quality hard maple, unless
otherwise indicated. Lumber shall be thoroughly
air dried on sticks, then kiln dried to a moisture
content of 5% or less in a type of kiln that will
leave the lumber free from excessive strain or
case hardening. Lumber shall be allowed to cool
and temper approximately 30 days before being
milled, shall be free from knots, worn holes,
shakes, strains or other defects.
2.
Steel: All steel used in bench construction, base
cabinets, lockers, legs, rails, shelves, etc.
shall be prime cold rolled steel, free from
defects,
buckle,
scale,
rust
or
other
imperfections. Steel used in base cabinet and
lockers shall be stretcher leveled furniture grade
steel in the gages specified. All gages indicated
shall be U.S. Standard. Where welding is used in
fabrication, welding rods shall be of the same
type as the metal being welded.
Bench Components
1.
NYSCA
Bench Tops: Bench tops shall be 2.25" thick made
up of edge grain hard maple full length strips,
0.75' (min.) to 2" (max.) in width bonded together
in a rigid, crack-free assembly with a waterproof
glue. Each top shall be bored (not channelled)
from edge to edge to receive .438" steel
reinforcing rods approximately 36" on center, with
the first and last rod near ends of top. Rods
shall be tensioned in place with heavy nuts and
washers counterbored beneath edge surface with
wooden
plugs
fitted
and
glued
into
each
counterbored hole and dressed off flush to edge
surface. Alternate construction may be submitted
for approval. Bench tops 14 ft. or longer may be
made up either as one piece (without joint) or as
two equal length sections with abutting ends
splined and securely bolted together with two (2)
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 9
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
.375" dia. tie bolts. After assembly, top surface
shall be planed perfectly flat, free of all
protruding edges or hollows. Top shall then be
thoroughly sanded with fine sand paper to remove
all tool marks, surface defects, sharp corner,
etc., before applying clear finish as hereinafter
specified.
2
2.
Wall Type Benches:
Unless otherwise indicated,
when a bench is designated as wall type, there
shall be a 1.25" thick, 6" high (measured from
bench top) backboard running the entire length of
the bench. Backboard shall be fastened to bench
top with counterbored .312" dia. lag screws
located approximately 24" on center, beginning 6"
from each end, as shown on Drawings Backboard
shall be of one piece, hard maple construction.
3.
Bases
a.
Steel Locker
Each steel locker base shall consist of
assembled individual lockers of dimensions
and quantity shown on Drawings and referenced
applicable
Shop
Equipment
Reference
Numbers.All locker components shall be welded
together and suitably reinforced with angles,
channels and gussets to form a rigid
assembly. There shall be two acceptable
designs for lockers, which are as follows
(Note:
Design
features
are
not
interchangeable, except as noted).
Type 1:
Doors shall be 16 gage steel, of one piece
construction, flanged on four sides with
returns on two sides. All corners shall be
welded and smoothed. Entire body of locker
shall be 18 gage steel with panels suitably
reinforced and flanged with returns on all
four sides to form door opening.
Type 2:
Door and frame assembly shall be as noted in
the previous paragraph. The inner opening of
frame shall be flanged on four sides to form
door opening. The outer edge shall be flanged
on four sides and welded to body of locker.
Entire body of locker shall be made of 22 ga
(min.) steel panels suitably reinforced and
designed to receive door frame.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 10
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
The following provision shall apply to all
lockers, consistent with the requirements
listed above:
b.
1.
Top, back, bottom, sides, etc., shall
each be of one piece construction,
flanged for assembly by welding.
2.
Each door shall have a minimum of three
(3) louvers.
3.
Hinges shall be of the five knuckle
type, 2" long with tight pin and 12 ga
(min. plates. One side of the hinge
shall be welded in place and the other
riveted or bolted.
4.
There shall be one (1) 11 gage hasp with
padlock eye and end flanged to form
finger grip, welded to door. In addition
there shall be one (1) 11 gage hasp with
padlock eye welded to frame. Door may be
slotted to receive hasp welded to frame.
Steel Cabinets: Steel base cabinets shall be
of the sliding door type, 36" or 48" wide, or
combination of same, as indicated in Ref. No.
12.04 and shall be not less than 21 or more
than 22 inches deep inside and not less than
31 nor more than 31.75" high, unless
otherwise specified, with all members welded
together with reinforced channels, angles and
gussets. The dimensions of the steel base
cabinets and the quantity required for each
bench shall be as specified in Ref. No.
12.04. The plates forming the end panels,
backs, tops, etc., shall each be in one
piece.
The
entire
cabinet
shall
be
constructed of 18 gage (min.) steel panels
flanged on all edges, with channel shaped top
and formed with returns, suitably reinforced,
around door openings. Each side panel shall
have
suitable
means
of
supporting
the
adjustable shelf on 2 inch centers over an 18
inch vertical range. The back panel shall be
attached to rear flanges of each side panel.
Each cabinet front shall be provided with a
separate or integral 16 gage frame with a
pair of sliding doors, number plate and lock.
Each door shall be equipped with a recessed
flush type handle welded into door and
finished same as door. Door shall be in one
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 11
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
piece flanged with returns on all four sides.
Door shall be reinforced with a welded,
suitably sized inverted channel or other
approved means of reinforcement to insure
rigidity. Corners of doors shall be welded
and ground smooth. Doors shall be hung on
rollers suspended from a continuous track
with bottom of doors running between No. 16
gage continuous, channel retaining guides.
Jambs shall be provided with rubber bumpers.
Sliding doors and frame shall be an integral
unit bolted to the cabinet. Sliding doors
shall not be removable when in the locked
position by lifting door (wood fillers to
accomplish
this
purpose
will
not
be
acceptable). The acceptable alternate shall
be sliding doors that cannot be removed
unless the entire frame or portion of the
frame is unbolted from cabinet. Each cabinet
shall be provided with one (1) 18 gage (min.)
adjustable shelf, box flanged with returns on
all four sides. All corners of the shelf, box
flanged with returns on all four sides. All
corners of the shelf shall be welded and
ground smooth. In addition, there shall be
welded to the shelf: a 20 gage (min.) panreinforcing channel running lengthwise at the
center of shelf or a 1/8 inch thick equal leg
angle, each leg equal to the depth of the
flange, welded to the front edge of shelf and
running the entire length of the shelf.
c.
4.
NYSCA
Wood Bases:
The frame, legs, spreaders and
cross rails of wooden base units shall be
solid (not built up) hard maple, except if
otherwise specified, with glued mortise and
tenon joints. All exterior surfaces shall be
free of stretches, dents or other defects.
All exterior corners and frame base edges
shall have a .375" radius.
Accessories
a.
Hardware:
All machine nuts and bolts and
wood screws shall be of standard design,
fully cadmium plated. No bare steel parts
permitted.
All
machine
bolt
and
nut
assemblies shall be made with lockwasher, and
proper length screw to eliminate excessive
screw protrusion.
b.
Locks:
Locks shall be of heavy duty, pin
tumbler type construction with groove key.
All keys shall be brass and be provided with
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 12
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
a ring and brass or aluminum tag stamped as
specified below. Key and lock cylinder shall
be stamped with matching identification
numbers.
Each locker shall be equipped with cylinder
locks
as
previously
specified,
keyed
differently and master keyed for each room.
Contractor shall furnish two (2) keys for
each locker and three (3) master key s for
each room. All locker keys tags shall be
stamped with letter "L."
Each cabinet shall be equipped with cylinder
locks as previously specified, keyed alike in
each room and differently from any other room
and master keyed for school. Furnish three
(3) cabinet keys for each Shop and two (2)
master keys for the school. All cabinet key
tags shall be stamped with the letter "C".
Locks for sliding doors cabinets shall be
equipped with a brass self-locking adapter
and strike designed to hook behind door to
prevent door from being sprung.
c.
D.
Number Plates:
All lockers and cabinets
shall be equipped with identifying metal
number plates riveted in place with a minimum
of two (2) metal rivets. All lockers shall be
consecutively numbered in each room, with
number assignments made in vertical rows,
advancing left to right. All cabinets shall
be consecutively
numbered in each room.
Number plates shall be provided with indented
.375" high (min.) numbers, accented with
black, chemical resistant enamel protected
with a durable clear finish. Plates shall be
aluminum, brass or plated steel and shall
contain the name of the manufacturer. Plates
shall be fastened to locker and cabinet doors
in
a
prominent
and
uniform
position.
Alternate means of providing number and
manufacturer's
name
on
separate
plates
acceptable.
Assembly and Mounting
Locker and cabinet base assemblies shall be made up of
individual units bolted together in exact alignment,
with a minimum of four (4) .25" round head steel
machine screws used to fasten adjourning units
together. Assembly shall be completely free of sharp
edges, protruding hardware, etc. Tops shall be attached
to base assemblies with approved angle clips spaced
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 13
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
approximately 18" on centers with no less than two (2)
clips per side. Angle clips shall be fastened to wood
tops with No. 12 x 1.5" flathead screws. Base
assemblies shall be attached to floor with the same
angle clips and spacing as above. All bolts and screws
used with angle clips shall be of the flathead type,
countersunk below surface of clips. Angle clips shall
be 1.25" lengths of 1.25" x 1.25" x .125" steel angle
iron with
outer arm corners rounded to .375" radius
and all other exposed corners rounded to .063" radius.
All workbench assemblies shall be carefully leveled and
secured to floor with approved expansion bolts as
specified in Article 3.02 of this Specification.
E.
F.
Finishes
1.
Wood:
After finish sanding, all wood bases and
all surfaces of maple bench tops (top, bottom and
edges) shall be given one (1) coat of clear wood
sealer and finished with two (2) coats of a heavybodied, durable, scuff resistant clear finish.
2.
Metal:
All the steel parts of each bench
including base cabinets, base lockers, lockers,
etc., shall be cleaned thoroughly and free from
dirt, oil, grease, rust and scale and given a
phosphate coating or chemical treatment which will
serve as a corrosion inhibitor, and shall then be
coated with one coat of synthetic metal primer and
finished with one coat of the finest quality semigloss baking enamel. The primer and finish coat
shall
be
baked
separately
at
temperatures
recommended by the enamel manufacturers. The
finish coat will be a semi-gloss enamel, grey in
color.
Approved Manufacturers
The following listed suppliers are approved to furnish
benches in conformance with the requirements of this
Specification.
NYSCA
1.
Angle Steel Div., Kewaunee Scientific Equipment
Co.
2.
Brodhead - Garret Co.
3.
Valiant Metal Products Corp.
4.
Paxton-Patterson Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 14
05/14/04
2.04
1
DESIGN NO. _____
LIST OF EQUIPMENT
REF.NO.
TITLE
12.04
WORKBENCH - CABINET BASE
12.04A
WORKBENCH - DRYING CABINET BASE
12.04B
WORKBENCH - DAMP-PROOF CABINET BASE
12.04C
WORKBENCH - DRYING/DAMP-PROOF CABINET BASE
12.05
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE
12.05A
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE, 50" X 68"
12.05B
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE, MASONITE TOP
12.06
WORKBENCH - WOOD TOP, WITH SHELF
12.07
WORKBENCH - WALL TYPE, WITH SHELF
12.07A
WORKBENCH - WALL TYPE
12.08
WORKBENCH - WOOD TOP, METAL COVERED, WITH SHELF
12.09
FINISHING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
12.10
HEAT RESISTANT TOP BENCH - WITH SHELF
12.10A
HEAT RESISTANT TOP BENCH - CABINET BASE
12.12
WORKBENCH - CRAFTS
12.13
MOLDING BENCH - WOOD
12.13A
STEEL MOLDING BENCH
12.14
EIGHT STATION WORKBENCH UNIT - LOCKER BASE
12.15
TWO STATION WOODWORKING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
12.16
FOUR STATION WOODWORKING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
12.17
SOLDERING BENCH WITH THREE BURNER FURNACE
12.18
SOLDERING BENCH WITH TWO BURNER FURNACE
12.18A
SOLDERING BENCH
12.19
COMBINATION STAKE AND MACHINE BENCH
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 15
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.19A
MACHINE BENCH
12.20
DOUBLE STAKE BENCH
12.20A
METAL BENCH
12.21
ELECTRICAL DEMONSTRATION DESK
12.22
ELECTRICAL TEST BENCH
12.23
ELECTRICAL TUNNEL - SINGLE FACED
12.24
ELECTRICAL TUNNEL - DOUBLE FACED
12.25
TUNNEL MODULE (POWER PACK) - DOUBLE FACED
12.26
TUNNEL MODULE (POWER PACK) - DOUBLE FACED, PORTABLE
12.27
POWER STATION WITH LOCKING COVER
12.28
TOOL GRINDER - PEDESTAL TYPE, CHISEL ATTACHMENT
12.29
TOOL GRINDER - PEDESTAL TYPE, TWO ADJUSTABLE RESTS
12.30
TOOL GRINDER - BENCH TYPE, CHISEL ATTACHMENT
12.31
TOOL GRINDER - BENCH TYPE, TWO ADJUSTABLE RESTS
12.32
TOOL GRINDER - HIGH SPEED, PEDESTAL TYPE
12.33
TOOL GRINDER - HIGH SPEED, BENCH TYPE
12.34
GRINDER PEDESTAL
12.35
DRILL PRESS - 15", FLOOR TYPE
12.36
DRILL PRESS - 15", BENCH TYPE
12.37
DRILL PRESS - 15" VARIABLE SPEED, FLOOR TYPE
12.38
DRILL PRESS - 15" VARIABLE SPEED, BENCH TYPE
12.39
DRILL PRESS - 17", FLOOR TYPE
12.40
DRILL PRESS - 17" WITH MORTISING ATTACHMENT
12.41
SCROLL SAW
12.42
SCROLL SAW - VARIABLE SPEED
12.43
JOINTER
12.44
BELT SANDER
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 16
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.45A
COMBINATION BELT AND DISC SANDER
12.45B
COMBINATION BELT AND DISC SANDER - 1"
12.46
WET-DRY VACUUM CLEANER
12.47A
BAND SAW - 20" WOODCUTTING
12.47B
BAND SAW - 20" METAL CUTTING
12.48
BAND SAW - 14" WOODCUTTING
12.49
CIRCULAR SAW - 10"
12.50
CIRCULAR SAW - 10", WITH DOLLY
12.51
RADIAL SAW
12.52
WOOD TURNING LATHE
12.52A
WOOD TURNING LATHE - VARIABLE SPEED
12.53
ENGINE LATHE - 10"
12.53A
ENGINE LATHE - 13"
12.54
ENGINE LATHE - VARIABLE SPEED
12.54A
ENGINE LATHE - 10" MINIMUM (HEAVIER DUTY)
12.55
METAL WORKING SHAPER - 7"
12.56
METALWORKING SHAPER - 12"
12.57
HORIZONTAL MILLING MACHINE
12.58
SPOT WELDER - PORTABLE
12.58A
SPOT WELDER - PEDESTAL MOUNTED
12.59
POLISHING UNIT
12.60
TRIPLE PURPOSE FURNACE
12.61
DUAL PURPOSE FURNACE
12.62
HEAT TREATING FURNACE
12.63
CRUCIBLE FURNACE
12.64
COMBINATION BENCH FURNACE
12.65
BENCH FURNACE
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 17
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.66
SQUARING SHEAR - 36"
12.67
SQUARING SHEAR - 24", BENCH MOUNTED
12.68
RING AND CIRCLE SHEAR - 30"
12.69
RING AND CIRCLE SHEAR - 24"
12.70
BOX AND PAN BRAKE
12.71
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 30"
12.71A
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 24"
12.72
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 20"
12.73
ADJUSTABLE BAR FOLDER - 30"
12.74
ADJUSTABLE BAR FOLDER - 20"
12.75
COMBINATION ROTARY MACHINE
12.76
BENDING MACHINE - 9"
12.77
BENDING MACHINE - 6"
12.78
POWER HACK SAW - 6"
12.79
POWER HACK SAW - 4"
12.80
PORTABLE HACK SAW
12.81
ARBOR PRESS - FLOOR TYPE
12.82
ARBOR PRESS - BENCH TYPE
12.83
ANVIL - 100 LBS
12.84
ANVIL - 70 LBS
12.85
STAKE PLATE - BENCH TYPE
12.86
STAKE HOLDER
12.87
STAKE SET - ART METAL
12.88
STAKE SET - SHEET METAL
12.89
METAL STORAGE RACK
12.90
MACHINISTS' VICE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(3-1/2" WIDTH)
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 18
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.90A
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(4" WIDTH)
12.90B
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(5" WIDTH)
12.91
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(3-1/2" WIDTH)
12.91A
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(4" WIDTH)
12.91B
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(5" WIDTH)
12.92
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS (31/2" WIDTH)
12.92A
MACHINISTS' VISE
(4" WIDTH)
-
SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
12.92B
MACHINISTS' VISE
(5" WIDTH)
-
SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
12.93
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS (31/2" WIDTH)
12.93A
MACHINISTS'
(4" WIDTH)
VISE
-
SWIVEL
BASE,
SMOOTH
FACED
JAWS
12.93B
MACHINISTS'
(5" WIDTH)
VISE
-
SWIVEL
BASE,
SMOOTH
FACED
JAWS
12.94
COMBINATION PIPE VISE
12.95
PIPE VISE
12.96
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 10"
12.97
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 10" RAPID ACTION
12.98
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 7"
12.99
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 7" RAPID ACTION
12.101
PLASTIC OVEN
12.102
LARGE ELECTRIC KILN - SIZE 15" X 21" X 18"
12.103
SMALL ELECTRICAL KILN - SIZE 11" X 11" X 11"
12.104
ENAMELING KILN - SIZE 8" X 10" X 4"
12.105
COMBINATION KICK & ELECTRIC POTTER'S WHEEL
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 19
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.106
ELECTRIC POTTER'S WHEEL
12.109
CLAY STORAGE BIN
12.109A
CLAY STORAGE BIN - MOBILE
12.110
WEDGING TABLE
12.110A
WEDGING BOARD
12.111
BANDING WHEEL
12.112
JAR MILL (BALL MILL)
12.113
SPRAY BOOTH - CERAMIC
12.114
GRAPHIC ARTS CAMERA
12.115
PLATEMAKER
12.117
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - IMAGE SIZE 8-1/2" X 13-1/2"
12.117A
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - IMAGE SIZE 11" X 16-1/2"
12.117B
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - TABLE TOP
12.120
PROOF PRESS
12.121
PILOT PRESS
12.122
PILOT PRESS CABINET
12.122A
COMBINATION TYPE CABINET AND PILOT PRESS
12.123
ETCHING PRESS
12.124
ETCHING PRESS WITH CABINET
12.125
STANDING PRESS
12.126
STAMPING MACHINE
12.127
PRESSROOM CABINET
12.128
TYPE CABINET
12.129
IMPOSING TABLE - 39" x 51"
12.130
IMPOSING TABLE - 31" x 39"
12.131
LEAD AND RULE CUTTER
12.132
MITERING MACHINE
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 20
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.133
DRYING RACK
12.133A
DRYING RACK - MOBILE
12.134
HAND BOOKBINDING UNIT
12.135
PAPER CUTTER
12.135A
PAPER CUTTER AND STAND
12.135B
POWER PAPER CUTTER - 26"
12.136
STAPLER
12.137
PLANNING CENTER - CABINET UNIT
12.137A
PLANNING CENTER - TRACING UNIT
12.137B
PLANNING CENTER - COMBINATION UNIT
12.138
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - WOODWORKING
12.139
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - METAL WORKING
12.139A
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - GENERAL
12.140
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - ELECTRICAL
12.141
SEWING MACHINE
12.142
COMBINATION LAPIDARY UNIT
12.143
STOCK CART - MOBILE (36" x 44" x 32")
12.143A
STOCK CART - MOBILE (30" x 16" x 32")
12.144
TOOL TOTER - MOBILE
12.145
KILN CART - HEAT PROOF, MOBILE
12.146
STEEL PLATE - FOR BENCH TOP
12.147
STAKE PLATE STAND
12.148
GUARD RAILS
12.149
DESK AND PLAN UNIT
12.150
DUST COLLECTOR - MOBILE
12.150A
DUST COLLECTOR - MOBILE
12.151
FOUNDRY DEMONSTRATION OUTFIT
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 21
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.152
RUBBER STAMP VULCANIZING PRESS
12.153
BAND SAW BLADE WELDER - PORTABLE
12.154
PLATEMAKER
12.155
PRINTER AND DEVELOPER
12.156
PHOTO-COMPOSING MACHINE
12.157
COLLATOR - PORTABLE
12.158
LIGHT TABLE
12.158A
LIGHT TABLE - PORTABLE
12.159
BENCH PUNCH
12.160
CHASSIS - PICK-UP TRUCK
12.161
SPARK PLUG CLEANER & TESTER - BENCH TYPE
12.162
SLOW AND FAST BATTERY CHARGER - MOBILE
12.163
ARMATURE TESTER - PORTABLE
12.165
ENGINE SCOPE ANALYZER - MOBILE
12.166
TIRE CHANGING UNIT - MANUAL TYPE
12.166A
TIRE CHANGER - PNEUMATIC
12.167
TIRE TEST TANK
12.168
SIX CYLINDER ENGINE - OPERABLE
12.169
V-8 ENGINE - OPERABLE
12.169A
FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE - OPERABLE
12.170
DIFFERENTIAL-DRIVE SHAFT HOLDING FIXTURE
12.171
PARTS CLEANER - MOBILE
12.172
HYDRAULIC SERVICE JACK - 2 TON, MOBILE
12.174
PNEUMATIC GREASER - MOBILE
12.175
PUG MILL - PORTABLE
12.176
REAR-END - AUTOMOBILE
12.177
AIR METER AND HOSE
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 22
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.178
POWER DRIVE AND STAND - PORTABLE
12.179
ONE CYLINDER - TWO CYCLE GASOLINE ENGINE
12.180
ONE CYLINDER-FOUR CYCLE GASOLINE ENGINE
12.181
HYDRAULIC CRANE - MOBILE
12.182
UNIVERSAL ENGINE STAND - MOBILE
12.183
OUTBOARD MOTOR TEST BARREL
12.184
OUTBOARD MOTOR STAND
12.185
OUTBOARD MOTOR - 5-10 HP
12.186
OUTBOARD MOTOR - 15-20 HP
12.187
TWO TON SAFETY STAND - PORTABLE
12.188
FIVE TON SAFETY STAND - PORTABLE
12.189
LIVE ENGINE STAND - MOBILE
12.190
SIX CYLINDER ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION - OPERABLE
12.191
GALLEY CABINET
12.192
JOGGER - PORTABLE
12.195
EXHAUST EQUIPMENT FOR LIVE ENGINES - AUTOMOBILE
12.196
PAINT SPRAY BOOTH INSTALLATION
12.197
HYDRAULIC SADDLE JACK - 1-1/2 TON, MOBILE
12.198
EXHAUST HOOD
12.199
FILM STORAGE CABINET AND FILM CUTTER
12.199A
PLATE AND NEGATIVE STORAGE CABINET
12.200
OUTBOARD MOTOR TEST TANK
12.201
TEACHER'S DEMONSTRATION BENCH
12.202
PORTABLE SHOP UNIT
12.203
PLASTIC FORMING MACHINE
12.204
CHALKBOARD DRAFTING MACHINE
12.205
DRAFTING MACHINE - PORTABLE
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 23
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.206
WELDING BENCH - ARC
12.206A
WELDING BENCH - GAS
12.207
WELDING SCREEN - MOBILE
12.208
ARC WELDER - MOBILE
12.209
IGNITION SYSTEM SIMULATOR
12.210
CASTER-CAMBER SIMULATOR
12.211
WAX COATER - PORTABLE
12.212
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER
12.212A
ELECTRONICS KIT
12.213
PLASTIC INJECTION PRESS AND COMPRESSOR - MOBILE
12.214
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, H.S.
12.214A
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, I.S.
12.214B
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, P.S.
12.215
LAMINATOR - PORTABLE
12.215A
LAMINATOR - 9", PORTABLE
12.216
BINDING MACHINE - PORTABLE
12.217
PAPER DRILL - PORTABLE
12.217A
PAPER DRILL
12.218
FOLDING MACHINE - PORTABLE
12.219
LABORATORY OVEN - PORTABLE
12.220
EXHAUST EQUIPMENT FOR LIVE ENGINES - UTILITY
12.221
FOUR POST CHASSIS LIFT
12.221A
AUTO LIFT - TWO POST, SURFACE MOUNTED
12.222
DRYING CABINET - LOW
12.222A
DAMP-PROOF CABINET - LOW
12.223
FLOOR MAINTAINER
12.224
LATHE/MILLER
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 24
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.226
ROTATIONAL MOLDING MACHINE
12.227
ELECTRIC KICK WHEEL
12.228
GLASS DRILLING MACHINE - PORTABLE
12.229
ELECTRIC STAPLER - PORTABLE
12.230
ABRASIVE BELT GRINDER
12.231
CASTING TANK - MOBILE
12.233
COMPACT ENLARGER - PORTABLE
12.234
ENLARGER - PORTABLE
12.235
PRINT DRYER - PORTABLE
12.236
EXPOSING UNIT - PORTABLE
12.237
HEAT SEALING MACHINE
12.238
PLANT GROWING UNIT "A"
12.239
PLANT GROWING UNIT "B"
12.241
PLASTIC WELDER - PORTABLE
12.242
PLASTIC STRIP HEATER - PORTABLE
12.243
FLEXIBLE SHAFT GRINDER - PORTABLE
12.244
KEY CUTTING MACHINE
12.245
BUTTON PRESS - 2.25"
12.247
PLASTIC FORMER AND COMPRESSOR
12.248
SIGN MAKER
12.249
HORIZONTAL BAND CUT-OFF SAW
12.250
VERTICAL MILLING MACHINE
12.251
BRAKE SERVICE UNIT
12.252
WHEEL BALANCER - MOBILE
12.253A
DIESEL ENGINE
12.254
WASTE OIL DRAINER - MOBILE
12.255
SMALL ENGINE DYNAMOMETER
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 25
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.256
AUTO A/C SERVICE UNIT - MOBILE
12.258
CENTRIFUGAL CASTING UNIT
12.259
JEWELER'S VISE - SWIVEL
12.260
DRILL PRESS - SENSITIVE, PORTABLE
12.261
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL MILLING MACHINE
12.262
FILM DRYING CABINET
12.263
PLASTIC SAW
12.264
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING TRAINER
12.265
COMPUTERIZED ROBOTIC ARM
12.266
NUMERICAL CONTROL TRAINING CENTER
12.267
COMPUTERIZED METAL LATHE
12.268
COMPUTERIZED PLASTICS ENGRAVER
12.269
NOT USED
12.270A
APPLIANCE LIFT TRUCK "A"
12.270B
APPLIANCE LIFT TRUCK "B"
12.271
COMPUTERIZED TYPESETTING SYSTEM
12.272
CAMERA - MULTIPURPOSE
12.273
COMPUTERIZED WOOD LATHE
12.275
PLASTIC EDGE BEVELER
12.276
INSTRUCTOR STATION, MOBILE
12.277A
STUDENT STATION
12.277B
STUDENT STATION FOR DISABLED
12.278A
MICROCOMPUTER STATION
12.278B
MICROCOMPUTER STATION FOR DISABLED
12.279
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS TRAINER
12.280
COMPUTERIZED METAL MILL
12.281
HAND NOTCHER
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 26
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.282
ROBOTIC WORK CELL
12.283
COMPUTERIZED ROUTER
12.284
STRUCTURAL STRESS ANALYZER
12.285
STACKWAGON
12.286A
PLANER - PORTABLE
12.286B
PLANER
12.287
PLATE PROCESSOR
12.288
METAL DUST COLLECTOR
12.289
ELECTRONICS COMMUNICATIONS STATION
2.05
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
REF. NO.
TITLE
12.04
WORK BENCH - CABINET BASE
A.
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Entire bench shall be constructed as per Art. 2.03.
B.
Bench top
follows:
1.
shall
be
14' long bench:
mounted
on
steel
cabinets
as
3 cabinets 48" wide for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
6 cabinets 48" wide; 3
pairs back-to-back for
bench tops 48" wide.
2.
12' long bench:
2 cabinets 36" wide and 1
cabinet
48"
wide
for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
4 cabinets 36" wide; 2
pairs back-to-back, and 2
cabinets 48" wide; 1 pair
back-to-back for bench
tops 48" wide.
3.
NYSCA
10' long bench:
2 cabinets 48" wide for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 27
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4 cabinets 48" wide; 2
pairs back-to-back for
bench tops 48" wide.
4.
8' long bench:
2 cabinets 36" wide for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
4 cabinets 36" wide; 2
pairs back-to-back for
bench tops 48" wide.
5.
7' long bench:
2 cabinets 36" wide for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
4 cabinets 36" wide; 2
pairs back-to-back for
bench tops 48" wide
6.
6' long bench:
1 cabinet 48" wide for
bench tops less than 48"
wide.
2 cabinets 48" wide; 1
pair
back-to-back
for
bench tops 48" wide.
7.
2
2
C.
When a Bookbinding Unit is to be mounted on a bench,
refer to Drawings for location of cabinet base.
D.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
12.04A
NYSCA
All cabinets to be 21" - 22" deep (inside).
WORKBENCH - DRYING CABINET BASE
A.
Workbench, drying cabinet base, shall consist of a
workbench unit made up of a maple top, constructed as
specified in Art. 2.03, and a base of expanded metal
drying cabinets, with frame support, as specified
below. Top shall be mounted centrally with respect to
base cabinets except if indicated otherwise. Size of
bench is shown on Drawings.
B.
Drying cabinet base shall be made up of individual
drying cabinets each 36"W x 18"D x 31"H in size,
bolted together. Each cabinet shall be constructed of
3/4" x 16 ga. expanded flattened steel sides, back and
doors with 13 ga. steel angle corner supports.
Top
and bottom pans shall be 16 ga. steel fully welded and
reinforced.
Cabinet shall have two 18"W x 24"H
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 28
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
(approx.) doors with heavy duty hinges and 1" x 14 ga.
angle frames with welded corners.
Doors shall be of
the flush recessed type having full 90o swing even when
cabinets are butted closely together, side by side.
Door handles shall be of the heavy duty "T" type with
the right hand door having a locking handle with disc
cylinder lock and two (2) keys.
C.
Furnish each cabinet with two (2) full size removable
shelves. Each shelf shall be constructed of 3/4" x 16
ga. flattened expanded steel with edges framed in 1" x
20 ga. U sections welded in place on all four sides.
Masonite or equivalent type shelves are unacceptable.
Shelves shall be supported on three sides by 1" x 16
ga. bent angles welded in place between corner
supports.
D.
Drying cabinets shall be enclosed in a steel support
frame when used as a workbench base.
Frame shall
consist of four (4)-2" x 14 ga. square steel legs
joined together at the top with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 14
ga. steel angles. Pairs of legs at each end of bench
shall be joined at their center sections with 18" x
34" x 14 ga. plates, all joints welded and end plates
bolted to base cabinet assembly. Submit shop drawings
for approval.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, base cabinets shall be
arranged in two rows, back to back, bolted together,
as follows:
1.
6' long bench - 4 cabinets
2.
9' long bench - 6 cabinets
3.
12' long bench - 8 cabinets
Door handles shall not protrude beyond outline of
bench top.
F.
12.04B
WORKBENCH - DAMP-PROOF CABINET BASE
A.
NYSCA
Workbench, drying cabinet base shall be constructed of
a maple top per Art. 2.03 and drying cabinets,
modified as described above, shall be Mod. 9250M of
Debcor, Inc., Alsip, III.
Workbench, damp-proof cabinet base, shall consist of a
workbench unit made up of a maple top constructed as
specified in Art. 2.03 and a base of air-sealed dampproof cabinets with frame support as specified below.
Top shall be mounted centrally with respect to base
cabinets, except if indicated otherwise.
Size of
bench is shown on Drawing.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 29
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Damp-proof cabinet base shall be made up of individual
damp-proof cabinets, each 36"W x 18"D x 31"H bolted
together.
Doors and all walls of each cabinet shall
be of double wall construction with 19 ga. anodized
aluminum interior and 19 ga. steel exterior. Top and
bottom pans shall be 16 ga. steel fully welded and
reinforced corner supports shall be 13 ga. steel
angles.
Cabinets shall have 18"W x 24"H (approx.)
doors with heavy duty hinges and 1" x 14 ga. angle
frames with welded corners.
Doors shall be of the
flush recessed type having full 90o swing even when
cabinets are butted closely together, side by side.
Door handles shall be of the heavy duty T type with
right hand door having a locking handle with disc
cylinder lock and two (2) keys.
Doors shall be
equipped with foam rubber gaskets around their entire
periphery to maintain high interior humidity.
C.
Furnish each cabinet with two (2) full size removable
shelves.
Each shelf shall be constructed 3/4" x 14
ga. flattened anodized aluminum with edges framed in
1" x 20 ga. aluminum U section welded in place on all
four sides.
Masonite or equivalent type shelves are
unacceptable.
Shelves shall be supported on three
sides by 1" x 18 ga. bent angles welded in place
between corner supports.
Entire cabinet shall be
fully deburred to remove all sharp edges and corners.
Finish cabinet in beige/gray rust resisting enamel.
D.
Damp-proof cabinets shall be enclosed in a steel
support frame when used as workbench base.
Frame
shall consist of four (4) - 2" x 14 ga square steel
legs joined together at the top with 1-1/2" x 14 ga.
steel angles.
Pairs of legs at each end of bench
shall be joined at their center sections with 18" x
34" x 14 ga. plates, all joints welded and end plates
bolted to base cabinet assembly. Submit shop drawings
for approval.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, base cabinets shall be
arranged in two rows, back to back, bolted together,
as follows:
1.
6' long bench - 4 cabinets
2.
9' long bench - 6 cabinets
3.
12' long bench - 8 cabinets
Door handles shall not protrude beyond outline of bench
top.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 30
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Workbench,
damp-proof
cabinet
base,
shall
be
constructed of a maple top per Art. 2.03 and dampproof cabinets, modified as described above, shall be
Mod. 9150M of Debcor, Inc., Alsip, ILL.
12.04C
NYSCA
WORKBENCH - DRYING/DAMP-PROOF CABINET BASE
A.
Workbench,
drying/damp-proof
cabinet
base,
shall
consist of a workbench unit made up of a maple top
constructed as specified in Art. 2.03, and a base
consisting of a combination of expanded metal drying
cabinets and air sealed damp-proof cabinets with a
frame support as specified below. Cabinet base shall
be mad up of one type of cabinet on one side, and the
other type on the other side, as indicated on drawing.
Top shall be mounted centrally with respect to base
cabinets except if indicated otherwise. Size of bench
is shown on Drawing.
B.
Cabinet base shall be made up of individual cabinets,
each 36"W x 18"D x 31"H in size, bolted together.
Cabinets shall have 18"W x 24"H (approx.) doors with
heavy duty hinges and 1" x 14 ga. angle frames with
welded corners. Doors shall be of the flush recessed
type, having full 90o swing even when cabinets are
butted closely together, side by side.
Door handles
shall be of the heavy duty T type, with right hand
door having a locking handle with a disc cylinder lock
and two (2) keys. Cabinet corner supports shall be 13
ga. steel angles. Top and bottom pans shall be 16 ga.
steel fully welded and reinforced.
Entire cabinet
shall be fully deburred to remove all sharp edges and
corners.
Finish cabinet in beige/gray rust resisting
enamel.
C.
Drying cabinets shall be constructed of 3/4" x 16 ga.
expanded, flattened steel sides, back and doors.
Furnish each drying cabinet with two (2) full size
removable shelves. Each shelf shall be constructed of
3/4" x 16 ga. flattened expanded steel with edges
framed in 1" x 20 ga. U sections welded in place on
all four sides.
Masonite or equivalent type shelves
are unacceptable.
Shelf shall be supported on three
sides by 1" x 16 ga. bent angles, welded in place
between corner supports.
D.
Damp-proof cabinets shall have doors and all walls, of
double wall construction with 19 ga. anodized aluminum
interior and 19 ga. steel exterior.
Doors shall be
equipped with foam rubber gaskets around their entire
periphery to maintain high interior humidity. Furnish
each damp-proof cabinet with two (2) full size
removable shelves.
Each shelf be constructed 3/4" x
14 ga. flattened expanded anodized aluminum with edges
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 31
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
framed in 1" x 20 ga. aluminum U sections welded in
place on all four sides. Masonite or equivalent type
shelves are unacceptable.
Shelves shall be supported
on three sides by 1" x 18 ga. bent angles welded in
place between corner supports.
E.
Base cabinets shall be enclosed in a steel support
frame when used as a workbench base.
Frame shall
consist of four (4) - 2" x 14 ga. square steel legs
joined together at the top with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 14
ga. steel angles. Pairs of legs at each end of bench
shall be joined at their center sections with 18" x
34" x 14 ga. plates, all joints welded and end plates
bolted to base cabinet assembly. Submit shop drawings
for approval.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, base cabinets shall be
arranged in two rows, back to back, bolted together,
as follows:
6' long bench - 4 cabinets
9' long bench - 6 cabinets
12' long bench - 8 cabinets
Door handles shall not protrude beyond outline of bench
top.
G.
12.05
NYSCA
Workbench, drying/damp-proof cabinet base shall be
constructed of a maple top per Art. 2.03 and a cabinet
base made up of drying cabinets Mod. 9250M and dampproof cabinets Mod. 9150M, both modified as described
above, and supplied by Debcor, Inc., Alsip, Ill.
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE
A.
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Entire bench shall be constructed as per Art. 2.03.
B.
For free standing benches, lockers shall be 12" wide x
15" high x 15" deep for 34" + high benches and 12"
wide x 12" high x 15" deep for 27" + high benches.
Lockers shall be mounted back to back unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings as follows:
1.
14' long bench - 48 lockers
2.
12' long bench - 40 lockers
3.
10' long bench - 32 lockers
4.
8' long bench - 24 lockers
5.
6' long bench - 16 lockers
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 32
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
For wall type benches, bench shall be equipped with
one-half number of lockers indicated in B above and
shall be 12" wide x 15" high x 21" deep for 34" + high
benches and 12" wide x 12" high x 21" deep for 27" +
high benches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
D.
When a Bookbinding Unit is to be mounted on a bench,
refer to Drawings for location of locker base.
E.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
2
2
12.05A
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE, 50" X 68"
A.
Workbench, locker base, 50" x 68", shall consist of a
maple top constructed as specified in Art. 2.03 and a
base of twelve steel lockers constructed per Art.
2.03. Top shall be mounted centrally with respect to
base cabinets except if otherwise indicated.
B.
Locker base shall consist of individual lockers, each
12"W x 21"D x 15"H, bolted together. Lockers shall be
arranged in two double tiered rows, three lockers
wide, with lockers placed back to back. Lockers shall
face 68" side of workbench.
12.05B
NYSCA
WORKBENCH - LOCKER BASE, MASONITE TOP
A.
Workbench, locker base, masonite top, shall consist of
a base made up of steel lockers with a 0.25" tempered
masonite top of a size as shown on Drawings.
B.
Top shall be made up of maximum size pieces of 0.25"
thick tempered masonite, smooth side up, with edges
cut even with edge of locker base.
Top shall be
securely anchored in place with countersunk No. 8 x
1/2" flat head nuts and bolts, attached directly to
the tops of the lockers.
Bolts shall be positioned
around periphery of top, approx. 1" in from the edge,
8" apart, with one screw near each of the four
corners.
Install screws in the center area in an
alternate grid pattern with screws approx. 16" apart.
C.
Locker base shall consist of individual lockers, each
12"W x 21"D x 15"H, bolted together. Lockers shall be
constructed as specified in Art. 2.03. Lockers shall
be arranged in two double tiered rows, back to back,
total number as shown o Drawing.
Wall type benches
shall be made up of one double tiered row, backs to
wall, total number as shown on Drawing.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 33
05/14/04
12.06
2
WORKBENCH - WOOD TOP, WITH SHELF
A.
Workbench top size shall be as specified and shown on
plans. Wood top shall be constructed as specified in
Art. 2.03C.
B.
Workbench shall be constructed as shown on Drawings.
12.07
2
2
WORKBENCH - WALL TYPE, WITH SHELF
A.
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Entire bench shall be constructed as per Art. 2.03.
B.
Work bench shall be constructed similar to details as
shown on Drawings.
C.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
12.07A
2
2
WORKBENCH - WALL TYPE
A.
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on Drawings.
Entire bench shall be constructed as per Art. 2.03.
B.
Work bench shall be constructed as shown on Drawings.
C.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
12.08
2
12.09
3
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
WORKBENCH - WOOD TOP, METAL COVERED, WITH SHELF
A.
Workbench top size shall be as indicated on plans.
Wood top shall be constructed as specified in Art.
2.03C.
B.
Workbench shall be constructed as shown on Drawings.
C.
If Drawings call for a portable bench, it shall be
provided without casters and not fastened to the
floor.
FINISHING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
A.
Bench top size shall be as shown on Drawings. Entire
bench shall be constructed as per Art. 2.03, except as
noted herein.
B.
The bench top shall be 21/4" thick maple, covered with
20 ga. 18-8 stainless steel. The steel top shall
extend over the four sides, and underside of bench top
11/2 inches from sides to edges of steel cover. Corners
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 34
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
shall be welded and ground smooth. Top of bench shall
be flat and smooth.
C.
The locker base unit shall consist of individual 12"W.
x 15"D. x 30"H. steel lockers, each bolted to each
other. Each locker shall have a shelf of No. 16 gage,
3/4" diamond mesh expanded metal, reinforced with 1" x
1" x 1/8" angle iron frame. The expanded metal shall
be welded to the angle iron frame, which then shall be
welded to the locker at the midpoint. Each locker door
shall be full length, and shall be constructed as per
Art. 2.03, subparagraph C(3)a, Type 1. Each door shall
be provided with a cylinder lock, keyed the same for
all lockers of the finishing bench. Each door shall
have three (3) louvers in the top, and three (3)
louvers in the bottom.
Each door shall be equipped
with slam-close latching handle "PENCO" OR "LYON",
latch shall be released by lifting handle of door.
Across the face of the locker doors, the following
shall be stenciled with white paint in 2-inch high
capital letters:
"MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF INFLAMMABLE MATERIAL PERMITTED - 10
GALLONS" and "IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE WATER".
Provide on the inside of each locker door one (1) card
holder and card of adequate size, to list the contents
of the locker.
3
D.
12.10
2
HEAT RESISTANT TOP BENCH - WITH SHELF
A.
Heat resistant top bench size shall be as indicated on
plans.
Bench top shall be covered with a 1/2" thick
"ultraboard (non-asbestos)."
The bench shall also
have a 1/2" thick "ultraboard (non-asbestos)" covered
center board on top and one metal shelf underneath.
B.
Heat resistant top bench shall be constructed as shown
on Drawings.
C.
Paint top with clear epoxy varnish to inhibit release
of fibers.
12.10A
NYSCA
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
HEAT RESISTANT TOP BENCH - CABINET BASE
A.
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Bench top shall be mounted
specified in Ref. No. 12.04.
on
steel
cabinets
as
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 35
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
"Ultraboard" (non-asbestos) covering shall be fastened
to wood bench top with No. 5 x 1-1/2" thick long flat
wood screws, countersunk on approximately 18" centers.
Paint top with clear epoxy varnish to inhibit release
of fibers. Steel cabinets shall be constructed, and
top fastened to cabinet base as specified in Art.
2.03.
D.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
2
12.12
WORKBENCH - CRAFTS
A.
Workbench, Crafts, shall be multiple use workbench with
maple top and combination draw unit/cabinet base.
Unit shall have center shelf riser and be approx. 32"
high.
B.
Workbench top shall be 48" W x 96" L constructed of
2.25" thick laminated hard maple. Center shelf riser
shall be 12" W x 12" H x 96" L constructed of 1.25"
thick maple. All wood shall be finished with a scuff
resistant clear finish.
C.
Drawer unit and storage cabinet base units shall be
constructed with maple framing with 0.75" thick birch
plywood exterior.
Drawer unit shall have six (6)
drawers, each 18" W x 6" H x 20" D in size, with
dovetail joints and hinged pullout stops.
Cabinet
unit shall have 21" H x 18" W x 22" D interior
dimensions on each side, with full size doors and
heavy duty hinges.
End support leg shall be maple,
securely anchored to bench top.
D.
12.13
NYSCA
of
rigid
section,
Workbench, Crafts, shall be a Craft unit Model CB1 of
the Brodhead-Garrett Co., Mansfield Ohio, or Craft
Bench Model PCB-1 of the Paxton-Patterson Co., Marlton
N.J.
MOLDING BENCH - WOOD
A.
Bench shall be 48" long x 24" wide x 60" high overall.
It shall be made entirely of solid maple and waterproofed birch plywood panels.
The sand hopper is to
be completely lined with galvanized steel and open at
bottom. A shelf 7" deep for storage of molders, tools
and etc.
Shall be provided on the upper part of the
back panel.
B.
Molding bench shall be Brodhead-Garret Co. Model MB-1,
"Paxton-Patterson" Model WMB-1.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 36
05/14/04
12.13A
12.14
3
12.15
2
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
STEEL MOLDING BENCH
A.
Bench shall be sturdy steel construction, 60" long x
30" wide x 32" overall height.
The trough shall be
44" long x 18" wide x 18" deep and shall include 2
rails near its top for mounting of shaker bars.
A
shelf for storage of tools, flashes, etc.
Shall be
provided below the trough bottom and be the full
length and width of the bench. Bench finish shall be
green enamel.
B.
Steel molding bench shall be Brodhead-Garret Co. Model
MB- 5, or Paxton-Patterson - Model # 6010CB.
EIGHT STATION WORKBENCH UNIT - LOCKER BASE
A.
The unit shall be an eight (8) position complex, made
up of four (4) locker banks forming a cross, and
having a common wood work top.
B.
Each base unit shall be of all steel construction, 36"
W x 21" D x 31" H, and shall contain six (6) Lockers
18" W x 10" H x 21 D, Locker doors shall be springhinged, and provided with a padlock hasp, and masterkeyed cylinder lock. The base units shall be finished
in baked gray enamel.
C.
The top of the complex shall consist of five (5)
individual
sections,
each
constructed
of
2-1/4"
laminated maple. The center piece shall be 60" x 60",
with diagonal corner cutoffs; each of the four (4) end
pieces shall be 30" x 30." All five (5) pieces shall
be assembled and connected with pins.
The top units
shall have a natural lacquer finish.
D.
The assembly of the complex shall be made by butting
the corners of the locker units together before
assembling and fastening the top pieces thereon,
leaving an overhang on the ends of approx. 12."
E.
Complete unit shall be perfectly leveled and rigidly
fastened together, and shall be left in working condition, free of all sharp edges, scratches, dents,
etc.
F.
Eight station workbench unit shall be Model FX30 as
specified above of the Brodhead-Garret Company.
TWO STATION WOODWORKING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
A.
Bench top shall be 28-1/2" x 64" as shown on Drawings
and shall be constructed as specified in Art. 2.03.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 37
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Wood working Bench shall be constructed as shown on
Drawings.
12.16
2
2
NYSCA
B.
Base of bench shall consist of three (3)
lockers, for a total of six (6) lockers,
constructed as specified in Art. 2.03.
size shall be 12" wide x 21" deep x 15"
wide x 21" deep x 13" high as specified on
two (2) tier
and shall be
Each locker
high or 12"
Drawings.
C.
Bench top shall be equipped with two (2) 4" x 10"
woodworking vises with dogs, Model No. 62A of Wilton
Tool Mfg. Co., or Model No. 10 CDT of Columbian Vise
and Mfg. Co. Vises shall be installed at each of two
diagonally opposite corners. Six stop holes shall be
provided opposite each vise and two removable bench
stops to fit holes.
D.
Two Station Woodworking Bench shall be Model B-4160-1
Sp'c'1 of Angle Steel Inc.; Model No. W36A-2V, Stock
No. 63-0574 as supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
FOUR STATION WOODWORKING BENCH - LOCKER BASE
A.
Bench top shall be 50" x 68" as shown on Drawings and
shall be constructed as specified in Art. 2.03. Wood
working Bench shall be constructed as shown on
Drawings.
B.
Base of bench shall consist of six (6) two (2) tier
lockers, for a total of twelve (12) lockers, and shall
be constructed as specified in Art. 2.03. Each locker
size shall be 12" wide x 21" deep x 15" high or 12"
wide x 21" deep x 13" high as specified on Drawings.
C.
Bench top shall be equipped with four (4) 4" x 10"
woodworking vises with dogs, Model No. 62A of Wilton
Tool Mfg. Co., or Model No. 10 CDT of Columbian Vise
and Mfg. Co. Vises shall be installed at each corner
at right angles to each other. Six stop holes shall be
provided opposite each vise and two removable bench
stops to fit holes.
D.
When
indicated
on
the
plans,
provide
disabled
accessible bench in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
E.
Four Station Woodworking Bench, modified as specified
herein, shall be Model B-4160-2 of Angle Steel Inc.;
Model No. W36A-4V, Stock No. 63-00496 as supplied by
Paxton/Patterson.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 38
05/14/04
12.17
2
DESIGN NO. _____
SOLDERING BENCH WITH THREE BURNER FURNACE
A.
Bench shall be constructed as shown on Drawings. Bench
shall be center board type, size as shown on plan,
with
two
(2)
furnaces,
below
pipes,
and
air
compressor, all necessary piping, fittings, cocks,
rubber tubing, electrical outlets, all wiring,etc.,
complete and ready for use.
Provide in an approved manner all the necessary gas and
air piping, fittings, cocks, wrenches etc., to supply
gas and air to the combination bench furnaces, and to
the blowtorch stations.
Gas and air piping shall be
black standard steel.
Fittings for the gas and air
piping shall be heavy malleable iron beaded fittings.
Piping shall be made up with right and left couplings
only.
Piping and fittings shall be threaded joints,
made with red lead.
(Gas fitters cement will not be
accepted.)
Gas and air piping shall be supported in an approved
manner. Where pipes of different size come together,
reducing fittings shall be used. Bushings will not be
accepted.
Furnish and clamp one (1), four (4) foot length of
rubber tubing to each brass hose connection. Furnish
and connect the blow pipes to the other ends of the
rubber tubing one (1) blow pipe attached to each air
and gas set of two (2) lengths of rubber tubing.
Provide standard bronze cocks in each branch gas line
to the bench furnaces and in each branch gas and air
line to the blow pipes.
Provide a bronze cock in the main gas line.
The Contractor shall consult with the gas company to
determine the type of gas being furnished at the school
building. The bench furnaces and blow pipes shall be
designed to operate on the type of gas being furnished.
The bench and piping shall be painted with one (1) coat
of metal primer two (2) coats of flat paint and
furnished with one (1) coat of acid and solvent
resistant gray enamel. All edges shall be ground and
rounded to prevent injury to personnel.
B.
NYSCA
Each bench furnace shall be three (3) burner,
combination furnace designed for heating soldering
coppers, heat treating, and soft metal melting. Each
furnace shall have a removable lid on hood, and
furnished with one (1) 6-inch diameter melting pot of
approximately 22 lb. lead capacity.
Combination Gas
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 39
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Bench Furnace shall be Johnson Gas Appliance Co., No.
118.
C.
The air compressor shall be a ball bearing, centrifugal
type multistage turbo-compressor.
The compressor
shall be capable of delivering 60 C.F.M. at a pressure
of 12 oz. per square inch.
The compressor shall be
complete and ready to operate and furnished with
direct connected motor, rubber sleeve and clamps. The
compressor shall be mounted on bench shelf with 1"
thick approved vibration isolation, cork pads.
Compressor motor shall be 1/3 H.P., designed to operate
on three phase, 208 volts, 60 cycle A.C. Provide in a
convenient location an approved magnetic starter.
Turbo compressor shall be Spencer Turbine Co. MultiStage Turbo Compressor, Catalog No. 0751/3.
D.
The cock in the main gas line shall be non-shock, 125
pound per sq. inch service rating, flathead, bronze
cock.
This cock shall be furnished with a malleable
iron flathead wrench.
Cocks shall be Walworth
Company, No. 555.
All the
shall be
rating,
Walworth
12.18
2
other cocks in the branch gas and air lines
non-shock, 125 pounds per square inch service
tee head, bronze cocks.
Cocks shall be
Company, No 557.
E.
Blow pipes shall be National Welding Equipment Co.,
"Koolite" No. 3-A Blow pipe complete with one (1) each
of size N-0, N-1 and N-2 tips and wrench; No."6FN" as
made by the William Dixon Co.
F.
Rubber tubing shall be kink resistant, natural rubberpure gum, black or red with either a smooth or light
cloth impression finish, inside diameter to fit the
gas and air connections of the blowpipes and shall
have 1/8 inch wall thickness. Rubber tubing shall be
Minor Rubber Co., Inc., "Mirco" brand.
G.
Provide a check valve in gas line after shut of valve.
SOLDERING BENCH WITH TWO BURNER FURNACE
A.
Bench shall be constructed as shown on Drawings. Bench
shall be center board type, size as shown on plan,
with two (2) furnaces, blow pipes, an air compressor,
all necessary piping, fittings, cocks, rubber tubing,
electrical outlets, all wiring, etc., complete and
ready for use.
Provide in an approved manner all the necessary gas and
air piping, fittings, cocks, wenches, etc., to supply
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 40
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
gas to the bench furnaces and gas and air to the
blowtorch stations. Gas and air piping shall be black
standard steel.
Fittings for the gas and air piping
shall be heavy malleable iron beaded fittings Piping
shall be made up with right and left couplings only.
Piping and fittings shall be threaded joints, made with
red lead. (Gas fitters cement will not be accepted.)
Gas and air piping shall be supported in an approved
manner. Where pipes of different size come together,
reducing fittings shall be used. Bushings will not be
accepted.
Furnish and clamp one(1), four (4) foot length of
rubber tubing to each hose connection.
Furnish and
connect the blow pipes to the other ends of the rubber
tubing one (1) blow pipe attached to each air and gas
set of two (2) lengths of rubber tubing.
Provide standard bronze cocks in each branch gas line
to the bench furnaces and in each branch gas and air
line to the blow pipes.
Provide a bronze cock in the main gas line.
The Contractor shall consult with the gas company to
determine the type of gas being furnished at the school
building. The bench furnaces and blow pipes shall be
designed to operate on the type of gas being furnished.
The bench and piping shall be painted with one (1) coat
of metal primer two (2) coats of flat paint and
finished with one (1) coat of acid and solvent
resistant gray enamel. All edges shall be ground and
rounded to prevent injury to personnel.
NYSCA
B.
Each bench furnace shall be a two (2) burner furnace
designed for heating soldering coppers, heat treating
and soft metal melting.
Each furnace shall have a
removable lid on hood, and furnished with one (1) 3inch diameter melting pot of approximately 10 lb. lead
capacity.
Gas Bench Furnace shall be Johnson Gas
Appliance Co., No. 105.
C.
The air compressor shall be a ball bearing, centrifugal
type multi-stage turbo-compressor.
The compressor
shall be capable of delivering 60 C.F.M. at a pressure
of 12 oz. per square inch.
The compressor shall be
complete and ready to operate and furnished with
direct connected motor, rubber sleeve and clamps. The
compressor shall be mounted on bench shelf with 1"
thick approved vibration isolation, cork pad.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 41
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Compressor motor shall be 1/3 H.P.,
on three phase, 208 volt. 60 cycle
convenient location an approved
Turbo compressor shall be Spencer
Stage Turbo Compressor, Catalog No.
D.
The cock in the main gas line shall be non-shock, 125
pound per sq. inch service rating, flathead, bronze
cock.
This cock shall be furnished with a malleable
iron flathead wrench.
Cocks shall be Walworth
Company, No 555.
All the
shall be
rating,
Walworth
other cocks in the branch gas and air lines
non-shock. 125 pounds per square inch service
tee head, bronze cocks.
Cocks shall be
Company, No. 557.
E.
Blow pipes shall be National Welding Equipment Co.,
"Koolite" No. 3-A Blow pipe complete with (1) each of
size N-0, N-1 and N-2 tips and wrench; No. "6FN" as
made by the William Dixon Co.
F.
Rubber tubing shall be kink resistant, natural rubberpure gum, black or red with either a smooth or light
cloth impression finish, inside diameter to fit the
gas and air connections of the blowpipes and shall
have 1/8 inch wall thickness. Rubber tubing shall be
Miner Rubber Co., Inc., "Mirco" brand.
G.
Provide a check valve in gas line after shut off valve.
12.18A
NYSCA
designed to operate
A.C. Provide in a
magnetic starter.
Turbine Co. Multi0751/3.
SOLDERING BENCH
A.
Bench shall consist of cabinet base unit: "ultraboard
(non-asbestos)" covered wood top; and with one
Furnace, and necessary gas piping and valves for
properly operating this assembly.
B.
The overall unit shall be 30" x 72" and shall be
approximately 32" to the top surface of he table,
unless otherwise noted or shown on the Drawings.
C.
The cabinet base unit shall be approximated 48" wide by
approximately 22" deep.
Cabinet Base Unit shall be
double door, with master-keyed handle for positive
locking; all welded base construction; with adjustable
shelf.
D.
Table Top to be 1-3/4" thick hard maple edge grain
surface strips and 1/2" thick one piece "ultraboard
(non-asbestos)" cover.
E.
The Contractor shall consult with the gas company to
determine the type of gas being furnished at the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 42
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
school building. The bench furnace shall be designed
to operate on the type of gas being furnished.
2
F.
Bench furnace shall be a two (2) burner furnace
designed for heating soldering coppers, heat treating
and soft metal melting.
Furnace shall have a
removable lid on hood, and furnish with one (1) 3-inch
diameter melting pot of approximately 10 lb. lead
capacity.
G.
Gas bench furnace shall be Johnson Gas Appliance Co.,
No. 105.
H.
Provide in an approved manner all the necessary gas
piping, fittings, cocks, wrenches, etc., to supply gas
to the bench furnace.
Gas piping shall be black
standard steel. Fittings for the gas piping shall be
heavy malleable iron beaded fittings. Piping shall be
made up with right and left couplings only.
Piping
and fittings shall be threaded joints.
Gas piping
shall be supported in an approved manner. Where pipes
of different size come together, reducing fittings
shall be used. Bushing will not be accepted.
I.
The cock in the main gas line shall be a non-shock. 125
pounds per sq. inch service rating, flathead, bronze
cock. This cock shall be furnished with malleable iron
flathead wrench. Cocks shall be Walworth Company, No
555.
J.
All the other cocks in the branch gas lines shall be
non-shock, 125 pounds per square inch service rating,
tee head, bronze cocks.
Cocks shall be Walworth
Company, No. 557.
K.
The bench and piping shall be painted with one (1) coat
of metal primer, two (2) coats of flat paint, and
finished with one (1) coat of acid and solvent
resistant gray enamel.
Top of bench shall be
completely painted with clear epoxy varnish to inhibit
release of fibers.
L.
Soldering Bench gas line shall be equipped with a backfire check valve, MN-1000 series, as supplied by
Eclipse Fuel Engineering, installed after gas cock per
Drawings.
12.19
COMBINATION STAKE AND MACHINE BENCH
A.
NYSCA
Bench shall be a 96" long x 40" wide, edge grain maple
top, 2-1/4" thick with front and back edges protected
by angle irons.
Top to be equipped with two (2) 30"
long x 8" wide stake plates, set diagonally opposite
to each other and 4" from front edge. Bench shall be
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 43
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
recessed so that face of stake plate can be installed
flush with bench top surface.
Bench top to have a
natural lacquer finish.
B.
Base shall be of heavy gage all-steel construction;
consisting of pressed steel channel or angle steel
legs and two (2) 30" deep steel shelves.
Base shall
be given a gray enamel finish.
C.
Stake Bench shall be Paxton-Patterson - Model # SMB96B;
Brodhead-Garret Co., Metal Bench No. SM-90-S.
12.19A
MACHINE BENCH
A.
Bench shall be 96 inches long x 40 inches wide, edge
grain maple top, 2-1/4" thick with front and back
edges reinforced and protected with angle iron flush
with bench top and running the entire length of the
bench top.
Bench top to have a natural lacquer
finish. Bench shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Base shall be of heavy gage all-steel construction;
consisting of pressed steel channel or angle steel
legs and two (2) 30" deep steel shelves.
All metal
components shall be finished in baked on gray enamel.
C.
Metal Bench shall be Brodhead-Garret Co. Metal Bench
No. SM-88-S, or Paxton-Patterson - Model # SMB96B.
12.20
DOUBLE STAKE BENCH
A.
Bench shall be a 60" long x 40" - 42" wide edge grain
maple top, 2-1/4" thick with front and back edges
protected by angle irons. Top to be equipped with two
(2) 30" long x 8" wide stake plates, set directly
opposite to each other and 4" from front edge. Bench
shall be recessed so that face of stake plate can be
installed flush with bench top surface. Bench top to
have a natural lacquer finish.
B.
Base shall be of heavy gage all-steel construction;
consisting of two pressed steel channel or angle steel
legs and two (2) 30' deep steel shelves.
Base shall
be given a gray enamel finish.
C.
Stake Bench shall be Parent Metal Products, Inc.,
Double Stake Bench No. 60-42 S; or Brodhead-Garret Co.
Metal Bench No. SM-60-S.
12.20A
METAL BENCH
A.
NYSCA
The bench shall be complete and ready for use.
The
complete bench shall consist of: one (1) 60" long x
40" wide x 2-1/4" thick wood top of selected edge
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 44
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
grain maple with front and back edges reinforced and
protected with angle iron flush with
bench top and
running the entire length of the bench top; two sets
of, two (2) angle steel legs or two (2) pressed steel
channel bench legs; two (2) 30" deep steel shelves;
one (1) stake plate 30" x 8 inches to be installed
flush with top of bench and 4" from front edge.
Top
shall be finished in natural lacquer. All metal parts
shall be finished in baked on gray enamel.
B.
12.21
NYSCA
Metal bench shall be Brodhead-Garrett Co. Catalog No.
SM-59-S.
ELECTRICAL DEMONSTRATION DESK
A.
Desk shall have an electrical demonstration area with
Textolite, plastic covered top, drawer facilities,
pre-wired plug mold strip and AC/DC power supply.
Power to the unit shall be 120 V., single phase,
grounded through rigid conduit.
B.
Bench shall conform to the following specifications:
1.
Top:
1-1/4" ply covered, natural gain Textolite
size 30" x 72". Over-all height 37."
2.
Drawer section:
Front and back of 1-1/2" hard
maple frame with 1/2" x 1/2" mortised and tenoned
at all joints.
3.
1/4" birch ply back, 3/4" birch ply ends.
4.
3 Storage drawers with 7/8" master keyed cylinder
locks, each size 13-5/8" wide by 20-3/4" deep x 41/4" high inside using metal ball bearing nylon
rollers.
5.
Metal drawer runners with stops.
6.
One (1) file drawer with 7/8" master keyed lock
cylinder type size 13-5/8" wide x 24-3/4" deep x
10-1/4" high inside using metal drawer runner with
ball bearing nylon rollers and stops.
7.
Four (4) planning drawers 31" wide x 24-3/4" deep
1-7/8" inside paper hold downs and with metal
runners.
8.
Left table apron 7/8" x 4" hard maple.
9.
One (1) 1-1/4" x 2" inverted A end hard maple leg
with 1-1/4 x 2" spreader between leg and base.
10.
One (1) 3 ft. 6 outlet plug mold (grounded).
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 45
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
11.
One (1) "1230U" power supply unit installed in
upper left hand drawer opening.
12.
Unit shall have a heavy gage steel face panel,
size 12-3/4" wide x 6" high grill type steel body
case, lock type control switch, pilot light,
circuit breakers and silicon rectifier.
Unit
shall be ready for use by plugging into standard
120 volt. A.C. single phase source.
Output services shall be as follows:
Continuous Rating
1.
120 Volts A.C. from standard
duplex outlet
2.
Variable A.C. 0 to 120
volts from standard duplex
5 amps.
3.
Variable A.C. 0 to 12 volts
from 2 jacks
10 amps.
Variable A.C. to 24
volts from 2 jacks
4.
D.
12.22
NYSCA
15 amps.
5 amps.
Variable D.C. 0 to 12 volts
unfiltered from 2 jacks
10 amps.
Variable D.C. 0 to 20 volts
unfiltered from 2 jacks
5 amps.
Electrical Demonstration Desk shall be Brodhead-Garrett
Model ET 631.
ELECTRICAL TEST BENCH
A.
Electric test bench shall consist of upper test panel,
wood work top and sliding door steel cabinet base.
B.
Test panel shall be of birch plywood throughout, 60" x
30" x 4" deep. Panel shall be completely wired, self
contained and ready to connect to a source of single
phase, 120 volt, grounded power.
This panel shall
include six A.C. meter, one each 0-5 volts, 0-50
volts, 0-300 volts, 0-1 amp., 0-5 amps., 0-25 amps.,
watthour meter 120 volt, transformer, 120 volt primary
and 4-8-16-24 volt 100 watt secondary, switches,
receptacles, fuse box, circuit breakers and bell
buzzer.
Also provide all necessary test leads,
continuity tester, set of test instructions. Input to
the panel shall be 115 volts, A.C., single phase, 30
amperes capacity.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 46
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Work top shall be 72" x 30" x 1-1/2" and suitable for
electrical work.
The top shall be surfaced both top
and bottom with high-density 1/4" hardboard and
finished with two coats of acid and oil resistant
clear vinyl.
D.
Sliding door cabinet base shall be 60" long x 30" deep
x 33" high and finished in gray enamel.
E.
Power to the unit shall be 120 volt, single phase,
grounded through rigid conduit.
F.
Electrical Test Bench shall be Brodhead-Garret Co. No.
ET 5 C.
12.23
ELECTRICAL TUNNEL - SINGLE FACED
A.
Electrical tunnel shall be constructed of 20 gage sheet
metal and finished in gray enamel.
Four receptacle
boxes shall be mounted from the outside and fastened
with sheet metal screws to the front side of the
tunnel.
Fuse box shall be for single screw-in type fuse with
on-off handle control.
B.
Power to the unit shall be 120 volt, single phase,
grounded the rough rigid conduit.
C.
The top shall be removable for maintenance or rewiring
without interfering with the original wiring.
Tunnel to be 7" wide, 6-1/2" high, 72" long.
Tunnel to be furnished prewired, ready for use.
D.
12.24
NYSCA
Electrical Tunnel shall be Brodhead-Garret Model ET
100.
ELECTRICAL TUNNEL - DOUBLE FACED
A.
Electrical tunnel shall be constructed of 20 gage sheet
metal and finished in gray enamel.
Eight receptacle
boxes shall be mounted from the outside and fastened
with sheet metal screws, four to each side of the
tunnel made so that the switch may be mounted at
either end.
Fuse box shall be for single screw-in
type fuse with on-off handle control.
B.
Power to the unit shall be 120 volt, single phase,
grounded through rigid conduit.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 47
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
The top shall be removable for maintenance or rewiring
without interfering with the original wiring.
Tunnel to be 7" wide, 6-1/2" high, 72" long.
Tunnel to be furnished prewired, ready for use.
D.
12.25
Electrical Tunnel shall be Brodhead-Garret Model ET
101.
TUNNEL MODULE (POWER PACK) - DOUBLE FACED
A.
The unit shall be housed in a 16 gage prime cold rolled
steel enclosure, 19" wide x 7" high x 14" deep at base
and 12" deep at top. The unit shall be finished with
a rust preventive primer and durable baked enamel.
The enclosure shall have rubber feet, no carrying
handles, and shall be designed to mount the panels by
means of Phillips head screws in each corner. Panels
shall be constructed of 12 gage steel.
Tunnel Module shall be "Brompton Series 1400".
NYSCA
B.
Power to the unit shall be fed to an internal junction
box through rigid conduit.
The panels and the
enclosure shall be grounded electrically by a third
wire.
The entrance of power to the unit shall be
through knockouts provided in the bottom and sides of
the panel enclosure.
Weld studs shall be positioned
to locate and fasten the junction box properly with
relation to the knockouts provided.
Electrical
service shall be 120V A.C., single phase 60 cycle, 25
amperes, through rigid conduit.
C.
Power shall be controlled by a key, removable in the
"On" or "Off" position so as to prevent unauthorized
tampering. When "Off" all outputs shall be dead A red
pilot light shall indicate whenever the unit is
energized.
D.
All variable outputs from the various power sources
shall be protected by a 3.5 Ampere thermal magnetic
circuit
breaker,
in
the
primary
of
the
auto
transformer, to prevent overheating or damage to
components due to overloads.
Breaker will open when
dead, shorted or overloaded.
The use of fuses will
not be accepted for any protection within the unit.
E.
All variable outputs shall be continuously variable
from
zero
to
rated
voltage
by
means
of
an
autotransformer in the input circuit.
The power
supply
control knob shall withstand 700" oz.torque
without slipping on the shaft or damaging the control.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 48
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Control knob shall turn at least 300o. All knobs shall
have metal inserts. All knobs shall be sealed against
tampering.
F.
All external parts shall be arranged for easy operation
and shall have a clear and consistent marking system.
External parts must be mounted to prevent unauthorized
removal or tampering. No screwheads or other means of
component disassembly shall appear externally.
G.
All supplies except fixed 120 volt A.C. and variable
zero to 120 volt A.C. shall be isolated.
H.
This unit shall have two working panels mounted back to
back in a double faced enclosure.
Panel A shall
contain one D.C. Voltmeter and one D.D. Ammeter
(description
to
follow)
and
one
Power
Supply
(description to follow).
Panel B shall contain one
A.C. Voltmeter and one A.C. Ammeter (description to
follow) and shall contain one identical Power Supply
as provided on Panel A.
I.
Diode Protected Meters - Meter movements shall be G.C.
#DO-91 and AO-91 3-1/2" wide view, panel type,
+2%
operating
at
full
scale
accuracy.All
meter
movements, diodes, multipliers, and shunts must be
protected so that they remain within their stated
accuracy, and no resistor shall exceed a temperature of
125o Centigrade, even when accidentally or deliberately
connected improperly to any power source available on
the power supply panel.
Each voltmeter and each
ammeter shall be diode protected. Ammeters shall also
be thermal magnetic breaker protected. The degree of
rotation of meter selection knobs shall be no more than
180o and specifically limited to the ranges indicated
on the panel. All ascending meter ranges shall rotate
in a clockwise direction. All knobs shall have metal
inserts and shall be able to withstand 300 in-oz of
torque without slipping on the shaft or damaging the
control.
J.
The unit shall provide the following outputs from each
power supply from a 120 volt A.C. single phase 60
cycle input, and the following metering services:
Voltage
120 Volts A.C.
Continuous
Ratings
Termination
10 Amp.
Ground Type
Receptacle
0-120 Volts A.C. 1 Amp.
NYSCA
Remarks
Ground Type
Receptacle
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 49
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
0-16 Volts A.C.
2 Amp.
5 way binding
posts
Isolated
0-16 Volts D.C.
2 Amp.
5 way binding Isolated
posts
Less than
1% RMS
Ripple
DIODE PROTECTED METERS
NYSCA
Type
Range
Termination
D.C. Voltmeter
0-5, 25, 50, 250, 500
5 way binding
posts
D.C. Ammeter
0-.1ma., 1ma., 10ma.,
.1A., 1A., 10A.
5 way binding
posts
A.C. Voltmeter
0-15, 75, 150, 300
5 way binding
posts
A.C. Ammeter
0-.1A., .5A., 1A.,
5A., 10A.
5 way binding
posts
K.
Unit shall be provided with two sets of banana plug
stacking type test leads 24" long and two sets of
instrument type test leads fitted with insulated
banana plugs and alligator clips.
Plugs clips, and
cords shall be D.C. color coded and shall adapt
readily to Johnson Type 111-300 five way binding
posts. All binding posts shall be installed in "D"
shaped holes to prevent rotation of the body.
All
D.C. binding posts shall be color coded black and red.
All A.C. binding posts shall be color coded yellow.
L.
Module shall be equipped with two full length locking
covers and two masterkeyed cylinder locks complete
with four identical keys.
Locking covers shall be
constructed of 16 gage steel, pan formed type, with an
additional 90o return angle for added strength.
Two
horizontal pin hinges shall allow the locking cover to
rest on top of the module when in an open position.
The locking cover, when in a closed position will
cover completely the individual power panels and
meters.
M.
All components shall be warranted to be free from
defects in workmanship for a period of two years from
the date of installation as marked in the unit.
The
manufacturer,
when
notified,
shall
inspect
the
defective unit at the school. The manufacturer shall
be
responsible
for
on-the-job
service
and/or
transportation to and from factory, if required the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 50
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
manufacturer shall replace or repair any equipment
which is found to be defective through normal use
without cost to the Board of Education or the
Authority for the warranty period.
12.26
TUNNEL MODULE (POWER PACK) - DOUBLE FACED, PORTABLE
A.
The unit shall be housed in a 16 gage prime cold rolled
steel enclosure, 19" wide x 7" high x 14" deep at the
base and 12" deep at the top.
The unit shall be
finished with a rust preventive primer and durable
baked enamel.
The enclosure shall have rubber feet,
two carrying handles, and shall be designed to mount
the panels by means of Phillips head screws in each
corner. Panels shall be constructed of 12 gage steel.
Portable Tunnel Module shall be "Brompton Series 1400".
B.
Power to the unit shall be fed through a five foot long
3 conductor grounding type cord, plug and socket. The
panels
and
the
enclosure
shall
be
grounded
electrically by
a third wire.
This unit shall
operate from a 125V.A.C. single phase 60 cycle source.
C.
Power shall be controlled by a key, removable in the
"On" or "Off" position so as to prevent unauthorized
tampering.
When "Off" all outputs shall be dead.
A
red pilot light shall indicate whenever the unit is
energized.
D.
All variable outputs from the various power sources
shall be protected by a 3.5 Ampere thermal magnetic
circuit
breaker,
in
the
primary
of
the
autotransformer, to prevent overheating or damage to
components due to overloads.
Breaker will open when
dead shorted or overloaded. The use of fuses will not
be accepted for any protection within the unit.
E.
All variable outputs shall be continuously variable
from zero to rated voltage by means of an autotransformer in the input circuit.
The power supply
control knob shall withstand 700 in-oz torque without
slipping on the shaft or damaging the control.
Control knob shall turn at least 300o. All knobs shall
have metal inserts.
All knobs shall be sealed against tampering.
F.
NYSCA
All external parts shall be arranged for easy operation
and shall have a clear and consistent marking system.
External parts must be mounted to prevent unauthorized
removal or tampering. No screwheads or other means of
component disassembly shall appear externally.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 51
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
G.
All supplies except fixed 120 volt A.C. and variable
zero to 120 volt A.C. shall be isolated.
H.
This unit shall have two working panels mounted back to
back in a double faced enclosure.
Panel A shall
contain one D.C. Voltmeter and one D.C. Ammeter
(descriptions
to
follow)
and
one
Power
Supply
(description to follow).
Panel B Shall contain one
A.C. Voltmeter and one A.C. Ammeter (description to
follow) and shall contain one identical Power Supply
as provided on Panel A.
I.
Diode Protected Meters - Meter movements shall be G.E.
# DO-91 and AO-91 3-1/2" wide view, panel type,
operating at +2% full scale accuracy.
All meter movements, diodes, multipliers, and shunts
must be protected so that they remain within their
stated accuracy, and no resistor shall exceed a
temperature of 125o Centigrade, even when accidentally
or deliberately connected improperly to any power
source available on the power supply panel.
Each
voltmeter and each ammeter shall be diode protected.
Ammeters shall also be thermal magnetic breaker
protected. The degree of rotation of meter selection
knobs shall be no more than 180o and specifically
limited to the ranges indicated on the panel.
All
ascending meter ranges shall rotate in a clockwise
direction.
All knobs shall have metal inserts and
shall be able to withstand 300 in-oz of torque without
slipping on the shaft or damaging the control.
J.
The unit shall provide the following outputs from each
power supply from a 120 volt A.C. single phase 60
cycle input, and the following metering services:
Voltage
120 Volts A.C.
Continuous
Ratings
Termination
10 Amp.
Ground Type
Receptacle
0-120 Volts A.C. 1 Amp.
NYSCA
Remarks
Ground Type
Receptacle
0-16 Volts A.C.
2 Amp.
5 way binding
posts
Isolated
0-16 Volts D.C.
2 Amp.
5 way binding Isolated
posts
Less than
1% RMS
Ripple
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 52
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
DIODE PROTECTED METERS
Range
Termination
D.C. Voltmeter
0-5, 25, 50, 250, 500
5 way binding
posts
D.C. Ammeter
0-.1ma., 1ma., 10ma.
.1A., 1A., 10A.
5 way binding
posts
A.C. Voltmeter
0-15, 75, 150, 300
5 way binding
posts
A.C. Ammeter
0-.1A., .5A., 1A.
5A., 10A.
5 way binding
posts
K.
This unit shall be provided with two sets of banana
plugs stacking type test leads 24" long and two sets
of instrument type test leads fitted with insulated
banana plugs and alligator clips. Plugs, clips, and
cords shall be D.C. color coded and shall adapt
readily to Johnson type #111-300 five way binding
posts.
All binding posts shall be installed in "D"
shaped holes to prevent rotation of the body.
All
D.C. binding posts shall be color coded black and red.
All A.C. binding posts shall be color coded yellow.
L.
Module shall be equipped with two full length locking
covers and two masterkeyed cylinder locks complete
with four identical keys.
Locking covers shall be
constructed of 16 gage steel, pan formed type, with an
additional 90o return angle for added strength. Two
horizontal pin hinges shall allow the locking cover to
rest on top of the module when in an open position.
The locking cover, when in a closed position will
cover completely the individual power panels and
meters.
M.
All components shall be warranted to be free from
defects in workmanship for a period of two years from
the date of installation as marked in the unit.
The
manufacturer,
when
notified,
shall
inspect
the
defective unit at the school. The manufacturer shall
be
responsible
for
on-the-job
service
and
or
transportation to and from factory, if required. The
manufacturer shall replace or repair any equipment
which is found to be defective through normal use
without cost to the Board of Education or the
Authority for the warranty period.
12.27
POWER STATION WITH LOCKING COVER
A.
NYSCA
Type
Power supply shall consist of a small bench mounted
power supply meter module designed to provide a range
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 53
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
of AC/DC voltages and instrumentation suitable
general purpose electric/electronic experiments.
B.
for
Unit shall consist of the following panel sections
meeting the listed specifications, all housed in one
steel cabinet with frontal locking cover:
1.
2.
DC meter
a.
DC Voltmeter:
Range: 2 V, 20 V, and 200 V.
Accuracy: +5% of full scale.
b.
DC Ammeter:
Range: 2 ma, 20 ma, 200 ma and 2 amps.
Accuracy: + 3% of full scale.
Sine/Square Wave Generator
a.
Sine Wave Generator:
Frequency Range:
50 Hz to 500 KHZ
ranges).
Dual Accuracy: + 5% max. dial setting.
Distortion: Max. 3%
Output Level: 6 V p-p (min.) open circ.
b.
Square Wave Generator:
Frequency Range:
50 Hz to 500 KHZ
ranges).
Output Level: + 5 V DC (max) open circ.
(4
(4
Rise & Fall Time: 100 nanoseconds (type.)
Asymmetry: 6% (max)
3.
NYSCA
Electronic VOM
a.
AC/DC voltmeter:
Range: 0.2 V, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 2 KV
(500 V DC/300 V AC min. on 2 KV scale).
Input Resistance: 1 Megohm (all scales).
Accuracy: + 3% of full scale.
b.
AC/DC Ammeter:
Range: 0.2 ma, 2 ma, 20 ma,
2 amps
Accuracy: + 3% of full scale.
200 ma,
and
c.
Ohmmeter:
Range:
X1 ohm, X100 ohm, X10K ohms,
X1M ohms.
Accuracy: + 3% of full scale.
and
4.
AC/DC Power Supplies
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 54
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
a.
AC Voltages:
Outputs: 6.3 V, 20 V, 30 V, and 40 V (fixed
steps).
Current: 1 amp (max).
Load Regulation: 20%
b.
DC Voltages:
Output: 2-10V, 10-20V (variable over range).
Current: 1 amp (max).
Load Regulation:
1% + 60 mv (no load-ful
load).
Ripple: 10 mv rms (max).
12.28
NYSCA
c.
Power supply shall be fully protected against
improper connections to system voltages and
have all minus and common jacks isolated form
the chassis.
Meters shall be of the taut
band suspension type, fully shielded and
overloaded protected. All input and out put
connections shall be of the banana jack type.
Provide one (1) copy of Instruction Manual
with each instrument.
d.
Electrical requirements of power supply unit
shall be 120 V, 60 HZ, 100 W. Provide solid
electrical connection to unit at position
shown on Drawing.
e.
Power supply shall be a Mod AA-438 as
supplied by Lab - Volt Systems, Farmingdale,
N.J.
TOOL GRINDER - PEDESTAL TYPE, CHISEL ATTACHMENT
A.
Grinder shall be mounted on a pedestal with water pot.
Unit to be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one (1)
medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding wheel,
each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, one (1) adjustable tool
rest and one (1) plane iron and chisel grinding
attachment and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 55
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on grinder a gravity type dust collector, Model
No. 23-292 with Model No. 23-293 filter of the Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania. Supply one extra filter replacement with
grinder.
E.
Tool Grinder shall be Model 7308 equipped with Model
GA23 plane blade attachment all of Baldor, Columbus,
Mississippi.
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
Pedestal shall be Model GA20 with Model GA3 water pot
and two (2) Model GA4 tool trays, all of Baldor,
Columbus, Mississippi.
12.29
NYSCA
TOOL GRINDER - PEDESTAL TYPE, TWO ADJUSTABLE RESTS
A.
Grinder shall be mounted on a pedestal with water pot.
Unit to be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one (1)
medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding wheel,
each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, two (2) adjustable tool
rests and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on grinder a gravity type dust collector, Model
No. 23-292 with Model No. 23-293 filter of the Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania. Supply one extra filter replacement with
grinder.
E.
Tool Grinder including two (2) adjustable tool rests
shall be Model 7308 of Baldor, Columbus, Mississippi.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 56
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
Pedestal shall be Model GA20 with Model GA3 water pot
and two (2) Model GA4 tool trays, all of Baldor,
Columbus, Mississippi.
12.30
TOOL GRINDER - BENCH TYPE, CHISEL ATTACHMENT
A.
Grinder shall be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one
(1) medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding
wheel, each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, one (1) adjustable tool
rest and one (1) plane iron and chisel grinding
attachment and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on each safety wheel guard a dust collector bag
which is easily removable for cleaning.
E.
Tool Grinder shall be Model 7308 equipped with Model
GA23 plane blade attachment all of Baldor, Columbus,
Mississippi.
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
12.31
TOOL GRINDER - BENCH TYPE, TWO ADJUSTABLE RESTS
A.
NYSCA
Grinder shall be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one
(1) medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding
wheel, each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, two (2) adjustable tool
rests and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 57
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on each safety wheel guard a dust collector bag
which is easily removable for cleaning.
E.
Tool Grinder including two (2) adjustable tool rests
shall be Model 7308 of Baldor, Columbus, Mississippi.
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
12.32
NYSCA
TOOL GRINDER - HIGH SPEED, PEDESTAL TYPE
A.
Grinder shall be mounted on a pedestal with water pot.
Unit to be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one (1)
medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding wheel,
each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, two (2) adjustable tool
rests and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 3450 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on grinder a gravity type dust collector, Model
No. 23-292 with Model No. 23-293 filter of the Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania. Supply one extra filter replacement with
grinder.
E.
Tool Grinder including two (2) adjustable tool rests
shall be Model 7309 of Baldor, Columbus, Mississippi.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 58
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
Pedestal shall be Model GA20 with Model GA3 water pot
and two (2) Model GA4 tool trays, all of Baldor,
Columbus, Mississippi.
12.33
TOOL GRINDER - HIGH SPEED, BENCH TYPE
A.
Grinder shall be fully enclosed ball bearing motor, one
(1) medium and one (1) fine carborundum grinding
wheel, each wheel 7" dia. x 1" face, 5/8" bore, fully
enclosed safety wheel guards, two (2) adjustable tool
rests and two (2) illuminated safety eye shields,
complete with holders, safety glass, 120 volt light
bulbs, etc. Grinder shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for operation.
B.
Motor for grinder shall be fully enclosed, 1/2
horsepower, 3450 R.P.M., designed to operate on three
phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on grinder a magnetic
starter wired with approved materials to motor. The
illuminated safety eye shields shall be wired to the
motor circuit so that the lights will automatically go
on when motor is started. Omit toggle switch and
blank-off the opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted with enamel to match the grinder.
D.
Provide on each safety wheel guard a dust collector bag
which is easily removable for cleaning.
E.
Tool Grinder including two (2) adjustable tool rests
shall be Model 7309 of Baldor, Columbus, Mississippi.
Illuminated safety eye shields shall be Baldor Model
GA9.
12.34
GRINDER PEDESTAL
A.
Pedestal for grinder shall be constructed of cast iron,
measuring approximately 33" high with water pot and
two (2) tool trays.
B.
Pedestal shall be Model GA20 with Model GA3 water pot
and two (2) Model GA4 tool trays, all of Baldor,
Columbus, Mississippi.
12.35
DRILL PRESS - 15", FLOOR TYPE
A.
NYSCA
Drill press shall be a motor driven, floor type, slow
speed, standard tilting table, ball bearing, free
floating 1/2" Jacobs chuck spindle. Spindle travel not
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 59
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
less than 4-1/2", distance from center of chuck to
face of column not less than 7", maximum distance from
chuck to base 46", machine ground cast iron table not
less than 10" D x 14" W, and ground steel column 3"
minimum outside diameter. Drill press shall be
complete, adjusted, and be ready to operate, and
furnished with motor, necessary step pulleys for a
speed range of 317 to 3550 R.P.M., V-belts, column
collar under head, calibrated depth stop, spring
return mechanism, and feed wheel. Spindle shall be
equipped with a 0-1/2" Jacobs key type drill press
chuck.
B.
Provide in place on drill press the following
additional equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved
design, guard shall be hinged or easily removable for
shifting belts, and shall completely cover the belts
and entire driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of
sufficient length around base of column that should
the table accidentally drop it will be stopped six
inches above base; one (1) table support collar. Also
furnish one (1) drill press vise, with drill press,
No. 1035 of Wilton Corp.; Palmgren No. 14 by Chicago
Tool and Engineering Co.
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least 1/2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three
phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co. in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Drill press shall be Model No. 15-234 with Model No.
49-009
motor
of
Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Model 1152800
with No. 6470607 motor of Powermatic, McMinnville, TN;
Model No. 1676 of Clausing, Kalamazoo, Michigan.
12.36
DRILL PRESS - 15", BENCH TYPE
A.
NYSCA
Drill press shall be a motor driven, bench type, slow
speed, standard tilting table, ball bearing, free
floating 1/2" Jacobs chuck spindle. Spindle travel not
less than 4-1/2", distance from center of chuck to
face of column not less than 7", distance from chuck
to base approximately 17", machine ground cast iron
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 60
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
table not less than 10" D x 14" W, and ground steel
column 3" minimum outside diameter. Drill press shall
be complete, adjusted, and be ready to operate, and
furnished with motor, necessary step pulleys for a
speed range of 317 to 3550 R.P.M., V-belts, column
collar under head, calibrated depth stop, spring
return mechanism, and feed wheel. Spindle shall be
equipped with a 0-1/2" Jacobs key type drill press
chuck.
B.
Provide in place on drill press the following
additional equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved
design, guard shall be hinged or easily removable for
shifting belts, and shall completely cover the belts
and entire driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of
sufficient length around base of column that should
the table accidentally drop it will be stopped six
inches above base; one (1) table support collar. Also
furnish one (1) drill press vise, with drill press,
No. 1035 of Wilton Corp.; Palmgren No. 14 by Chicago
Tool and Engineering Co.
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least 1/2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three
phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co. in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Drill press shall be Model No. 15-224 with Model No.
49-009
motor
of
Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Model No. 1651
of Clausing, Kalamazoo, Michigan.
12.37
DRILL PRESS - 15" VARIABLE SPEED, FLOOR TYPE
A.
NYSCA
Drill press shall be a motor driven, floor type,
variable speed range of 330 to 2640 R.P.M., standard
tilting table, ball bearing, free floating 1/2" Jacobs
chuck spindle. Spindle travel not less than 4-1/2",
distance from center of chuck to face of column not
less than 7", maximum distance from chuck to base 46",
machine ground cast iron table not less than 10" D x
14" W, and ground steel column 3" minimum outside
diameter. Drill press shall be complete, adjusted, and
be ready to operate, and furnished with motor,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 61
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
necessary pulleys, V-belt, speed control wheel, speed
indicating dial, column collar under head, calibrated
depth stop, spring return mechanism, and feed wheel.
Spindle shall be equipped with a 0-1/2" Jacobs key
type drill press chuck.
B.
Provide in place on drill press the following
additional equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved
design, guard shall completely cover the belts and
entire driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of
sufficient length around base of column that should
the table accidentally drop it will be stopped six
inches above base; one (1) table support collar. Also
furnish one (1) drill press vise, with drill press,
Model Palmgren No. 14 by Chicago Tool and Engineering
Co.
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least 1/2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three
phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co. in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Drill press shall be Model No. 15-334 with Model No.
49-009
motor
of
Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Model 1152827
with No. 6470607 motor of Powermatic, McMinnville, TN;
Model No. 1689 of Clausing, Kalamazoo, Michigan.
12.38
DRILL PRESS - 15" VARIABLE SPEED, BENCH TYPE
A.
NYSCA
Drill press shall be a motor driven, bench type,
variable speed range of 330 to 2640 R.P.M., standard
tilting table, ball bearing, free floating 1/2" Jacobs
chuck spindle. Spindle travel not less than 4-1/2",
distance from center of chuck to face of column not
less
than
7",
distance
from
chuck
to
base
approximately 17", machine ground cast iron table not
less than 10" D x 14" W, and ground steel column 3"
minimum outside diameter. Drill press shall be
complete, adjusted, and be ready to operate, and
furnished with motor, necessary pulleys, V-belt, speed
control wheel, speed indicating dial, column collar
under head, calibrated depth stop, spring return
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 62
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
mechanism, and feed wheel. Spindle shall be equipped
with a 0-1/2" Jacobs key type drill press chuck.
B.
Provide in place on drill press the following
additional equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved
design, guard shall completely cover the belts and
entire driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of
sufficient length around base of column that should
the table accidentally drop it will be stopped six
inches above base; one (1) table support collar. Also
furnish one (1) drill press vise, with drill press,
Model Palmgren No. 14 by Chicago Tool and Engineering
Co.
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least 1/2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three
phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co. in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Drill press shall be Model No. 15-324 with Model No.
49-009
motor
of
Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Model No. 1681
of Clausing, Kalamazoo, Michigan.
12.39
NYSCA
DRILL PRESS - 17", FLOOR TYPE
A.
Drill press shall be a motor driven, floor type,
infinitley variable speed (230 to 2830 R.P.M.),
standard tilting table, ball bearing, free floating
1/2" Jacobs chuck spindle. Spindle travel not less
than 5", distance from center of chuck to face of
column not less than 8-1/2", maximum distance from
quill to base 45-3/4", machine ground cast iron table
not less than 11" D x 14" W, and ground steel column
3-1/2" minimum outside diameter. Drill press shall be
complete, adjusted, and be ready to operate, and
furnished with motor, V-belts, column collar under
head, calibrated depth stop, spring return mechanism,
and feed wheel. Spindle shall be equipped with a 01/2" Jacobs key type drill press chuck.
B.
Provide on drill press the following additional
equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved design,
guard shall be hinged or easily removable for shifting
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 63
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
belts, and shall completely cover the belts and entire
driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of sufficient
length around base of column that should the table
accidentally drop it will be stopped six inches above
base; one (1) table support collar. Also furnish one
(1) drill press vise, with drill press, Model No. 20
of Heinrich Tools, Inc.
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least one (1)
horsepower with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on
three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co., in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Drill press shall be Model No. 17-523 with Model No.
49-007
Motor
of
Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
12.40
NYSCA
DRILL PRESS - 17" WITH MORTISING ATTACHMENT
A.
Drill press shall be a motor driven, floor type,
infinitley variable speed (230 to 2830 R.P.M.),
standard tilting table, ball bearing, free floating
1/2" Jacobs chuck spindle. Spindle travel not less
than 5", distance from center of chuck to face of
column not less than 8-1/2", maximum distance from
quill to base 45-3/4", machine ground cast iron table
not less than 11" D x 14" W, and ground steel column
3-1/2" minimum outside diameter. Drill press shall be
complete, adjusted, and be ready to operate, and
furnished with motor, V-belts, column collar under
head, calibrated depth stop, spring return mechanism,
and feed wheel. Spindle shall be equipped with a 01/2" Jacobs key type drill press chuck.
B.
Provide in place on drill press the following
additional equipment: one (1) belt guard of approved
design, guard shall be hinged or easily removable for
shifting belts, and shall completely cover the belts
and entire driving mechanism, one (1) rubber collar of
sufficient length around base of column that should
the table accidentally drop it will be stopped six
inches above base; one (1) table support collar. Also
furnish one (1) drill press vise, with drill press,
Model No. 20 of Heinrich Tools, Inc.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 64
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Motor for drill press shall be at least one (1)
horsepower with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on
three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide on table a float-lock vise No. 15-8 with corner
attachment as made by American Machine and Foundry Co.
E.
Provide in convenient location on drill press a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to
motor.
F.
Furnish a safety type self-ejecting chuck key, as made
by the Miracle Instrument Co., in lieu of the standard
key.
G.
Mortising Attachment
1.
Mortising attachment shall be complete with base,
fence, hold down, curved arms, chisel holder and
bolts. Unit shall be assembled on machine and
ready for operation. Mortising attachment shall be
Model No. 17-905 of Delta International Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
2.
Furnish the following tool accessories for the
mortising
attachment
as
supplied
by
Delta
International Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania :
Three (3) Hollow Chisels: 1/4", 3/8" and 1/2".
Three (3) Mortising Bits: 1/4", 3/8" and 1/2".
Eight (8) Machine Spur Bits 6" long 1/2" shanks:
1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16", 1/2", 9/16", 5/8" and
3/4".
Five (5) Plug Cutters
5/8", 3/4" and 1".
H.
12.41
shank:
3/8",
1/2",
Drill press shall be Model No. 17-523 with Model No.
49-007 Motor, Model No. 17-882 spindle and Model No.
15-830 drill chuck of Delta International Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
SCROLL SAW
A.
NYSCA
1/2"
Scroll saw shall be a four speed, motor driven saw with
a 24 inch throat capacity and capable of cutting stock
at least 1-3/4" thick. Table shall be of cast iron,
smoothly finished, not less than 14" square, tilt
right and left and equipped with indicator. Height of
table above floor shall be as specified on the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 65
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
drawings; scroll saw to be mounted on stand. Scroll
saw shall be complete, adjusted, and be ready to
operate, and shall be furnished with steel scroll saw
stand, adjustable spring blade tension, adjustable
blade guides, roller supports, spring steel hold down,
blower, flexible metal air hose, motor, belt guard,
and necessary chucks. Chuck shall be universal and
adjustable to take all types of blades and sabers up
to 1/4" wide and files with shanks up to 1/4"
diameter; ball bearing or bronze bearing driving
mechanism, splash lubricated.
NYSCA
B.
Provide in place on scroll saw one (1) complete lamp
attachment. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 25 watt electric light bulb,
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc. Lamp
attachment shall be Model No. 25-858 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
C.
Motor for scroll saw shall be at least 1/3 horsepower
with GD enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on
three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
Provide a duplex convenience outlet on scroll saw so
that lamp attachment may be plugged in.
D.
Provide in a convenient location on scroll saw, a
magnetic starter completely wired to motor with
approved materials. The duplex convenience outlet for
lamp attachment shall be wired to the motor circuit so
that the light will automatically go on when motor is
started.
E.
Scroll saw manufacturer's stand shall be modified to
provide the scroll saw table height specified on the
drawings.
Modifications
will
not
diminish
the
structural integrity of the stand. All welds and cut
surfaces shall be ground smooth, all edges shall be
chamfered. Paint exposed steel with enamel to match
manufacturer's original finish. Submit shop drawings.
F.
Furnish the following
quantities indicated:
scroll
saw
blades
in
the
1.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .070", 32teeth.
2.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .010" x .070", 14teeth.
3.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .010" x .045", 18teeth.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 66
05/14/04
G.
12.42
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .055", 15teeth.
5.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .110", 7teeth.
6.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .110", 15teeth.
7.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .016" x .054", 30teeth.
Scroll saw shall be Model No. 40-417 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
SCROLL SAW - VARIABLE SPEED
A.
Scroll saw shall be a variable speed, motor driven saw
with a 24 inch throat capacity and capable of cutting
stock at least 1-3/4" thick. Table shall be of cast
iron, smoothly finished, not less than 14" square,
tilt right and left and equipped with indicator.
Height of table above floor shall be as specified on
the drawings; scroll saw to be mounted on stand.
Scroll saw shall be complete, adjusted, and be ready
to operate, and shall be furnished with steel scroll
saw stand, adjustable spring blade tension, adjustable
blade guides, roller supports, spring steel hold down,
blower, flexible metal air hose, motor, belt guard,
and necessary chucks. Chuck shall be universal and
adjustable to take all types of blades and sabers up
to 1/4" wide and files with shanks up to 1/4"
diameter; ball bearing or bronze bearing driving
mechanism, splash lubricated.
B.
Provide in place on scroll saw one (1) complete lamp
attachment. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 25 watt electric light bulb,
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc. Lamp
attachment shall be Model No. 25-858 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania;
Model
6448005
of
Powermatic,
McMinnville, TN.
C.
Motor for scroll saw shall be at least 1/3 horsepower
with GD or TEFC enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., designed to
operate on three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid
Connection). Provide a duplex convenience outlet on
scroll saw so that lamp attachment may be plugged in.
D.
Provide in a convenient location on scroll saw, a
magnetic starter completely wired to motor with
approved materials. The duplex convenience outlet for
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 67
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
lamp attachment shall be wired to the motor circuit so
that the light will automatically go on when motor is
started.
E.
Scroll saw manufacturer's stand shall be modified to
provide the scroll saw table height specified on the
drawings.
Modifications
will
not
diminish
the
structural integrity of the stand. All welds and cut
surfaces shall be ground smooth, all edges shall be
chamfered. Paint exposed steel with enamel to match
manufacturer's original finish. Submit shop drawings.
F.
Furnish the following
quantities indicated:
G.
12.43
saw
blades
in
the
1.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .070", 32teeth.
2.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .010" x .070", 14teeth.
3.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .010" x .045", 18teeth.
4.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .055", 15teeth.
5.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .110", 7teeth.
6.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .020" x .110", 15teeth.
7.
30 Blades, 5" long, blank ends, .016" x .054", 30teeth.
Scroll saw shall be Model No. 40-407 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania; Model 1950070 with No. 64700208 motor
and No. 2759014 stand all of Powermatic, McMinnville,
TN.
JOINTER
A.
Jointer shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate and furnished with built-in dust chute,
knives, front and rear knife guards, rabbeting edge,
motor pulleys, V-belts and fence. Jointer shall
include the following features:
1.
NYSCA
scroll
Jointer shall be a six-inch self-contained unit
and shall be mounted on a totally enclosed steel
cabinet with built-in chip/dust chute. Maximum
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 68
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
width of boards the machine will surface shall be
6", maximum depth of rabbet cut 1/2."
Tables shall be heavy cast iron with machined and
Ground surface mounted on dove-tail ways and
adjustable
gibs
or
spring
counterbalanced
parallelogram support system. Each table to be
individually raised or lowered by means of hand
levers. Combined length of tables shall be 48"
minimum. Front table to lower for rabbeting up to
1/2" deep.
3.
Cutter head shall be three knife safety type and
mounted in dust sealed ball bearings. Cutter head
shall operate at a speed of 5000 R.P.M. Each
cutter head shall be furnished with a set of three
(3) high speed tool steel knives.
4.
Fence shall have ground surface, shall be at least
4" high and 34" long, with locking levers and
movable across full width of tables for rabbeting,
and tilt right and left 45o. Table and fence
furnished with graduated depth of cut and tilt
scales respectively.
B.
Motor for jointer shall be at least 3/4 horsepower with
TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three phase,
208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Provide in convenient location on jointer a magnetic
starter completely wired with approved materials to
motor.
D.
Jointer shall be furnished with the following extra
equipment:
E.
12.44
1.
One (1) cutter head.
2.
One (1) set of three (3) high speed steel knives.
3.
One (1) magnetic type knife setting jig.
4.
One (1) dust collector connector.
Six-inch jointer shall be Model No. 37-150 DJ-15 with
No. 52-854 stand and motor all of Delta International
Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
BELT SANDER
A.
NYSCA
2.
Sander shall be a six inches abrasive belt finishing
machine. Machine shall be ball bearing, motor driven
and mounted on a totally enclosed steel cabinet and
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 69
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
shall be capable of being operated both vertically and
horizontally. All moving parts shall be enclosed.
Tilting table mounted on heavy trunnion and so arranged
that table can lock in any
position up to 45o from
o
belt and 20 toward belt by means of locking handle and
equipped with tilting scale.
Table approximately 71/2" x 15", with 3/8" by 3/4" miter gage groove.
Belt size six inches wide x 48 inches long and belt
capacity above table approximately 10" high x 6" wide.
Drum hood shall be provided with adjustable deflector
and dust suction spout.
Each machine shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate, and furnished with cast iron stand and sub
base, belt guard, tilting table, necessary pulleys,
motor, V-belts, and cloth backed, 6" x 48" long garnet
belt, 80 grit fine.
B.
Belt Sander shall be driven by a 3/4 H.P. Motor
designed to operate on three phase, 208 Volts, 60
cycle A.C.
C.
Provide on new belt sander a dust collector unit
complete with specially treated dust bag. Unit shall
be Tornado Model 83 B as made by the Brewer Electric
Manufacturing Co. Furnish six (6) extra dust bags with
each dust collector.
D.
Dust collector shall be driven by
a 3/4 horsepower
motor designed to operate on three phase, 208 Volts,
60 cycle A.C.
E.
Provide in convenient location on belt sander a
magnetic starter for each of the above motors and one
separate
push-button
station
(momentary
contact
switch, normal position open) wired to both magnetic
starters so that both units will operate.
F.
Belt sanders shall be Delta International Machinery
Corporation, Abrasive Belt Finishing Machine, Model
No. 31-515; or Model 648, Engleberg Huller Co. Inc.
G.
Each belt sander shall be furnished with the following
extra equipment:
One (1) Auto-set Miter Gauge.
One (1) Adjustable Backstop, complete with Bracket.
One (1) Wood Fence, approximately 3-1/4" high x 17-1/2"
long, complete with Brackets.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 70
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Ten (10) 6" Cloth Backed Garnet Belts, for wood, 40
grit coarse, to fit belt sander.
Ten (10) 6" Cloth Backed Garnet Belts, for wood, 80
grit fine, to fit belt sander.
12.45A
COMBINATION BELT AND DISC SANDER
A.
Sander shall be a belt and disc abrasive finish machine
of cast iron construction and mounted on a rugged
reinforced steel cabinet. Sanding surfaces only, are
to be exposed, all other moving parts, including belt
assembly, to be completely enclosed. Belt assembly
shall be adjustable for operation at any angle from
horizontal to vertical. Outer belt guard to be
removable for contour or edge sanding. Drums shall be
mounted in sealed ball bearings. Idler drum, spring
loaded so as to maintain tension on belt. Disc shall
be dynamically balanced to insure vibration-free
performance. Belt and disc shall each be equipped with
tilting type table, slotted for miter gage attachment
and mounted on heavy duty trunnion, shall tilt and
lock at any angle to 45o out and 15o in.
1.
2.
B.
NYSCA
Combination belt and disc sander shall conform to
the following characteristics and specifications:
a.
Sanding Disc:
12"
b.
Sanding Belt:
6" x 48"
c.
Belt Support
Table Size:
6-1/2" x 14-1/2" minimum.
d.
Disc Tilt Table
Size:
7" x 14-3/4" minimum.
e.
Belt Tilt Table
Size:
7" x 16-1/4" minimum.
f.
Disc speed:
2100 RPM minimum.
g.
Belt Speed:
2850 SF/M minimum.
h.
Belt drums:
4-1/2" dia. minimum.
Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate and
furnished with all necessary pulleys, V-belts,
garnet belt and garnet disc., 80 grit fine.
Motor for Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be at
least 1-1/2 horsepower with TEFC enclosure, 1725
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 71
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
R.P.M., designed to operate on three phase, 208 volts,
60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection). If Dust Collector is
designed for single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C.,
provide a duplex convenience outlet on Combination
Belt And Disc Sander so that Dust Collector may be
plugged in.
C.
Provide in a convenient location on sander, a magnetic
starter and a separate push button station wired to
motor with approved materials. Dust Collector shall be
wired to the sander motor circuit so that the Dust
Collector will automatically go on when sander motor
is started. Remove existing toggle switch and blank
off opening with steel plate. Plate shall be painted
with enamel to match sander.
D.
Provide with sander a dust collection system, as
furnished by the manufacturer of Combination Belt And
Disc Sander. Dust Collector shall generate at least
300 CFM and have a minimum of 20 sq. ft. of filter
area. Furnish five (5) replacement filters.
E.
Furnish with sander the following extra accessories:
F.
12.45B
One (1) Miter gage.
2.
One (1) Fence assembly.
3.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 50 grit, coarse.
4.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 80 grit, medium.
5.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 100 grit, fine.
6.
Six (6) Garnet sanding disc for wood, 40 grit,
coarse.
7.
Six (6) Garnet sanding disc for wood, 80 grit,
medium.
8.
Six (6) Garnet sanding disc for wood, 100 grit,
fine.
9.
One (1) pint disc cement.
Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be Model No.
1300130 with Model No. 6471322 motor and Model No.
2093002 stand with dust collector all of Powermatic,
McMinnville, TN.
COMBINATION BELT AND DISC SANDER - 1"
A.
NYSCA
1.
Sander shall be a bench type belt and disc abrasive
finish machine of cast iron construction and mounted
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 72
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
on a rugged steel base. Sanding surfaces only, are to
be exposed, all other moving parts, including belt
assembly, to be completely enclosed. Side belt cover
to be removable for contour or edge sanding. Drums
shall be mounted in sealed ball bearings. Unit shall
have automatic belt tensioning with belt tracking
control. Disc shall be dynamically balanced to insure
vibration-free performance. Belt and disc shall each
be equipped with tilting type table, slotted for miter
gage attachment and mounted on heavy duty trunnion,
shall tilt and lock at any angle to 45o out. Disc
tilting type table shall also tilt and lock at any
angle to 45o in.
1.
2.
NYSCA
Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall conform to
the following characteristics and specifications:
a.
Sanding Disc:
8"
b.
Sanding Belt:
1" x 42"
c.
Dust Collection
Outlets:
and belt.
1-1/2" dia. each for disc
d.
Disc Tilt Table
Size:
4" x 10" minimum.
e.
Belt Tilt Table
Size:
6" x 7" minimum.
f.
Disc speed:
1725 RPM minimum.
g.
Belt Speed:
3000 SF/M minimum.
Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate and
furnished with all necessary pulleys, V-belts,
garnet belt and garnet disc., 80 grit fine.
B.
Motor for Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be at
least 1/3 horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate
on single phase, 115 Volts, 60 Hz A.C.
C.
Furnish with sander the following extra accessories:
1.
One (1) Miter gage.
2.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 50 grit, coarse.
3.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 80 grit, medium.
4.
Six (6) Garnet belts for wood, 120 grit, fine.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 73
05/14/04
F.
12.46
DESIGN NO. _____
5.
Six (6) Garnet sanding discs for wood, 50 grit,
coarse.
6.
Six (6) Garnet sanding discs for wood, 80 grit,
medium.
7.
Six (6) Garnet sanding discs for wood, 120 grit,
fine.
8.
One (1) pint disc cement.
Combination Belt And Disc Sander shall be Model No. 31340 of Delta International Machinery Corporation,
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
WET-DRY VACUUM CLEANER
A.
B.
Vacuum cleaner shall be UL listed, self-contained and
capable of picking up dust, wood and metal chips,
water, and shall have a shut-off to prevent motor
flooding. Unit shall be equipped with heavy duty vac
cart. The capacity and features of the vacuum cleaner
shall be as follows:
1.
Drum:
20 gallon size steel with epoxy phenolic
coating on interior surfaces and baked on enamel
finish on exterior surfaces.
2.
Capacity:
gallons
3.
Motor:
3 HP (peak), two-stage,
cooling, 109 CFM constant level.
4.
Bearings:
5.
Fans:
6.
Switch:
7.
Bumpers:
Wet - 18-1/4 gallons, Dry - 17-1/4
forced
air
Sealed, self lubricating ball bearings.
Balanced Sirocco type.
Push-push type.
Non marking rubber.
Accessories
Vacuum cleaner shall be complete, adjusted and ready
for use and equipped with the following accessories:
NYSCA
1.
One (1) 12 ft. x 1-1/2 inch rubber hose.
2.
Two (2) interlocking extension wands finished with
copper, nickel and chrome.
3.
One (1) crevice tool.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 74
05/14/04
4.
One (1) round duster brush.
5.
One (1) 14 inch floor brush.
6.
One (1) 14 inch squeegee brush.
7.
One (1) water shut-off assembly.
8.
Twenty-four (24) disposable filters.
9.
Four (4) reusable bags.
C.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 11 amps. Vacuum cleaner shall be
fitted with 18 feet long, 3 wire cord set with
grounded plug to match the receptacle. Unit shall be
approved for Class II, Division 1, Group G locations
as per Article 502 of NFPA 70.
D.
Wet-Dry Vacuum Cleaner shall be Shop Vac Model 970-03:
Stock No. 178770 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett;
Stock No. 42-2592 as supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
12.47A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
BAND SAW - 20" WOODCUTTING
A.
Band Saw shall be a 20", ball bearing, motor driven, Vbelt drive, wood cutting band saw, mounted on a
totally enclosed steel or cast iron base. Capacity of
band saw shall be at least 13-3/8" between upper blade
guide and table. Speed of blade 2000 F.P.M. for nonferrous metals and 4500 F.P.M. for wood, blade length
150". Band saw shall have a cast iron table with
ground true surface approximately 24" x 24", tiltable
45o to the right and 10o to the left with a positive
stop at level position; wheels 20" in diameter, both
wheels completely guarded, and equipped with foot or
hand operated brake. Unit shall be complete, adjusted
and ready to operate and furnished with wheel guards,
blade guards, V-belt guard, independently adjusted
sets of upper and lower blade guides, and ball type
wheel
bearings,
blade
tension
adjustment,
motor
pulleys, V-belts, chip/dust chute connection, 1/4"
band saw-blade, stand, etc.
B.
Provide in place on band saw one (1) complete lamp
attachment. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 40 watt electric light bulb,
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc. Lamp
attachment shall be Model No. 25-857 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
C.
Provide in place on band saw a complete belt driven
chip blower. Chip blower shall be complete with pump,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 75
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
pulley, O-belt, mounting brackets, flexible metal air
hose, etc. Chip blower shall be Model No. 28-720 of
Delta International Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
D.
Motor for band saw shall be at least 2 horsepower with
TEFC enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on
three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
E.
Provide in a convenient location on band saw, a
magnetic
starter
with
thermal
overload
and
undervoltage protection completely wired to motor with
approved materials. Lamp attachment shall be wired to
the motor circuit so that lamp will automatically go
on when motor is started.
F.
Furnish a self contained portable 1/2" capacity blade
welder equipped with built-in grinder, case and
carrying handle, designed for 115 Volt single phase
operation. Blade welder shall be Model No. 1990010 of
Powermatic, McMinnville, TN.
G.
The following extra equipment is to be supplied with
the band saw:
1.
One (1) auto miter gage with 60o swing both right
and left.
2.
One (1) rip fence complete with guide bars.
3.
One (1) dust collector connector.
4.
Ten (10) of each of the following new blades to
fit machine:
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
blade, 5 teeth/inch
blade, 5 teeth/inch
blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
blade, 10 teeth/inch for metal cutting
blade, 18 teeth/inch for metal cutting
Above standard blades shall be of the required
length to fit the band saw supplied.
H.
NYSCA
Band Saw shall be Model No. 28-655 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 76
05/14/04
12.47B
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
BAND SAW - 20" METAL CUTTING
A.
Band Saw shall be a 20", variable speed, ball bearing,
motor driven, V-belt drive, metal cutting band saw,
mounted on a totally enclosed steel or cast iron base.
Capacity of band saw shall be at least 13-3/8" between
upper blade guide and table.
Speed of blade 50 to
4500 F.P.M., blade length 150". Band saw shall have a
cast iron table with ground true surface approximately
24" x 24", tiltable 45o to the right and 10o to the
left with a positive stop at level position; wheels
20" in diameter, both wheels completely guarded, and
equipped with foot or hand operated brake. Unit shall
be complete, adjusted and ready to operate and
furnished with wheel guards, blade guards, V-belt
guard, independently adjusted sets of upper and lower
blade guides, and ball type wheel bearings, blade
tension adjustment, motor pulleys, V-belts, chip/dust
chute connection, 1/4" band saw-blade, stand, etc.
B.
Provide in place on band saw one (1) complete lamp
attachment. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 40 watt electric light bulb,
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc. Lamp
attachment shall be Model No. 25-857 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
C.
Provide in place on band saw a complete belt driven
chip blower. Chip blower shall be complete with pump,
pulley, O-belt, mounting brackets, flexible metal air
hose, etc. Chip blower shall be Model No. 28-720 of
Delta International Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
D.
Motor for band saw shall be at least 2 horsepower with
TEFC enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate on
three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
E.
Provide in a convenient location on band saw, a
magnetic
starter
with
thermal
overload
and
undervoltage protection completely wired to motor with
approved materials. Lamp attachment shall be wired to
the motor circuit so that lamp will automatically go
on when motor is started.
F.
Furnish a self contained portable 1/2" capacity blade
welder equipped with built-in grinder, case and
carrying handle, designed for 115 Volt single phase
operation. Blade welder shall be Model No. 1990010 of
Powermatic, McMinnville, TN.
G.
The following extra equipment is to be supplied with
the band saw:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 77
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
One (1) auto miter gage with 60o swing both right
and left.
2.
One (1) rip fence complete with guide bars.
3.
One (1) dust collector connector.
4.
Ten (10) of each of the following new blades to
fit machine:
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
blade, 5 teeth/inch
blade, 5 teeth/inch
blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
blade, 10 teeth/inch for metal cutting
blade, 18 teeth/inch for metal cutting
Above standard blades shall be of the required
length to fit the band saw supplied.
H.
12.48
NYSCA
Band Saw shall be Model No. 28-664 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
BAND SAW - 14" WOODCUTTING
A.
Band Saw shall be a 14", ball bearing, motor driven, Vbelt drive, wood cutting band saw, mounted on a
totally enclosed steel or cast iron base. Capacity of
band saw shall be at least 6-1/4" between upper blade
guard and table and at least 13-3/4" between saw blade
and column. Speed of blade shall be not less than 3000
F.P.M.; length of saw blade approximately 93"; utilize
blades up to 3/4" wide. Band saw shall have a cast
iron table with ground true surface approximately 14"
x 14", tiltable 45o to the right and 10o to the left
with a positive stop at level position, locking device
for locking the table in any position and tilt index
scale; wheels 14" in diameter, both wheels completely
guarded. Table shall have a miter gauge groove and
take out slot for removing blades. Unit shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate and furnished
with wheel guards, blade guards, V-belt guard,
independently adjusted sets of upper and lower blade
guides, and ball type wheel bearings, blade tension
adjustment, motor pulleys, V-belts, chip/dust chute
connection, 1/4" band saw-blade, stand, etc.
B.
Provide in place on band saw one (1) complete lamp
attachment. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 40 watt electric light bulb,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 78
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc. Lamp
attachment shall be Model No. 25-858 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
C.
Motor for band saw shall be at least 3/4 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., designed to operate
on three phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid
Connection).
D.
Provide in a convenient location on band saw, a
magnetic
starter
with
thermal
overload
and
undervoltage protection completely wired to motor with
approved materials. Lamp attachment shall be wired to
the motor circuit so that lamp will automatically go
on when motor is started.
E.
Furnish a self contained portable 1/2" capacity blade
welder equipped with built-in grinder, case and
carrying handle, designed for 115 Volt single phase
operation. Blade welder shall be Model No. 1990010 of
Powermatic, McMinnville, TN.
F.
The following extra equipment is to be supplied with
the band saw:
1.
One (1) auto miter gage with 60o swing both right
and left.
2.
One (1) rip fence complete with guide bars.
3.
One (1) dust collector connector.
4.
Ten (10) of each of the following new blades to
fit machine:
1/8" blade, 8 teeth/inch
3/16" blade, 6 teeth/inch
1/4" blade, 6 teeth/inch
3/8" blade, 6 teeth/inch
1/2" blade, 6 teeth/inch
1/4" Skip tooth Blade, 6 teeth/inch
3/8" Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
1/2" Skip tooth Blade, 4 teeth/inch
Above standard blades shall be of the required
length to fit the band saw supplied.
G.
NYSCA
Band Saw shall be Model No. 28-203 with Model No, 52973 Enclosed Steel Stand all of Delta International
Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Model
No. 141 with Model No. 6470712 motor
all of
Powermatic, Mcminnville, TN.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 79
05/14/04
12.49
DESIGN NO. _____
CIRCULAR SAW - 10"
A.
Circular saw shall be a ten (10) inch, tilting arbor
saw. Arbor shall tilt 45o equipped with stops for
accurate setting at 45o and 90o.
Saw shall be
furnished with table extension wings.
1.
2.
B.
NYSCA
Circular Saw shall conform to the
characteristics and specifications:
following
a.
Diameter of Arbor:
5/8"
b.
Diameter of Blade:
10"
c.
Maximum Depth
of Cut:
3-1/8" minimum.
d.
Maximum Rip to
Right of Blade:
25" minimum.
e.
Maximum Rip to
Left of Blade:
15-1/2" minimum.
f.
Maximum Thickness
of Cut at 45o:
2-1/8" minimum.
g.
Table in Front of
Saw Blade at Maximum
Cut:
12-1/4" minimum.
h.
Maximum Width
of Dado:
13/16" minimum.
i.
Table Size:
20" x 27" minimum.
j.
Table Size with
Extension Wings:
36" x 27" minimum.
k.
T-Slot Miter
Gage Groove:
3/8" x 3/4"
l.
Blade Speed:
4000 RPM
Saw shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate and furnished with motor, belts, pulleys,
graduated miter cut off gage, double face double
locked ripping fence, one combination type 10"
hollow
ground
saw
blade,
wrenches,
totally
enclosed steel or cast iron base, and all regular
equipment.
Motor for Circular Saw shall be at least 2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, 3450 R.P.M., designed to operate
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 80
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
on three phase,
Connection).
NYSCA
208
volts,
60
Hz
A.C.
(Solid
C.
Provide in a convenient location on saw a magnetic
starter wired to motor with approved materials.
D.
Furnish with the saw the following extra accessories as
furnished by the manufacturer of the circular saw:
1.
One (1) 10", 72 tooth carbide tipped blade (trim
cut with grain).
2.
One (1) 10", 80 tooth carbide tipped blade (trim
cut across grain).
3.
One (1) 10",
(combination).
4.
One (1) 6" carbide tipped stackable dado head set,
1/8' to 13/16".
5.
One (1) dado head insert.
6.
One (1) tenoning attachment.
7.
One (1) 10", 50 tooth steel combination blade.
8.
One (1) dust collector connector and 5" dia. x 90"
long hose with hose clamps.
50
tooth
carbide
tipped
blade
E.
Provide a blade safety guard to fit the saw supplied.
Safety guard shall comply with OSHA Regulations,
Sections 1910-213-C and 1910-213-D. Saw Guard shall be
Model No. 34-976 "Uniguard Saw Guard" of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
F.
Furnish with the saw, two (2) heavy duty roller stands.
Each stand shall be fabricated with heavy wall steel
tubing, complete with five (5) 13/8" diameter, 18" long
steel rollers. Rollers shall be ball bearing. Stand
design shall permit height adjustment with one hand
and with full load on stand. Each stand shall be
adjustable from 27" to 45" tall. Load capacity shall
be at least 550 lbs. for each stand. Roller stand
shall be Stock No. 804-816 as supplied by Woodworker's
Supply, Casper, Wyoming.
G.
Circular Saw
International
Pennsylvania.
shall be Model No. 34-765 of Delta
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 81
05/14/04
12.50
DESIGN NO. _____
CIRCULAR SAW - 10", WITH DOLLY
A.
Circular saw shall be a ten (10) inch, tilting arbor
saw. Arbor shall tilt 45o equipped with stops for
accurate setting at 45o and 90o.
Saw shall be
furnished with table extension wings.
1.
2.
B.
NYSCA
Circular Saw shall conform to the
characteristics and specifications:
following
a.
Diameter of Arbor:
5/8"
b.
Diameter of Blade:
10"
c.
Maximum Depth
of Cut:
3-1/8" minimum.
d.
Maximum Rip to
Right of Blade:
25" minimum.
e.
Maximum Rip to
Left of Blade:
15-1/2" minimum.
f.
Maximum Thickness
of Cut at 45o:
2-1/8" minimum.
g.
Table in Front of
Saw Blade at Maximum
Cut:
12-1/4" minimum.
h.
Maximum Width
of Dado:
13/16" minimum.
i.
Table Size:
20" x 27" minimum.
j.
Table Size with
Extension Wings:
36" x 27" minimum.
k.
T-Slot Miter
Gage Groove:
3/8" x 3/4"
l.
Blade Speed:
4000 RPM
Saw shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate and furnished with motor, belts, pulleys,
graduated miter cut off gage, double face double
locked ripping fence, one combination type 10"
hollow
ground
saw
blade,
wrenches,
totally
enclosed steel or cast iron base, and all regular
equipment.
Motor for Circular Saw shall be at least 2 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, 3450 R.P.M., designed to operate
on three phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. Saw shall be
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 82
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
provided with 20 ft. heavy duty, four conductor (one
grounding) cord and twist-lock plug to match the
receptacle.
4
NYSCA
C.
Provide in a convenient location on saw a magnetic
starter wired to motor with approved materials.
D.
Furnish with the saw the following extra accessories as
furnished by the manufacturer of the circular saw:
1.
One (1) 10", 72 tooth carbide tipped blade (trim
cut with grain).
2.
One (1) 10", 80 tooth carbide tipped blade (trim
cut across grain).
3.
One (1) 10",
(combination).
4.
One (1) 6" carbide tipped stackable dado head set,
1/8' to 13/16".
5.
One (1) dado head insert.
6.
One (1) tenoning attachment.
7.
One (1) 10", 50 tooth steel combination blade.
8.
One (1) dust collector connector and 5" Dia. x 90"
long hose with hose clamps.
50
tooth
carbide
tipped
blade
E.
Provide a blade safety guard to fit the saw supplied.
Safety guard shall comply with OSHA Regulations,
Sections 1910-213-C and 1910-213-D. Saw Guard shall be
Model No. 34-976 "Uniguard Saw Guard" of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
F.
Provide on cabinet base a four wheel dolly
with
locking device. Locking device design shall allow
machine to be placed in a fixed stationary position
for safe saw operation. Dolly shall be constructed as
shown on Drawings.
G.
Furnish with the saw, two (2) heavy duty roller stands.
Each stand shall be fabricated with heavy wall steel
tubing, complete with five (5) 13/8" diameter, 18" long
steel rollers. Rollers shall be ball bearing. Stand
design shall permit height adjustment with one hand
and with full load on stand. Each stand shall be
adjustable from 27" to 45" tall. Load capacity shall
be at least 550 lbs. for each stand. Roller stand
shall be Stock No. 804-816 as supplied by Woodworker's
Supply, Casper, Wyoming.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 83
05/14/04
H.
12.51
DESIGN NO. _____
Circular Saw
International
Pennsylvania.
shall be Model No. 34-765 of Delta
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
RADIAL SAW
A.
Radial saw shall be table mounted, 12" radial saw.
Using a 12" diameter saw blade, the machine shall have
a cut-off capacity of not less than 16" on a 1" stock,
a ripping capacity of not less than 25" and a maximum
depth of cut of not less than 3".
Saw spindle arbor
shall be 5/8" in diameter.
The table shall be constructed of pressed steel frame
with an approximately 25" x 35" wood top and back
guide.
Arm shall rotate 360o horizontally with
provisions for locking arm in any position.
A rip
scale shall show location of ripping position.
Carriage rollers shall ride on machined tracks with rip
lock to hold carriage at any position.
Yoke shall
swivel 360o horizontally. Motor shall turn vertically
within yoke for bevel cuts with means of locking motor
in any angle, and a degree scale showing angle of bevel
cut.
An adjustable type safety guard, equipped with
anti-kickback device for use in ripping and an
adjustable dust spout shall also be provided.
The machine shall be complete adjusted and ready for
use and furnished with steel table frame, sliding table
extensions
and
wood
top,
motor,
10"
diameter
combination saw blade, and spindle arbor guard (to
cover entire saw spindle).
B.
Motor for radial saw shall be totally enclosed, fan
cooled, 2 horsepower, 3,425 full load R.P.M., designed
to operate on three phase, 208 Volts, 60 cycle A.C.
C.
Provide in convenient location on machine an approved
magnetic starter completely wired to motor with
approved materials (See Section 8 of the Standard).
D.
Radial saws shall be "De Walt" of the Black and Decker
Co., Model T-1533.
E.
Furnish two (2) additional combination
carbide tip, No. T2510 "De Walt".
12.52
blades,
WOOD TURNING LATHE
A.
NYSCA
saw
Lathe shall be four-speed, ball bearing, motor head
stock lathe. Length of bed not less than 55" and not
more than 60", swing over bed 12" and not less than
31" between centers.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 84
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Bed shall be one piece cast iron, cross-braced for
rigidity with planed surface for aligning head and
tailstocks. Bed shall be mounted on floor legs, with
ribs cast in legs for supporting a shelf under bed.
C.
Tailstock shall be of open face design, self-ejecting
center type and secured to bed by positive lever
clamp. Tailstock spindle to be bored for No. 2 Morse
taper.
D.
Motor Head stock shall be the In-built unit type with
the four (4) speed motor (to provide spindle speeds of
600-1200-1800-3600 R.P.M.), control mechanism and
brake all enclosed in the motor headstock housing.
Operation
of the speed control shall be by means of
lever or knob located at front of housing with
indicator showing the four speeds and "OFF" positions.
Switch shall be so arranged that the motor will start
only when the speed control lever is at the lowest
speed (600 R.P.M.) and then only by use of the "START"
pushbutton.
Motor shall be stopped by moving speed
control lever from any speed position to "OFF"
position, or be stopped from any speed by operating
the lever brake which shall be inter-locked with the
cutoff switch. Magnetic Starter with overload and low
voltage protection shall be self contained and located
in motor housing.
"ON" pushbutton station shall be
located at front of motor housing and pushbutton shall
be so protected that it cannot be pushed by
accidentally leaning against it. Head stock shall be
equipped with a spindle lock for securing spindle
while changing face plates.
E.
Head stock spindle shall be hollow double-end type and
threaded at both ends for chucks and face plates and
bored for No. 2 Morse taper at front end.
F.
Each lathe shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate and shall be furnished with the following
regular equipment:
One (1) 8" combination hand wheel and rear end face
plate.
One (1) 6" front face plate.
One (1) 3/4" spur center.
One (1) 3/4" cup center.
One (1) 2-1/4" or 3" screw chuck.
One (1) 6" hand tool rest.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 85
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) 12" hand tool rest.
One (1) Center knockout rod.
One (1) Blueprint holder.
One (1) set of wrenches.
One (1) Tool shelf.
One (1) 6" Angle tool rest.
G.
Motor for lathe shall be fully enclosed, ball bearing,
at least 1/2 horsepower, four speed type (600-12001800-36 R.P.M.) designed to operate on three phase,
208 Volts, 60 cycle A.C.
H.
Wood turning lathes shall be J.G. Blount Co., four
speed headstock lathe No. 4SIC; or Oliver Machinery
Co., four speed head stock lathe No. 51D.
I.
Each lathe shall also be furnished with the following
extra equipment:
Two (2) 3/4" spur centers.
Two (2) 3/4" cup centers.
Four (4) 6" face plates
Four (4) 8" face plates.
One (1) Complete set of wood turning tools. Set
shall consist of the following one (1) one inch
skew chisel: one (1) 1/2" skew chisel: one (1)
2" gouge; one (1) 1" gouge; one (1)1/4" gouge; one
(1) 1/8" parting tool; one (1) 1/2" spear point;
one (1) 1/2" round nose. One (1) floor stand for
outboard face turning complete with off set rest
holder and hand tool rest.
Wood turning tools shall be of high grade alloy
steel and each tool fitted with a hard wood
handle.
Overall length of tool and handle
approximately 15". Wood turning tool set shall be
Delta International Machinery Corporation, No.
130; Disston D15; Buck Bros..
J.
NYSCA
Also, furnish, deliver and install (as directed) one
(1) Wood Turning Duplicator, to fit lathe supplied,
complete, adjusted and ready for use as follows:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 86
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Wood turning duplicator attachment shall be Toolmark
Model 3010 with gap bed adapter and 42" lathe shield.
The turning capacity shall be 12" diameter x 42" long.
Slide rails shall be chrome plated, steel tubing, 60"
long.
Cross slide shall also be of chrome plated,
steel tubing. All other parts shall be: tubular steel
and/or aluminum alloy castings; painted in silver
hammertone and tested withstand the strain of a 1-1/2
H.P. motor. The following regular equipment shall be
shipped with this item:
One (1) cutting tool 3/8" x
3/8" x 3" (High Speed Steel); One (1) piece of High
Speed Steel ground for general turning; brochure
assembly instructions; pattern design; patten making
and full operating instructions.
One (1) Extra Cross Bar Assembly shall be Gizco Model
No. 1A consisting of: extra adapter No. 3, extra bolt
No. 2, extra bolt and nut, and part No. 130.
Three (3) High Speed Steel tool banks, Gizco Model No.
5-20.
Two (2) High Speed Steel cutting tools, Gizco Model No.
5-21.
Two (2) High Speed Steel cutting tools, Gizco Model No.
5-22.
One (1) High Speed Steel, special boring tool, Gizco
Model No. 5-23.
One (1) High Speed Steel, special boring tool (ground
on both ends), Gizco Model No. 5-24.
One (1) High speed Steel taper turning tool, Gizco
Model No 5-25.
One (1) Round Guide Finger, Gizco Model No. 24-C.
One (1) each of special guide fingers, Gizco Model
No. 24 and 24-B.
12.52A
WOOD TURNING LATHE - VARIABLE SPEED
A.
NYSCA
Lathe shall be variable speed, swing over bed 12",
swing over gap bed not less than 161/2", and not less
than 38" between centers. Bed shall be gap bed design,
one piece cast iron, cross-braced for rigidity, and
with ground surface for aligning head and tail stocks.
Bed shall be mounted on a one piece welded steel base,
with a cross shelf for tools. Tail stock shall be
self-ejecting center type and secured to bed by
positive lever clamp. Tail stock spindle to be bored
for No. 2 Morse taper. Head stock shall have a
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 87
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
variable speed of not less than 340 or more than 3200
R.P.M. Spindle shall be mounted in sealed ball
bearings, with cog belt fully guarded, and outboard
drive directly from motor without use of countershaft.
Head stock shall be equipped with a spindle lock for
securing spindle while changing face plate. Spindle
lock shall not be able to lock spindle while lathe is
running. Head stock spindle shall be a hollow doubleend type, threaded at both ends, with no smaller
diameter than 1", No. 8 threads, for chucks and face
plates. Spindle shall have a No. 2 Morse Taper at
front end.
B.
Motor for lathe shall be at least 1 horsepower with
TEFC enclosure, 1725 R.P.M., fan cooled ball bearing
type, designed to operate on three phase, 208 Volts,
60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Power switch shall be so arranged that motor will start
only when the speed control lever is at the lowest
speed (800 R.P.M. or less). Unit shall have selfcontained
magnetic
starter
with
overload
and
undervoltage protection. Speed control mechanism shall
be located in head stock housing. Operation of the
speed control shall be by means of a lever or knob
located in front of housing, with indicator showing
"ON" and "OFF" positions, and speed of lathe.
D.
Provide, unless otherwise directed on Drawings, one (1)
Wood Turning Duplicator, to fit lathe supplied,
complete, adjusted and ready for use, as follows:
Wood turning duplicator attachment, the Toolmark Model
3010 with gap bed adapter and Model 422-L 42" lathe
shield. The turning capacity shall be 6" diameter x 32"
long. Slide rails shall be chrome plated, steel tubing,
36" long. Cross slide shall also be of chrome plated,
steel tubing. All other parts shall be: tubular steel
and or aluminum alloy castings; painted in silver
hammertone and tested to withstand the strain of a 11/2 H.P. motor. The following equipment shall be
furnished with this item: Three (3) High Speed Steel
cutting blanks 3/8" x 3/8" x 3"; Three (3) High Speed
Steel cutting tools ground for general turning; Three
(3) follower stylus bits; One (1) U-Tool Woodshaver
with
three
(3)
replacement
blade
assemblies;
brochure/assembly instructions covering pattern design,
pattern making and full operating instructions.
NYSCA
1.
Two (2) High Speed
Model No. 5-21.
Steel
cutting
tools,
Gizco
2.
Two (2) High Speed
Model No. 5-22.
Steel
cutting
tools,
Gizco
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 88
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
One (1) High Speed Steel boring tool, Gizco Model
No. 5-23.
4.
One (1) High Speed Steel
Gizco Model No. 5-24.
5.
One (1) High Speed Steel taper turning tool, Gizco
Model No. 5-25.
special
boring
tool,
E.
Provide a safety shield to fit the lathe supplied.
Safety Shield shall comply with OSHA Regulations,
Sections 1910-213-0-2 and 1910-213-0-4. Shield shall
be fabricated of high impact 3/16" thick Lexan with
extruded aluminum alloy frames and support. Unit shall
feature dual, flat rectangular front panels, one (1)
approx. 12" x 12" and one (1) approx. 12" x 24" which
shall provide clear unobstructed view of the work area
with no distortion. Back shield shall be fabricated of
heavy wire grid. Unit shall have friction-drag type
hinges holding the independently adjustable front
panels in raised, lowered operating position, or any
in-between setting. Front panels shall be securely
held in the operating position with locks. Mounting
system shall permit fore and aft, vertical and angular
adjustment. Safety Shield shall be Model No. 2250123
of Powermatic, McMinnville, TN; Model No. 46-809 of
Delta International Machinery Corporation, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
F.
Furnish with the lathe one (1) complete set of wood
turning tools, consisting of the following:
1.
One (1) 1/4" Skew Chisel.
2.
One (1) 1/2" Skew Chisel
3.
One (1) 3/4" Skew Chisel.
4.
One (1) 1/2" Round Point.
5.
One (1) 1/4" Gouge.
6.
One (1) 1/2" Gouge.
7.
One (1) 3/4" Gouge.
8.
One (1) 1/2" Parting Tool.
Woodturning tools shall be of high grade alloy steel,
and each tool shall be fitted with a hardwood handle.
Overall length of tool and handle to be approximately
15". Woodturning tools shall be of the Powermatic,
McMinnville,
TN;
Delta
International
Machinery
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 89
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; Buck Bros. as
supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
G.
H.
12.53
1.
One (1) shaving hood with dust collector connector
for 5" dia. hose conforming to Chapter 8 of NFPA
664-1981.
2.
One (1) 8" combination handwheel and rear face
plate.
3.
One (1) 2-1/4" (or 3") screw chuck.
4.
One (1) 6" Hand tool rest.
5.
One (1) 12" Hand tool rest.
6.
One (1) Center knock-out rod.
7.
One (1) Blue-print holder.
8.
One (1) Set of wrenches.
9.
One (1) Tool shelf.
10.
One (1) 6" Angle tool rest.
11.
Three (3) 3/4" Spur Centers.
12.
Three (3) 3/4" Cup Centers.
13.
Five (5) 6" Face Plates.
14.
Five (5) 3" Face Plates.
Wood Turning Lathe shall be Model No. 1900330 with
Model No. 6471036 motor of Powermatic, McMinnville,
TN; Model No. 46-614 of Delta International Machinery
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
ENGINE LATHE - 10"
A.
NYSCA
Lathe shall be complete, adjusted, and ready to
operate, and shall be furnished with the following
equipment:
Engine Lathe shall be a nominal 10" swing, floor
mounted machine supported by a one or two piece heavy
welded steel cabinet. A closed pedestal is permitted
under tailstock end. The lathe shall be a precision,
back geared thread cutting machine with quick change
gears. The motor and all pertinent driving mechanisms
shall be completely enclosed within the cabinet under
the headstock.
This enclosure shall be designed so
that equipment adjustments, repairs and lubrication
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 90
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
can be readily carried out.
Speed shall be changed
easily by manual shifting of belts and/or a variable
speed control.
The spindle shall operate in ball
bearing, tapered roller bearing or adjustable and
replaceable bronze sleeve type bearings. In the latter
case the bearing shall be provided with oil grooves
and scraped for precision engagement of spindle.
Gears shall be steel, cast iron or other approved
material.
The use of zinc alloy for functional lathe parts such
as gears is not acceptable.
Both cross-feed and
compound rests shall operate in dovetail slide bearings
provided with adjustable gibs to take up wear. Gaging
graduations for both slides shall be engraved division
equivalent to 0.001" with good visibility.
The
tailstock shall provide a minimum of 0.625" sideways
adjustment and be equipped with automatic center
ejection. The tailstock shall be provided with a means
for securely clamping its spindle in any place over its
2.125" travel.
The lathe carriage shall be provided
with a disengageable threading dial.
The bed of the
lathe shall be made of semi-steel with its "V" and flat
ways flame hardened and precision ground. All bearings
shall be suitably equipped with a means of lubrication.
A metal plate shall be provided mounted on the quick
change gear box that clearly shows the control lever
positions
for
the
full
range
of
threads
and
longitudinal feeds available.
B.
The characteristics and specifications of the Engine
Lathe shall be as follows:
Quantities shown are minimum acceptable.
NYSCA
1.
Swing over bed (dia.)
10"
2.
Swing over Cross-slide (dia.)
5.5"
3.
Distance between centers
22"
4.
Hole through spindle
0.844"
5.
Collet capacity (draw bar type) (round) 0.625"
6.
Type of spindle nose
threaded
7.
Cross-slide travel
5.875"
8.
Compound slide travel
2
9.
Size of centers (Morse taper)
No. 2
10.
Range of screw threads (threads
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 91
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
per inch)
4-224
11.
Number of threads that can be cut
48
12.
Longitudinal feed range
(per spindle rev.)
0.0367"
0.0015"-
13.
Number of Longitudinal feeds
48
14.
Range of spindle speed (R.P.M.)
50-1365
15.
Number of spindle speeds
12
C.
Lathe shall be furnished complete and adjusted, ready
to operate with motor, necessary belts and pulleys,
enclosed quick change gear box, and with a full
complement of standard equipment as specified by the
manufacturer in his catalog. In lieu of the standard
chuck keys, furnish safety type self-ejecting chuck
keys as made by the Miracle Instrument Co.
D.
Provide in place on each lathe (1) chip pan made of
heavy gage steel.
E.
The motor for lathe shall be reversing type, a minimum
of 3/4 horsepower, single speed, designed to operate
on three phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz.
F.
Provide in a convenient location on the lathe a
"forward, stop and reverse" type button station and a
reversing type magnetic starter with thermal overload
and under voltage protection completely interwired and
connected to motor with approved materials.
The
reversing type magnetic starter shall be manufactured
by General Electric Co.; Allen-Bradley; Square D.
G.
Furnish the following additional equipment as supplied
or recommended by the manufacturer of lathe being
furnished:
1.
One (1) key operated 0-1/2" Jacobs tailstock chuck
with No. 2 Morse Taper.
2.
One (1) 5" (min) three jaw universal chuck fitted
to lathe.
3.
One (1) 6" (min) four jaw independent chuck fitted
to lathe.
4.
One (1) 1/4" straight tool holder.
5.
One (1) 1/4" right hand tool holder.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 92
05/14/04
H.
12.53A
6.
One (1) 1/4" left hand tool holder.
7.
One (1) straight parting tool complete with six
(6) extra cutter blades.
8.
One (1) Knurling tool with medium diamond pattern
knurl.
9.
One (1) boring tool holder with 1/2" bar.
10.
One (1) steady rest.
11.
One (1) set of safety lathe dogs consisting of one
of each of the following sizes: 3/8", 1/2", 3/4",
1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2".
12.
Telescoping taper attachment.
13.
One (1) straight thread cutting tool (60o V type).
14.
Two (2) carbide tip lathe centers (Morse No. 2
taper).
15.
One (1) taper adapter-No. 2 Morse taper center to
head stock taper (if required).
Lathe shall be the South Bend Model CL-370-ZD Boxford
Model 280.
ENGINE LATHE - 13"
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Engine Lathe shall be nominally a 13" floor type
machine mounted on either a heavy welder steel cabinet
type leg under its headstock and a broad "A" pattern
leg under its tailstock or the machine shall be fully
supported on a heavy, spot welded steel cabinet. The
lathe shall be a precision, back-geared, threadcutting machine built with quick change gears and with
its
motor
and
all
pertinent
driving
mechanism
completely enclosed in cabinet under its headstock.
The
enclosure
however,
shall
permit
equipment
adjustments, repairs and lubrication. The lathe shall
be provided with adequate and ready means for easy
drive belt shifting.
The spindle shall operate in
either tapered roller bearings or in adjustable and
replaceable bronze sleeve type bearings.
In the
latter case, the bearing shall be provided with oil
grooves and scraped for precision engagement of
spindle. The apron shall be double-walled. All gears
shall be made of steel. Both cross-feed and compound
rests shall operate in dovetail slide bearings
provided with properly fitted adjustment gibs. Gaging
graduations for both slides shall be engraved in
single 1/1000" and for good visibility. The tailstock
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 93
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
shall be made for a minimum of 15/16" sidewise
adjustment. Its spindle shall be made with means for
automatic center ejection.
The spindle housing shall
be provided with means for secure clamping of the
spindle, in any place of its 4-1/4 min. travel.
The
lathe carriage shall be provided with a disengageable
threading dial. The bed of the lathe shall be made of
semi-steel and its "V" and flat ways shall be either
hand scraped or hardened and precision ground for
proper engagement with its saddle and tailstock ways.
All bearings shall be equipped with means for oiling.
The completely assembled lathe shall weigh about 1560
lbs, net.
B.
The characteristics and specifications of the Engine
Lathe shall be the following:
Swing over bead, not less than
13-1/8"
dia.
Swing over cross-slide, not less than
7-3/4"
dia.
Distance between centers, not less than
40"
Hole through spindle, not less than
1-3/8"
dia.
Collet capacity--draw bar type-(round collet) max
1-1/16"
Spindle nose tapered keyed drive
L-00
Cross-slide travel min
8-3/4"
Compound slide travel, min
3-1/8"
Size of Centers, min
No. 3—
Morse
taper
Size of lead screw, min
1" dia. X
6- thds/
Acme
No. of threads can be cut, min
48
Feed range per 1 spindle
revolution min
Screw thread rang per 1"
NYSCA
0006" to
.0315"
min.
4-224
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 94
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
No. of feeds per 1 spindle
revolution, min
48
No. of spindle speeds, min.
8
Minimum range of spindle speeds
40-940
R.P.M.
C.
Each lathe shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate and shall be furnished with motor, necessary
belts and pulleys and enclosed quick change gear box.
Each lathe shall also be furnished with the standard
equipment furnished by the manufacturer of the lathe
as per his catalog, except that, in lieu of the
standard chuck keys, furnish safety-type self-ejecting
keys, as made by the Miracle Instrument Co..
D.
Provide in place on each lathe one (1) chip pan.
chip pan shall be made of heavy gage steel.
E.
The motor for each lathe shall be a reversing type,
min. 1-1/2 horsepower, single speed, designed to
operate on three phase, 208 Volts, 60 cycles A.C.
F.
Provide in a convenient location on the lathe a
"forward, stop and reverse" type push button station
and a reversing type magnetic starter with thermal
overload
and
under-voltage
protection
completely
interwired and connected to motor with approved
materials. The reversing type magnetic starters shall
be manufactured by General Electric Co., AllenBradley, Square-D.
G.
Engine lathe shall be South Bend Lathe Works
No. CL-145-C; or Boxford Model 330.
H.
Furnish the following additional equipment as supplied
or recommended by the manufacturer of new engine
lathe:
The
One (1) Key operated 0-1/2" Jacobs tailstock chuck.
One (1) 5" three jaw universal chuck fitted to lathe.
One (1) 6" four jaw independent chuck fitted to lathe,
Cushman No. 614 or Skinner No. 906.
One (1) Straight tool holder.
One (1) Right hand tool holder.
One (1) Left hand tool holder.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 95
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) Straight parting tool complete with six (6)
extra cutter blades.
One (1) Knurling tool with medium diamond pattern.
One (1) Thread cutting dial installed on lathe in an
approved manner.
One (1) Boring tool holder and 1/2" bar.
One (1) Steady rest.
One (1) Set of safety lathe dogs consisting of one of
each of the following: 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 11/2".
One (1) Telescoping Taper attachment.
One (1) Straight thread cutting tool.
Two (2) Lathe centers.
12.54
NYSCA
ENGINE LATHE - VARIABLE SPEED
A.
Engine Lathe shall be floor type machine built to ISO
1708/DIN 8606 standards. Lathe shall be mounted on a
heavy welded steel cabinet with integral full water
tight swarf tray, storage space and lockable doors.
Lathe shall be a precision variable speed, backgeared, thread-cutting machine built with quick change
gears. Motor and all pertinent driving mechanism shall
be completely enclosed in cabinet under its headstock.
The
cabinet
enclosure
shall
permit
access
for
equipment adjustment, repairs and lubrication.
B.
Machine Specifications: Bed shall be hardened and
ground. Headstock shall be grey iron casting with Vee
location on bed. Headstock shall have oil sump
lubrication with oil-level sight glass, ball bearing
lay shafts with sliding gears, hardened alloy-steel
gearing and spindle nose, internal feed reverse
gearing and low output R.P.M. to end drive. Feed
gearbox shall be grey iron casting, enclosed and fully
lubricated. Feed gearbox shall have hardened and
tempered alloy-steel gears with ball bearing shafts
and low periphery speeds. Apron shall be grey iron
casting, enclosed and fully lubricated. Saddle and
slides shall have Tee slot tool slide, lubrication
points, molded bedway wipers and hole-grid for
attachments on cross slide. Tailstock shall have dual
graduated
quill,
hardened
morse
taper,
ball
lubrication points, and molded bedway wiper.
Engine
Lathe shall conform to the following specifications:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 96
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Distance Between
Centers:
30" min.
2.
Swing Over Bed:
11" min.
3.
Swing Over Cross Slide:
7" min.
4.
Hole Through
Headstock Spindle:
13/8" dia. min.
5.
Spindle Nose (Camlock):
D1-3
6.
Taper In Nose:
No. 41/2 ASAB5.10
7.
Taper In Bush:
3MT
8.
Number Of
Spindle Speeds:
9
9.
Minimum Range Of Speeds: 40-2240 RPM
10.
Bed Width Over Ways:
71/2"
11.
Cross Slide Width:
51/2"
12.
Cross Slide Travel:
67/8"
13.
Tool Slide Width:
3"
14.
Tool Slide Travel:
33/4"
15.
Tailstock Quill
Diameter:
115/32"
16.
Tailstock Travel:
33/4"
17.
Tailstock Internal
Taper:
3MT
18.
Tailstock Set Over:
3/8"
19.
Leadscrew Diameter:
1" min.
20.
Leadscrew Thread:
4 TPI
21.
Number Of Feeds:
12
22.
Longitudinal Feed:
min.
0.0005-0.024"
per
rev.
23.
Cross Feed:
min.
0.0005-0.012"
per
rev.
24.
Thread Pitches:
3.5-128 TPI
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 97
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Motor for lathe shall be a reversing type, at least 11/2 horsepower, designed to operate on three phase,
208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection). Low Voltage
Lamp Attachment shall be wired to the motor circuit so
that the light will automatically go on when motor is
started.
D.
Lathe shall have strategically placed Emergency Stop
push button, and Emergency Stop/Isolator which may be
secured in off position with padlock. Headstock shall
have centralized direct reading speed selector. Feed
gearbox shall have lever feed selection for whole
range with half, plus 50%, double and 8:1 multipliers.
Apron shall have push-pull feed axis selector, cam
lever-feed engagement with adjustable feed slipping
force, graduated handwheel dial and thread dial
indicator. Saddle and slides shall have adjustable
gibs, backlash eliminator, cross and topslide locks
and diameter reading crosslide dial. Tailstock shall
have graduated handwheel dial and set over adjustment
with scale.
E.
End drive cover and access panels required for
equipment adjustment, repairs and lubrication shall be
electrically
interlocked.
Leadscrews
shall
be
protected by telescopic covers. Lathe shall have an
integral rear splash/chip guard. Unit shall have
electrically interlocked Lexan chuck guard. Feed and
thread engagement shall be electrically interlocked
and disengagement shall be omni directional. Apron
shall have feed slipping clutch. Lathe shall have
shear pin in end drive. Bed shall have tailstock
travel stop.
F.
Furnish the following additional equipment as supplied
or recommended by manufacturer of Engine Lathe:
NYSCA
1.
One (1) Padlock with two (2) keys for use with the
Emergency Stop/Isolator control.
2.
One (1)
Chuck.
3.
One (1) 5" Three Jaw Universal Chuck installed on
lathe.
4.
One (1) 6" Four Jaw Independent Chuck.
5.
One (1) 5/16" Straight Tool Holder.
6.
One (1) 5/16" Right Hand Tool Holder.
7.
One (1) 5/16" Left Hand Tool Holder.
Key
Operated
0-1/2"
Jacobs
Tailstock
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 98
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
8.
One (1) 1/4" Straight Tool Holder.
9.
One (1) 1/4" Right Hand Tool Holder.
10.
One (1) 1/4" Left Hand Tool Holder.
11.
One (1) Straight Parting Tool complete with six
(6) extra cutter blades.
12.
One (1) Knurling Tool with medium diamond pattern.
13.
One (1) Thread Cutting Dial installed on lathe in
an approved manner.
14.
One (1) Boring Tool Holder and 1/2" bar.
15.
One (1) Telescopic Taper Attachment.
16.
One (1) Steady Rest.
17.
One (1) Set of Safety Lathe Dogs consisting of one
of each of the following: 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1",
1-1/4", 1-1/2".
18.
One (1) Straight Thread Cutting Tool.
19.
One (1) Low Voltage Lamp Attachment installed on
lathe.
20.
Two (2) Lathe centers.
21.
Six (6) 5/16" Tool Bits.
22.
Six (6) 1/4" Tool Bits.
23.
One (1) Extra Lathe Chuck Guard.
24.
One (1) Lathe Travel Guard installed on lathe,
Model No. 295-0400, Stock No. 44-3268 as supplied
by Paxton/Patterson.
Lathe shall be complete, adjusted and ready to operate
and shall be furnished with motor, necessary belts and
pulleys and enclosed quick change gear box. Lathe shall
also be furnished with the standard equipment furnished
by the manufacturer of the lathe as per his catalog,
except that in lieu of the standard chuck keys, furnish
safety type self-ejecting keys, as made by the Miracle
Instrument Co.
H.
NYSCA
Engine Lathe - Variable Speed shall be Model 280 of
Boxford Ltd., Stock No. 49-2912 as supplied by
Paxton/Patterson.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 99
05/14/04
12.54A
DESIGN NO. _____
ENGINE LATHE - 10" MINIMUM (HEAVIER DUTY)
A.
Engine Lathe shall be a 10" minimum swing floor mounted
machine supported by a one or two piece heavy welded
steel cabinet.
A closed pedestal is permitted under
tailstock end.
The lathe shall be a precision, back
geared thread cutting machine with quick change gears.
The motor and all pertinent driving mechanisms shall
be completely enclosed within the cabinet under the
headstock.
This enclosure will be designed so that
equipment adjustments, repairs and lubrication can be
readily carried out. Spindle speeds shall be changed
easily by manual shifting of belts.
The spindle shall operate in ball bearing, tapered
roller bearing or adjustable and replaceable bronze
sleeve type bearings. In the latter case the bearing
shall be provided with oil grooves and scraped for
precision engagement of spindle. Gears shall be steel,
cast iron or other approved material. The use of zinc
alloy for functional lathe parts such as gears is not
acceptable.
Both cross feed and compound rest shall
operate in dovetail slide bearings provided with
adjustable gibs to take up wear.
Gaging graduations
for both slides shall be engraved division equivalent
to 0.001" with good visibility.
The tailstock will
provide a minimum of 0.687" sideways adjustment and be
equipped with automatic center ejection. The tailstock
shall be provided with a means for securely clamping
its spindle any place over its 2.125" travel.
The
lathe carriage shall be provided with a disengageable
threading dial. The bed of the lathe shall be made of
semi-steel with its "V" and flat ways flame hardened
and precision ground. All bearings shall be suitably
equipped with a means of lubrication.
A metal plate
shall be provided mounted on the quick change gear box
that clearly shows the control lever positions for the
full range of threads and longitudinal feeds available.
B.
NYSCA
The characteristics and specifications of the Engine
Lathe shall be as follows:
quantities shown are
minimum acceptable.
1.
Swing over bed (dia.)
10"
2.
Swing over cross slide (dia)
5.875"
3.
Distance between centers
22"
4.
Hole through spindle
1.375"
5.
Collet capacity (draw bar type)
(round)
1.062"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 100
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
Type of spindle nose (tapered
key drive or camlock)
D1-4"
L-00
7.
Cross-slide travel
6.25"
8.
Compound slide travel
2"
9.
Headstock center size
(Morse Taper)
No.4
10.
Tailstock center size
(Morse Taper)
No. 2
11.
Range of screw threads
Threads per inch)
4-224
12.
Number of threads that can be cut
54
13.
Longitudinal feed range
(per spindle rev.)
14.
Number of longitudinal feeds
54
15.
Range of spindle speeds (RPM)
55-1400
16.
Number of spindle speeds
12
or
.0016 to .0367
C.
Lathe shall be furnished complete and adjusted, ready
to operate with motor, necessary belts and pulleys,
enclosed quick change gear box and with a full
complement of standard equipment as specified by the
manufacturer in his catalog. In lieu of the standard
chuck keys, furnish safety type self-ejecting chuck
keys as made by the Miracle Instrument Co.
D.
Provide in place on each lathe (1) chip pan made of
heavy gage steel.
E.
The motor for each lathe shall be reversing type, a
minimum of 1 horsepower single speed, designed to
operate on three phase, 208 Volts, 60Hz.
F.
Provide in a convenient location on the lathe a
"forward, stop and reverse" type button station and a
reversing type magnetic starter with thermal overload
and under voltage protection completely interwired and
connected to motor with approved materials.
The
reversing type magnetic starter shall be manufactured
by General Electric Co.; Allen-Bradely; Square D.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 101
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
G.
Furnish the following additional equipment as supplied
or recommended by the manufacturer of the lathe being
furnished:
1.
One (1) key operated 0-1/2" Jacobs tailstock chuck
with No. 2 Morse taper.
2.
One (1) 6" (min) three jaw universal chuck fitted
to lathe.
3.
One (1) 6" (min) four jaw independent chuck fitted
to lathe.
4.
One (1) 1/4" straight tool holder.
5.
One (1) 1/4" right hand tool holder.
6.
One (1) 1/4" left hand tool holder straight.
7.
One (1) straight parting tool complete with six
(6) extra cutter blades.
8.
One (1) knurling tool with medium diamond pattern
knurl.
9.
One (1) boring tool holder with 1/4" bar.
10.
One (1) steady rest.
11.
One (1) set of safety lathe dogs consisting of one
of each of the following sizes: 3/8", 1/2", 3/4",
1", 1", 1-1/2".
12.
One (1) straight thread cutting tool (60o V type).
13.
Two (2) carbide tip lathe centers (Morse No. 2
taper).
14.
One (1) taper adapter to adapt No. 2 Morse taper
center to headstock taper (if required).
15.
The following accessories shall be provided when
indicated on Drawings:
a.
NYSCA
One (1) mica undercutting attachment complete
with 120 volt 60 Hz., single phase motor,
switch and heavy duty three conductor one
grounding) line cord with plug to match
receptacle.
Provide a 120 volt, 60 Hz.,
grounding receptacle at a convenient location
on the lathe for the undercutting attachment,
extending the necessary wiring from the lathe
circuit.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 102
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Mica
undercutting
attachment
shall
be
provided with ten (10) high speed circular
saws, two (2) each of the following 5 sizes:
.015", .020", .025", .030" and .035".
b.
H.
12.55
One (1) telescoping taper attachment.
Lathe shall be the South Bend Model CL - 187Z.
METAL WORKING SHAPER - 7"
A.
Shaper shall be a 7" precision bench shaper with V-belt
drive, reversible power cross feeds, and mounted on
cabinet base or stand.
Length of ram stroke from 0 to a maximum of not less
than 7", four (4) speeds approximately 42 to 195
strokes per minute. Table top shall be not less than
6" in length and not less than 5" in width; horizontal
travel of table 9-1/2" and vertical travel not less
than 5"; minimum distance form ram to table 1/2" and
maximum not less than 5-1/2". Vise jaws shall be 4" in
width, 1" in depth, maximum opening 4". Tool head feed
length 3".
Vise shall swivel to any angle with base graduated from
0o to 90o right and left.
Adjustable tool head shall
swivel to any angle, and graduated from 0o to 90o for
angle work.
Ways provided with gib adjustment for
taking up wear.
Rocker arm driving mechanism, with
length of stroke indicated by scale on rocker arm.
Tables shall have slots and drilled holes on top and
each side for clamping work. Belt tension release for
shifting belts, all pulleys and belts shall be enclosed
in guards.
Shaper shall be complete, adjusted and ready to operate
and furnished with motor, necessary V-belts and
pulleys, countershaft swivel vise, safety guards,
wrenches and adjustable lamp.
Shaper shall be furnished and mounted complete with
steel stand providing rigid support, stand shall
contain three drawers with key lock. Top to be a chip
pan.
Width approx. 19", depth approx. 36", height
approx. 28". Stand to be finished with a gray wrinkled
enamel.
Steel stand shall be South Bend Lathe Works
No. CS9600.
B.
The metal shaper shall be furnished with the following
extra equipment:
Two (2)
NYSCA
Drop-Head Tool Holders.
Tool holder drop
forged steel heat treated and hardened, high
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 103
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
speed steel cutter bit. Size of cutter bit
3/16" x 3/16".
Each tool holder shall be
complete with holder, cutter bit and wrench,
Armstrong Bros. Tool Company No. 100-S.
NYSCA
Two (2)
Shaper Tool Holders, Swivel head and capable
of being locked at eight (8) different
positions. Drop forged steel holder and high
speed steel cutter bit. Size of cutter 1/4"
x 1/4".
Each shaper tool holder shall be
complete with holder, cutter bit and wrench,
Armstrong Bros. Tool Company No. 39.
One (1)
Extension Shaper Tool.
Drop forged heat
treated and hardened holder, steel bar and
high speed steel cutter bit. Size of cutter
bit 3/16" x 3/16", size or bar 1/2" dia. x 71/2" long, size of shank 3/8" x 7/8".
Extension shaper tool shall be complete with
holder, bar, cutter bit and wrench, Armstrong
Bros. Tool Company No. 46.
One (1)
Rotary Index Table.
Top of table precision
ground with three (3) T-slots on face for
clamping work. Table not less than 4-1/2" in
diameter. Clamping device for locking table
in any position. Rotary Index Table shall be
complete and ready for use and furnished with
clamping bolts and nuts, etc., rotary index
table of the South Bend Lathe Works, No. CE9144.
One (1)
Index Center. Capable of taking work between
centers
up
to
5"
in
diameter
and
approximately 6" long. Heavy base with bolt
holes for clamping to shaper table, and
clamping device for locking center in any
position. Index center shall be complete and
ready for use and furnished with index
plates, clamping dog, bolts, etc., index
center of the South Bend Lathe Works, No. CE9635.
C.
Motor for metal shaper shall be 1/2 HP, designed to
operate on three-phase, 208 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
Provide in a convenient place on the Shaper a "Start
and Stop" pushbutton station and a magnetic starter
with
thermal
overload
and
with
under
voltage
protection.
Both shall be completely wired with the
motor.
D.
7" precision metal shaper shall be South Bend Lathe
Works, No. CS-100.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 104
05/14/04
12.56
DESIGN NO. _____
METALWORKING SHAPER - 12"
A.
Shaper with plain table and nominal 12" capacity shall
be a precision type, sturdy machine cast integrally
with its base or its body may be mounted on top and
securely fastened to a rigid, fabricated, box-type
pedestal. The machine shall be driven either through
back gears and a Veri-drive unit or through a series
of transmission gears.
Each machine shall be
controlled by means of a manually operated clutch
equipped with or without a break.
The ram head, a
minimum of 6-1/2" dia. shall be able to swivel a
minimum of 60o either way from its normally vertical;
position and it shall be provided with means for
securely clamping in any adjusted position.
The ram
and its head slide shall be made with "dovetail" type,
flat slide bearings. The cross rail and the vertical
knee adjustment bearings shall be either of the
"dovetail" or the rectangular slide design.
All bearings of the "dovetail" design shall be provided
with properly fitted gibs for wear take-up.
Either
type of slide bearings shall be either hand scraped or
hardened and ground for precise engagement with slides
of their respective mating parts. The drill gear shall
be equipped with taper type roller bearings completely
enclosed and sealed to make them dir and grit proof in
operation.
All feed screws shall be equipped with
indicating collars plainly engraved and reading in
thousandths of an inch. The ram shall be provided with
a pointed reading against a stationary tabulation used
to determine length of the ram stroke for any adjusted
length between zero and its full stroke. All rotating
bearings hall be provided with means for period
lubrication.
The shaper shall weigh not less than
1,600 lbs.
NYSCA
B.
The Shaper table with its top surface not less than 10"
x 12" and not less than 10" high shall be provided
with a minimum of five (5) T-slots: three (3) in its
top surface and to (2) cut vertically in its side,
serving for vertical clamping of round work; it shall
be located in between the two vertical T-slots.
A
suitable bracket shall be provided for supporting the
outer end of the table in any vertically adjusted
position.
C.
The characteristics and specifications shall be the
following:
Ram stroke length, not less than
12-3/4"
Ram length, not less than
30-1/2"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 105
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Ram bearing length, not less than
22-1/4"
No. of ram speeds, not less than
4
Ram strokes per minute (slowest)
not more than
27 (max.)
Ram strokes per minute (fastest)
not less than
130 (min.)
Ram head slides, not less than
4"
Vertical table adjustment,
not less than
7"
Cross-feed of table, distance,
not less than
12"
No. of table feeds (R.H. and L.H.),
not less than
6 each
Slowest feed per ram stroke,
not more than
006 in.
Fastest feed per ram stroke,
not less than
0175 in.
D.
The Shaper shall be equipped with at least a two(2)
horsepower motor designed to operate on three phase,
208 Volts, 60 cycle A.C. Provide in a convenient place
on the Shaper a "Start and Stop" pushbutton station
and a magnetic starter with thermal overload and with
undervoltage protection.
Both shall be completely
wired with the motor.
E.
Each Shaper shall be equipped with the following:
One (1) Swivel type vise, made to swivel a minimum of
90o clockwise or counterclockwise from its marked zero
or central position.
It shall be built with 7" long
removable jaw plates, and opening at least 6" and with
a 1-1/2" minimum depth. The index of the vise shall be
readably engraved in single degrees or less. The vise
shall be equipped with keys fitting any of the T-slots
in the Shaper table top. The vise shall be made by the
manufacturer of the Shaper.
One (1) Rotary Index Table.
Top of table precision
ground not less than 10" in diameter with three Tslots.
Clamping device for locking table in any
position.
Rotary Index Table shall be complete and
ready for use and furnished with clamping bolts and
nuts, etc., South Bend Lathe Works, No. CE 9144.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 106
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) Index Center. Capable of taking work between
centers up to 5" in diameter and approximately 6" long
with heavy base and clamping device for locking center
in any position. Index center shall be complete with
index plates, clamping dog, bolts, etc., South Bend
Lathe Works, No. CE 9635.
One (1) Drop Head Tool Holder. Tool holder drop forged
steel heat treated and hardened, high speed steel
cutter bit.
Size of cutter bit 3/16" x 3/16".
Each
tool holder shall be complete with holder cutter bit
and wrench, Armstrong Bros. Tool Company No. 100-S.
One (1) Shaper Tool Holder drop forged steel with 8
position swivel head. Size of cutter 1/4" x 3/8. Each
shaper tool holder shall be complete with holder,
cutter bit and wrench, Armstrong Bros. Tool Company No.
40.
One (1) Extension Shaper Tool.
Drop forged and heat
treated. Size of cutter bit 5/16" x 5/16", size of bar
1/2" diameter x 7-1/2" long, size of shank 3/8" x 7/8".
Extension shaper tool shall be complete with holder
bar, cutter bit and wrench, Armstrong Bros. Tool
Company No. 47.
One (1) of each wrench type of wrenches as necessary
for the complete operation of the Shaper.
F.
12.57
NYSCA
Shaper shall be Model No. 8000P as manufactured by the
Sheldon Machine Tool Co., Inc.; 12" plain table mode,
Step-toe-Western machine manufactured by the Western
Machine Tool Works Model No. 12-X.
HORIZONTAL MILLING MACHINE
A.
Horizontal milling machine shall be a medium duty,
overarm type, floor mounted, precision machine tool,
designed for general horizontal milling and related
machining operations.
B.
Machine shall be of heavy cast iron construction, with
heavy ribbed column, knee and saddle supported in wide
ways, rigid table with three full length T slots,
spindle supported in
roller type bearings, all
slideways equipped with adjustable gibs to take up
wear, large diameter control cranks with large collars
having easily read graduations of .001", and all other
components required for full operation.
C.
Unit shall have rear mounted motor with three stop
sheave driving spindle through a three step back shift
sheave, providing a range of six (6) spindle speeds.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 107
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Drive mechanism shall be fully enclosed with speed
controls easily accessible from front of machine.
Table shall be of the screw feed type equipped with
longitudinal power feed with all controls.
Motor
shall have standard taper roller bearings with
provision for lubrication.
Spindle assembly shall be
carried on a sliding head member with 4.5" stroke,
controlled by hand lever and locked with gib clamp.
D.
NYSCA
Horizontal milling machine shall meet the following
minimum specification:
1.
Table size
8" x 32"
2.
Longitudinal table travel
21"
3.
Cross table-travel
5"
4.
Vertical Knee travel
15.75"
5.
Distance, spindle axis
to table top
15.75"
6.
Table T slot width
.688
7.
Motor speed (RPM)
1200
8.
Spindle speeds
145/225/335/710/
1120/1650 RPM
9.
Spindle headstock taper
No. 9 B & S
10.
Arbor diameter
1"
11.
Longitudinal table feed
0.5-125 in. per min.
E.
Machine shall be furnished fully adjusted, lubricated,
ready for use, with a full complement of standard
accessories as specified by the manufacturer in his
catalog.
Provide full operating Instruction/Parts
manual.
F.
Spindle motor shall be 1 HP (min.) designed for
operation on 208 Volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Provide in a
frontal position of the headstock of machine a
magnetic type starter per Sec. 8 of this Standard.
G.
Provide one (1) each of the following accessories as
approved by manufacturer of machine.
1.
Power longitudinal table feed.
2.
One shot lubrication with grease gun and fittings.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 108
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
Work light with receptacle mounted on convenient.
position on machine to plug light into.
4.
Swivel base
openings.
5.
Hold down bolt and nut kit.
6.
Arbor, No. 9 B & S with all spacers, drawbar and
nut.
7.
Jacobs drill chuck 0.-0.5" with R-8 shank and self
ejecting key shall be supplied by the Miracle
Instrument Co.
8.
6" driving head complete with tailstock, indexing
plates, 5" chuck and all parts.
9.
One (1) each of the following end mill adaptors
with #9 B & S taper in the following sizes:
vise
with
6"
jaw
width
and
5"
.187", .250", .375", .500", 625", .750".
10.
One (1) each of the following shell end mill
arbors with No. 9 B & S taper in the following
sizes:
.050", 750", 1.0".
H.
Furnish three (3) each of the following size H.S. four
lipped, R.H., double end spiral end mills:
.187", .250", .375", .625", .750".
J.
K.
12.58
1.25" dia.
1" width
0.5" hole
2.00" dia.
1.375" width
0.75" hole
2.75" dia.
1.650" width
1.0" hole
Horizontal milling machine shall be a Burke Model 1 as
manufactured
by
Powermatic-Houdaille,
Inc.
McMinnville, Tenn.
SPOT WELDER - PORTABLE
A.
NYSCA
Furnish three (3) each H.S. R.H. Shell end mills in the
following sizes:
Spot welder with finger tip pressure adjustment control
shall haver the pressure multiplier operating through
a linkage to give accurate adjustment at the work and
maximum pressure on the operating lever. In a single
operation, the operating lever shall close the tongs
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 109
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
ont he work trigger switch and initiate the electronic
weld timer. Welder shall have a electronic timer with
time control know to give accurate adjustment from 3
to 90 cycles depending upon the ferrous metal to be
welded.
Machine shall be equipped with a Radioweld
pilot light.
B.
The spot welder shall operate at 120 volts and shall be
fused at 30 amps.
It shall have a capacity of 1/8"
for combined thickness in mild-steel and it shall have
a rated output at 50% duty cycle, 1.5 KVA.
C.
Welder shall be supplied with two pair of tongs, 1 pair
standard tong 12" long and 1 pair LMO offset tong 18"
long.
Provide standard 12-tongs with standard tips
and LMO tongs with LMO offset tips. Furnish unit with
10 ft. (min.) heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
power cable with plug to match receptacle.
D.
Spot welder shall be Miller spot welder Model WT-1515.
12.58A
NYSCA
SPOT WELDER - PEDESTAL MOUNTED
A.
Spot welder with finger tip pressure adjustment control
shall have the pressure multiplier operating through a
linkage to give accurate adjustment at the work and
maximum pressure on the operating lever. In a single
operation, the operating lever shall close the tongs
on the work trigger the switch and initiate the
electronic
welder
time.
Welder
shall
have
an
electronic timer with time control knob to give
accurate adjustments from 3 to 90 cycles depending
upon metal thickness to be welded. Spot welder shall
have a maximum capacity of 0.125" total welding
thickness for mild steel. Unit shall be equipped with
pilot light.
B.
Spot welder shall be designed to operate on 120 Volts,
single phase, and fused at 30 amps. Unit shall have a
rated output of 1.5 KVA at a 50% duty cycle. Provide
with six foot heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
C.
Welder shall be supplied with two pair of tongs, one
pair standard tongs 12" long, and one pair LMO offset
tongs 18" long. Provide standard 12" tongs with
standard tips and LMO 18" tongs with LMO offset tips.
Furnish unit with 10 ft. (min.) heavy duty three wire
(one grounding) power cable with plug to match
receptacle. Provide spot welder with steel floor
mounted pedestal with foot control.
Welder shall be
capable of use on or off pedestal.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 110
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Spot Welder shall be a Model WT-1515 with No. 040-872
pedestal of Miller Electric Mfg. Co., Appleton, Wisc.
12.59
POLISHING UNIT
A.
Polishing Unit shall be a self contained grinding,
polishing and dust collecting unit, capable of
accommodating 8" dia. x 1-1/2" thick polishing wheels.
Unit shall consist of a double shaft electric
polishing motor and dust hoods all mounted on machine,
with an enclosed cabinet, housing a cloth bag dust
collector. Each adjustable dust hood shall be equipped
with an electric light socket and removable pumice
pan. Spindle diameter 3/8". Polishing unit shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate and furnished
with motors, fan filter pad, etc. The double shaft of
the polishing motor shall be of required length, so
that when the tapered buffing spindle or polish wheel
arbors are attached on shaft, the buffing and/or brush
wheels will not extend beyond the dust hoods. Top
surface of base unit and shelf shall be covered with
16 ga. (min.) 6061 aluminum alloy sheet or equivalent
with bright finish, with front edge bent over 90o to
cover full thickness of top edge. Top shelf unit shall
be rigidly mounted on top of base unit with (2) two
7/16" thick aluminum plate and supports of full shelf
depth, anchored in place at end with full depth 1" x
1" (min.) extruded aluminum angles.
B.
Dust
collection
system
shall
be
motor
driven
centrifugal blower type which generates at least 500
CFM. Unit shall have renewable air filter pad and
exhaust into cloth bag.
C.
Motor for polishing unit shall be fully enclosed, at
least 3/4 horsepower, 3450 R.P.M., designed to operate
on three phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid
Connection).
Motor for dust collection system shall be fully
enclosed, at least 1/3 horsepower, 1725 R.P.M.,
designed to operate on three phase, 208 volts, 60 Hz
A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
NYSCA
Provide magnetic starters with overload protection for
each motor. The control circuitry for each magnetic
starter shall be paralleled and wired to one (1)
start-stop push button station in the casing of one of
the magnetic starters. The holding contacts of both
starters shall be wired in series with each other, and
the combination in parallel with the "Start" button.
The resulting wiring arrangement shall permit the
starting and stopping of both motors simultaneously by
the push button station, and the complete deSECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 111
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
activation of the entire control circuit by the action
of any thermal overload element. The dust hood
electric lights shall also be wired to the starting
circuit so that the lights will go on automatically
when machine is in use.
E.
E.
12.60
NYSCA
Furnish the following extra equipment with polishing
unit:
1.
Two (2) 60 watt electric bulbs.
2.
One (1) bag for dust collector.
3.
Two (2) air filter pads.
4.
Four (4) 6" diameter 50 ply muslin wheel.
5.
Three (3) 6" diameter 3/4" thick felt wheel.
6.
One (1) tapered buffing spindle, with right hand
thread.
7.
One (1) tapered buffing spindle, with left hand
thread.
8.
Two (2) polishing wheel arbors, each complete with
flanges, etc.
Polishing unit shall be Model No. BCE-2700 of Brompton
Service Corp., Great Neck, N.Y.
TRIPLE PURPOSE FURNACE
A.
Triple purpose furnace shall consist of a pot hardening
furnace, four burner Hi-Speed oven type hardening
furnace and a drawing furnace, capable of providing a
complete heat-treating set-up.
B.
The pot type furnace for lead cyanide and salt
hardening shall measure approximately 6" in diameter
by 8" deep and shall be Johnson No. 568.
C.
The oven type furnace for hardening carbon and high
speed steels in temperature range of 1300oF to 2350oF
shall measure approximately 7" high at 13" wide by 161/2" deep and shall be the Johnson No. 142, single
front door type.
D.
The drawing furnace for temperatures up to 1150oF shall
measure approximately 7" high by 13" wide by 16-1/2"
deep and shall be Johnson No. 175.
E.
The triple purpose unit shall have be complete with
piping, valve, blowers, burners, diaphragm valve and
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 112
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
automatic
temperature
controls
as
furnish
by
manufacturer,
all
mounted
on
bench
measuring
approximately 27" height, by 80" long by 22" wide.
F.
Triple purpose unit shall have a maximum input of
305,000 BTU per hour and shall be furnished with 11/4" gas supply line.
G.
Triple purpose heat treating unit shall be Johnson No.
252 AC, equipped with Johnson 100% safety system unit
III, as made by the Johnson Gas Appliance Co.
H.
The triple purpose unit shall be equipped with two (2)
Johnson No. 1202 blowers.
I.
Safety
equipment unit shall consist of a number of
components, all piped and wired in such manner that
each safety unit shall function as a constant burning
safety pilot system which will automatically shut off
the gas supply to each and all units in case of flame
or air failure, or shut down of the hood exhauster.
The components of the safety equipment shall be
properly mounted in place, piped and wired in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the unit. Upon completion of the installation, the
safety unit shall be ready for use.
Safety equipment unit shall consist of the following
components:
NYSCA
1.
Three (3) manual reset "start-stop" controls shall
be Honeywell No. S446A Start-Stop Station.
The
start-stop buttons of each control shall be
connected in series with a contact on a three (3)
pole relay whose holding coil is controlled by an
auxiliary contact of the furnace hood exhauster
starter, in order to prevent operation of the
three furnaces when the hood exhaust is not in
operation.
2.
Two (2) pilot safety switches (thermocouple
controlled) shall be Baso Division of Penn
Controls, Inc., Base Switch No. 850-1, for drawing
furnace and pot type furnace.
3.
One (1) ultra-violet safety control for oven type
hardening furnace, Fireye UVM-1D Flame Safeguard
with UV-1 Scanner.
4.
One (1) indicating pyrometer control with straight
type chromel-alumel thermocouple, 0-2500oF, for
oven type hardening furnace, Guardsman Model J.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 113
05/14/04
D.
12.61
5.
Two (2) air switches, Cleveland
Model FSL-Co. air switch.
Controls
CEA,
6.
Two (2) complete 48" thermocouple sets. Each set
shall consist of a thermocouple, protecting type,
leads, mounting adapters, connection fittings,
etc.; Baso Division of Penn Controls, Inc., Baso
Thermocouple.
7.
Three (3) complete pilot assemblies.
Each
assembly shall consist of one (1) safety pilot,
one (1) constant burning pilot, mounting bracket,
etc., Johnson Gas Appliance Co. Pilot Assembly.
8.
Three (3) 3/4" magnetic solenoid gas valves for
gas supply, one (1) valve to each furnace, ITT
General-Controls, Model K-3A, catalog No. K3455L.
9.
Three (3) 3/8" magnetic solenoid gas valves, one
(1) to each constant burning pilot, ITT GeneralControls, model K-3A, Catalog No. K-3A532.
10.
Three (3) manual gas adjusting valves, Roberts
Brass Mfg. Co.
11.
Safety equipment: Unit III, Johnson Gas Appliance
Co., Safety Pilot System.
The shut-off valve in the gas supply line for the unit
shall be a standard, 125 pound per sq. inch service
rated, bronze, lockshield globe valve.
The valve
shall be furnished with two (2) keys for the
lockshield, Lockshield globe valves, Walworth Company.
No. 76.
DUAL PURPOSE FURNACE
A.
B.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Dual purpose furnace shall consist of the following
units:
1.
A heat-treating furnace with four burners capable
of providing a temperature range from 1300oF
to
2350oF for heat treating high speed steel and
carbon steel tools, dies and small parts, a blower
with easily accessible shutter.
2.
A drawing furnace, atmospheric fired, used for
pre-heating and drawing. Atmospheric burner tips
beneath the hearth plate shall be capable of
providing a temperature range from 400oF to
1150oF.
The dual purpose unit shall be complete with piping,
blower, burners and temperature controls, mounted on
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 114
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
bench measuring approximate 27" high by 22" wide by
60" long.
C.
Dual purpose furnace shall have a maximum input of
235,000 BTU per hour and shall be furnished with a 11/4" gas supply line.
D.
Dual purpose furnace shall be Johnson model No. 258,
complete with Johnson 100% safety system unit III, as
made by Johnson Gas Appliance Co.
12.62
HEAT TREATING FURNACE
A.
Heat treating furnace shall be complete and ready for
use. Furnace shall include the following: A blower,
a 100% safety equipment unit, a lock shield valve, all
the necessary piping, fittings, electrical wiring,
etc.
B.
The heat treating furnace shall be a pedestal mounted
furnace designed for heat treating high speed and
carbon steels, and for light forge work. The furnace
shall have the following features:
temperature range
of approximately 1300oF to 2350oF, firebox approximate
6-1/4" high x 13" wide x 16-1/2" long, lined with
insulating refractory and hard refractory bottom with
hearth rests; door to open upwards with door opening
mechanism capable of holding door at various heights.
The furnace shall be installed complete and ready for
use and furnished with removable hearth plate,
pedestal and blower with motor.
The blower shall be capable of delivering not less than
25 C.F.M. at 4" W.C. pressure. The motor shall be 1/25
H.P., single phase, 120 volts, A.C.
Heat-treating furnaces shall be Johnson Gas Appliance
Co., No. 143 Heat-Treating and Forge Furnace with Front
and Rear Doors, Pedestal and No. 1202 Blower.
C.
NYSCA
Safety equipment unit shall consist of a number of
components all piped and wired in such manner that
each safety unit shall function as a constant burning
safety pilot system that will automatically shut-off
the gas supply to its furnace in case of a flame or
air failure.
The components of the safety equipment
unit shall be properly mounted in place, piped and
wired in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the furnace.
Upon completion of the
installation the safety unit shall be ready for use.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 115
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Safety equipment unit shall consist of the following
components:
D.
12.63
One
(1)
manual
reset
"Start-Stop"
control.
Honeywell No. S446A start-stop station.
The
start-stop buttons shall be connected in series
with the auxiliary contact of the furnace hood
exhausted, in order to prevent operation of the
heat treating furnace when the hood exhaust is not
in operation.
2.
One
(1)
pilot
safety
switch
(thermocouple
controlled).
Baso Division of Penn Controls,
Inc., Baso Switch No. 853-1.
3.
One (1) air switch.
Cleveland
Model FSL-Co. air switch.
4.
One (1) complete 48" thermocouple set.
The set
shall consist of a thermocouple, protecting tube,
leads, mounting adapters, connection fittings,
etc. Baso Division of Penn Controls, Inc., Baso
Thermocouple.
5.
One (1) complete pilot assembly.
The assembly
shall consist of one (1) safety pilot, one (1)
constant burning pilot, mounting bracket, etc.
Johnson Pilot Assembly.
6.
One (1) 3/4" magnetic solenoid gas valve, for the
gas supply to the furnace.
ITT General-Controls
Model K-3A, Catalog No. KJ-3A532.
7.
One (1) 3/8" magnetic solenoid gas valve, for the
gas supply to the constant burning pilot.
ITT
General Controls, Model K-3A, Catalog No. K-3A532.
8.
One (1) manual gas adjusting valve Roberts Brass
Mfg. Co.
Controls,
CEA,
The shut-off valves in the gas supply lines for the
furnace shall be a standard, 125 pound per sq. inch
service rating, bronze, lockshield globe valve.
The
valve shall be furnished with two (2) keys for the
lockshield. Lockshield globe valves shall be Walworth
Company, No 76.
CRUCIBLE FURNACE
A.
NYSCA
1.
Crucible furnace shall be complete and ready for use.
Furnish shall include the following:
a blower, a
safety equipment unit, a lock shield valve, all the
necessary piping, fittings, electrical wiring, etc.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 116
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
The crucible furnace shall be a pot type furnace
designed for melting metals such as aluminum and
brass.
The furnace shall be lined with castable
refractory and have temperature range of approximately
1200oF to 2500oF. The furnace shall be set on a 36" x
36" x 1/2" thick "Ultraboard" (non-asbestos), floor
pad.
The furnace shall be installed complete and
ready for use and furnished with a side exhaust vent,
three (3) No. 10 crucibles, one (1) 6" x 8" steel pot,
lid, derrick for lifting the lid, and one (1) blower
with motor.
The blower shall be capable of delivering not less than
75 C.F.M. at 6.5" W.C. Pressure.
The motor shall be
1/7 H.P., single phase, 120 volts, A.C.
Crucible furnace shall be the Johnson Gas Appliance
Co., No 900SS with No. 1207 Blower.
C.
In addition, furnish the following auxiliary equipment,
Foundry
Tool
Set
No.
10,
Brodhead-Garret
Co.,
consisting of:
One (1) Crucible Lifter
One (1) Crucible Pouring Tool
One (1) Pouring Rack
D.
Safety equipment unit shall consist of a number of
components all piped and wired in such manner that
each safety unit shall function as a constant burning
safety pilot system that will automatically shut off
the gas supply to its furnace in case of a flame or
air failure.
The components of the safety equipment unit shall be
properly mounted in place, piped and wired in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the furnace.
Upon completion of the installation
the safety unit shall be ready for use.
Safety equipment unit shall consist of the following
components:
1.
NYSCA
One
(1)
manual
reset
"Start-Stop"
control,
Honeywell No. S446A start-stop station.
The
start-stop buttons shall be connected in series
with the auxiliary contact of the furnace hood
exhausted in order to prevent operation of the
crucible furnace when the hood exhaust is not in
operation.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 117
05/14/04
E.
12.64
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
One (1) pilot safety
switch (thermocouple
controlled).
Baso Division of Penn Controls,
Inc., Baso Switch No. 853-1.
3.
One (1) air switch.
Cleveland
Model FSL-Co. air switch.
4.
One (1) complete 48" thermocouple set.
The set
shall consist of a thermocouple, protecting tube,
leads, mounting adapters, connection, fittings,
etc. Baso Division of Penn Controls, Inc., Baso
Thermocouple.
5.
One (1) complete pilot assembly.
The assembly
shall consist of One (1) safety pilot, one (1)
constant burning pilot, mounting bracket, etc.
Johnson Gas Appliance Co., Johnson Pilot Assembly.
6.
One (1) 3/4" magnetic solenoid gas valve, for the
gas supply to the furnace. ITT General-Controls,
Model K-3A, Catalog No. K-3A552.
7.
One (1) 3/8" magnetic solenoid gas valve for the
gas supply to the constant burning pilot. ITT
General-Controls, Model K-3A, Catalog No. K-3A532.
8.
One (1) manual gas adjusting valve. Roberts Brass
Mfg. Co. Provide complete safety equipment unit as
specified above.
Controls,
CEA,
The shut-off valve in the gas supply line for the
furnace shall be a standard, 125 pound per sq. inch
service rated, bronze, lockshield globe valve.
The
valve shall be furnished with two (2) keys for the
lockshield. Lockshield globe valves shall be Walworth
Company, No. 76.
COMBINATION BENCH FURNACE
A.
Combination bench furnace, consisting of approved
furnace made of cast iron with 3 gas burners, 1
melting pot of 6" diameter and 22 lbs. lead capacity,
refractory furnace lining and plate cover for fire box
of furnace.
Furnace shall be adaptable for heating
soldering irons or copper, branding irons, stenciling
irons, tempering steel, heat treating, annealing, case
hardening or soft metal melting.
B.
Combination bench furnace
Johnson Gas Appliance Co.
shall
be
Model
No.
118,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 118
05/14/04
12.65
BENCH FURNACE
A.
Bench furnace shall be approved furnace made of cast
iron requiring no blower or forced air blast. Furnace
shall consist of 2 gas burners, 1 melting pot 3"
diameter of 10 lbs. lead capacity and a removable lid
on hood.
Furnace shall be adaptable for heating
soldering irons or copper, branding irons, stenciling
irons, tempering steel, heat treating, annealing, case
harding or soft metal melting.
B.
Bench furnace shall be Model No. 105, made by the
Johnson Gas Appliance Co.
12.66
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
SQUARING SHEAR - 36"
A.
Squaring shear shall have a nominal cutting length of
36", be foot operated and capable of shearing No. 18
gage mild steel.
Each shear shall be complete,
adjusted and ready to operate and furnished with front
side and back gages; a hold-down device, and a locking
deice arrangement with cylinder lock and two (2) keys,
installed in such a manner that the shear shall be
inoperable by an unauthorized person.
B.
Provide on the squaring shear one (1) transparent blade
guard.
The transparent blade guard shall be made of
clear lucite or plexiglass 3/4" thick x 4" wide and
extending across the entire front of the shearing
blade.
The guard shall be set 3/8 of an inch above
the surface of table.
The guard shall be rigidly
fastened to the frame of the machine or table as
conditions require. The guard shall be complete with
necessary brackets,s crews, etc.
Screws shall be
Phillips recessed head steel machine screws with round
heads countersunk flush with surface. The guard shall
also be provided with a metal stiffener at the top
3/4"
edge
of
the
guard
to
prevent
excessive
deflection.
The bottom 3/4" edge of the guard to
prevent excessive deflection.
the bottom 3/4" edge
shall be chamfered approximately 20 degrees with
horizontal,
at
the
front,
for
a
distance
of
approximately 1/2", in order to provide a funnel space
to receive the work to be sheared. Transparent blade
guards shall be Brett-Guard Corporation, "Ful-Vu"
Shearguard, Catalog Listing No. 1030.
C.
36" foot squaring shear shall be Peck, Stow and Wilcox
Co. No. 132; Niagara Machine and Tool Works, No. 36-F
Foot Squaring Shear; Famco Machine Co. No. 18-36.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 119
05/14/04
12.67
SQUARING SHEAR - 24", BENCH MOUNTED
A.
Squaring shear shall have a nominal cutting length of
24". Squaring shear shall be hand operated, bench
mounted, capable of shearing No. 16 gage mild steel
and have a micromatic back gage. Shear shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate.
B.
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the
squaring
shear
consisting
of
a
locking
device
arrangement with cylinder lock and two (2) keys
installed in such a manner that the shear shall be
rendered inoperable by an unauthorized person. Submit
shop drawings.
C.
Squaring
Shear
shall
be
Model
Type
Walker/Gerver, Worcester, MA; Model No.
Strippit, Inc., Akron, N.Y.
12.68
GG-4
24
of
of
RING AND CIRCLE SHEAR - 30"
A.
Ring and circle shear shall be a bench mounted ring and
circle
shear,
designed
for
cutting
circles,
rings,strip cutting, contour cutting, etc.
Maximum
capacity No. 20 gage mild steel, and capable of
cutting circles 42" in diameter from square stock.
Each machine shall have a heavy cast iron bed designed
for bolting to bench top.
It shall have adjustable
clamping action, fully enclosed machine gears, and
hardened and tempered steel cutters.
Each machine
shall be complete, adjusted and ready to operate.
B.
Ring and circle shear shall be Model 299 made by Peck,
Stow and Wilcox Company; Niagara Model No. 13.
12.69
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
RING AND CIRCLE SHEAR - 24"
A.
Ring and circle shear shall be bench mounted. Designed
for cutting circles, rings, strip cutting, contour
cutting, etc.
Maximum capacity No. 20 U.S.S. gage
mild steel, and capable of cutting circles up to at
least 22" in diameter from square stock. Each machine
shall have a heavy cast iron bed designed for bolting
to bench top, have adjustable clamping action, fully
enclosed machined gears, hardened and tampered steel
cutters. Each machine shall be complete, adjusted and
ready to operate.
B.
24" ring and circle shear shall be Model 298 made by
Peck, Stow and Wilcox Company; Model No. 11 made by
Niagara Machine and Tool Works.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 120
05/14/04
12.70
BOX AND PAN BRAKE
A.
Box and pan brake shall be bench mounted, lever
operated box and pan brake. Machine shall be capable
of bending up to No. 16 gage sheet steel and up to 24"
wide to any desired angle from 0o to 135o, maximum box
or pan depth 3". Unit shall have various width fingers
with length in inches stamped on each finger, back
gage range 1/4" to 24", thickness control adjusting
knobs, positive angle stops and removable leaf bar for
minimum reverse bends of 1/4". Box and pan brake shall
be complete, adjusted and ready to operate.
B.
Box And Pan Brake shall be Model No. 24 of Strippit,
Inc, Akron, N.Y.
12.71
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 30"
A.
Slip roll former shall be bench mounted, hand operated
and capable of handling No. 22 gage mild steel. Shall
have hardened, ground, smoothly finished steel rolls,
working length of rolls 30" and 2" in diameter.
One
end of the upper roll raised by
means of a lever
mechanism, front and rear rollers adjustable for
clearance and required radius. Each machine shall be
complete, adjusted and ready to operate. Former shall
be installed on blocks, if necessary, to permit free
swing of operating handle.
B.
Slip roll former shall be Model No. 2-30 made by Niagra
Machine and Tool Works; Model 382 made by Peck, Stow
and Wilcox Company; Model No. 5 made by Di-Acro Corp.
12.71A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 24"
A.
Slip roll former shall be bench mounted, hand operated
and shall have a capacity for handling No. 20 gage
mild steel. Rolls shall be 2" in diameter and have a
rolling length capacity of 24", widths of circular
grooves for rod forming shall be 3/16", 1/4", and
5/16". One end of the upper roll shall raise by means
of a lever mechanism. Front and rear rollers shall be
adjustable for clearance and required radius. Machine
shall be furnished complete, adjusted and be ready to
operate. Former shall be installed on hard wood
blocks, if necessary, to permit free swing of
operating handle.
B.
Slip Roll Former - 24" shall be Model No. 2-24 of
Niagara Machine and Tool Works, Buffalo, N.Y.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 121
05/14/04
12.72
SLIP ROLL FORMER - 20"
A.
Slip roll former shall be bench mounted, hand operated
and capable of handling No. 24 gage mild steel. Shall
have hardened, ground smoothly, finished steel rolls.
Working length of rolls shall be 20" by 1-1/2" in
diameter.
One end of the upper roll shall raise by
means of a lever mechanism.
Front and rear rollers
shall be adjustable for clearance and required radius.
Each machine shall be complete, adjusted and ready to
operate. Former shall be installed on blocks, if
necessary, to permit free swing of operating handle.
B.
Slip roll former shall be Model No. 328 of Niagara
Machine & Tool works; Model No. 0384 of Peck, Stow &
Wilcox Co.
12.73
ADJUSTABLE BAR FOLDER - 30"
A.
Adjustable bar folder shall be bench mounted, hand
operated and shall have a capacity of handling No. 22
gage mild steel. Folding length shall be 30", gaging
range form 3/32 to 1", and round folds for wire a
maximum of 1/4" diameter. Folding blade shall be hard
rolled steel, with hardened edge accurately ground.
Machine shall be furnished complete, adjusted and be
ready to operate.
Bar folder shall have adjustable
stops for forming any desired angle, and adjustable
gage with means for locking gage.
Bar folder shall
have a self-contained counterbalance or governor.
B.
Adjustable bar folders shall be Model 63 made by Peck,
Stow and Wilcox Company; Model No. 3 made by Niagara
Machine and Tool Works.
12.74
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
ADJUSTABLE BAR FOLDER - 20"
A.
Adjustable bar folder shall be bench mounted, hand
operated and shall have a capacity for handling No. 20
gage mild steel. Folding length shall be 20", gaging
range from 1/8" to 1", and round folds for wire a
maximum of 1/4" diameter. Folding blade shall be hard
rolled steel, with hardened edge accurately ground.
Bar folder shall have adjustable stops for forming any
desired angle, and adjustable gage with means for
locking gage. Machine shall be furnished complete,
adjusted and be ready to operate.
B.
Adjustable bar folder shall be Model No. 2 of Niagara
Machine and Tool Works, Buffalo, N.Y.; Model No. 62 of
Roper Whitney/Pexto as supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 122
05/14/04
12.75
COMBINATION ROTARY MACHINE
A.
Combination rotary machine shall be bench mounted,
universal type, complete with one pair of each of the
following rolls:
O.G. Beading, Crimping, Burring,
Turning and Wiring; also three (3) gages (crimping
gage, beading gage, turning, wiring, and burring
gage); also one (1) small bench stand to fit this
equipment, Model No. 142, as made by the Niagara
Machine Works.
B.
Rotary machine shall be Model No. 150 made by Niagara
Machine Works; Model 622 made by Peck, Stow & Wilcox
Co.
12.76
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
BENDING MACHINE - 9"
A.
Bending machine shall be sturdily built, hand operated,
precision bending machine, mounted on steel stand as
made by manufacturer of machine or bench mounted as
indicated on Drawings.
Machine shall be constructed
of alloy castings and cold rolled steel bars.
All
parts subject to wear shall be properly hardened and
ground. The bender shall be equipped with rollers in
the main bearings, a bend locating gage that allows
each bend to be duplicated, and angle step to
determine the degree of bend and a locking pin to
clamp the material during bending operation.
B.
Bending machine shall conform to the following
approximate characteristics and specifications:
Radius Capacity
9"
Height of Std. Forming Nose
1"
Center Pin Hole Diameter
. .
1"
Operating Leverage
. .
29"
C.
Bending machine shall be Di-Acro Corp. Model No. 2.
D.
Furnish with the bending machine a Bend-R-Pac No. 2 as
furnished
by
Di-Acro
Corp.,
consisting
of
the
following: 3/16" Radius Pin, 1/2" Radius Pin (std.),
1" Radius Collar, 1-3/4" Radius Collar, Zero Radius
Block, 1" Square Block, Grooved Radius Collar for 3/4"
O.D. tubing, to a 2" radius, clevis clamp for 3/4"
O.D. tubing, follow block for 3/4" O.D. tubing--9"
length, forming roller for use in Tube Bending Scroll
Collar.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 123
05/14/04
12.77
BENDING MACHINE - 6"
A.
Bending machine shall be a sturdily built, bench type,
hand operated, precision bending machine.
Machine
shall be constructed of alloy castings and cold rolled
steel bars.
All parts subject to wear shall be
properly hardened and ground.
The bender shall be
equipped with rollers in the main bearing, a bend
locating gage that allows each bend to be duplicated,
an angle stop to determine the degree of bend and a
locking pin to clamp the material during bending
operation.
B.
Bending machine shall conform to the following
approximate characteristics and Specifications:
C.
12.78
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Radius Capacity
6"
2.
Height of Std. Forming Nose
3/4"
3.
Center Pin Hole Diameter
1/2"
4.
Operating Leverage
16"
Bending machine shall be Di-Acro Corp. Model No. 1A.
POWER HACK SAW - 6"
A.
Power hack saw shall be 6" x 6" capacity size, at
least 2 speed, wet cut, including coolant system
complete with pump.
It shall take 14" blades, and
shall have a swivel vise and heavy enclosed base. The
blade of machine shall be lifted clear of work on the
non-cutting
stroke.
All
cutting
action
shall
automatically stop when piece has been cut through.
Machine shall have an adjustable feed.
B.
Power hack saw shall be driven by at least a 1 H.P.
motor designed to operate on three phase, 208 volts,
60 cycle A.C.
C.
Provide in convenient location on machine a magnetic
starter completely wired with approved materials to
motor.
D.
Furnish with power hack saw, one (1) dozen High Speed
steel saw blades 1-1/4" wide, 10 teeth per inch as per
Marvel No. 1410-W made by Armstrong-Blum Mfg. Co.
E.
Power hack saw shall be Model No. 4B/MG1 as made by the
Armstrong-Blum Co.; Model 3SC as made by the Peerless
Machine Co.; or Model No. 66-W2 as made by the Racine
Hydraulics and Machinery, Inc.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 124
05/14/04
12.79
DESIGN NO. _____
POWER HACK SAW - 4"
A.
Power hack saw shall be at least 4" x 4" capacity, dry
cut, single speed, motor driven, blade length at least
12", equipped with vise and adjustable feed.
All
cutting action shall automatically stop when piece has
been cut through.
B.
Power hack saw shall be mounted in a heavy cast iron
frame approximately 32" high.
C.
Hack saw shall be driven by a 1/4 H.P. motor, designed
to operate on three phase, 208 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
D.
Provide in convenient location on machine a magnetic
starter with start and stop push button in cover,
interwired to hack saw motor.
E.
Furnish with power hack saw one (1) dozen High Speed
steel saw blades 1-1/4" wide - 10 teeth per inch.
F.
Power hack saw shall be
Armstrong-Blum Mfg. Co.;
Peerless Machine Co.
12.80
Model
Model
No.
No.
1/M1
P4M
made
made
by
by
PORTABLE HACK SAW
A.
Portable hack saw shall be driven by a 1/4 H.P. motor
designed to operate on single phase, 120 volts, 60
cycle A.C., equipped with a heavy duty three wire cord
(one grounding) and plug to match receptacle.
Saw shall be capable of cutting up to 3" square steel
bars.
Cutting action shall be draw cut and lift
return.
B.
Furnish with portable hack saw, one (1) dozen High
Speed steel saw blades 1/2" wide - 18 teeth per inch.
C.
Portable Hack saw shall be Handihack model made by the
Lipe-Rollway Corp.
12.81
ARBOR PRESS - FLOOR TYPE
A.
NYSCA
Arbor press shall be single leverage, ratchet type,
pedestal mounted arbor press.
The arbor press shall
have the following features: approximate pressure not
less than 3 tons; largest diameter of work not less
than 14"; capacity over table not less than 11-1/2";
capacity over table plate not less than 10-3/4"'
leverage ratio not less than 48-1; size and length of
ram not less than 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 16-1/2"; press
operated by ratchet; counterweight for quick return of
lever after down stroke; fame of semi-steel casting
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 125
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
and arrange for pedestal mounting.
The arbor press
shall be complete and ready for use and furnished with
machined and slotted table plate.
B.
12.82
ARBOR PRESS - BENCH TYPE
A.
B.
12.83
NYSCA
Arbor presses shall be Dake Corporation, Ratchet Type,
Single Leverage Arbor Press No. 1-1/2; Famco Machine
Co., Single Ratchet Type Arbor Press No. 3-R.
Arbor press shall be a bench type, semi-steel casting
frame capable of handling a minimum pressure of 2
tons, and conforming to the following characteristics
and specifications:
Type
Single Leverage
Largest Diameter Work
12" Minimum
Largest Diameter Arbor
1-5/8" Minimum
Capacity Over Table
11" Minimum
Capacity Over Table Plate
10-1/4" Minimum
Length and Size of Ram
1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 16-1/2"
Minimum
Leverage Ratio
35 to 1 Minimum
Arbor press shall be Model No. 1 made by Dake
Corporation; Model No. 3 made by Greenerd Arbor Press
Co.; Model No. 3 Famco Machine Co.
ANVIL - 100 LBS
A.
Anvil shall be complete with a wood base. Each anvil
shall have the following features:
face of anvil
shall be of solid tool steel, accurately ground,
tempered, polished and thoroughly welded to the grey
cast iron body of the anvil; horn covered with tough,
untempered forged steel; point of horn made entirely
of tough, untempered forged steel.
Each wood base
shall be shock absorbing and weighted with sand. Each
anvil shall be securely fastened to the wood base.
B.
Anvils shall be American Skein and Foundry Co., Badger
Anvil Size No. 10; Milwaukee Tool Co.; Fisher and
Norris "Eagle" Anvil Works; Illinois Iron and Bolt
Co., Vulcan Anvil, Size No. 10.
C.
Anvil bases shall be
Absorbing Anvil Base.
William
Dixon,
Inc.,
Shock
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 126
05/14/04
12.84
DESIGN NO. _____
ANVIL - 70 LBS
A.
Anvil shall be complete with a wood base.
The anvil
shall have the following features: face of anvil shall
be of solid tool steel, accurately ground, tempered,
polished and perfectly welded to the grey cast iron
body of the anvil; horn covered with tough, untempered
forged steel; point of horn made entirely of tough,
untempered forged steel. The wood base shall be shock
absorbing and weighted with sand. The anvil shall be
securely fastened to the wood base.
B.
Anvils shall be American Skein and Foundry Co., Badger
Anvil Size No. 7; Fisher and Norris "Eagle" Anvil
Works; Illinois Iron and Bolt Co., Vulcan Anvil, No.
7; Milwaukee Tool Co.
C.
Anvil bases shall be
Absorbing Anvil Base.
12.85
Dixon,
Inc.,
Shock
STAKE PLATE - BENCH TYPE
A.
Stake plate shall be approximately 30" long x 8" wide
and approximately 1-1/2" thick made of close grain
cast iron. Top of bench plate and stake hole shall be
ground smooth.
Stake plate shall be perforated with
apertures of various sizes to hold stakes, bick iron,
anvil spikes or other tools.
B.
Bench shall be recessed and stake plate shall be
installed flush to top of bench minimum of 4" from
edge of table and plate shall be firmly fastened to
bench with bolts.
C.
Stake plate shall be model 585 made by Niagara Machine
and Tool Works; Model 982 made by Peck, Stow & Wilcox
Co.
12.86
STAKE HOLDER
A.
12.87
Stake holder shall be Model No. 88 of William Dixon,
Inc.
STAKE SET - ART METAL
A.
Stakes shall be made of steel or cast iron as per
manufacturer's standard and all working surfaces shall
be highly polished.
B.
Stake set shall consist of the following items as made
by William Dixon, Inc. Milwaukee Tool Co.
Name
NYSCA
William
Stake No.
Quantity
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 127
05/14/04
12.88
2-Inch. Round Head
No. 1
1
Anvil with Curved Ends
No. 5
1
Anvil Top
No. 12
1
Half Moon, 1-Inch Wide
No. 57
1
Half Moon, 3-Inch Wide
No. 58
1
Spoon, 2-3/4" x 2"
No. 61
1
Curved Surface
No. 34
1
Deep Concave
No. 40
1
Wedge Shape
No. 41
1
Inverted Rocker Anvil
No. 9
1
Curved Surface, Width
Taper, 1-1/2" to 1"
No. 23
1
Curved Surface, Width
Taper, 1-1/2" to 1-3/8"
No. 25
1
Square Flat Top
No. 26
1
Oblong Flat Top
No. 27
1
Round Flat top, 2-1/2"
Diameter
No. 29
1
Stake Holder
No. 90
1
Blowhorn, as made by
Milwaukee Tool Co.
No. 671450
1
STAKE SET - SHEET METAL
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Stake set shall consist of the following stakes as made
by the Milwaukee Tool Co.:
Name
Stake No.
Quantity
Beakhorn
No. 671030
1
Blowhorn
No. 671450
1
Coppersmiths Square
No. 671540
1
Hatchet
No. 671080
1
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 128
05/14/04
12.89
Candle Mould
No. 671240
1
Round Head
No.671100
1
Conductor
No. 671520
1
METAL STORAGE RACK
A.
Rack shall be 48" wide by 9'-4" high free-standing all
steel constructed unit. Front section shall have five
(5) compartments and sloped backward at a 7o angle.
Each compartment will be 8" wide by 6" deep. Depth of
rack at top to be 16" deep and 40" deep at bottom.
Back shall have four (4) compartments open at both
ends, one (1) compartment 4" wide by 48" deep by 106"
high, and three (3) compartments 4" wide by 48" deep x
36" high. Metal rack shall be finished in gray enamel.
Rack shall be installed and ready for use.
B.
Metal Storage Rack shall be
supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
12.90
Stock
No.
461578
as
MACHINISTS' VICE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(3-1/2" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, stationary base,
permanent lubricated machinists' vise. Vise shall have
the following features: Jaws 3-1/2" wide, to open at
least 5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made
of
malleable
iron;
replaceable,
serrated
faced,
hardened tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel
screw; round steel bar handle with steel or neoprene
ball ends. Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists' vise shall be Model 503-1/2M2 of Columbian
Vise and Mfg. Co.; Model 350N of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co.
Inc., New Jersey.
12.90A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(4" WIDTH)
A.
Vise
shall
be
stationary
base
type,
permanent
lubricated machinists' vises.
Each vise shall have
the following capacities and characteristics:
jaw
width 4"; Jaw opening not less than 5"; vise nut and
front jaw casting made of malleable iron; cold rolled
steel vise screw; steel handle with steel or neoprene
ball ends; replaceable, hardened tool steel, serrated
jaw faces. Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists'
vises
shall
be
Columbian
Vise
Manufacturing
Co.,
No.
504M2;
Wilton
Manufacturing Co., Inc. No. 400N.
and
Tool
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 129
05/14/04
12.90B
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(5" WIDTH)
A.
Vise
shall
be
stationary
base
type,
permanent
lubricated machinists' vises.
Each vise shall have
the following capacities and characteristics:
jaw
width 5"; jaw opening not less than 5"; vise nut and
front jaw casting made of malleable iron; cold rolled
steel vise screw; steel handle with steel or neoprene
ball ends; replaceable, hardened tool steel, serrated
jaw faces. Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists'
vises
shall
be
Columbian
Vise
and
Manufacturing
Co.,
No.
505M2;
Wilton
Tool
Manufacturing Co., Inc. No. 500N.
12.91
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(3-1/2" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, stationary base,
permanent lubricated machinists' vise. Vise shall have
the following features: Jaws 3-1/2" wide, to open at
least 5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made
of malleable iron; replaceable, smooth faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists' vise shall be Model 503-1/2M3 of Columbian
Vise and Mfg. Co., Stock No. 224011 as supplied by
Brodhead Garrett; Model 350N of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co.
Inc., New Jersey.
12.91A
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(4" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, stationary base,
permanent lubricated machinists' vise.
Vise shall
have the following features: jaws 4" wide, to open at
least 5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made
of malleable iron; replaceable, smooth faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists' vises shall be Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co.,
No. 504M2; Wilton Tool Mfg. Co. Inc. 400N.
12.91B
MACHINISTS' VISE - STATIONARY BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS
(5" WIDTH)
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Vise shall be stationary jaw, stationary base,
permanent lubricated machinists' vise.
Vise shall
have the following features: Jaws 5" wide, to open at
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 130
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
least 5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made
of malleable iron:
replaceable, smooth faced,
hardened tool steel jaw facings: cold rolled steel
screw; round steel bar handle with steel or neoprene
ball ends. Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
B.
12.92
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS (31/2" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, swivel base, permanent
lubricated machinists' vise. Vise shall have the
following features: jaws 3-1/2" wide, to open at least
5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made of
malleable iron; replaceable, serrated faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Swivel base shall rotate 360o and shall have two
positive locks. Vise shall be complete and ready for
use.
B.
Machinists' vise shall be Model 603-1/2M2 of Columbian
Vise and Mfg. Co.; Model 350S of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co.,
Inc., New Jersey.
12.92A
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(4" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw and swivel base permanent
lubricated vise.
Vise shall have the following
features: jaws 4" wide, to open at least 5": movable
front jaw and vise nut shall be made of malleable
iron; replaceable tool-steel jaw facings properly
tempered and serrated. Handle shall be of steel with
steel or neoprene ball ends. Swivel base shall rotate
360o and shall have two positive locks. Vise shall be
complete and ready for use.
B.
Machinists' vises shall be Wilton Tool
Machinists'
Vise
No
400;
Columbian
Manufacturing Co., No. 604M2.
12.92B
Mfg.
Vise
Co.,
and
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SERRATED FACED JAWS
(5" WIDTH)
A.
NYSCA
Machinists' vises shall be Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co.,
No. 505M2; Wilton Tool Mfg. Co. Inc., No. 500N.
Vise shall be stationary jaw and swivel base permanent
lubricated vise.
Vise shall have the following
features: jaws 5" wide, to open at least 5"; movable
front jaw and vise nut shall be made of malleable
iron; replaceable tool-steel jaw facings properly
tempered and serrated. Handle shall be of steel with
steel or neoprene ball ends Swivel base shall rotate
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 131
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
360o and shall have two positive locks.
complete and ready for use.
B.
12.93
Machinists' vises shall be Wilton Tool
Machinists'
Vise
No.
500S;
Columbian
Manufacturing Co., No. 605M2.
Mfg. Co.,
Vise
and
MACHINISTS' VISE - SWIVEL BASE, SMOOTH FACED JAWS (31/2" WIDTH)
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, swivel base, permanent
lubricated machinists' vise. Vise shall have the
following features: jaws 3-1/2" wide, to open at least
5"; movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made of
malleable iron; replaceable, smooth faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Swivel base shall rotate 360o and shall have two
positive locks. Vise shall be complete and ready for
use.
B.
Machinists' vise shall be Model 603-1/2M3 of Columbian
Vise and Mfg. Co., Stock No. 223962 as supplied by
Brodhead Garrett; Model 350S of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co.,
Inc., New Jersey.
12.93A
MACHINISTS'
(4" WIDTH)
VISE
-
SWIVEL
BASE,
SMOOTH
FACED
JAWS
A.
Vise shall be stationary jaw, swivel base, permanent
lubricated machinists' vise.
Vise shall have the
following features: jaws 4" wide, to open at least 5";
movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made of
malleable iron; replaceable, smooth faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Swivel base shall rotate 360o and shall have two
positive locks. Vise shall be complete and ready for
use.
B.
Machinists' vises shall be Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co.,
No. 604M2; Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., Inc. No. 400S.
12.93B
MACHINISTS'
(5" WIDTH)
A.
NYSCA
Vise shall be
VISE
-
SWIVEL
BASE,
SMOOTH
FACED
JAWS
Vise shall be stationary jaw, swivel base, permanent
lubricated machinists' vise.
Vise shall have the
following features: jaws 5" wide, to open at least 5";
movable front jaw and vise nut shall be made of
malleable iron; replaceable, smooth faced, hardened
tool steel jaw facings; cold rolled steel screw; round
steel bar handle with steel or neoprene ball ends.
Swivel base shall rotate 360o and shall have two
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 132
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
positive locks.
use.
B.
12.94
Machinists' vises shall be Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co.,
No. 605M2; Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., Inc. No. 500S,
COMBINATION PIPE VISE
A.
Vise shall be swivel base type combination pipe,
permanent lubricated vise. Vise shall have the
following features: jaw width 3-1/2"; jaw opening not
less than 4" pipe capacity 1/8" to 2-1/2"; vise nut
and movable front jaw casting made of malleable iron;
cold rolled steel screw; replaceable diamond serrated
face hardened tool steel jaw facings; hardened tool
steel pipe jaws; pipe jaws not to protrude beyond vise
jaw faces; ground steel handle with steel or neoprene
ball ends.
B.
Combination pipe vises shall be Columbian Vise & Mfg.
Co., No. 203-1/2; Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., Inc., Catalog
No. C-0. Vise shall be complete and ready for use.
12.95
PIPE VISE
A.
Vises shall be bench type, automatic locking pipe
vises.
Frame and base shall be made of certified
malleable iron, jaws shall be tool steel, carefully
milled, hardened, tempered and tested. Hooks shall be
drop forged of steel and guaranteed against breaking.
Vise shall have a capacity of 1/8" to 2".
B.
Pipe vise shall be Armstrong Bros. Tool Co. No. 70;
Wilton Tool Mfg. Co. No. 52; The Ridge Tool Co. No.
21.
12.96
NYSCA
Vise shall be complete and ready for
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 10"
A.
Vise shall be solid nut, continuous screw, dog in front
jaw, woodworkers' vise. Vise shall have the following
features: jaw size 4" x 10", maximum jaw opening 12";
1" diameter cold rolled steel vise screw with Acme
thread; cold rolled steel drag bar; jaw faces
accurately machined, sides and tops ground flush; each
jaw face shall be equipped with 10" x 4" x 5/8" thick
dressed maple blocks; solid aluminum or tubular steel
handles; two (2) cold rolled steel guide rods.
B.
Vise shall be mounted flush with the end of the bench,
with the metal facing of the jaws set 1/8" below
surface of the bench top and the wood facing blocks of
jaws 1/8" above the surface of the bench top. Vise
shall be securely fastened to bench top with lag
screws and shall be ready for use.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 133
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Woodworkers' vise shall be Model 10CDT of Columbian
Vise and Mfg. Co., Stock No. 223929 as supplied by
Brodhead Garrett; Model 62A of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co.,
New Jersey.
12.97
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 10" RAPID ACTION
A.
Vise shall be whole nut rapid action type; that will
engage and disengage the screw automatically within
1/2 revolution of handle.
Tightening action must
continue beyond a full revolution.
Vise shall have
the following features: jaw size 4" x 10"; maximum jaw
opening 12"; 1" dia. cold rolled steel vise screw with
Acme thread; cold rolled steel drag bar; jaw faces
accurately machined, sides and tops ground flush; each
jaw face shall be equipped with 10" x 4" x 5/8" thick
dressed maple blocks; solid aluminum or tubular steel
handles; two (2) cold rolled steel guide rods.
B.
Vise shall be mounted flush with the end of the bench,
with the metal facing of the jaws set 1/8" below
surface of the bench top and the wood facing blocks of
jaws 1/8" above the surface of the bench top.
Vise
shall be securely fastened to bench tops with lag
screws and shall be ready for use.
C.
Woodworkers' vises shall be Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., No.
64A; The Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co., No 10RDT.
12.98
NYSCA
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 7"
A.
Vise shall be solid nut, continuous screw, dog in front
jaw, woodworkers' vise. Vise shall have the following
features: jaw size 4" x 7", maximum jaw opening 9"; 1"
diameter cold rolled steel vise screw with Acme
thread; cold rolled steel drag bar; jaw faces
accurately machined, sides and tops ground flush; each
jaw face shall be equipped with 7" x 4" x 5/8" thick
dressed maple blocks; solid aluminum or tubular steel
handles; two (2) cold rolled steel guide rods.
B.
Vise shall be mounted flush with the end of the bench,
with the metal facing of the jaws set 1/8" below
surface of the bench top and the wood facing blocks of
jaws 1/8" above the surface of the bench top. Vise
shall be securely fastened to bench top with lag
screws and shall be ready for use.
C.
Woodworkers' vise shall be Model 7CDT of Columbian Vise
and Mfg. Co., Stock No. 223907 as supplied by Brodhead
Garrett; Model 51A of Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., New
Jersey.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 134
05/14/04
12.99
WOODWORKERS' VISE - 7" RAPID ACTION
A.
Vise shall be whole nut rapid action type; that will
engage and disengage the screw automatically within
1/2 revolution of handle.
Tightening action must
continue beyond a full revolution.
Each vise shall
have the following features: jaw size 4" x 7"; maximum
jaw opening 9" 1" dia. cold rolled steel vise screw
with Acme thread; cold rolled steel drag bar; jaw
faces accurately machined, sides and tops ground
flush; each jaw face shall be equipped with 7" x 4" x
5/8" thick dressed maple blocks; solid aluminum or
tubular steel handles; two (2) cold rolled steel guide
rods.
B.
Vise shall be mounted flush with the end of the bench,
with the metal facing of the jaws set 1/8" below
surface of the bench top and the wood facing blocks of
jaws 1/8" above the surface of the bench top.
Vise
shall be securely fastened to bench tops with lag
screws and in the locations on benches where shown on
the drawings. Each vise shall be installed ready for
use.
C.
Woodworkers' vises shall be Wilton Tool Mfg. Co., No.
63A; The Columbian Vise and Mfg. Co., No. 7RDT.
12.101
PLASTIC OVEN
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Oven shall be a high temperature, bench model, of heavy
steel cabinet construction, with two swing out doors
mounted on piano type hinges. Oven shall be fully
insulated with 2-1/2" fiberglass insulation. Oven
shall have Fan-Forced Air Re-Circulation, low watt
density incoloy sheathed heating elements, a sensitive
thermostat to hold the desired temperature within plus
or minus 1% and (2) slide out shelves. Oven shall be
given two coats of gray silicon baked enamel. Plastic
Oven shall conform to the following characteristics
and specifications:
1.
Temperature Range:
100o-550oF
2.
Cubic Capacity:
6 cubic feet
3.
Inside Dimensions:
26" wide x 20" deep x 20"
high
4.
Outside Dimensions:
1" wide x 26" deep x 24"
high
5.
Rating:
3000 watts
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 135
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Plastic oven shall be designed to operate on single
phase, 208 volts, 60 HZ A.C. (Solid Connection).
C.
Control panelboard mounted on side of oven shall be
completely wired and equipped with control switch and
pilot lights for heat and fan. High-low heat control
shall consist of two (2) rotary or toggle switches
with red pilot light for each switch. Provide on oven
an appropriate range thermometer with 6" to 8" dial
graduated in 10o units, printed numbers between 100oF
and 600oF every 50 degrees: To be mounted on top of
oven protected by an insulation panel of two (2)
pieces of 1/8" "Ultraboard" (non-asbestos) with a 1"
core of magnesia or equal insulation. Also provide a
seven day interval timer to provide predetermined
periods of oven operation, to be mounted on oven in a
metal box equipped with a lock.
D.
Provide oven on a steel cabinet base. Cabinet shall be
as provided by manufacturer of oven. It is to be 31"
wide x 26" deep with two (2) sliding shelves and two
(2) hinged doors with locks. Cabinet to be furnished
with two (2) coats of gray silicon baked enamel.
Cabinet Base shall be Stock No. 303405 as supplied by
Brodhead Garrett.
E.
Plastic Oven shall be Model No. 51-550,
303522 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
12.102
No.
LARGE ELECTRIC KILN - SIZE 15" X 21" X 18"
A.
NYSCA
Stock
The kiln casing shall be constructed of cold rolled
galvanized sheet steel of not less than sixteen gage
which shall be used for the rear wall, side walls, top
and bottom section.
Eleven gage cold rolled steel
shall be employed for the front section of the kiln
and the door.
The rear pan, forming the rear wall,
shall fit within the side walls and bottom piece and
shall be formed as a pan with not less than one-and-ahalf inches for a lip.
The front pan, eleven gage
steel, shall be made as a pan with one-and-a-half inch
lip to fit within the side walls and the bottom of the
kiln. The top pan shall fit over the side walls, rear
wall, and front section and shall extend for one-anda-half inches over the areas.
This pan shall be
formed by making a running weld at the corners and
such weld shall be ground smoothly to a finished
surface. These sections of metal shall be secured by
means of continuous welding or not less than twelve
sheet metal screws to each area being secured.
All
rough edges at junctions of metal sections shall be
ground smooth. Other methods of construction will be
considered upon submission for approval.
The metal
shall be treated on the interior with two coats of
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 136
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
acid-resistant coating.
Each section of metal shall
further be lined with not less than one-eight inch
"Fibrefax" or approved insulation.
"Fibrefax" shall
be secured by means of heat-resistant adhesive applied
to the inner coated surface of each metal surface
except the lips of the pans.
B.
Kiln Door and Firing Chamber
1.
Shall be plug type, hinged, refractory backed
(with a total thickness off not less than 6"),
door shall be constructed of not less than 11
gage, cold rolled steel, provided with minimum of
one latch.
Door shall be hung on two approved
heavy cast iron or bronze, plated, pintle type
hinges measuring approximately 41/2" long by 2"
wide overall and approximately 1/2" thick with at
least 1/2" dia. by 11/2" long pin in a 1" housing
and securely fastened to kiln with heavy plated
bolts.
The latch shall be cast iron or bronze
with plated sliding eccen-tric headed steel bolt
or approved cam action type latch for holding door
tight against front of kiln. The latch shall be
provided with means for locking the door with a
padlock. Hinges shall be mounted on face of front
panel immediately adjacent to door and shall
connect between door and front panel.
Door shall be equipped with handle constructed of
not less than 1/2" diameter stainless steel rod or
chrome plated steel tubing extending the full
height of door, securely fastened to top and
bottom with a minimum of two cap screws and lockwashers at each location. Handle shall be placed
on door opposite from hinge side. Door shall be
provided with a minimum of one front sight peep
hole with mica shield cover.
Door shall be
capable of being opened a minimum of 120 degrees
without sag and shall be so secured that the front
pan does not bulge or pull away from the kiln when
the door is fully opened or locked in position.
Door shall be mounted on the right or left as
specified.
2.
NYSCA
Kiln shall encase a firing chamber of approx. 18"
wide x 18" high x 18" deep or other approved
dimensions to give a volume of not less than 5,670
cu. in.
Firing chamber and door shall be lined
with K-26 refractory insulating brick, backed up
by K-20 insulating brick.
The bricks shall be
laid on a 2-1/2" surface and shall be backed with
4-1/2" laid on the 4-1/2" surface of K-20.
Refractory insulating brick shall have not less
than 2600oF rating and shall be made by A.P.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 137
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Green, Babcock and Wilcox, Harbison Walker, Johns
Manville.
3.
C.
Outside of kiln casing shall
after 8 hours of operation.
not
exceed
225oF
Kiln Cabinet Steel Stand
Stand shall be of angle iron construction with the top
angles not less than 2" x 2" x 1/8", diagonally braced
at back area on both sides.
Legs shall be of angle
iron of same size as top angles or of tubular steel of
approved diameter to carry load.
Stand shall be of
proper height to locate center of kiln heating chamber
approximately 4 feet above floor level.
At floor,
bottom ends of leg shall be connected by angle irons
(not less than 2" x 2" x 1/8") to properly distribute
weight of kiln and not damage floor surface.
Stand
shall be equipped with horizontal angle iron braces not
less than 1" x 1" x 1/8" at two points, 5" and 17" from
floor on which shall be fastened heavy steel plates to
provide stand with one No. 18 gage steel shelf. Stand
shall be fully enclosed with No. 18 gage cold rolled
steel, equipped with hinged door and snap catch. One
piece construction for combined kiln and stand shall be
acceptable in lieu of two piece construction specified
above.
NYSCA
D.
Cabinet stand shall be painted with two coats of gray
heat resisting and rust resisting paint, hammertone
finish.
E.
Kiln shall be equipped with three (3) heating elements
made up of Kanthal A-1 metal coils and shall be of
sufficient length to produce a temperature in firing
chamber of approximately 2350oF under normal working
conditions.
Elements shall be fully enclosed or sit
in open grooves cut into refractory lining of firing
chamber in the two sides, rear door or two sides and
bottom and shall be secured in place by pins,
porcelain or ceramic channels.
Leads from elements
shall be drawn through kiln wall through porcelain
tubes of proper size to take leads and these porcelain
tubes shall be packed with rock wool to prevent
passage of heat from firing chamber to outer terminal
junction box.
Rod type heating elements shall be
acceptable.
Heating elements shall be designed to
operated on three phase, four wire, 208 volt, 60
cycle,
alternating
current
supply
from
building
service. Heating elements shall be made of Kanthal A1 wire made by Fire Clay Co.; Jeliff Mfg. Co.; Haskins
Chromel Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 138
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved type terminal
junction box in which shall be installed a panel board
of heat resisting non-conductor material on which
shall be mounted the required electrical binding posts
to take heating elements, leads, etc.
Binding posts
shall be of brass and all interior and exterior
electrical
connections
shall
terminate
at
these
binding posts.
Electrical binding posts for all heating elements as
specified in the following specifications shall be made
of brass or of any other suitable material approved for
this use by the Authority.
Manufacturer must submit
evidence of at least five years' experience that all
newly submitted binding posts will be maintenance free
and tend toward easy replacement of heating elements to
which they are connected.
G.
Auxiliary Equipment, Controls
Each kiln shall be equipped with the following
equipment with all interconnections made complete and
ready to operate:
NYSCA
1.
Kiln shall be equipped with a 60 ampere three pole
unfused disconnect switch for operation on 208
volt, 60 cycle, 3 phase Alternating Current, type
A as made by A & H, Square "D", Bull Dog, mounted
on exterior of kiln casing or cabinet. Where the
current per phase does not exceed 25 Amps. a 30
ampere switch, A-H 7810 will be acceptable.
2.
Kiln shall be equipped with three (3) approved
rotary or toggle switches each of which shall
control one of the heating elements and each
element switch shall be provided with its own
pilot light in series showing current on or off
element.
3.
Thermocouple:
Kiln shall be equipped with an
approved chromel-alumel thermocouple, Wheelco No.
CA-SC-19F with a 12" long by 1/2" diameter
standard drawn nickel or similar high temperature
alloy protecting tube and adjustable flange and
equipped with Wheelco 46-4500 chromel-alumel No.
14 gage (stranded) heat-resistive covered lead
wire.
4.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved indicating
and limiting pyrometer or controller calibrated to
2500oF, Wheelco "Limitrol" Model No. 741-P.
Controller shall be designed to operate through a
three pole contactor.
If current per phase
exceeds 25 Amps, a 3 pole, 60 ampere contactor of
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 139
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Automatic Switch Co., Bulletin 1034, shall be
furnished.
However, if current is less than 25
Amps, a 30 ampere contactor will be accepted.
Magnetic coil of such contactor shall be designed
to operate on 120 volt, 60 cycle alternating
current and controller shall be designed to
automatically cut of the power to kiln through the
contactor when any predetermined
temperature
within the range has been reached.
Controller shall be calibrated for operation with
thermocouple and lead wire hereinbefore specified.
Controller shall be equipped with a means of
opening power circuit to kiln, when thermocouple
circuit is broken (i.e., shall have T.C. and
T.C.B. leads).
Controllers shall be Model No.
741-P, made by Wheelco Instrument Co., Brown
Instrument Co.; Model JL made by West Instrument
Company. Controller shall be equipped with a means
of limiting the maximum setting of the limiting
operating mechanism so that it will be impossible
to heat kiln above the safe maximum temperature of
the kiln heating elements as prescribed by the
manufacturer of the kiln.
Controller shall be
mounted on kiln with spacers to provide air space
between controller and kiln casing.
Controller
shall be further insulated by a panel composed of
two pieces of 1/8" thick transite board separated
by a one (1) inch thick 85% magnesia block
insulation. Panels shall be of sufficient size to
overlap sides and back of controller by one inch.
Furnish an electrically operated manual rest
synchronous motor operated interval timer enclosed
in a metal box equipped with a lock. Box with
enclosed timer shall be mounted on kiln and wired
into control circuit to automatically cut-off
current supply to kiln when predetermined time
setting has elapsed. Timer shall be Model No. RS12H made by Industrial Timer Corp.; Model No. 2409
made by Paragon Elec. Co.
5.
H.
NYSCA
Kiln shall be equipped with manufacturer's name
plate which should provide all electrical data
giving rating, current, voltage, etc. Kiln should
also be provided with a proper size plate securely
fastened to front of kiln door with 2" high
letters in red spelling word "DANGER."
Kiln shall have a max. rating of 10.0 KW. Kiln shall be
designed to reach maximum temperature of 2350oF. in not
more than 6 hours.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 140
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
I.
Kiln shall be American Art Clay Co., Model No. AH-10;
Harper Electric Furnace Corp., Model No. SIC151821-SF;
or Norman Kilns, Inc., Model No. N4.
J.
Each kiln shall be
additional supplies.
furnished
with
the
following
Seventy-two (72) assorted refractory porcelain posts.
Seventy-two (72) assorted refractory stilts.
Five (5) lbs. Kilnwash.
One (1) box cones type 05.
One (1) box cones type 06.
Six (6) full size (16" x 16") or 12 half size (8" x
16") silicone carbide shelves.
K.
12.103
NYSCA
Kilns shall be assembled with all their electric
connections by the Contractor who shall arrange for a
competent person to demonstrate and operate kiln after
electric service has been connected to kiln.
Test
shall be made with an authorized person, assigned by
the Authority to prove that apparatus is complete and
in good operating condition.
Manufacturer of kiln
shall furnish either an instruction book or a
typewritten set of instructions.
SMALL ELECTRICAL KILN - SIZE 11" X 11" X 11"
A.
Electrical Kiln shall be constructed of 16 gage minimum
cold
rolled
steel
welded
casing,
enclosing
a
refractory lined firing chamber or muffle, of 11" by
11" size, complete for mounting on steel and stand
unless specified or shown on drawings as bench
mounted. Front door shall be size hinged and made of
steel similar to kiln casing. door shall be hung with
an extended plate with steel hinges welded to steel
door plate and kiln casing side.
Door shall fit
tightly into recessed front wall of kiln and shall be
equipped with two (2) approved latches for holding
door tight against front of kiln.
Door shall be
equipped with front sight peep hole of approved size.
B.
Muffle lining shall be not less than 4-1/2" thick
consisting of insulation on sides, bottom and top of
2-1/2" thick refractory block capable of withstanding
2,000oF without failure, and 2" insulation made of Mica
powder or magnesia block.
Door insulation shall be
not less than 4-1/2" thick consisting of solid
refractory block capable of withstanding 2,000oF
without failure.
Refractory block shall be made by
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 141
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Babcock Wilcox Armstrong, Harbison-Walker,
Manville, or other approved refractory block.
C.
Johns-
Heating elements shall be made of nickel-chromium or
"Kanthal" metal wire set in open grooves of muffle on
not less than four (4) sides of muffle, two (2) side
walls, rear wall and front door.
Elements shall terminate at posts in side terminal box.
Kiln shall be equipped with a switch to control
current to elements for three conditions of heating,
such as low, medium and high and also off positions.
Element wire shall be of metal specified made by the
Driver-Harris Corp.; Jeliff Mfg. Co.; Hoskins Chromel
Co.
Kiln shall also be equipped with a manual reset
interval timer enclosed in a metal box equipped with a
lock.
Box with enclosed timer shall be mounted on
kiln.
Timer shall be Model No. RS-12H made by
Industrial Timer Corp.; Mark Timer made by Rodale
Manufacturing Company.
D.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved pyrometric cone
heat shut off device, "Kiln-gard" unit, which can be
used up to 2,000oF. Kiln-gard unit shall be properly
wired into circuit for control of current supply to
heating elements of kiln.
E.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved pyrometer
complete with thermocouple made of Chromel-Alumel
metals for indication of temperatures within firing
chamber. Pyrometer shall be securely fastened to kiln
in location of or ease of reading.
F.
Unless kiln is specified or shown on the Drawings as
bench mounted, it shall be provided with a welded
steel floor stand of size to fit base of kiln casing.
Kiln stand shall be equipped with steel shelf of No.
12 gage steel plate with four edges turned up for
attaching and enclosing shelf plate.
When kiln is
specified or shown on the Drawings as bench mounted,
provide a vented false bottom with flanges for
mounting on bench top.
G.
Kiln and stand or false bottom shall be given two (2)
coats of approved heat resisting gray paints.
H.
Kiln shall be completely assembled on steel stand or
false bottom and shall be of size and construction as
specified.
I.
NYSCA
Kiln shall be Model No. 6 made by Norman Ceramics;
Steward Clay Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 142
05/14/04
J.
DESIGN NO. _____
Each kiln shall be furnished
supplies of approved quality:
with
the
following
Two (2) boxes small pyrometric cones.
Two (2) silicon carbide shelves to fit firing chamber.
Sixteen (16) assorted refractory posts.
One (1) gross of assorted refractory silts.
Three (3) pounds of kiln wash.
One (1) repair kit consisting of six (6) nichrome
splice coils, one (1) ounce of nichromate paste, one
(1) test light and three (3) dozen nichrome pins.
K.
Kiln shall be rated at 1.6KW, 115V, A.C., and shall be
permanently connected to its source of supply.
Provide an unfused disconnect switch, AH 68-8.
L.
Kiln shall have nameplate securely attached thereto,
located for ease of reading. Nameplate shall indicate
manufacturer, trade mark or other identification
symbol, together with nonerasable markings giving
current, operating voltage, wattage, maximum operating
temperature and date of installation. Kiln shall also
be provided with a metal plate securely fastened to
front of kiln door with 2" high letters in red
spelling word "DANGER."
M.
After installation, Contractor shall arrange for a
competent person to demonstrate proper operation of
the kiln.
Test shall be made with an authorized
person assigned by
the Authority, to prove that the
apparatus is complete and in good operating condition.
Manufacturer of kiln shall furnish a complete set of
printed or typewritten kiln operating instructions.
N.
Kiln shall be constructed in compliance with and
approved by the (N.Y.C. Bureau of Gas and Electricity
and the N.Y.C. Electrical Code).
12.104
ENAMELING KILN - SIZE 8" X 10" X 4"
A.
NYSCA
Each electric enameling kiln shall be constructed in
compliance with the rules and regulations of the New
York City Electric Code and the Bureau of Gas and
Electricity of the City of New York.
Any electric
kiln which does not meet the above requirements will
not be approved for purchase and use in any of the New
York City School Buildings.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 143
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Each electric enameling kiln shall have a metal name
plate securely attached thereto, located for ease of
reading.
Name plate shall indicate manufacturer,
trademark or other identification symbol, together
with nonerasable markings, giving current, operating
voltage, wattage, maximum operating temperature, and
serial number.
Kiln shall be rated at 2.5 KW, single phase, 3 wire,
120/208 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
NYSCA
C.
Kiln shall be provided with legs or other means of
allowing air to circulate, under he kiln. Space under
kiln shall be a minimum of two inches.
D.
The electric enameling kiln shall be constructed of
minimum 16 gage cold rolled sheet steel casing. Kiln
and legs shall be given two (2) coats of approved heat
and rust resisting gray paint, hammer-tone finish.
E.
The firing chamber refractory block shall be entirely
encased with insulating material to a thickness of not
less than 2-1/2" between refractory block and the
sheet steel casing.
Approved insulating materials
shall be mica pellets; 85% magnesia block.
F.
The firing chamber shall be a minimum
and cubic content of approximately
shall be constructed of insulating
not less than 2-1/2" in thickness
withstanding a temperature of 2,300oF
manufactured
by
A.P.
Green
Co.,
Harbison-Walker, Johns-Manville.
G.
Kiln shall be front loading type (side swinging)
equipped with a hinged front door constructed of sheet
steel of not less than 16 gage, enclosing refractory
material equal in quality and thickness to that of
firing chamber.
Door shall be hung on approved
continuous steel hinge, securely fastened to door and
kiln casing.
Door shall fit tightly into front
opening of kiln and shall be equipped with peephole
and approved magnetic door catch, or other approved
device for holding door tight against front of kiln.
Door shall be furnished with a handle that remains
cool during firing operations.
H.
Kiln shall be equipped with heating elements made of
approved metal wire coils, "Kanthal" A-1, Nichrome V,
Chromel A. Elements shall be of sufficient length and
resistance to reach a temperature of at least 1,550oF
under normal working conditions within thirty minutes.
Elements shall be renewable without disassembling of
kiln. Leads from elements of firing chamber shall be
of 8" x 10" x 4"
320 cu. in. It
refractory block
and capable of
without failure,
Babcock-Wilcox,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 144
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
drawn through kiln wall in porcelain tubes of length
equal to wall thickness of kiln.
Porcelain tubes
shall be packed with rock wool after elements have
been drawn through tubes. This rock wool is required
to prevent passage and loss of heat from interior of
firing chamber to element terminal junction box.
Heating elements shall be of the above specified wire
as manufactured by the Driver-Harris Corp., Jeliff
Mfg. Co.
NYSCA
I.
Kiln must be so constructed to maintain a temperature
of 1,550oF during the repeated opening and closing of
door during continuous firing.
J.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved junction panel
box for leads from heating elements mounted for ease
of access for checking, repairs, etc.
Box shall be
furnished with a panel of heat resistant non-conductor
material mounted on insulators.
On this panel of
junction box shall be mounted the required number of
electrical binding posts for elements terminal leads
and electrical circuit connections.
Binding posts
shall be made of brass and all interior and exterior
electrical
connections
shall
terminate
at
these
binding posts.
This terminal junction box shall be
furnished with an approved cover.
K.
Kiln shall be provided with an approved indicating
pyrometer, thermocouple, and approved limiting control
shall be "Kiln-trol" as manufactured by Kiln-guard Co.
An input regulator, the equal of "INF" by "Robert
Shaw" will be accepted in lieu of "Kiln-trol."
L.
Kiln shall be permanently wired.
Provide a 2 pole
unfused 30 Amp type main disconnect switch, A-H6808.
M.
Furnish one (1) pound of kiln wash, and twelve (12)
assorted triangular bars to rest trivets.
N.
Enameling Kiln as made by Norman Kilns, Inc., the
American Art Clay Co., the Electric Hotpack Co., Inc.
O.
Where required, when the unit is not bench mounted but
is free standing as determined by the plans, a sturdy
angle iron stand (1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angles) is
to be provided by the supplier of the kiln. Height of
stand to be approximately 30": a shelf (16 ga.) to be
provided at approximately 18" from floor; stand to be
bolted to floor; and kiln to be installed, complete
and ready to operate on the stand.
P.
Submit shop drawings for approval.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 145
05/14/04
12.105
DESIGN NO. _____
COMBINATION KICK & ELECTRIC POTTER'S WHEEL
A.
Potter's wheel shall be sturdily constructed and
equipped with a 30" diameter, extra heavy steel
flywheel, mounted on a 1" steel shaft, set in totally
enclosed ball bearings with a ball thrust bearing on
the underside of the wheel.
Head shall be 12" cast
aluminum and removable.
The work pan shall be
equipped with an adjustable swinging arm rest.
B.
Potter's wheel shall be furnished with an adjustable
contour seat, and foot rests.
C.
Motor for Potter's wheel shall be 1/3 H.P., designed to
operate on single phase, 120 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
D.
Potter's wheel shall
complete ready for use.
E.
Combination Kick & Electric Potter's Wheel shall be
model No. 4133, The Craftool Co.
12.106
be
delivered
and
installed
ELECTRIC POTTER'S WHEEL
A.
Electric Potter's Wheel shall be a two-speed, motor
driven, self contained, table model.
Worktable shall be of heavy, noncorrosive, one piece,
cast aluminum, with high splash rim and rounded
corners. It shall be sloped slightly so that drippings
will flow into a removable aluminum water reservoir.
Motor and enclosed drive, which shall be a reduction
gear transmission, running in an oil bath, shall be
fitted underneath the worktable and bolted to the steel
base of the worktable.
Throwing head shall be a 12"
diameter, wheel of cast aluminum, machined face with
concentric centering circles, and shall run level and
true with no wobble or eccentric movement.
A two position switch shall be provided for changing
speed of throwing head from 65 to 95 R.P.M.
Approximate over-all dimensions are 17" wide, 25" long
and 12" high.
NYSCA
B.
Electric Potter's Wheel shall be driven by a two (2)
speed, 1/3 horsepower motor, designed to operate on
120 volts, and provide with a heavy duty, three wire
(one grounding) cord, and plug to match receptacle.
C.
Provide in convenient location on electric potter's
wheel a magnetic starter completely wired to motor
with approved materials.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 146
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Provide with, and affixed to the electric potter's
wheel, a steel stand with a seat as provided by
manufacturer of potter's wheel.
Electric potter's
wheel stand shall be made of 1-3/16" diameter steel
tubing, shaped and welded for strength and rigidity.
Stand shall have four (4) sturdy legs with chromium
plated feet. The four legs shall fit into, and shall
be secured to individual bases. Bases shall be 1-1/4"
x 4" dia. chromium plated steel flanges. Bases shall
be rigidly fastened to the floor.
Four round metal
cups welded to top of stand shall fit around the four
rubber feet of the potter's wheel for mounting. Stand
shall also have a contoured seat approximately 15-3/4"
wide by 15" long and 18-1/4" above the floor. Stands
over-all length approximately 37-1/2" and finished in
a green enamel.
E.
Electric potter's wheel shall be completely assembled
and installed ready for use.
F.
Electric potter's wheel shall be American Art Clay Co.,
Amaco Electric Potter's Wheel No. 1 mounted on a No.
1B stand with complete jiggering outfit and arm rest.
12.109
4
CLAY STORAGE BIN
A.
The bin shall be constructed of soapstone and rest on a
steel angle iron frame with iron pipe legs. Bin shall
have two (2) separated compartments each with its own
door. Doors are to be installed on the top, each with
two (2) hinges and a locking device, so that they
swing up and towards the back of the bin.
B.
Clay storage
Drawings.
C.
Artificial soapstone shall not contain asbestos.
12.109A
NYSCA
bin
Shall
be
constructed
as
shown
on
CLAY STORAGE BIN - MOBILE
A.
The bin shall be all metal, approx. 28" long x 18" deep
x 28" high, having stainless steel interior, and
mounted on casters.
B.
Two swinging, double walled access doors shall be
provided on the top.
The interior clay storage unit
shall be removable.
It shall be perforated on the
underside, seated over a water pan, fillable from the
top, and located on the bottom of the cabinet.
C.
The complete unit shall be set on four (4) heavy duty,
swivel type, rubber tired casters, and shall be
finished in baked gray enamel.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 147
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Mobile clay storage bin shall be the Craftool Co. Model
No. 7040; Brodhead Garret Mod. CC-7 (Stock No.
463149).
12.110
WEDGING TABLE
A.
Wedging Table shall be a floor model for wedging or
kneading clay before forming and made of heavy gage
reinforced steel angle construction. Table support
stand shall be of steel angle construction, and
adjustable from 30" to 36" in height. Table top with
steel angle frame shall measure 20" x 24" x 21/2" deep
and shall have plaster of paris bat with a canvas
wedging cloth which snaps firmly over the table.
Tension bar shall be placed at center rear of table
top and hold steel cutting wire. Tension bar shall be
10" high minimum. One end of cutting wire shall be
secured to front of table top frame with adjustable
hook to permit changes in tension of wire. Metal stand
and table top frame shall have chip proof baked enamel
finish.
B.
Wedging Table shall be Model 9625, Stock No. 135130 as
supplied by Brodhead-Garrett Co.
12.110A
A.
Wedging Board shall be a bench top model for wedging or
kneading
clay
before
forming.
Base
shall
be
constructed of 3" x 3/4" solid wood and have two
recess areas, each measuring 10" x 12" x 13/8" deep,
waterproofed and filled flush with plaster of paris
bat. Base shall have a canvas wedging cloth which
snaps firmly over the bat. Tension bar shall be placed
at center rear of base and hold steel cutting wire.
Tension bar shall be 10" high minimum. One end of
cutting wire shall be secured to front of table top
frame with adjustable hook to permit changes in
tension of wire. All wood surfaces shall have a heavy
application of water-resistant lacquer.
B.
Wedging Board shall be Model 11711W, Stock No. 320728
as supplied by Brodhead-Garrett Co.
12.111
NYSCA
WEDGING BOARD
BANDING WHEEL
A.
Banding wheel shall be heavy duty 8" diameter banding
wheel with needle and ball thrust bearing. Head shall
have scribed concentric circles.
B.
One (1) plaster bat 10 inches in diameter recessed to
fit 8" banding wheel shall be furnished.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 148
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Banding Wheel shall be Model 7008 with Plaster Bat
Model BW-17 made by The Craftool Co.
12.112
JAR MILL (BALL MILL)
A.
Jar Mill shall be a bench-mounted, motor driven, double
porcelain jar, pebble mill. Each jar shall be roller
driven.
Mill shall be adjusted and ready to operate
and be completely equipped with motor, pulleys, belts,
pulley guard, two (2) white vitrified porcelain 1/2
gallon jars, and 2.5 lbs. of flint pebbles for each
jar.
B.
Jar Mill shall be driven by at least a 1/4 horsepower
motor designed to operate on 120V, 60Hz, 1ph.
C.
Provide in convenient location on jar mill a magnetic
starter completely wired to motor with approved
materials.
D.
Jar Mill shall have 20" machine driven rubber rollers.
E.
Furnish one (1) extra gallon size vitrified porcelain
jar complete with locking device.
F.
Jar Mill shall be Model No. 14621 made by The Craftool
Co.; 2" x 15" Special Jar Rolling Mill made by Paul O.
Abbe, Inc.; Amaco Ball Mill made by American Art Clay
Co.
12.113
NYSCA
SPRAY BOOTH - CERAMIC
A.
Ceramic Spray Booth shall be approximately 24" wide x
28" deep x 28" high, stand mounted or bench mounted,
as required, and shall be used for ceramic spraying
only. The booth shall have a galvanized interior with
spray baffles and a top exhaust outlet with glass wool
filter.
B.
Exhaust fan shall have a totally enclosed motor capable
of handling 1100 CFM (free delivery) designed to
operate on 120 volts single phase 60 cycles (5.2 amps)
equipped with a heavy duty three wire cord (one
grounding) and plug to match receptacle.
C.
Booth shall be given two (2) coats of gray enamel,
baked on.
D.
Ceramic Spray Booth shall be Model No 11440, stand
mounted on Model No. 11441, bench mounted, as made by
The Craftool Co.; Amaco Ceramic Spray Booth as made by
American Art Clay Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 149
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
The following accessories and spares, as furnished by
the manufacturer of the above Ceramic Spray Booth,
shall be furnished with the unit:
Four (4) Glass wool filters (spares).
One (1) Ball bearing turntable.
One (1) Heavy duty switch for exhaust fan.
One (1) Pilot light (to indicate fan on).
One (1) Air filter and regulator, attached to booth.
One (1) Portable ceramic spraying outfit complete with
air compressor powered by 1/4 H.P. Universal Motor
designed to operate on 120 volts, single phase, A.C.
(unless otherwise specified), three wire 6 foot long
cord with plug to match receptacle in room, 15 feet of
hose with spray gun and container.
Furnish Craftool
Outfit No.2.
F.
12.114
NYSCA
Model
12191
sprayer,
Amaco
Spryer
Provide metal nameplate at top of booth saying "NOT TO
BE USED FOR LACQUER, ENAMEL OR PRINT SPRAY WORK."
Minimum size of letters, 5/16" high.
GRAPHIC ARTS CAMERA
A.
Unit shall be a floor mounted vertical type camera for
the shooting of negatives, stats, halftones, line
shots, reverses, and re-sizings.
B.
Graphic Arts Camera shall have diaphragm control,
ground glass for pre-shot viewing, and vacuum holder
system with pump-motor unit for film. Scaling charts
shall be furnished with the camera. Unit shall conform
to the following specifications:
1.
Final Image Size:
14" x 18"
2.
Film Size Max.:
16" x 20"
3.
Contact Screen:
16" x 20"
4.
Copyboard Size:
16" x 20"
5.
Size And Focus Movement:
Manual
6.
Lens:
Rodenstock
7.
Enlargement/Reduction:
300% up, 331/3%
down.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 150
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
8.
Four (4) 420 watt
quartz lamps.
C.
Camera shall have electronic timer/integrator with
eight (8) memory channels for storing main, flash and
backlighting exposure information. Light integrator
system shall have touch-activated keypad, L.E.D.
digital
display
window
and
light-reading
photo
detector probe for exposures to tenths of a light unit
and/or second.
D.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 20 amps. Camera shall be fitted
with heavy duty three wire (one grounding) line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
E.
Graphic Arts Camera shall be Model VVE1418 of nuArc
Company, Inc., Chicago, Illinois.
12.115
NYSCA
Lighting System:
PLATEMAKER
A.
Unit shall be a flip/top type exposure system for
making precise exposures for platemaking, proofing
materials, films, and screen emulsions.
B.
Platemaker's size inside blanket beading shall be at
least 23" x 27". Unit shall have solid state power
supply, 1000 watt instant-on Mercury Lamp, and
integrator system
which compensates for voltage
fluctuations to keep exposures uniform. Platemaker
shall feature one-piece glass frame with rubber
blanket and vacuum system for holding plates. Unit
shall have power driven blowers for dissipating odors,
preventing temperature rise on vacuum frame and
prevent accumulation of residue.
C.
Unit shall have electronic exposure control with eight
(8) built-in memory banks for entering, selecting and
storing individually programmed exposure information.
Integrator system shall have touch-activated keypad,
L.E.D. digital display window and light-reading photo
detector probe for programming exposures to tenths of
a light unit.
D.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Input to lamp shall be 1000 watts.
Vacuum pump motor shall be 1/6 horsepower. Platemaker
shall be fitted with heavy duty three wire (one
grounding) line cord with plug to match receptacle.
E.
Platemaker shall be complete, adjusted and ready for
use and supplied with one (1) Replacement Lamp.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 151
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Provide Mercury Lamp with full parts and service
warranty for a period of one (1) year, commencing on
the date of demonstration.
G.
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
the Platemaker at time agreed upon by the Chairperson
Of Technology of the school.
H.
Platemaker shall be Model FT26V-1 with C1200 Electronic
Exposure Control Accessory, all of nuArc Company,
Inc., Chicago, Illinois.
12.117
NYSCA
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - IMAGE SIZE 8-1/2" X 13-1/2"
A.
Unit shall be a motorized floor mounted console type
offset duplicator designed for the production of one
and two color line work, solid and halftone images on
sheet paper stock up to 8-1/2" x 14" in size.
B.
Unit shall be of heavy duty construction with welded
steel "T" beam frame, sealed cylinder bearings, and
adjustable glider feet for leveling. Offset duplicator
shall have a single lever control which selects the
number of cycles in each operating function, and a
neutral mode which deactivates functions in the proper
sequence. Unit shall have four (4) feed system blowers
and nine (9) vacuum feed tubes for sheet separation
and direct pick-up. Each vacuum tube shall have
individual shut off valve for paper width changes.
Offset duplicator shall have calibrated control for
paper thickness and buckle control to regulate thrust
for vertical register. Feed and chain delivery shall
hold up to 5,000 sheets. Master and impression
cylinders shall automatically adjust to the blanket
cylinder to compensate for differences in master or
impression paper thickness; master and impression
cylinders shall contact the blanket cylinder when
paper is fed, and immediately separate from it when
feeding stops. Unit shall have ink roller system with
varied roller diameters. Rollers shall include three
(3) oscillating rollers, two (2) ductor rollers, five
(5) distributor rollers and two (2) ball- bearing ink
form rollers. Unit shall be equipped with complete
wire guard safety system, adjustable universal plate
clamp and removable ink fountain. Wire guard safety
system shall have interlock switch to stop machine
when guard is opened. Offset duplicator shall conform
to the following specifications:
1.
Paper Sizes:
3" x 5" minimum,
8-1/2 x 14" maximum.
2.
Paper Weights:
12 lb. bond minimum,
110 lb. index
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 152
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
maximum.
3.
Paper Receiver:
Large capacity chain
delivery (5000
sheets).
4.
Maximum Image Area:
8-1/2" x 13-1/2"
5.
Impression Gripper Margin:
1/4"
6.
Copying Positioning:
Lateral:
1/4"
overall
adjustment
on pinbar clamp.
Vertical:
12"
overall adjustment;
image position on
blanket
does
not
change.
Angular: adjustment
of pinbar clamp for
true
squaring
of
copy.
C.
NYSCA
7.
Speed:
2500 IPH – 10000
IPH.
8.
Drive Motor:
3/4
horsepower,
single phase, 115
Volts, 60 Hz A.C.
9.
Pump Motor:
1/3
horsepower,
single phase, 115
Volts, 60 Hz A.C.
10.
Lever Control Modes:
Night Latch
Neutral
Ink
Image
Feed
Unit shall be furnished with the following accessories
as supplied by the manufacturer of the offset
duplicator (A.B. Dick model numbers given):
1.
One (1) Work Organizer #1-9801
2.
One (1) Work Light #1-3582
3.
One (1) Ink Roller Clean-Up Device #1-3628
4.
One (1) Swingaway Color Head #1-8855S
5.
One (1) Super Aquamatic Dampening System #1-3642
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 153
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Offset duplicator shall be designed to operate on
single phase, 115 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 20 amps. Provide
with six foot heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
E.
Provide in a convenient location on offset duplicator,
two (2) magnetic starters and push buttons completely
wired to the motors with approved materials.
F.
The following additional starting equipment to fit the
duplicator provided shall be furnished:
G.
12.117A
A.
NYSCA
1.
Blanket cleaning wash - 5 gallons.
2.
Fountain solution - 5 quarts.
3.
Glaze remover - 1 quart.
4.
Black ink - Minimum of five one (1) pound cans or
cartridges, medium drying.
5.
Covers, molletons, outside - 3 sets, if used on
machine provided.
6.
Covers, molletons,
machine provided.
7.
Hand cleaner - two one (1) pound cans.
8.
Wiperites (cotton pads) - 20 packages.
9.
Blankets, Rubber - 2 blankets.
10.
Plate preservation,
quart.
11.
Paper masters, 10 x 15, medium run - 2 packages of
100 each.
12.
Clean-up mats, for offset duplicator - one package
of 500.
base
for
-
3
sets,
plates
if
used
provided
-
on
one
Offset Duplicator shall be Model 8820 of A.B. Dick
Company, Chicago, Illinois.
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - IMAGE SIZE 11" X 16-1/2"
Unit shall be a motorized floor mounted console type
offset duplicator designed for the production of one
and two color line work, solid and halftone images on
sheet paper stock up to 11" x 17" in size.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 154
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Unit shall be of heavy duty construction with welded
steel "T" beam frame, sealed cylinder bearings, and
adjustable glider feet for leveling. Offset duplicator
shall have a single lever control which selects the
number of cycles in each operating function, and a
neutral mode which deactivates functions in the proper
sequence. Unit shall have six (6) feed system blowers
and eleven (11) vacuum feed tubes for sheet separation
and direct pick-up. Each vacuum tube shall have
individual shut off valve for paper width changes.
Offset duplicator shall have calibrated control for
paper thickness and buckle control to regulate thrust
for vertical register. Master and impression cylinders
shall automatically adjust to the blanket cylinder to
compensate for differences in master or impression
paper thickness; master and impression cylinders shall
contact the blanket cylinder when paper is fed, and
immediately separate from it when feeding stops. Unit
shall have ink roller system with varied roller
diameters. Rollers shall include three (3) oscillating
rollers, two (2) ductor rollers, five (5) distributor
rollers and two (2) ball- bearing ink form rollers.
Unit shall be equipped with complete wire guard safety
system, adjustable universal plate clamp and removable
ink fountain. Wire guard safety system shall have
interlock switch to stop machine when guard is opened.
Offset duplicator shall conform to the following
specifications:
NYSCA
1.
Paper Sizes:
3" x 5" minimum,
11" x 17" maximum.
2.
Paper Weights:
12 lb. bond minimum, 110
lb. index maximum.
3.
Paper Receiver:
Large capacity chain
delivery (5000 sheets).
4.
Maximum Image Area:
11" x 16-1/2"
5.
Plates:
Paper/metal/ polymer;
pinbar/straight.
6.
Mounting:
Self-Opening, straight
edge, pinbar
7.
Plate Adjustment:
1/4"
8.
Blanket Size:
12-5/8" x 19-3/16"+
9.
Feed Table Raise:
Calibrated table raise
control with dual raise
speed controls .012"-
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 155
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
.024"
C.
D.
NYSCA
10.
Feed and Delivery:
20-1/4"+ feed capacity,
22-1/2"+ delivery
capacity, Chain Delivery.
11.
Impression Gripper Margin:
12.
Ink System Control:
Enlarged ink fountain
with 14 adjustment screws
and 11 position inking
control.
13.
Speed:
3000 IPH - 10000 IPH.
14.
Drive Motor:
3/4 horsepower, single
phase, 115 Volts, 60 Hz
A.C.
15.
Pump Motor:
1/3 horsepower, single
phase, 115 Volts, 60 Hz
A.C.
16.
Lever Control Modes:
Night Latch
Neutral
Ink
Image
Feed
1/4"
Offset duplicator shall be furnished with Townsend
Swing Away T-51 color head as manufactured by Townsend
Industries, Altoona, Iowa. Unit shall be furnished
with the following accessories as supplied by the
manufacturer of the offset duplicator (A.B. Dick model
numbers given):
1.
One (1) Work Organizer #1-9801
2.
One (1) Work Light #1-3582
3.
One (1) Ink Roller Clean-Up Device #1-9828
4.
One (1) Super Aquamatic Dampening System
5.
One (1) Infrared/Dry Powder Spray Attachment - 115
Volt #1-3880
Offset duplicator shall be designed to operate on
single phase, 115 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 20 amps. Provide
with six foot heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 156
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Provide in a convenient location on offset duplicator,
two (2) magnetic starters and push buttons completely
wired to the motors with approved materials.
F.
The following additional starting equipment to fit the
duplicator provided shall be furnished:
G.
12.117B
NYSCA
1.
Blanket cleaning wash - 5 gallons.
2.
Fountain solution - 5 quarts.
3.
Glaze remover - 1 quart.
4.
Black ink - Minimum of five one (1) pound cans or
cartridges, medium drying.
5.
Covers, molletons, outside - 3 sets, if used on
machine provided.
6.
Covers, molletons,
machine provided.
7.
Hand cleaner - two one (1) pound cans.
8.
Wiperites (cotton pads) - 20 packages.
9.
Blankets, Rubber - 2 blankets.
10.
Plate preservative,
quart.
11.
Paper masters, 10 x 15, medium run - 2 packages of
100 each.
12.
Plates, metal to fit image size
provided - 2 packages of 100 each.
13.
Clean-up mats, for offset duplicator - one package
of 500.
base
for
-
3
sets,
plates
if
used
provided
of
-
on
one
machine
Offset Duplicator shall be Model 9810 of A.B. Dick
Company, Chicago, Illinois.
OFFSET DUPLICATOR - TABLE TOP
A.
Offset Duplicator shall be heavy duty , precision built
machine capable of handling paper from 13 lbs. to 90
lbs. (min.) rating and 3" x 5" to 11.75" x 14.5"
(min.) in size and printing up to 7,000 (min.)
impressions per hour.
Unit shall be table top or
bench mounted.
B.
Machine shall be complete and ready for operation with
full image positioning control, feed table and
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 157
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
receiving tray capable of holding at least 500 sheets
of 20# paper, automatic ink roller and blanket cleanup system, and swing away type safety covers over ink
rollers
and
cylinder
mechanism.
Unit
shall
accommodate paper or metal plate masters up to 10.25"
x 15" in size with a copy area of at least 9.75" x
13.18".
Machine shall meet all applicable OSHA
standards including electrical interlocks on all
primary covers.
C.
NYSCA
Duplicator shall be equipped with the following:
1.
Master clamps to accommodate straight
pinbar punched masters and metal plates.
edge
or
2.
Forwarding roller feed to impression
grippers for registration control.
cylinder
3.
Pre-set type copy counter (0 to 999) min.
4.
Single dial control for aquamatic ink system,
etching, imaging and paper feed functions.
5.
Completely disposable ink fountain.
6.
Blanket wash and fountain solution bottles.
7.
Four (4) adjustable glider feet.
8.
Instruction/Parts Manual.
9.
Plastic protective cover.
D.
Drive motor shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase
rated at 0.166 HP (min.).
Provide an 8 ft. (min.)
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) line cord with
plug to suit receptacle.
E.
Furnish the following additional supplies
quantity
indicated
of
a
type
approved
manufacturer:
in
by
the
the
1.
Six (6) quarts liquid etch.
2.
Two (2) packages (100
masters, direct image.
sheets
3.
One (1) quart
provided.
preservative
4.
Two (2) rubber blankets.
5.
Five (5) one lb. cans or cartridges of medium
drying black ink.
plate
per
pkg.),
paper
for
plates
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 158
05/14/04
F.
12.120
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
Five (5) quarts fountain solution.
7.
Six (6) quarts fountain concentrate.
8.
Five (5) quarts glaze remover.
9.
Four (4) gallons blanket cleaning wash.
10.
Two (2) packages of
blanket wash tray.
11.
Two (2) packages of five (5) each, disposable ink
cleanup tray.
12.
Two (2) pints cylinder cleaner.
13.
Two
(2)
packages
(100
plates
presensitized aluminum plates.
14.
One (1) quart of developing lacquer for aluminum
plates.
15.
One (1)
plates.
16.
Twenty (2) packages of wiperites (cotton pads).
17.
One (1) package of 500 cleanup mats.
18.
Two (2) cans, one (1) lb. each hand cleaner.
quart
plate
five
(5)
each,
desensitizer
disposable
per
for
pkg.)
aluminum
Offset duplicator, table top, shall be Model 310, A.B.
Dick Co., Chicago, IL; or Model 319, Gestetner Corp.,
Yonkers, NY.
PROOF PRESS
A.
Proof press shall be manually operated, hand brayer
inked with a sturdily constructed reciprocating bed
mounted in anti-friction bearings.
Bed actuating
mechanism shall be completely guarded.
Press shall
handle forms up to 13-1/2" x 17-1/2". Stationary bed
design may be submitted as an alternate of approval.
B.
Press shall be complete, ready to operate, mounted on a
heavy steel floor stand having three shelves.
Press
shall have a roller rack, rag box and a full size ink
plate. Cylinder packing shall be replaceable. Press
hall be supplied with a galley height bed (1968"),
with a removable precision galley plate to permit type
high or galley
proofing.
Press shall be furnished
with a 6" safety brayer with core and cast roller.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 159
05/14/04
C.
D.
12.121
DESIGN NO. _____
Furnish proof
equipment:
press
complete
with
the
following
1.
(1) - Galley Plate
2.
(1) - Tympan including blanket
3.
(12) - Extra die cut drawsheets
4.
(12) - Extra die cut undersheets
5.
(1) - Extra 6" brayer roller including core
6.
(1) - Cylinder packing
7.
(1) - Register device with adjustable side guides
8.
(1) - Set necessary tools
Proof press shall be Challenge Proof Press Model 1418E
(with stand) as made by the Challenge Machinery Co,
Grand Haven, Mich.
PILOT PRESS
A.
Press shall be a substantial printing press.
Each
press shall have a hard wood feed table at front,
moving platen, and operated by a straight handle side
lever.
Each press shall be complete, adjusted and ready for
use and furnished with a single disc, depressible
grippers, four (4) semi-steel chases, one (1) wrench,
four (4) cast rollers, and four (4) roller trucks. The
inside measurements of the chases shall be 6-1/2" x
10".
B.
12.122
NYSCA
Pilot Press shall be the Chandler and Price Co. Pilot
Press.
PILOT PRESS CABINET
A.
Each cabinet shall serve as a base for one (1) pilot
press.
Cabinets shall be finished in metallic gray,
top 24" x 24-1/2", height 25", the back of each shall
be
enclosed.
Each
cabinet
shall
contain
the
following:
One (1) drawer for storing four (4)
rollers and small tools; one (1) chase rack for
storing four (4) chases; two (2) open shelves for
stock, etc.
B.
Pilot Press Cabinet shall be Hamilton Manufacturing
Co., Lever Press School Cabinet No. 20C1; Thompson
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 160
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Cabinet Co., Model No. 15108-V;
Mfg. Co., Model No 5108-2001.
12.122A
American
Wood
Type
COMBINATION TYPE CABINET AND PILOT PRESS
A.
Unit shall consist of a hand operated pilot press
mounted on a type cabinet for use in the production of
printed media.
B.
The cabinet shall be of all steel construction,
approximately 49" long x 24" deep; the left side 31"
high, and the right side 25" high.
The top shall be
covered with stain-proof micarta.
The cabinet shall contain a lock-up unit with a 12" x
18" marble top, two large drawers, font of wood reglet
furniture, chase rack for five (5) 61/4" x 10" pilot
chases, galley rack including six (6) 83/4" x 13"
galleys and eight (8) 2/3rd size cases as follows: six
(6) California Job Cases, one (1) Lead and Slug Case
and one (1) Blank Case.
C.
D.
NYSCA
The pilot press shall be of cast aluminum alloy
construction. Press shall have a hard wood feed table
at front and moving platen. Operation shall be by a
straight side lever equipped with handle. Unit shall
be complete, adjusted and ready for use and furnished
with a single disc, depressible grippers, four (4)
semi-steel chases, four (4) cast rollers, four (4)
roller trucks, and one (1) wrench. Pilot press shall
conform to the following specifications:
1.
Inside Measurement
Of Chase:
61/2 " x 10"
2.
Platen Size:
71/4" x 121/4"
3.
Maximum Sheet Size
(width):
14"
4.
Number Of Rollers:
2
The following accessories and
furnished with the Type Cabinet:
1.
Four (4) Galleys.
2.
One (1) Font Reglets.
3.
One (1) Font Furniture.
4.
One (1) Stone.
5.
One (1) Lot Paper:
supplies
shall
be
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 161
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Two (2) Boxes Business Card Stock.
Two (2) Boxes 2-1/4" x 3-1/2" Card Stock, Rd.
Corners.
Two (2) Reams 8-1/2" x 11".
Two (2) Reams 5-1/2" x 8-1/2".
6.
One (1) Font Each:
No. 540 Casion 12 pt. caps, L.C. and figures.
No. 707 Spartan 10 pt. caps, L.C. and figures.
No. 707 Spartan 12 pt. caps, L.C. and figures.
No. 577 Park Ave. 18 pt. caps, L.C. and figures.
Copperplate Gothic 6 pt. caps, L.C. and figures
No. 4.
Copperplate Gothic 12 pt. caps and figures No. 26.
Copperplate Gothic 6 pt. caps and figures No. 3.
Copperplate Gothic 12 pt. caps and figures No. 27.
7.
One (1) Lot of Spaces and Quads:
2 Fonts 6 pt.
1 Font 10 pt.
2 Fonts 12 pt.
1 Font 18 pt.
NYSCA
8.
One (1) Stainless Steel Composing Stick (6").
9.
One (1) Stainless Steel Composing Sick (10").
10.
Two (2) 12" Stainless Steel Line Gages.
11.
Two (2) 4-1/2" Tweezers.
12.
Two (2) Pint Benzene Cans.
13.
One (1) Doz. No. 1 Quoins.
14.
Two (2) No. 1 Quoin Keys.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 162
05/14/04
E.
DESIGN NO. _____
15.
Eight (8) Tubes Assorted Ink, 1/4 lb. ((2) black,
(2) blue, (1) red, (1) yellow, (1) green, (1)
orange).
16.
One (1) Planer 8" Leather Top.
17.
One (1) Rawhide Mallet.
18.
One (1) Tube Make Ready Paste.
19.
One (1) Doz. Spring Tongue Gage Pins.
20.
Twenty-five (25) Sheets Tympan Paper (8" x 10").
21.
One (1) Qt. White Padtex.
22.
One (1) Gal. Non-flammable Phenol Type Wash.
23.
Two (2) Benzene Brushes.
24.
One (1) Ink Mixing Spatula.
25.
Five (5) lbs. Assorted 2 pt. Leads, 10, 15, 20,
25, 30.
26.
Five (5) lbs. Assorted 6 pt. Slugs, 10,15, 20, 25,
and 30.
Type Cabinet shall be Model No. 1789-BG-5 as supplied
by American Printing Equipment And Supply Company,
Long Island City, N.Y.; Stock No. 280381 as supplied
by Brodhead Garrett, Mansfield, OH. Type Cabinet shall
be furnished with all accessories and supplies listed
above.
Pilot Press shall be American Printing Equipment Pilot
Press of American Printing Equipment And Supply
Company, Long Island City, N.Y.
12.123
NYSCA
ETCHING PRESS
A.
Etching Press shall be a bench mounted, self contained
unit designed to make reproductions from etchings,
linoleum blocks, lithographs, type, photo engravings,
etc.
Press shall have the following capacities and
features:
offset printing surface 15-1/2" long; flat
bed 20" x 14"; chase 14" x 11"; heavy ribbed, cast
iron frame; bed moving on rollers; type, blocks, etc.,
can be used directly in the chase; lower roller, gear
actuated; two stage pressure springs.
B.
Each press shall be complete, adjusted and ready for
use equipped with standard equipment as follows: one
(1) reinforced plastic bed, one (1) 14" x 11" chase;
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 163
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
one (1) 3" dia. fixed steel roller, one (1) 3" dia.
interchangeable steel roller.
C.
Etching press shall be The Craftool Co., Printmaker
Bench Model, No. 5112; Sturgis Etching Press Mod. CP-4
of Printmakers Machine Co., Villa Park, Ill.
D.
Furnish with the etching press one (1) each of the
following kits:
Etching Kit - The Craftool Co., No.
5019AZ; Relief Printing Kit - The Craftool Co. No.
5020AZ; Lithography Kit - The Craftool Co. No. 5021AZ.
12.124
ETCHING PRESS WITH CABINET
A.
Unit shall consist of an etching press mounted on a
cabinet equipped with dolly. Press shall perform
Relief, Intaglio, and Lithography printing processes.
Unit shall make reproductions of etchings, drypoint,
linoleum
cuts,
woodblocks,
wood
engravings,
lithographs, type, line cuts, and photo engravings.
B.
Press
chassis
shall
be
of
heavy
welded
plate
construction with baked enamel finish. Unit shall have
reinforced plastic bed which moves on rollers. Flatbed
shall measure 20" x 14" and chase shall measure 14" x
11". Lower roller shall be actuated by a gearing
system. Press shall be provided with three (3)
cylinders:
1.
One (1) steel 3" diameter fixed bottom roller.
2.
Two (2) interchangeable upper rollers:
a.
One (1) steel 3" diameter.
b.
One (1) 51/4" diameter rubber covered roller,
providing an offset printing surface 151/2"
long.
Unit shall feature 2 stage pressure springs,
gears covered with safety guard, geared
handle with plastic handgrips, and quick
changing bearing releases. Press's design
shall permit type blocks, etc. to be used
directly in the chase without a removable
insert. Press shall be complete, adjusted and
ready for use.
C.
NYSCA
Cabinet shall be 36" x 24" and fabricated from heavy
duty gauge steel. Cabinet shall have a shelf and two
swing out doors and locking handle. Cabinet shall be
finished in gray baked enamel.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 164
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Furnish one (1) dolly designed to accommodate the
Etching Press With Cabinet. Dolly shall be of welded
steel angle construction with the angles turned up,
but shall not interfere with the opening of the doors.
Provide two (2) 3" swivel, and two (2) 3" locking type
casters with renewable neoprene tires. Submit shop
drawings.
E.
The following accessories shall be furnished with the
Etching
Press
With
Cabinet
(American
Printing
Equipment And Supply Company model numbers given):
One (1) Lithography Kit No. 11619.
One (1) Relief Printing Kit No. 11618.
One (1) Etching Kit No. 11617.
F.
12.125
Etching Press With Cabinet shall be American Printing
Equipment Cabinet Model No. 11625 of American Printing
Equipment And Supply Company, Long Island City, N.Y.;
Printmaker Etching Press Model 11625, Stock No. 416284
as supplied by Brodhead Garrett, Mansfield, OH.
STANDING PRESS
A.
The standing press shall be bench mounted unit for use
in bookbinding. Press shall have 11/2" diameter steel
screw with wheel type handle. Platen shall be at least
10" x 151/2" and open 7".
B.
Standing Press shall be Model 001/2, W.O. Hickok
Manufacturing Company, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.
12.126
STAMPING MACHINE
A.
Stamping machine shall be bench mounted, electrically
heated, tiltable self-centering typeholder, and a work
platform. Machine shall be capable of taking lines of
type up to 53/4" long and 72 points or one (1) inch
type. Work platform of approx. 12" x 12", and a lower
support platform of approx. 33/4" x 91/4". Stroke to
work platform 13/4". Machine shall be delivered
complete and ready for use, including electric cord,
three-level heat switch, three speed electric heat
unit, pilot light, thermometer, and a complete set of
platform gauges and typeholder.
B.
Provide
on
the
stamping
machine
the
following
accessories as supplied by the manufacturer of the
stamping machine (Kwikprint model numbers given):
1.
NYSCA
One (1) complete machine light #116. light shall
be flexible arm tight adjustable to any angle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 165
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
The machine light shall be wired into the electric
heat unit circuit so that the light will turn on
and off simultaneously with the heat unit.
2.
C.
D.
12.127
One (1) automatic roll feed attachment #45.
Service type shall be made of heat resistant hard
durable metal and designed for use with the stamping
machine. Furnish with the stamping machine the
following quantities of service type (Gane Brothers &
Lane model numbers given):
1.
One (1) Font of 24-53 Caps.
2.
One (1) Font of 24-53 Lower Case.
Stamping Machine shall be Kwikprint Model 55 of Gane
Brothers and Lane, Elk Grove Village, Illinois.
PRESSROOM CABINET
A.
Pressroom cabinet shall be an all steel cabinet approx.
251/2" x 301/2" and 40" high.
Unit shall provide the
following storage:
One (1) Nine Drying Racks.
One
(1) Roller Storage with 2 sets of
brackets to hold up to 281/2" Rollers.
adjustable
One (1) Ink Storage Drawer.
12.128
NYSCA
TYPE CABINET
A.
Type cabinet shall be of steel construction with flush
bases and shall be finished in gray enamel baked on.
Cabinets shall have double-tier working bank top,
sloping both ways; height to working edge approx. 41".
Each cabinet shall be provided with thirty-eight (38)
full size California job cases, two (2) blank cases,
four (4) Wells job cases, two (2) lead and slug
quarter cases, two (2) lead and slug racks, and two
(2) three section unit for galleys and quarter cases
under working edges.
All cases shall be fitted with
combination pull and label holders.
Each body tier
shall be provided with locking device to lock all
cases.
B.
Type Cabinet shall be No. 1C39 of Hamilton Industries,
Two Rivers, WI; No. 1201-3D of Thompson Cabinet Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 166
05/14/04
12.129
DESIGN NO. _____
IMPOSING TABLE - 39" x 51"
A.
The imposing table shall be of steel and have the
following characteristics:
Holding frame end panels
of heavy gauge cold rolled furniture steel, top and
bottom frames of heavy gauge cold rolled steel;
recessed base for toe space all around table; height
to work surface 383/8"; steel numbered strip for galley
runs, white with black figures; grouping of units in
front and rear of table alike; table finished in
hammered gray baked on enamel.
The holding frame of
the imposing table shall contain the following units:
B.
Front of table shall have:
One (1) Furniture Storage Unit with one (1) drawer.
One (1) Reglet Storage Unit.
One (1) Adjustable Chase Rack Unit.
C.
Back of table shall have:
One (1) Four-tier Galley Storage Unit with numbered
runs for 88 - 8 3/4" x 13" galleys.
One (1) bin Unit with three (3) compartments for empty
galleys or other storage.
D.
Ends of table shall have:
One end shall contain one (1) Tier Galley Storage Unit
with numbered runs for 22 - 83/4" x 13" galleys.
Other end shall contain one (1) adjustable Chase Rack
Unit for five (5) 10" x 15" chases.
E.
Imposing tables shall be Hamilton Manufacturing Co.,
All Steel Imposing Table No. 10C41; Thompson Cabinet
Co., Steel School Imposing Table No. 13983-X.
F.
The imposing table shall be equipped with the following
optional equipment:
1.
NYSCA
One (1) 39" x 51" x 2" cast iron imposing surface.
The cast iron surface shall be precision ground
and polished, rabbeted on all four (4) edges and
with reinforcing ribs on underside. Hamilton Mfg.
Co. No. 30C40; Thompson Cabinet Co. No. 15704.
Ground steel plate substitute for cast iron top
will not be accepted.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 167
05/14/04
12.130
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
One (1) furniture font, the font consisting of 864
pieces.
Hamilton Mfg. Co., 12C10; Thompson
Cabinet Co. No. 13744-A.
3.
One (1) reglet font, the font consisting of 2244
pieces.
Hamilton Mfg. Co. No. 12C7; Thompson
Cabinet Co., No. 13734.
4.
One hundred ten (110) 83/4" x 13", steel job
galleys. Each galley shall be a double wall, rust
resisting steel galley. Hamilton Mfg. Co., Double
Wall Precision Aluminized Steel Galleys; Foster
Mfg., "Silver King" Double Wall Galleys.
IMPOSING TABLE - 31" x 39"
A.
Imposing table shall be an all steel table with a 31" x
39" semi-steel or cast iron rabbeted imposing surface.
Furniture side of imposing table shall contain the
following:
One (1) Furniture storage unit with one (1) drawer.
One (1) Reglet storage unit.
Galley side
following:
of
imposing
table
shall
contain
the
One (1) Two-tier galley storage unit with numbered runs
for 44 - 83/4" x 13" galleys.
One (1) Adjustable chase rack unit to accommodate 12
chase 8" x 12" and 10" x 15" in two tiers, or 6 chase
12" x 18" in one tier.
B.
Provide the following equipment with the above unit:
One (1) Rabbeted Cast Iron Surface 31" x 39", Model
No. 30C30 as made by Hamilton Mfg. Co.; Model No. 15694
as made by Thompson Cabinet Co. Ground steel plate
substitute will not be accepted.
One (1) furniture font,
Hamilton Mfg. Co., 12C10;
Thompson Cabinet Co. No. 13744-A.
One (1) reglet font, Hamilton
Thompson Cabinet Co. No. 13734.
Mfg.
Co.
No.
12C7;
Forty-four (44) - 83/4" x 13" Galleys.
C.
NYSCA
Imposing table shall be model No. 10C31 made by
Hamilton Manufacturing Co.; Model 13978-X made by
Thompson Cabinet Co. Ground steel plate substitute for
cast iron top will not be accepted.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 168
05/14/04
12.131
LEAD AND RULE CUTTER
A.
Lead and rule cutting machine as made by H. B. Rouse &
Co., Model No. 30.
B.
The No. 30 machine shall have a point gauge which may
be set from a nonpareil to 45 picas by points and a
total capacity of 105 picas.
12.132
MITERING MACHINE
A.
12.133
Mitering machine, hand, panameric, shall be Model No.
8221-1 made by H. B. Rouse & Co. Machine shall be
capable of mitering to 45o and square ends of rules.
Machine shall have positive point gauge, setting
instantaneously and locking automatically to points,
complete with chip cup and jointer.
DRYING RACK
A.
Drying rack shall be an all steel cabinet with a
reinforced top approx. 25" x 30" and 40" high.
Unit
shall contain 1 tier of 14 - Drying Racks measuring
approx. 20" x 281/2" x 11/8" high inside.
B.
Drying Rack shall be model No. 80C17 as made by
Hamilton Manufacturing Co.; model No. 15131-X as made
by Thompson Cabinet Co.
12.133A
DRYING RACK - MOBILE
A.
Drying rack shall be designed to provide dust-free
drying of printed inks and coatings on media. Frame
shall be made of heavy gage welded and reinforced
steel A-frame construction. Unit shall have 100
shelves made of welded steel wire spaced 1" apart
vertically. Each shelf shall be 24" x 30" and have
pivoted connection to A-frame permitting an upward
swing with an arc of 12". Cart shall be furnished with
four 3" diameter swivel rubber wheeled casters. Finish
shall be chip proof baked enamel. Cart shall be
delivered set up and ready for use.
B.
Drying Rack shall be Stock No. 258435 as supplied by
Brodhead-Garrett Co.
12.134
HAND BOOKBINDING UNIT
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Complete unit shall consist of a bench mounted doublescrew work clamp (maximum opening 61/2", width between
screws 181/2"), trimming shelf, drilling jig, drill
back stop, set of backing metals and sewing frame
board with uprights and cross bar.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 169
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Hand Bookbinding Unit shall be Pratt Bookbinding Unit
as supplied by American Printing Equipment And Supply
Company, Long Island City, N.Y.
12.135
PAPER CUTTER
A.
The paper cutter shall be a 261/2" hand lever paper
cutter.
Cutter shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for use and furnished with steel measuring tape,
two (2) knives, four (4) cutting sticks and necessary
wrenches. Cutter shall be equipped with a two-handed
Safety Lever Control requiring use of both hands to
operate. Cutter shall also be equipped with a safety
device that locks the knife bar, and so arranged that
safety device must be released and held open at the
start of each cut. Also provide a special binder and
knife locking arrangement.
This special binder and
knife locking arrangement shall be installed in such a
manner that the paper cutter can be locked when the
knife is in fully closed position, thus making the
paper cutter inoperable by unauthorized person.
B.
Paper cutter shall be Challenge Machinery Co. Style No.
265, 261/2" Lever Paper Cutter; Chandler and Price Co.,
261/2" "Craftsman" Lever Paper Cutter.
12.135A
NYSCA
PAPER CUTTER AND STAND
A.
The paper cutter shall be a 193/8" hand lever paper
cutter.
Cutter shall be complete, adjusted and be
ready for use and furnished with steel measuring tape,
two (2) knives, four (4) cutting sticks and necessary
wrenches. Cutter shall be equipped with a two-handed
Safety Lever Control requiring use of both hands to
operate. Cutter shall also be equipped with a safety
device that locks the knife bar, and so arranged that
safety device must be released and held open at the
start of each cut. Also provide a special binder and
knife locking arrangement.
This special binder and
knife locking arrangement shall be installed in such a
manner that the paper cutter can be locked when the
knife is in fully closed position, thus making the
paper cutter inoperable by unauthorized person.
B.
The stand shall be of welded steel construction, free
of burrs and rough edges, and shall have one (1) full
depth shelf for storage. The cutter shall be bolted to
the stand; the stand shall be of the same manufacture
as the cutter.
C.
Paper cutter shall be Challenge Machinery Co., Style
No. 193, 193/8" Lever Paper Cutter.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 170
05/14/04
12.135B
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
POWER PAPER CUTTER - 26"
A.
Paper cutter shall be a floor mounted electro-hydraulic
operated unit designed to cut paper up to 26.5" wide,
stacked 4" high.
B.
Unit shall be of heavy cast iron construction with
hydraulically operated knife and paper clamp.
Cutter
shall have 18.5" front table depth, 26.5" rear table
depth, with full width side tables.
Unit shall be
furnished complete, ready for use with table light,
L.E.D. digital backgage position indicator, foot pedal
clamping control, six (6) cutting sticks, false clamp
plate and complete operating instruction/parts manual.
C.
Power Paper Cutter shall be furnished with the
following accessories as supplied by the manufacturer
of the paper cutter:
1.
Two (2) extra cutter knives in wooden box.
2.
Light Beam Safety Device.
3.
Remote Clamp Pressure Adjustment.
4.
Rear table cover.
5.
Paper Deflector.
6.
Book Guides.
D.
Controls shall be of the push button magnetic starter
type with thermal overload protection. Cutter shall
have
integral
key
operated
lock
to
prevent
unauthorized use of the machine. Provide three (3)
keys. Cutter shall be equipped with "two hand" type
safety controls that require both hands to be on the
controls, away from knife, during the entire cutting
stroke. If either hand is removed from controls, the
knife shall instantly stop. If both hands are removed
from controls, the knife will reverse itself and
return to the up position.
Controls shall meet all
requirements of the OSHA and the N.Y. State Board of
Standards and Appeals.
E.
Motor for paper cutter shall be at least 5 horsepower
with TEFC enclosure, designed to operate on three
phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 25 amps (40 amp service
size, Solid Connection).
F.
Power Paper Cutter shall be Model "Diamond
Challenge Machinery Co., Grand Haven, Mich.
26",
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 171
05/14/04
12.136
STAPLER
A.
Stapler shall be floor mounted, foot operated unit with
adjustable work table for flat or saddle stapling of
work thicknesses up to 1/2". Unit shall use preformed
staples of 0.025" round wire with leg lengths from 1/4"
to 9/16". Stapler shall be complete, adjusted and ready
for use.
B.
Stapler shall be furnished with one (1) box each of
1/4", 3/8" and 1/2" staples; each box containing 5,000
staples.
C.
Stapler shall be Model EHFS of Stanley-Bostitch, Inc.,
East Greenwich, RI.
12.137
PLANNING CENTER - CABINET UNIT
A.
The planning center (cabinet storage unit) shall
consist of a storage and working ledge.
The unit
shall be sturdily constructed of Birch and Birch
Veneer wood; or other approved wood.
B.
The upper case of the storage unit shall have two
adjustable wood shelves and two smooth sliding clear
heavy plate glass doors with approved type lock. The
bottom case shall have one adjustable wood shelf and
two smooth sliding wood doors with approved type lock.
C.
The overall size of the cabinet storage unit shall be
approx. 78" high, 60" wide, and 20" deep with working
ledge extending an additional 10" to an overall depth
of 30".
The lower case shall be 30" high, while the
upper case shall be 48" high and 12" deep.
D.
The unit shall be assembled, complete and ready for
use.
E.
Planning center (cabinet storage unit), Model PLCC as
made by Brodhead-Garrett Co., Paxton-Patterson - Model
# PC40CG.
12.137A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
PLANNING CENTER - TRACING UNIT
A.
The planning center (tracing unit) shall consist of an
illuminated tracing table. The unit shall be sturdily
constructed of Birch and Birch Veneer wood.
B.
The overall size of the tracing unit shall be approx.
36" wide, and 301/2" deep by 351/2" high at back of
sloping table.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 172
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
The tracing unit shall be fitted with a minimum of two
fluorescent lamps and opal glass plate for uniform
light diffusion.
The unit shall be provided with an approved on-off
switch and a heavy duty cord and plug to match
receptacle.
D.
The unit shall be assembled, complete and ready for
use.
E.
Tracing unit shall be Model PLCT as made by BrodheadGarrett Co., Paxton-Patterson - Model # PC40T.
12.137B
A.
The combination planning center shall consist of an
illuminated tracing table, and one (1) storage and
working ledge unit, as specified in Ref. No. 12.137
and 12.137A.
B.
The total width of the combination planning center
shall be 96", the total height shall be 78", and the
depth shall be 30" with a working ledge extending and
additional 10".
C.
Combination planning center shall be Model PLC,
Brodhead-Garrett Co., or Paxton-Patterson - Model #
PC40.
12.138
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - WOODWORKING
A.
NYSCA
PLANNING CENTER - COMBINATION UNIT
The tool storage cabinet shall be 62" wide x 22" deep x
84" high constructed entirely of heavy maple framing
and birch plywood panels. Doors shall be 11/8" thick,
hung on continuous piano hinges reinforced by welds.
There shall be two pairs of doors, one for the upper
part of the cabinet and one for the lower part and
separate locks shall be furnished for each pair of
doors. See Art. 2.03C. The upper part of the cabinet
shall
provide
complete
facilities
for
storing
woodworking hand tools including specially designed
hooks and hangers mounted ready for use. Sharp edge of
tools shall be so stored as to reduce possibility of
injury. Each hanger shall be designed for specific
tools. The lower part of the cabinet shall have three
(3) adjustable shelves with eight (8) large plastic
tote trays 135/8" wide x 187/8" deep x 45/16" high, and
six (6) small tote trays- 87/8" wide x 187/8" deep x
45/16" high. The lower shelf shall include ten (1O)
steel nail and screw trays each 51/2" wide x 101/2" deep
x 21/2" high with two (2) dividers per tray.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 173
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
The following list of tools shall be provided in the
upper part of the cabinet:
Three (3) - #2 Rubber Mallets-Schacht.
Seven (7) - #7A Scratch Awls-Stanley.
Twelve (12) - #60 1 ft. Rules-Lufkin.
Seven (7) - #H1211A Assorted Nail Sets-Stanley.
Two (2) - #139 Brace Countersinks-Stanley.
One (1) - Each #1 and #2 Expansion Bit-Irwin.
Two (2) - Sets Auguer Bits #62-Irwin (sizes 4 to 16
inclusive).
Six (6) - Half Round Cabinet Wood Files 10" assorted
with 4" handles-Nicholson.
Six (6) - Half Round Cabinet Rasps 10" with #4 handles
2nd cut-Nicholson.
One (1) - #80 M Scraper-Stanley.
Eight (8) - #101 1/2 Hammers 16 oz.-Stanley.
Eight (8) - #102 Hammers 13 oz.-Stanley.
Two (2) - #51SS Spoke Shaves-Stanley.
One (1) - Each #18TB Bevels 6" and 8"- Stanley.
Four (4) - #611 Hand Drills-Stanley.
Four (4) - #945 Braces 10"-Stanley.
Eight (8) - #118 Block Planes-Stanley.
Six (6) - #5 Planes-Stanley.
Six (6) - #55 Coping Saw Frames-Parker.
Five (5) - K-1 Back Saws-Disston.
Four (4) - #D23 Crosscut Saws 24" 10 pt.-Disston.
Two (2) - D-8 Rip Saws 26" 5 1/2 pt.-Disston.
One (1) - #0 Level-Stanley.
One (1) - #100 Framing Square-Stanley.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 174
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Two (2) - #2006 Screwdrivers 8"-Stanley.
Four (4) - #2006 Screwdrivers 6"-Stanley.
Four (4) - #2006 Screwdrivers 4"-Stanley.
Ten (10) - #12 Try Squares 6"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #12 Try Squares 8"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #12 Try Squares 10"-Stanley.
Five (5) - #65 Marking Gauges-Stanley.
Three (3) - #40 Chisels 1"-Stanley.
Five (5) - #40 Chisels 3/4"-Stanley.
Five (5) - #40 Chisels 1/2"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #40 Chisels 1/4"-Stanley.
Three (3) - #40 Chisels 3/8"-Stanley.
Five (5) - #4 Planes-Stanley.
Five (5) - #5 1/4 Planes-Stanley.
One (1) - K-302 Compass Saw-Stanley.
One (1) - #12 - 10" Keyhole Saw-Disston.
One Hundred Forty
Blades-Parker.
Four
(144)
-
No.
22
Coping
Saw
Ten (10) - 21/2 x 5 Cabinet Scrapers-Disston.
Six (6) - #11 Sloyd Knives-Hyde.
One (1) - #1 Basic Carving Set-Buck Brothers.
Two (2) - #D-1-S Turning Chisel Sets-Disston.
One (1) - Pr. #282 Carpenters Pincers 8"-Crescent.
Six (6) - Nicholson File Card & Brushes-Nicholson.
One (1) - #1BA India Combination Stone-Behr Manning.
Two (2) - #44 India Oilstone Slips, 1 medium, 1 fineBehr Manning.
One (1) - Set # S-15 Hanson Twist Drills with metal
Stand.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 175
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Six (6) - 3/0 Adjustable Handscrews-Adjustable Clamp.
Six (6) - No. 0 Adjustable Handscrews-Adjustable Clamp.
Nine (9) - #640 Bar Clamps, 3'-Cincinnati Tool.
Six (6) - #540 PC Clamps, 6"-Cincinnati Tool.
Twelve (12) - #78 Bench Dusters 0-OX Fiber.
Two (2) - Pr. #91A Monogoggles-Willson.
Two (2) - # 35 8" Wing Dividers-Pexto.
One (1) - #47 Bit Gauge-Stanley.
Three (3) - #H1226 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Screwdriver Bits, 1
each-Stanley.
C.
12.139
Tool Storage Cabinet shall be Model No. TS10 as
supplied by Brodhead Garrett; Model No. L-84W2 as
supplied by Paxton / Patterson; and containing a full
compliment of tools and equipment as specified above.
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - METAL WORKING
A.
The tool storage cabinet shall be 62" wide x 22" deep x
84" high constructed entirely of heavy maple framing
and birch plywood panels. Doors shall be 11/8" thick,
hung on continuous piano hinges reinforced by welds.
There shall be two pairs of door, one for the upper
part of the cabinet and one for the lower part and
separate locks shall be furnished for each pair of
doors. See Art. 2.03C.
B.
The upper part of the cabinet shall provide complete
facilities
for
storing
metalworking
hand
tools,
including specially designed hooks and hangers mounted
ready for use. Sharp edge of tools shall be stored as
to reduce possibility of injury. Each hanger shall be
designed for specific tools.
C.
The following tools shall be provided in the upper
part:
2 - #1006 Screwdrivers 12"-Stanley.
2 - #2006 Screwdrivers 8"-Stanley.
3 - #2006 Screwdrivers 6"-Stanley.
3 - #2006 Screwdrivers 4"-Stanley.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 176
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1 - #9 Combination Set 12"-Starrett.
9 - #494 & # 496 Assorted Center & Prick PunchesStanley.
8 - Ring Scratch Awls #01-J-Line.
12 - #60 Steel Rules 12"-Lufkin.
12 - #604 Steel Rules 6"-Lufkin.
6 - #62 Steel Rules 2 ft.-Lufkin.
6 - #62 Steel Rules 3 ft.-Lufkin.
27
- Assorted
Nicholson.
10"
Metal
Files
with
#4
Handles-
6 - #H0309 Ball Pein Hammers 12 oz.-Stanley.
6 - #H0310 Ball Pein Hammers 16 oz.-Stanley.
2 - #861H Blacksmith Hammers 40 oz.-Stanley.
2 - #861H Engineers Hammers 32 oz.-Stanley.
3 - 12C, 12D, 12F, Blacksmith Tongs - 1 each 3/8, 1/2,
3/4-Warren Tool.
6 - #540 PC Clamps, 4"-Cincinnati Tool.
6 - #540 PC Clamps, 6"-Cincinnati Tool.
12 - #78 Bench Dusters-OX Fiber.
2 - Sets S29A Twist Drills 1/16" to 1/2" with standHanson.
3 - Stillson Ridgid Pipe Wrenches, 1 each 10", 14",
18"Ridgid.
6 - #368 Disston Hack Saw Frames.
6 - #10 Tin Snips Straight-Wiss.
3 - #W9CB Tin Snips Curved-Wiss.
2 - #793 Handy Seamers-Pexto.
10 - #440 Assorted Chisels, 2 each 3/8", 1/2", 5/8",
3/4", 1"-Stanley.
18 - Assorted 8" Metal Files with #3 Handles-Nicholson.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 177
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6 - File Card and Brushes-Nicholson.
4 - #L26 Pliers-Crescent.
4 - #L28 Pliers-Crescent
1 - #100 Square 24" x 16"-Stanley.
4 - Wrenches 8"-Crescent.
2 - Wrenches 10"-Crescent.
2 - Wrenches 12"-Crescent.
8 - #T47 Pocket Snips-Crescent.
3 - #277 6" Dividers-Starrett.
4 - #79 Outside Calipers 6"-Starrett.
2 - #79 Outside Calipers 8"-Starrett.
4 - #73 Inside Calipers 6"-Starrett.
2 - #73 Inside Calipers 8"-Starrett.
1 - #217 Bench Drill Vise-Miller Falls.
6 - #391 Center Gage-Starrett.
1 - #185 Drill Gage-Starrett.
1 - Set 271 C Steel V Blocks & Clamps-Starrett.
1 - 57A Universal Surface Gage-Starrett.
4 - #436P Micrometers 0 to 1"-Starrett.
6
-
Doz. 10" Flexible
SS1024- Nicholson.
Hack
Saw
Blades
SS1018
and
6 - #145 C Bench Oilers 1/2 pt.-Eagle.
1 - #S614 Ace Set Taps & Dies-Hanson.
2 - Rivet Sets #3-Pexto.
2 - Rivet Sets #4-Pexto.
2 - Rivet Sets #5-Pexto.
2 - Rivet Sets #6-Pexto.
2 - Hand Groovers #0-Pexto.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 178
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2 - Hand Groovers #2-Pexto.
2 - Hand Groovers #4-Pexto.
1 - Metal Banding Jig with Base-B.G.
2 - #95 Tinners Circumference Rule 36"-Lufkin.
2 - Pr. Soldering Coppers (2 lb.)
6 - Soldering Copper Handles-Anchor Mfg.
1
-
3158 Electric
Heater.
Soldering
Iron-American
Electric
1 - #0 Grinding Wheel Dresser.
12 - Assorted Drill & Countersinks 998 High Speed (4
each #2, 3, 4,)-Cleveland Twist Drill.
2 - Pr. Monogoggles 91A-Willson.
4 - VL-64 Protecto Shields-Willson.
1 - #21 Pipe Vise 1/8" to 2"-Ridgid.
D.
The lower part of the cabinet shall have three (3)
adjustable shelves with eight (8) large plastic tote
trays- 135/8" wide x 187/8" deep x 45/16" high, and six
(6) small tote trays- 87/8" wide x 187/8" deep x 45/16"
high.
The lower shelf shall include ten (10) steel
nail and screw trays each 51/2" wide x 101/2" deep x
21/2" high with two (2) dividers per tray.
E.
Tool storage cabinet, Model No. TS11 as made by
Brodhead-Garrett Co., Paxton-Patterson - Model # L84M,
and containing a full compliment of tools as specified
above.
12.139A
A.
NYSCA
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - GENERAL
The tool storage cabinet shall be 62" wide x 22" deep x
84" high constructed entirely of heavy maple framing
and birch plywood panels. Doors shall be 11/8" thick,
hung on continuous piano hinges reinforced by welds.
There shall be two pairs of doors, one for the upper
part of the cabinet and one for the lower part and
separate locks shall be furnished for each pair of
doors. See Art. 2.03C. The upper part of the cabinet
shall
provide
complete
facilities
for
storing
electrical and general hand tools including specially
designed hooks and hangers mounted ready for use.
Sharp edge of tools shall be so stored as to reduce
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 179
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
possibility of injury. Each hanger shall be designed
for specific tools.
The lower part of the cabinet
shall have three (3) adjustable shelves with eight (8)
large plastic tote trays 135/8" wide x 187/8" deep x
45/16" high, and six (6) small tote trays- 87/8" wide x
187/8" deep x 45/16" high. The lower shelf shall include
ten (1O) steel nail and screw trays each 51/2" wide x
101/2" deep x 21/2" high with two (2) dividers per tray.
B.
The following list of tools shall be provided in the
upper part of the cabinet:
Three (3) - #H0309 Ball Pein Hammers 12 oz.-Stanley.
Three (3) - #H0310 Ball Pein Hammers 16 oz.-Stanley.
Three (3) - W10 Tin Snips Straight-Wiss.
Two (2) - W9CB Tin Snips Curved-Wiss.
One (1) - #51SS Spoke Shaves-Stanley.
Two (2) - 1 Ea. # 18TB T Bevel Square 6" and 8"Stanley.
Two (2) - #611 Hand Drills 3/8" Capacity-Stanley.
Two (2) - #945 Braces 10"-Stanley.
One (1) - 80M Cabinet Scraper-Stanley.
Two (2) - #118 Block Planes-Stanley.
Three (3) - D-23 10 Point Hand Saws 24"-Disston.
Two (2) - D-8 51/2 Point Rip Saws 26"-Disston.
Three (3) - #348 Back Saw Frames-Disston.
Two (2) - #5 Planes 14"-Stanley.
Four (4) - #55 Coping Saw Frames-Parker.
Two (2) - K-1 Back Saw 12"-Disston.
Three (3) - Stillson Pipe Wrenches 1 each 1O", 14" and
18"-Ridgid.
One (1) - 793 Handy Seamer-Pexto.
Four (4) - 540 PC Clamps 4"-Cincinnati Tool.
Six (6) - #540 PC Clamps 6"-Cincinnati Tool.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 180
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Two (2) - #11C & 11D Blacksmith Tongs, 1 each 1/2" and
3/8"-Stanley.
One (1) - K-30 Compass Saw 12"-Disston.
One (1) - #12-10 Keyhole Saw 10"-Disston.
Two (2) - #2 Rubber Mallets 18 oz.-Schacht.
Six (6) - File Cards and Brushes-Nicholson.
One (1) - #0 24" Level-Stanley.
Two (2) - #4 Planes 9"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #5 1/4 Planes 111/2"-Stanley.
Five (5) - #440 Assorted Cold Chisels 3/8", 1/2", 5/8",
3/4", 1"-Stanley.
Three (3) - Hand Groovers, 1 each No. 0, 2, 4-Pexto.
Four (4) - Rivet Sets, 1 each No. 3. 4, 5, 6-Pexto.
Four (4) - #147 Pocket Snips-Crescent.
Three (3) - Crescent Wrenches 8"-Crescent.
Two (2) Crescent.
Crescent
Wrenches
1
each
10"
and
12"-
Six (6) - #604R 6" Steel Scales-Lufkin.
Twelve (12) - #60 12" Steel Rules-Lufkin.
Four (4) - #01 Ring Scratch Awls-B.G.
Two (2) - #496 Assorted Prick Punches-Stanley.
Two (2) - #494 Assorted Center Punches-Stanley.
Three (3) - 7A Brad Awls-Stanley.
Three (3) - #H1211A Assorted Nail Sets-Stanley.
One (1) - #79 8" Outside Caliper-Starrett.
One (1) - #73 8" Inside Caliper-Starrett.
Two (2) - #79 6" Outside Caliper-Starrett.
Two (2) - #73 6" Inside Caliper-Starrett.
Two (2) - #277 6" Dividers-Starrett.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 181
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Three (3) - #58 6" Wing Dividers-Starrett.
Four (4) - 12TS 6" Try Squares-Stanley.
Two (2) - 12TS 8" Try Squares-Stanley.
One (1) - 12TS 10" Try Squares-Stanley.
Four (4) - #L26 Common Pliers-Crescent.
Four (4) - #L28 Common Pliers-Crescent
One (1) - #R-100 24 x 16 Rafter Square-Stanley.
One (1) - #100 24 x 16 Steel Square-Stanley.
Two (2) - #1006 Screwdrivers 12"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #2006 Screwdrivers 8"-Stanley.
Three (3) - #2006 Screwdrivers 6"-Stanley.
Three (3) - #2006 Screwdrivers 4"-Stanley.
One (1) - #9 Combination Square Set 12"-Starrett.
One (1) - #95 36" Circumference Rule-Lufkin.
One (1) - #62 36" Steel Scale-Lufkin.
One (1) - #62 24" Steel Scale-Lufkin.
One (1) - #JB6 6" x 2" x 1" Combination India Oil
Stone-Behr Manning.
Two (2) - #44 India Oil Slips, medium.
One (1) - #139 Brace Countersink 3/4"-Stanley.
One (1) - Set #D-13 Auger Bits, Sizes 4 to 16 (3 in
all)-Irwin.
One (1) - No. 1 Expansion Bit-Irwin.
One (1) - No. 2 Expansion Bit-Irwin.
Three (3) - #H1226 Screwdriver Bits Assorted for Brace
1/4", 5/16", 3/8"-Stanley.
Ten (10) - #4OC Hand Chisels, 2 Each 1/4", 3/8", 1/2"
3/4", 1"-Stanley.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 182
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Twenty one (21) - Assorted Files 10" with HandlesNicholson.
Six (6) Nicholson.
Assorted
Wood
Rasps,
10"
with
Handles-
Three (3) - #101 1/2 16 oz. Nail Hammers-Stanley.
Four (4) - # 102 13 oz. Nail Hammers-Stanley.
Two (2) - #861 H 32 oz. Blacksmith Hammers.
C.
The following list of tools shall be provided in the
lower part of the cabinet:
Two (2) - D-I-S Wood Turning Chisel Sets-Irwin.
One (1) - #21 Pipe Vise 1/8" to 2"-Ridgid.
One (1) - Gr. No. 22 Coping Saw Blades-Parker.
Two (2) - #436 Micrometers 0 to 1"-Starrett.
One (1) - #47 Bit Gauge-Stanley
Five (5) - Cabinet Scrapers 21/2 x 5-Disston.
Three (3) - #11 Sloyd Knives-Hyde
One (1) - #0 Grinding Wheel Dresser.
One (1) - 57A Surface Gauge-Starrett.
One (1) - Set S-29A Drills 1/16" to 1/2" x 64ths.Hanson.
One (1) - Set S-15A drills 1/16" to 1/2" x 32nds.Hanson.
One (1) Starrett.
Set
#271
C
Steel
V
Blocks
and
Clamps-
Four (4) - File Cards and Brushes-Nicholson.
Three (3) - Doz. SS1018-SS1O74 10" Hack Saw BladesNicholson.
One (1) - 3158
Electric Heater.
Electric
Soldering
Iron-American
One (1) - Set S-614 Taps and Dies-Hanson.
Two (2) - #90G Marking Gauges-Stanley.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 183
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) - #1 Wood Carving Set-Buck Brothers.
One (1) - Pr.#282 Carpenters Pincers 8"-Crescent Tool.
Six (6) - Adjustable Hand Screws, 3 each No. 0 and 3/0Adjustable Clamp.
Two (2) - Pr. #91A Monogoggles-Willson
Six (6) - #998 Drill and Counter Sinks Assorted, 2 No.
4, 2 No. 3, and 2 No. 2-Cleveland Twist.
One (1) - #217 Bench Drill Vise-Miller Falls
One (1) - Metal Bending Jig with Base-B. G.
One (1) - Pr. 2 lb. Soldering Coppers.
Twelve (12) - Soldering Copper Handles-Anchor.
Three (3) - #391 Center Gauges-Starrett.
One (1) -
#185 Drill Gauge-Starrett.
Three (3) - #145 C Bench Oilers-Eagle.
D.
12.140
Tool Storage Cabinet shall be Model No. TS12 as
supplied by Brodhead Garrett; Model No. L-84G2 as
supplied by Paxton / Patterson; and containing a full
compliment of tools and equipment as specified above.
TOOL STORAGE CABINET - ELECTRICAL
A.
The tool storage cabinet shall be 62" wide x 22" deep x
84" high constructed entirely of heavy maple framing
and birch plywood panels. Doors shall be 11/8" thick,
hung on continuous piano hinges reinforced by welds.
There shall be two pairs of doors, one for the upper
part of the cabinet and one for the lower part and
separate locks shall be furnished for each pair of
doors. See Art. 2.03C. The upper part of the cabinet
shall
provide
complete
facilities
for
storing
electrical and general hand tools including specially
designed hooks and hangers mounted ready for use.
Sharp edge of tools shall be so stored as to reduce
possibility of injury. Each hanger shall be designed
for specific tools.
The lower part of the cabinet
shall have one (1) adjustable shelf.
B.
The following list of tools shall be provided in the
upper part of the cabinet:
Eight (8) - #3138 Electric Soldering Irons-American
Electrical Heater.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 184
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Eight (8) - D550 A Weller Electric Soldering GunsWeller.
One (1) - Set #1752 Allen Wrenches-Louder.
One (1) - #0 24" Level-Stanley.
One (1) - # 45018 Cable Ripper-Ideal.
Three (3) - #440 Assorted Cold Chisels, 3/8", 1/2",
5/8"-Stanley.
Two (2) - Sets Needle Files 51/2"-Nicholson.
Two (2) - #3400 Offset Screwdrivers-Stanley.
One (1) - #4 Rivet Set-Pexto.
Four (4) - #1OR Bear Sanding Blocks-Behr Manning.
One (1) - #118 Block Plane-Stanley.
One (1) - #4 Plane 9"-Stanley.
Two (2) - #2195 Vaco Solderless Terminal Kits-Vaco.
One (1) - #S-614 Tap & Die Set-Hanson.
One (1) - Set S-15A Drills in Metal Box 1/16" to 1/2" x
32nds-Hanson.
One (1) - #20 Screw Extractor Set-Cleveland Twist.
One (1) - #1B6 Combination India Oil Stone, 6 x 2 x 1Behr Manning.
One (1) - Set #260 1/4" Letter Stamps-Young Brothers
Stamp Works.
One (1) - Set #260 1/8" Letter Stamps-Young Brothers
Stamp Works.
One (1) - Set #90 1/4" Numeral Stamps-Young Brothers
Stamp Works.
One (1) - Set #90 1/8" Numeral Stamps-Young Brothers
Stamp Works.
Three (3) - #7950 Radio & Television Tweezer Sets-G.C.
Electronics.
Three (3) - #5028 Hex and Spline Key Wrench Sets-G.C.
Electronics.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 185
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Nine (9) - 10" Assorted Metal & Wood Files with Handles
-Nicholson.
Two (2) - Nicholson File Cards and Brushes-Nicholson.
One (1) - Set #886R Spade Type Bits-Irwin.
One (1) - #730 Round Chassis Punches, 1 each 3/4", 1",
11/16", 11/8"-Greenlee.
One (1) - #731 Square Chassis Punches 3/4"-Greenlee.
Eight (8) - #11 Sloyd Knives-Hyde.
Four (4) - 4" Crescent Wrenches-Crescent Tools.
Two (2) - 6" Crescent Wrenches-Crescent Tools.
Two (2) - 8" Crescent Wrenches-Crescent Tools.
One (1) - Pr. CG 710 Lock Pliers-Kraueter.
One (1) - H1221 1/2 Combination Square-Stanley.
One (1) - #125 8" x 12" Steel Square-Stanley.
Six (6) - #62 l2" Steel Rules-Lufkin.
One (1) - #H1225 Bevel Square 8"-Stanley.
Three (3) - #61 030 Continuity Testers-Ideal.
Three (3) - Electrical Testers-G.C. Electronics.
Two (2) - Sets #12TS 6" Try Squares-Stanley.
One (1) - 65G Marking Gauge-Stanley.
Eight (8) - #R-182 Xcelite Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
Eight (8) - #R-184 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
One (1) - Set #R-5168 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
One (1) - #R-146 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
One (1) - #R-3166 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
Two (2) - #X-104 Xcelite Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
Two (2) - #X-103 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
Two (2) - #X-102 Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 186
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Three (3) - #X1O1 Xcelite Screwdrivers-Xcelite.
Eight (8) Electronics
GC-5000
Alignment
Screwdrivers-G.
C.
Eight (8) - Sets #9099 Screw Holding Screwdrivers-G.C.
Electronics.
Two (2) - Pr. W1O Wiss Tin Snips, Straight-Wiss.
Two (2) - Pr. Combo W-18 Wiss Tin Snips, Curved-Wiss.
One (1) Bartlett.
Pr.
#7
Circular
Compound
Lever
Snips-
One (1) - Pr. #M3 Wiss Aviation Snips-Wiss.
One (1) - Pr. #1290NE Bolt Cutters, 3/16"-H. K. Porter.
Three (3) - Pr. #38 Wiss Scissors, 1 each 6", 7", 8"Wiss.
Two (2) - #101-1/2A 16 oz. Nail Hammers-Stanley.
One (1) - #2 Rubber Mallet-Schacht.
One (1) -#2-1/2" x 6" Wood Mallet-Holbrook.
Three (3) - H0308, H0309, H0310 Ball Pein Hammers, 1
each 8 oz., 12 oz., 16 oz.-Stanley.
Two (2) - #595 Plastic Face Hammers-Stanley.
Two (2) - #602 Upholsterers' Magnetic Hammers-Stanley.
Two (2) - #611 Hand Drills-Stanley.
One (1) - #D-23 Disston 10 point 24" Hand Saw-Disston.
One (1) Disston.
#D-8
Disston
5
1/2
point
26"
Hand
Saw-
Twelve (12) - #54 2" C Clamps-Cincinnati Tool.
Twelve (12) - #540
Cincinnati Tool.
PC
Clamps,
6
each
4"
and
3"-
Two (2) - #368 Hack Saw Frames-Disston.
Two (2) - #50 Jewelers Saws-Parker.
Four (4) - #40 C Wood Chisels, 1 each 1/4", 1/2", 3/4",
1"-Stanley.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 187
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) - #LCR6 6 Piece Combination Wrench Set 7/16",
1/2", 9/16", 5/8", 3/4", 7/8"-Billings.
Two (2) - #127 Nut Driver Sets-Xcelite.
One (1) - Pr.#35 Wing Dividers 8"-Pexto.
Eight (8)
Kraeuter.
-
Pr.#CG4501
6"
Diagonal
Cutting
Pliers-
Eight (8) - Pr. CG1671 6" Needle Nose Pliers-Kraeuter.
Eight (8) - Pr.#183O 6 1/2" Electrician Side Cutting
Pliers-Kraeuter.
Three (3) - H1211A Nail Sets Assorted 1/16", 3/32",
1/8"-Stanley.
Eight (8) - #494-496
Punches-Stanley
Assorted
Center
Pin
&
Prick
Four (4) - #01 Ring Scratch Awls-J.Line
One (1) - #1 Expansive Bit-Irwin.
One (1) - #47 Bit Gauge-Stanley.
Two (2) - Countersinks-Stanley.
One (1) - Set #D-13 Auger Bits, Sizes 4 to 16-Irwin.
Two (2) - #945 10" Braces-Stanley.
One (1) - #12-10 Key Hole Saw-Disston.
One (1) - K-302 Compass Saw-Disston.
Four (4) - #1111 Portable Vises-Wilton.
One (1) - #9A Small Portable Anvil-Columbian Vise.
C.
The following items of test equipment shall be provided
in the lower cabinet area:
One (1) EMCO V-20 Vacuum Tube Voltmeter
One (1) B & K 530 Tube Tester
One (1) EMCO DCM-1 Capacitance Tester
Two (2) EMCO MT-30 V-O-M
One (1) EMCO OSC-10 ST 5" Oscilloscope
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 188
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) EMCO SS-1 Function Generator
One (1) EMCO GEN RF-1 RF Signal Generator
D.
12.141
SEWING MACHINE
A.
B.
NYSCA
Tool Storage Cabinet shall be Model No. TS13 as
supplied by Brodhead Garrett; Model No. L-84ER as
supplied by Paxton / Patterson; and containing a full
compliment of tools and test equipment as specified
above.
Sewing machine shall be a motor operated, high speed,
straight stitch, single needle tailoring machine with
the following features:
1.
Balanced rotating hook and beveled gear mechanism.
2.
Spring action reverse feed lever for forward to
reverse stitching.
3.
Presser foot knee lift.
4.
Start-stop transmitter for quick start and stop
action of the machine.
5.
Powered by 1/4 HP transmitter for an output of
2200 stitches per minute.
6.
Maximum stitch length shall be five (5) stitches
per inch.
7.
Clearance under pressure foot shall be 5/16 inch.
8.
Thread take-up spring adjustable for both pressure
and location for varying thread control.
9.
One-revolution tension with graduated number dial
for adjustment of needle thread tension.
10.
Tension on upper thread released automatically for
free removal of fabric when pressure foot is
raised.
11.
A bobbin binder and automatic release when bobbin
is filled. Thread to bobbin fed under tension for
uniform and tightly wound bobbins.
Machine shall be mounted on a professional type heavy
duty table. Over-all machine bed shall measure 1523/32"
long, 7" wide with a space of 89/16" to the right of
the needle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 189
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Motor shall be mounted on the underside of the table.
Motor shall be 1/4 H.P., 120 volt, single phase, 60
cycle A.C., continuously running at 2200-2250 RPM. An
on-off switch shall start or stop the motor.
The
speed of the machine shall be controlled by a treadle
activated brake and clutch arrangement.
D.
The unit shall be equipped with a heavy duty three wire
cord (one grounding) and a plug to match receptacle.
Machine shall be equipped with a light fixture
attached to a machine arm and connected to table
electrical system with a heavy duty cord.
E.
Sewing machine shall be model No. 188KI, Singer Co.; or
Consew Model No. 105, Consolidated Sewing Machine
Corp.
12.142
COMBINATION LAPIDARY UNIT
A.
The unit shall consist of a self-contained lapidary
outfit mounted on a sturdily constructed steel cabinet
approximately 50" wide x 24" deep.
B.
The outfit shall consist of a polishing unit having two
(2) 8" x 11/2" grinding wheels, one 8" x 3" drum
sander, 8" sanding disc, and a 8" x 1" polishing felt.
C.
The saw unit shall have an adjustable tool rest and
three coolant valves. It shall be self-contained,
complete with 10" diamond blade, safety guard and
plexi splash shield. Rock vise on the saw unit shall
move on a rigid steel shaft.
Entire unit shall be
mounted on locking base having a self-contained
coolant recirculation system (completely removable for
cleaning).
D.
The unit shall be powered by two (2) 1/3, horsepower
motors; one for the polishing unit, and one for the
saw unit, designed to operate on three phase, 208
volts, 60 cycle A.C.
E.
Provide in a convenient location on the unit two (2)
magnetic starters (one for each motor) independently
wired with approved materials.
Omit toggle switches,
and blank off opening with a steel plate. Plate shall
be painted to match unit.
F.
The cabinet shall be of all steel construction,
provided with a toe space, and two (2) doors, handles,
and cylinder lock with two (2) keys.
Both
motors
and
the
self-contained
coolant
recirculation system shall be enclosed in the cabinet.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 190
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
G.
Combination lapidary unit shall be The Craftool Co.,
Model No. 1422-1OOAZ.
H.
In addition, provide an expendable accessory package
containing the following items:
Assorted gem stone material-30 lbs,
Soluble oil for coolant-1 gallon.
1 Lapidary Handbook.
No. 6124 Diamond Wheel Dresser (1).
No. 340 10" x .032 Diamond Blades (2).
No. 6126 Silicon Discs 120 & 220 (5 ea.).
No. 6127B Peel-off Cement-2 pts.
No. 6105D 8" x 1/2" Guide Wheels 100 & 220 (1 ea.).
No. 6109W Sanding Rolls 15'-120 & 220 (1 ea.).
No. 6147 1/4 lb. Dopping Wax (2 ea.).
No. 1652 Alcohol Lamps.
No. 1428-L 11 pc. Dop Set (1 ea.).
No. 1O1OT Oval Stone Guides (1 ea.).
No. 1O11T Oval Stone Guides (1 ea.).
No. 6116-60 Silicon Carbide (5 lbs.).
No. 6116-120 Silicon Carbide (5 lbs.).
No. 6117.1 Tin Oxide (1 lb.).
No. 6118-1 Cerium Oxide (1 lb.).
No. 6120 Levigated Alumina (1 lb.).
No. 6120-5 Levigated Alumina (5 lbs.).
No. 6121-5 Chrome Oxide (5 lbs.).
No. 6115-5 Red Rouge (5 lbs.).
Craftool Lapidary Wall Charts.
The above catalog numbers are from The Craftool Co.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 191
05/14/04
12.143
STOCK CART - MOBILE (36" x 24" x 32")
A.
Stock cart shall be made of heavy gage reinforced steel
construction for 800 lb. load capacity. Cart shall be
36" long x 24" wide x 32" high with upper and lower
shelf. Cart shall be furnished with two 5" diameter
swivel and two 5" diameter stationary rubber wheeled
casters. Finish shall be chip proof gray baked enamel.
Cart shall be delivered set up and ready for use.
B.
Stock Cart shall be Model 251, Stock No. 462040 as
supplied by Brodhead-Garrett Co.
12.143A
Stock cart shall be made of heavy gage reinforced steel
construction for 800 lb. load capacity. Cart shall be
30" long x 16" wide x 32" high with upper and lower
shelf. Cart shall be furnished with two 5" diameter
swivel and two 5" diameter stationary rubber wheeled
casters. Finish shall be chip proof gray baked enamel.
Cart shall be delivered set up and ready for use.
B.
Stock Cart shall be Model 250, Stock No. 462029 as
supplied by Brodhead-Garrett Co.
TOOL TOTER - MOBILE
A.
Tool toter shall be made of heavy gauge reinforced
steel construction.
Tool Toter shall be 24" long x
18" wide x 341/2" high. Tool Toter shall be furnished
with four (4) 21/2" swivel casters, two sturdy steel
drawers each 24" long x 15" wide x 4" high with nylon
glides.
B.
Drawers shall have padlock hasp and
Toter shall have lower shelf and
shelf.
Finish shall be non-chip
shall be delivered set up and ready
C.
Tool toter shall be Model No. 22 of Brodhead-Garrett
Co.
12.145
NYSCA
STOCK CART - MOBILE (30" x 16" x 32")
A.
12.144
12.146
DESIGN NO. _____
provision for lock.
a reversible upper
proof gray.
Toter
to use.
KILN CART - HEAT PROOF, MOBILE
A.
Kiln cart shall be constructed of heavy steel finished
in baked grey enamel.
Cart shall have three steel
trays covered with high- temperature resistant panel
board and shall have four (4) 4" swivel type wheels.
Trays shall be 16" x 30".
B.
Kiln cart Model No. 4230-BE as made by The Craftool Co.
STEEL PLATE - FOR BENCH TOP
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 192
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
A.
Steel plate shall be No. 8 gage chamfered at edges and
mounted on bench top flush with end and sides of
bench. Plate shall be fastened to bench top with No.
12 x 11/4" long flat head steel wood screws countersunk
into plate.
Screws shall be located 11/2" from edges
and not more than 9" on centers.
B.
Over-all size of steel plate shall be as indicated on
the Drawings.
12.147
STAKE PLATE STAND
A.
Stake plate stand shall be constructed of heavy gauge
steel welded to form a rigid unit.
Over-all size
shall be 313/8" long x 9" deep (top) x 18" deep
(bottom) x 26" high.
Top shall be equipped with a
stake plate 30" wide x 8" deep.
B.
Stand shall have a steel shelf 301/4" long x 131/4" deep
with shelf frame turned up 11/2".
C.
Finish shall be standard gray enamel.
set-up ready for use.
D.
Stake plate stand to meet specifications above will be
accepted.
12.148
NYSCA
Stand shall be
GUARD RAILS
A.
Guard rails shall be made of 11/4" pipe and standard
railing fittings with top and bottom rails, and
sufficient number of uprights to make the guard rails
rigid and secure. Distance between uprights shall not
exceed 4' on centers.
Base of each upright shall
consist of 11/4" x 4" flange, the flanges shall be
securely fastened to floor. Center of top rail shall
be 3' above floor, center of bottom rail shall be 9"
above floor. Furnish a wire screen extending from top
rail to bottom rail and running the entire length of
each guard rail.
Wire screens shall be welded to
guard rails.
Wire screens shall be made of 11 gage
wire, 11/4" diamond mesh securely clinched to 7/8"
steel channel frames, with ends of wires concealed by
1/8" thick steel flat fillers covering the channels.
B.
Guard rails and wire screens shall be painted with one
(1) coat of metal primer, one (1) undercoat and two
(2) finishing coats of gray enamel.
C.
Guard rail length shall be as shown on the Drawings.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 193
05/14/04
12.149
DESK AND PLAN UNIT
A.
Desk and plan unit shall he constructed entirely of
heavy solid maple frame and 3/4" birch plywood. Top
surface shall be 11/2" thick plywood covered with
plastic laminate, size 72" x 30". Over-all table
height shall be 37". The unit shall have four (4)
drawers 14" wide x 203/4" deep x 4" high each with
master-keyed locks; four (4) plan drawers 31" wide x
24" deep x 4" high each with hold down for papers and
blueprints; one (1) file drawer 14" wide x 10" high
with master-keyed lock. Desk and plan unit shall be
finished with sealer and multiple coats of hot
lacquer,
sanded
between
coats.
Unit
shall
be
delivered, set up ready for use.
B.
Desk And Plan Unit shall be Model PLB201, Stock No. 632064 as supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
12.150
DUST COLLECTOR - MOBILE
A.
B.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Dust Collector shall be UL listed, self-contained and
capable of collecting dry wood dust and chips. Dust
Collector shall be a two-stage type mobile unit with
55 gallon steel drum, heavy duty fiberglass drum lid,
14 gauge steel blower housing, and blower which
discharges into cloth bag assembly. Bag shall be held
in place with quick release spring clamps. Motor shall
be permanently lubricated, ball bearing, continuous
duty, totally enclosed and fan cooled. Unit shall be
equipped with 5-wheel drum dolly. The capacity and
features of the Dust Collector shall be as follows:
1.
Motor:
1 HP, 3450 RPM, 700 CFM @
41/2" static pressure.
2.
Impeller:
Cast Aluminum
3.
Dust Bag:
19 sq. ft. - Cloth.
4.
Intake:
One (1) 5" dia.
Dust Collector shall be complete, adjusted and ready
for use and equipped with the following accessories:
1.
Ten (10) Replacement Dust Bags.
2.
Two (2) Y-Connectors, 5" x 3" x 3".
3.
Two (2) Each:
Disconnects.
4.
Two (2) Each:
Disconnects.
Table
Saw
Jointer
Connectors
Connectors
and
Quick
and
Quick
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 194
05/14/04
5.
Two (2) Each: Disc Sander Connectors and Quick
Disconnects.
6.
Two (2) Each: Belt Sander Connectors and Quick
Disconnects.
7.
Two (2) Each:
Disconnects.
8.
Two (2) 5" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
9.
Two (2) 3" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
10.
Two (2) 5" Dia. Slide Gates.
Band
Saw
Connectors
and
Quick
C.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 115
volts, 60 Hz A.C. Dust Collector shall be fitted with
switch and six (6) feet long heavy duty, three
conductor (one grounding) cord set with plug to match
the receptacle. Unit shall be approved for Class II,
Division 1, Group G locations as per Article 502 of
NFPA 70.
D.
Dust Collector - Mobile shall be Model 50-180 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
12.150A
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
DUST COLLECTOR - MOBILE
Dust Collector shall be UL listed, self-contained and
capable of collecting dry wood dust and chips. Dust
Collector shall be a two-stage type mobile unit with
two (2) 55 gallon steel drums, heavy duty fiberglass
drum lid, 14 gauge steel blower housing, and blower
which discharges into cloth bag assembly. Bag shall be
held in place on steel drum with drawstring, and shall
be secured to discharge hose with quick release spring
clamps. Motor shall be permanently lubricated, ball
bearing, continuous duty, totally enclosed and fan
cooled. Each steel drum shall be equipped with 5-wheel
drum dolly. The capacity and features of the Dust
Collector shall be as follows:
1.
Motor:
3 HP, 3450 RPM, 1300 CFM
@ 10" static pressure.
2.
Impeller:
Cast Aluminum
3.
Dust Bag:
50 sq. ft. - Cloth.
4.
Intake:
One (1) 6" dia.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 195
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Dust Collector shall be complete, adjusted and ready
for use and equipped with the following accessories:
NYSCA
1.
Ten (10) Replacement Dust Bags.
2.
Two (2) Y-Connectors, 6" x 3" x 3".
3.
Two (2) 6" to 5" Reducers.
4.
Two (2) Y-Connectors, 5" x 5" x 5".
5.
Two (2) Each:
Disconnects.
6.
Two (2) Jointer Connectors and Quick Disconnects.
7.
Two
(2)
Disc
Disconnects.
Sander
Connectors
and
Quick
8.
Two
(2)
Belt
Disconnects.
Sander
Connectors
and
Quick
9.
Two (2) Band Saw Connectors and Quick Disconnects.
10.
Two (2) 6" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
11.
Two (2) 5" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
12.
Two (2) 3" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
13.
Two (2) 5" Dia. Slide Gates.
Table
Saw
Connectors
and
Quick
C.
Motor for Dust Collector shall have TEFC enclosure and
shall be designed to operate on three phase, 208
volts, 60 Hz A.C.
Unit shall be fitted with six (6)
feet long heavy duty, four conductor (one grounding)
cord set and twist-lock plug to match the receptacle.
Dust Collector shall be approved for Class II,
Division 1, Group G locations as per Article 502 of
NFPA 70.
D.
Provide in convenient location on Dust Collector a
magnetic
starter
wired
to
motor
with
approved
materials.
E.
Dust Collector - Mobile shall be Model 50-182 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 196
05/14/04
12.151
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
FOUNDRY DEMONSTRATION OUTFIT
A.
Foundry demonstration outfit shall consist of all
required parts and equipment necessary to demonstrate
metal casting procedures.
B.
Outfit shall consist of a minimum of one (1) each of
the following items, except if indicated otherwise:
1.
Electric crucible, with protective insulation
2.
Crucible (No. 1, holding 3 lbs. of type metal)
3.
Crucible handles (1 pair)
4.
Safety gloves (1 pair)
5.
Safety goggles (1 pair)
6.
Casting Flask (4.5" x 6.5" I.D.)
7.
Split pattern (paper weight anvil or equiv.)
8.
Casting sand (1 gal.)
9.
Skimmer
10.
Bench rammer
11.
Riddle
12.
Brush
13.
Dusting Bag
14.
Type metal 510oF melting point (5 lbs.)
15.
Strike off bar
16.
Riser pin
17.
Vent pin
18.
Sand tray
19.
Sprue Pin
20.
Molding boards
21.
Gate knife
22.
Molders spoon
23.
Instructional book
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 197
05/14/04
24.
Steel storage case with lock and side handles
25.
Parting compound (5 lbs.)
26.
Cerrobend alloy, 158oF melting point (10 lbs.)
C.
Electric crucible shall be rated for 120 V, 60 HZ,
1 ph, 1000 watt operation. Provide six (6) ft. heavy
duty three conducts (one grounding) line cord with
plug to match receptacle.
D.
Foundry demonstration outfit shall be a modified
Kit "A" (Stock No. 205574) as supplied by the
Brodhead-Garrett Co.; Modified Unit "A" (Stock No. 12478) as supplied by the Paxton-Patterson Co.
12.152
RUBBER STAMP VULCANIZING PRESS
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
The vulcanizing press shall be a bench mounted unit
consisting of a 11/2 ton hydraulic jack-operated,
spring loaded platen, controlled by one pump handle
and one hydraulic release-lock handle, each having
molded hand grips.
The handles shall be removable.
The unit shall have a mechanical timer, thermostat,
platens, heating elements, and four (4) guide posts.
The press shall be complete with steel chase, bearers,
and work tray. The press shall include the following
features:
1.
Top and bottom platens shall each be heated by a
separate 500 watt heater.
2.
Wiring between the thermostat and platens shall be
protected by flexible armor, which shall ground
both platens.
3.
Platen size shall be at least 5" x 8".
4.
Steel chase shall be at least 4" x 7" inside
measure.
C.
The unit shall operate on single phase, 120 Volts, 60
Hz A.C., and shall be provided with a 5 foot heavy
duty three wire (one grounding) cord and plug to match
the receptacle. The cord shall have an approved strain
relief where it enters the enclosure.
D.
Timer shall be 15 minute mechanical with bell
signalling at end of time. The temperature control
shall be by "Robert Shaw", with remote bulb located in
the top platen.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 198
05/14/04
E.
F.
12.153
Furnish the following additional equipment,
compatible with the above specified press:
to
be
1.
One (1) extra chase.
2.
One (1) pkg. of 10" x 121/2" fine grain
impregnated bakelite molding board, consisting of
six (6) sheets.
3.
One (1) pkg. of 12" x 18" sheets of rubber stamp
gum on white Holland cloth, consisting of six (6)
sheets.
4.
One (1)
powder.
5.
One (1) Instruction booklet.
one
pound
pkg.
of
soapstone
release
Rubber Stamp Vulcanizing Press shall be Model Simple X
- 5 x 8 of Custom Printers Supply, Stock No. 286417 as
supplied by Brodhead Garrett, Mansfield, OH.
BAND SAW BLADE WELDER - PORTABLE
A.
The blade welder shall be portable, with carrying case
and carrying handle.
B.
Band saw blade welder shall be capable of welding
woodworking or metalworking band saw blades, up to at
least 3/4".
C.
Saw blade welder shall have a built-in grinder for
finishing of welds.
D.
The unit shall have push button or toggle controls and
operate on single phase, 208 volts, 60 cycle A.C.,
unless otherwise specified. It shall have a six foot
length of heavy duty three wire cord (one grounding)
with plug to match receptacle.
E.
Band saw blade welder, complete and ready to operate,
shall
be
Powermatic
Co.
Division
of
Houdaille
Industries, Inc. Model No. 1990020.
12.154
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
PLATEMAKER
A.
Unit
shall
be
a
self-contained
electrostatic
platemaker, capable of producing offset master plates
up to 11" x 16" size suitable for use with the offset
duplicators specified in Ref. No. 12.117. Unit shall
be of the table top type.
B.
Platemaker shall be complete with an adjustable
exposure timer control and L.E.D. indicator and power
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 199
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
On-Off switch. Control of primary functions shall be
automatic and permit operator control of variations in
the camera ready originals. Unit shall feature "clam
shell" design providing complete access to the
platemaker for normal maintenance and inspection.
Platemaker shall have fiber optics lens system and
stationary copyboard which produces high resolution
images from a variety of originals. Unit shall use
light sensitive zinc oxide coated paper masters, which
are developed with a toning solution to produce
positive eye-readable images. Platemaker shall be
supplied with complete operating instruction and
service manual. Unit shall conform to the following
specifications:
C.
NYSCA
1.
Platemaking Process:
Electrostatic system
(liquid toner).
2.
Design Configuration:
Table-top clam shell.
3.
Original Size:
Maximum 11.8" x 17".
4.
Cassette Capacities:
Width: 8.7", 10", 11",
12".
Length: 13" to 18.9".
5.
Maximum Image Size:
11" x 16"
6.
Magnification:
1:1
7.
Speed:
1.5 plates/minute.
8.
Plate Feed System:
Automatic feed of
individual masters.
9.
Exposure System:
Fiber optic lens and
mirror system.
10.
Development System:
Liquid toner processing
with jet spray system.
11.
Light Source:
Halogen lamp 350 watts.
12.
Drying System:
Heater and fan system
with automatic
temperature regulation.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Platemaker shall be equipped with an
on-off switch and a six foot (min.) heavy duty three
wire (one grounding) line cord with plug to match
receptacle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 200
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Furnish the following starting equipment with the
platemaker of a type approved by the manufacturer of
the unit and compatible with offset duplicator
provided:
1.
E.
12.155
NYSCA
Electrostatic Plates
a.
1 pkg. (200 plates) Long Run Master series,
pinbar or straight edge, compatible with
Offset Duplicator specified in Ref. No.
12.117.
b.
6 qts. of Electrostatic toner
c.
6 qts. Dual-purpose Electrostatic Solution
d.
6 qts. Dispersant
e.
1 E-Stat Image remover
Platemaker shall be Model 156 of A.B. Dick Company,
Chicago, Illinois.
PRINTER AND DEVELOPER
A.
Printer and developer shall be an odorless, selfcontained, table model, diazo process copier, capable
of producing black line, blue line or sepia from
translucent originals up to 45" width.
B.
Unit shall be of heavy duty construction with
processing speed variable from one (1) to fifteen (15)
feet per minute with forward and reverse control.
Machine shall have completely self-contained nonammonia developing system with one 180 watt super
diazo self-cleaning fluorescent cylinder lamp and 0.1
HP (min.) drive motor.
Unit shall have a rated
printing width of 42" and shall only require electric
power during actual size.
C.
Printer and developer shall be designed for 120 volt,
60 HZ, 1 phase 1 KW operation.
Supply six (6) ft.
heavy duty three conductor (one grounding) line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
D.
Supply the following accessories and supplies with
machine of a type approved by manufacturer of machine
(Bruning numbers given):
1.
Six (6) Pints of activator No. 2010
2.
One (1) Cylinder lamp No. 09-203
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 201
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
4.
E.
12.156
Black line reproduction paper in the following
sizes: No. 28-2061
a.
One (1) Pkg. (250 sheets) 8 1/2" x 11"
b.
One (1) Pkg. (250 sheets) 11" x 17"
c.
One (1) Pkg. (250 sheets) 17" x 22"
d.
One (1) Pkg. (100 sheets) 22" x 34"
Two (2) Instruction/Service Manual.
Printer and developer shall be a Model PD-85 as
manufactured
by
the
Bruning
Div.
Addressograph
Multigraph Corp., Schaumburg, Ill.
PHOTO-COMPOSING MACHINE
A.
Photo-composing machine shall be bench mounted with
integral processing units and capable of producing
single
line
copy
on
35
or
51
millimeter
photosensitized paper tape of film.
B.
Machine shall be capable of reproducing fonts in sizes
from 10 point to 84 point. It shall have controls for
automatic letter and word spacing, exposure timing and
line length.
Processing shall be self contained and
automatic.
C.
Composing machine shall operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle
A.C. It shall be equipped with a six foot heavy duty
three wire cord (one grounding), and a plug to match
receptacle.
It shall be operated by means of an onoff toggle switch.
D.
The photo-composing machine shall come equipped with
the following type face:
Style 73: 84 point
Style 71: 36 and 38 point
Style 53: 14, 18 and 24 point
Style 38: 30 Point
It shall also be furnished with:
6 cartridges, plastic opaquer 35 mm paper
3 cartridges, transparent 35 mm paper
6 pkgs. of fixer
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 202
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6 pkgs. of developer
E.
Furnish with unit two copies each of instruction manual
and service parts list.
F.
Name plate shall be of aluminum with indented or
engraved letters 1/8" high, reading "City of New York
- Board of Education".
Letters shall be filled with
chemical resistant black enamel and the entire plate
protected with a chemical resistant clear coating.
The name plate shall be permanently fastened to unit
with rivets.
G.
Photo-Composing
Model 820.
12.157
Varityper
Corp.
"Headliner"
COLLATOR - PORTABLE
A.
The collator shall be an eight (8) station, selfcontained, metal enclosed, portable unit with a
carrying handle, capable of collating sheets of paper
of sizes from 5" x 8" to 11" x 17".
B.
Collator shall contain eight (8) feed arms, with two
(2) rollers per arm. and eight (8) trays for holding
the sheets with cork stripping to assure a positive
feed down to the last sheet. Unit shall collate paper
weights of 16# bond to 110# index at a speed of 20
sets per minute and a maximum stock height of 11/8".
Collator shall have a set counter which shall
automatically count the number of sets collated.
Operation of the unit shall be by a panel mounted
button on-off switch and foot operated control for
collating speed.
C.
Collator shall be designed to operate on single phase,
120 Volts, 60 cycle, A.C. (15 amp service size), and
shall be provided with a heavy duty three wire (one
grounding) cord and plug to match the receptacle.
D.
Collator - Portable shall be Model
Machinery Company, Grand Haven, MI.
12.158
NYSCA
Machine,
CA-8,
Challenge
LIGHT TABLE
A.
The light table shall be a floor model with glass table
top illuminated from below for layout and striping.
Unit shall have 18" x 20" x 1/4" thick glass work
surface centered in a 21" x 23" top surface, which is
30" high.
B.
The table and footrest shall be constructed of welded
steel with a minimum thickness of 18 gage. Top edges
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 203
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
shall be chromed steel straight edges for drafting
use, all other metal surfaces shall have baked enamel
finish. Leave no sharp corner edges on external
protruding shelves. Unit shall have leg levelers.
Light Table shall be delivered set up and ready for
use.
C.
The illumination shall be provided by incandescent
bulbs or fluorescent tubes which shall be of standard
make and shall be installed in the light table in such
manner
that
removal
and
replacement
is
easily
possible. Unit shall be equipped with light diffuser
to provide an evenly illuminated glass work surface.
D.
Unit shall be UL Listed and operate on single phase,
120 volts, 60 Hz, A.C., and shall come equipped with a
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) cord, and a plug
to match receptacle.
E.
Light Table shall be Model VLT18F, nuArc Company, Inc.,
Chicago IL.
12.158A
12.159
NYSCA
LIGHT TABLE - PORTABLE
A.
The light table shall be a portable
with glass table top illuminated from
and striping. Unit shall have 23" x
glass work surface centered in a
surface.
table top model
below for layout
28" x 1/4" thick
26" x 31" top
B.
The table shall be constructed of welded steel with a
minimum thickness of 18 gage. Unit shall have tilting
top and position lock. Top edges shall be chromed
steel straight edges for drafting use, all other metal
surfaces shall have baked enamel finish. Light table
shall be delivered set up and ready for use.
C.
The illumination shall be provided by fluorescent tubes
which shall be of standard make and shall be installed
in the light table in such manner that removal and
replacement is easily possible. Unit shall be equipped
with light diffuser to provide an evenly illuminated
glass work surface.
D.
Unit shall be UL Listed and operate on single phase,
120 volts, 60 Hz, A.C., and shall come equipped with a
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) cord, and a plug
to match receptacle.
E.
Light Table - Portable shall be Model VLT23T, nuArc
Company, Inc., Chicago IL.
BENCH PUNCH
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 204
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
A.
Bench punch shall be a hand lever operated unit for
punching holes in metal, bench mounted, with a 4"
overhang to allow for waste discharge. Punch shall be
of rugged drop forged construction with all wearing
parts heat-treated. Unit shall have a capacity of ten
(10) tons. Throat depth shall be 5" with adjustable
back-gage. Cutting capacity shall be 2" diameter hole
in 12 gage mild steel.
B.
Accessories
C.
12.160
1.
The punch shall come equipped with a set of narrow
strippers.
2.
The following round punch and die combinations, as
furnished by manufacturer, shall be supplied with
press: 1/8, 3/16, 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 7/16, 1/2, 3/4,
and 1 inches. Furnish also the following three die
shoes, as supplied by manufacturer: 7/8, 1-3/16,
and 1-15/16 inches.
3.
Furnish worktable, as supplied by manufacturer,
together with the following three (3) die
adapters: 7/8, 1-3/16, and 1-15/16 inches.
Bench Punch, with
accessories as specified above,
complete and ready to operate, shall be Model No. 91
of W.A. Whitney Corp., Rockford, Illinois.
CHASSIS - PICK-UP TRUCK
A.
The chassis shall be a new current year pick-up truck
type, without body or cab, but otherwise complete,
having a wheel base of 114" to 122" inclusive.
B.
The chassis shall contain a new six cylinder engine,
together with a battery, starter, generator or
alternator,
coil,
distributor,
spark
plugs,
carburetor, gas tank, fuel pump, air and oil filters,
etc., and standard transmission.
Additional equipment shall include the radiator, four
wheels and new tires (inflated), steering assembly,
exhaust
system,
hydraulic
brake
system,
shock
absorbers, front and rear lights, directional lights
and 4-way emergency lights, and a standard instrument
panel.
NYSCA
C.
The unit shall be completely wired, hooked-up,
adjusted, lubricated, and ready to operate; all as per
the manufacturers specifications.
D.
The complete unit shall be a pick-up truck chassis,
shall be a Ford, Chevrolet, Dodge, or other approved
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 205
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
make.
Provide a complete
manual and parts list.
12.161
service
SPARK PLUG CLEANER & TESTER - BENCH TYPE
A.
Spark plug cleaner and tester shall be a portable,
bench
top
unit
designed
for
the
servicing
of
automotive spark plugs.
B.
Spark plug cleaner shall be a heavy duty industrial
type unit with grommet to fit all sizes of spark
plugs, abrasive flow generator which covers entire
base of spark plug; dust separating system with
dust/carbon and cleaning compound individual bags, and
all other parts required for full operation.
C.
Spark plug tester shall provide a continuous spark in
compression chamber to test firing efficiency. Tester
shall have recessed observation mirror, two openings
to allow performance comparison of new and serviced
spark plugs, and all other necessary components.
Furnish Parts/Instruction Manual.
D.
Electrical requirements of spark plug cleaner and
tester shall be 120 V, 60 HZ, 100 W. Provide six (6)
ft. three conductor (one grounding) Type S heavy duty
line cord in accordance with Art 24 of the N.Y.C.
Electrical Code.
E.
Spark plug cleaner and tester shall be a Vixen Mod 400
as supplied by the E.J. Wudel Mfg. Co, Santa Fe
Springs, Cal.
12.162
NYSCA
manufacturer's
SLOW AND FAST BATTERY CHARGER - MOBILE
A.
Slow and fast battery charger shall be a mobile unit
having a heavy duty selenium rectifier rated to
deliver 50 amps. of continuous charge for 6 volt and
12 volt batteries.
Battery charger shall be capable
of being used as a starter or battery charger on
generator or alternator equipped cars.
B.
Battery charger shall operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle
A.C. and shall come equipped with a 12 foot three wire
cord (one grounding) and plug, to match receptacle,
and 9 foot long heavy duty leads with heavy duty
positive
type
clamps
having
replaceable
copper
inserts.
All cables shall be heavy duty Type S in
accordance with Art 24 of the N.Y.C. Electrical Code.
C.
Battery charger shall have the following additional
features:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 206
05/14/04
1.
Green and red pilot lights to show proper and
improper battery and charger connections.
2.
Manual solenoid valve to by-pass dead battery.
3.
Heavy duty transformer and cooling fan to cool
rectifier and transformer.
4.
Timer to allow manual or automatic control for a
period up to 60 minutes with automatic shut off.
Hold position to allow indefinite charge at
selected rate.
5.
Charge rate selector with "Trickle",
"Medium", or "High" charge positions.
6.
Voltage selector switch for 6 volt or 12 volt
battery charging.
7.
Ammeter with a zero to 60 amp. scale in five
ampere increments.
A red or danger zone on
ammeter scale to show excessive charging.
"Slow",
D.
Completely enclosed metal cabinet with hinged top cover
shall have baked enamel finish.
Cabinet shall be
mounted on two 8" heavy duty rubber wheels and have
two metal legs to allow unit to stand level. The unit
shall have a handle for movability.
E.
Furnish two copies of
replacement parts lists.
F.
Slow and fast battery charger,
shall be Sun Mode. IBC-720.
12.163
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
unit
operation
as
manual
specified
and
above,
ARMATURE TESTER - PORTABLE
A.
Armature tester shall be a small bench top electrical
instrument designed to test automotive and similar
armatures.
B.
Armature tester shall be a rugged electrical tester
intended to test automotive generator and starter
armatures from 2" to 6" in diameter for open, reversed
or shorted windings.
Unit shall be complete with
commutator segment probe, AC ammeter, test selector
switch,
audio
continuity
indicator,
rotor
test
supports, all mounted in a sturdy steel case. Furnish
Parts/Instruction Manual.
C.
Electrical requirements of tester shall be 120 V,
60 HZ, 1 ph, 2 Amp.
Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty
Type S three conductor (one grounding) line cord in
conformance with Art 24 of the N.Y.C. Electrical Code.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 207
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Armature tester shall be a Mod. 41-107 as supplied by
Marquette Automotive Div, Milwaukee, Wisc.
12.165
ENGINE SCOPE ANALYZER - MOBILE
A.
B.
C.
NYSCA
Engine scope analyzer shall be a cabinet type unit,
mounted on casters, and designed to make the following
engine checks:
1.
Electrical System Testing.
2.
Timing Advance Testing.
3.
Ignition System Testing.
4.
Cylinder Efficiency Analysis.
Include in or with the engine scope analyzer the
following components as supplied by the manufacturer
of the unit:
1.
Cathode ray tube, 12" rectangular scope screen
with illuminated grid.
Cathode ray tube to be
installed in mounting bracket.
2.
A high intensity flash
shatter proof case.
3.
A meter casing consisting of two large D'Arsonval
type moving coil meters (2% accuracy) with colorcoded scales and clear plastic cases plus
necessary circuitry.
4.
Vehicle test cable, single heavy duty multiconductor with plug and color-coded connectors.
5.
Lower Cabinet shall be completely enclosed,
equipped with ball bearing swivel oil resistant
casters, and equipped with a locked and hinged
front door with 2 keys.
6.
Insulated ignition pliers.
7.
Necessary diagnostic procedure pads, colored wall
chart, etc., as normally furnished with Analyzer.
8.
Instructional manual and maintenance manual.
tube
timing
light
in
The unit shall operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle, A.C.,
and shall be equipped with a heavy duty three wire
cord (one grounding) and plug to match receptacle.
All cables shall be heavy duty type "S" in accordance
with Art. 24 of the N.Y.C. Electrical Code.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 208
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Engine scope analyzer shall be the Allen Electric and
Equipment Company, Model 14-050 with components and
accessories Bear No. 40-950B.
12.166
TIRE CHANGING UNIT - MANUAL TYPE
A.
Tire changing unit shall be a manually operated tire
servicing unit for bead loosening, dismounting and
mounting of conventional or tubeless tires.
B.
Unit shall have the capacity to handle all standard
sizes and types of American manufactured automobile
tires and shall handle all types of rims for passenger
cars and light trucks.
C.
Unit shall have cam action bead loosening and roller
action mounting and dismounting features and heavy all
steel construction stand with round base.
D.
The tire changing unit shall be complete and ready for
use,
including
the
standard
equipment
as
per
manufacturer's catalog.
The following accessories
shall also be provided:
1 - Tool-Roller-Action Combination Tool "61".
1 - Spreader Attachment
1 - Mounting Band
E.
12.166A
NYSCA
Tire changing unit shall be Coats Company, Division of
The Jack P. Hennessy Co., Coats Three Star Tireman.
TIRE CHANGER - PNEUMATIC
A.
Tire changer shall be a floor mounted, air powered,
foot pedal actuated unit designed for the tire
servicing of all standard passenger cars and some
light trucks.
B.
Unit shall be a rugged, heavy duty machine capable of
dismounting and mounting tube or tubeless tires on
wheel rims with a minimum of manual effort.
Machine
shall handle wheel rims from 10" to 17.5" in dia.
(min.) and from 3.5" to 8.5" in width (min.)
Unit
shall be complete with upper and lower bead breaker
shoes, power thrust limiter, air cylinder, foot
controls and all other required parts.
Supply
instruction/parts manual and ten (10) feet of heavy
duty flexible air line with quick disconnect to match
shop air line fitting.
C.
Tire changer shall be Coats 10-10, J. Hennessy Co.,
West Paterson, N.J.; Bear Mark V Model 90-203 of
Applied Power, Inc., Rock Island, Ill.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 209
05/14/04
12.167
TIRE TEST TANK
A.
Tire tester shall be a floor model aluminum tank with
rolled edges, and having a quick operating chuck and
jaws, with a chuck locking means, and shall support
the tire in an upright position, permitting the free
rotation of the tire. Tank shall be approximately 35"
long x 12" wide x 13" deep.
B.
Unit shall be capable of accommodating all passenger
car and light truck tires.
C.
Tire tester shall be Huffy 3109; or Champ 95-1301.
12.168
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
SIX CYLINDER ENGINE - OPERABLE
A.
The engine shall be a new, current year, 6 cylinder
engine, complete and in running condition, equipped
with
batteries, starter, carburetor, all computer
control modules and associated sensors, fuel pump,
distributor, coil, spark plugs, alternator, voltage
regulator, oil filter, air cleaner, exhaust pipe, etc.
Supply two (2) 6 volt heavy duty batteries BCI size 2
(with series connector), DEKA No. 902, DELCO No. 917.
B.
Provide an instrument panel with an ammeter, oil
pressure and temperature gauges, and an ignition
switch with two (2) keys.
A hand operated throttle
shall also be mounted on this panel.
C.
Provide a one (1) gallon gas tank, connected to the
fuel line.
D.
The engine, together with all of the above components,
shall be installed in the live engine stand, using
shock-absorbing engine mounts.
Connect the flexible
exhaust connection between the engine exhaust pipe and
the muffler on the stand.
E.
Six cylinder engine shall be by Ford, General Motors,
or Chrysler. When a quantity of two or three six
cylinder engines are specified, each engine shall be
of a different manufacture.
Provide complete service
manual and parts list.
F.
The engine in the stand shall be completely hooked-up,
lubricated as per manufacturer's specifications, test
operated, and shall be left in satisfactory operating
condition.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 210
05/14/04
12.169
V-8 ENGINE - OPERABLE
A.
The engine shall be a new, current year, V-8 engine,
complete and in running condition, equipped with
batteries, starter, carburetor, all computer control
modules
and
associated
sensors,
fuel
pump,
distributor, coil, spark plugs, alternator, voltage
regulator, oil filter, air cleaner, exhaust pipe, etc.
Supply two (2) 6 volt heavy duty batteries BCI size 2
(with series connector), DEKA No. 902, DELCO No. 917.
B.
Provide an instrument panel with an ammeter, oil
pressure and temperature gauges, and an ignition
switch with two (2) keys.
A hand operated throttle
shall also be mounted on this panel.
C.
Provide a one gallon tank, connected to the fuel line.
D.
The engine, together with all of the above components,
shall be installed in the live engine stand, using
shock absorbing engine mounts.
Attach the flexible
exhaust connection between the engine exhaust pipe and
the muffler on the stand.
E.
V-8 engine shall be by Ford, General
Chrysler. When a quantity of two or three
are specified, each engine shall be of
manufacture.
Provide complete service
parts list.
F.
The engine in the stand shall be completely hooked-up,
lubricated as per manufacturer's specifications, test
operated, and shall be left in satisfactory operating
condition.
12.169A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Motors, or
V-8 engines
a different
manual and
FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE - OPERABLE
A.
The engine shall be a new, current year, 4 cylinder
engine, complete and in running condition, equipped
with
batteries,
starter,
carburetor,
fuel
pump,
distributor, coil, spark plugs, alternator, voltage
regulator, oil filter, air cleaner, exhaust pipe, all
computer control modules and associated sensors, etc.
Supply two (2) 6 volt heavy duty batteries BCI size 2
(with series connector), DEKA No. 902, DELCO No. 917.
B.
Provide an instrument panel with an ammeter, oil
pressure and temperature gauges, and an ignition
switch with two (2) keys.
A hand operated throttle
shall also be mounted on this panel.
C.
Provide a one (1) gallon gas tank, connected to the
fuel line.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 211
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
The engine, together with all of the above components,
shall be installed in the live engine stand, using
shock-absorbing engine mounts.
Connect the flexible
exhaust connection between the engine exhaust pipe and
the muffler on the stand.
E.
4 cylinder engine shall be by Ford, General Motors, or
Chrysler. When a quantity of two or three 4 cylinder
engines are specified, each engine shall be of a
different manufacture.
Provide complete service
manual and parts list for each type engine.
F.
The engine in stand shall be completely hooked-up,
lubricated as per manufacturer's specifications, test
operated,
and
shall
be
left
in
satisfactorily
operating condition.
12.170
DIFFERENTIAL-DRIVE SHAFT HOLDING FIXTURE
A.
The holding fixture shall be a bench mounted device
capable of holding a rear-end or drive shaft unit for
the purpose of disassembly and repair.
B.
The fixture shall be Kent-Moore No. J-3289-1.
C.
The following companion flange holding tools shall be
furnished:
No. J-2637 A
D.
J-2933
J-5293
J-3264
J-6289
The following
furnished:
companion
No. J-820 A
J-4743
J-962 A
J-5514
J-3420
J-6295
flange
removers
shall
be
E.
The holding tools and removers shall be of the same
manufacture as the holding fixture.
F.
Holding fixture, holding tools, and removers, shall be
of the latest design, in conformity with the items as
specified above, as recommended by the manufacturer.
12.171
PARTS CLEANER - MOBILE
A.
NYSCA
J-3453
Parts cleaner shall be a self-contained mobile unit
with electric motor driven pump with continuous flow
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 212
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
cold cleaning type solvent.
The enamel finished
cabinet shall have hinged self closing double thick
cover, equipped with fusible link safety closing
device fused for 160oF. The parts cleaner shall have a
capacity of approximately thirty (30) gallons of cold
cleaning solvent and a 2" drain plug.
B.
The fluid system shall consist of a barrier filter,
replaceable cartridge filter, grit ejector, and semirigid hose.
C.
The electric motor for the pump shall be a fan cooled
1/20 H.P. shaded pole sparkless type, to operate on
120 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
The unit shall include an
on-off switch and indicator light and a six (6) foot
long heavy duty three wire cord (one grounding) with
plug to fit receptacles in the shop.
D.
The following accessories sized
provided, shall be furnished:
One (1) drying shelf:
to
the
machine
Kleer-flo Model K 79.
One (1) plain soaking tank:
Three (3) parts baskets:
Kleer-flo Model K 81.
Kleer-flo Model K 80.
Twelve (12) cartridge filters:
Three (3) barrier filters:
Kleer-flo Model F 100.
Kleer-flo Model BF 100.
Twelve (12) parts cleaning brushes:
BR-1.
Kleer-flo Model
E.
The parts cleaner shall have an initial filling of
solvent, as furnished by manufacturer of equipment,
Kleer-flo Hi-T Degreasol Formula F-99.
In addition,
furnish one (1) thirty (30) gallon drum of cleaning
compound Kleer-flo Hi-T Degreasol Formula F-99.
F.
Parts cleaner shall be Kleer-flo Company, Model 70 B
with accessories as specified, complete, adjusted and
ready to operate.
G.
Contractor shall
specified under
Requirements."
12.172
obtain all "Use Permits", etc. as
"General Conditions" and "General
HYDRAULIC SERVICE JACK - 2 TON, MOBILE
A.
NYSCA
fit
Hydraulic service jack shall be hand-operated, single
saddle, two ton capacity, dolly type, with rigid steel
constructed frame.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 213
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
The unit shall have a hydraulic lift system with a high
capacity air chamber to eliminate the need for
venting. A speed and power lift system with automatic
overload valve shall be provided in the hydraulic
system of the jack. All controls of the service jack
shall be mounted on the handle, and the three position
handle shall have neoprene grips.
C.
The jack shall have a minimum low saddle height of 4",
and a maximum high saddle lift of approx. 24" with a
hydraulic lift of approx. 21".
D.
The jack shall be equipped with heavy duty oil
resistant rubber tired wheels, two fixed roller
bearing and two free swinging wheels.
E.
Service jack shall be furnished and delivered complete
and ready to operate.
F.
Two ton hydraulic service jack shall be Blackhawk Mfg.
Co. Model SJ-3R; Hein Werner Corp. Model MR; Ajax Mfg.
Corp. Model J-136.
12.174
PNEUMATIC GREASER - MOBILE
A.
Greaser shall be a compact unit with a baked enamel
finish, mounted on four swivel casters, designed to
dispense lubricants directly from 25, 35, and 50
pounds refinery pails.
B.
Cabinet, pump, and hose assembly shall be removable as
one unit to permit replacement of pails.
C.
Unit shall be equipped with a self-seating air valve
and seat, an air piston which requires no oil and has
a capacity to deliver up to 141/2 ounces of grease per
minute; a detachable air coupler; standard 6 foot lube
hose, and a Z-type swivel and control valve.
D.
Unit shall normally operate on 100 psi air service.
E.
Pneumatic greaser shall be Model
Division of Stewart-Warner Corp.
12.175
NYSCA
711-C,
Alemite
PUG MILL - PORTABLE
A.
The mill shall be a self-contained bench type unit,
mounted on four non-skid feet, capable of thoroughly
mixing and blending approx. 100 lbs. of moist clay per
hour, for throwing, sculpturing and jiggering, and
also for extrusion of special shapes.
B.
The steel hopper with sliding lid, the extrusion
barrel, and the auger blades shall all be chromium
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 214
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
plated.
Direct drive of the auger blades shall
provide fast cutting, mixing, and wedging action.
C.
The motor shall be a 1/3 horsepower, 120 volts, 60
cycle A.C. gear-motor, and shall be provided with a 6
ft. long heavy duty three wire cord and grounding plug
to fit receptacle in the room.
D.
Provide in convenient location, on the pug mill, a
magnetic starter completely wired to motor with
approved materials.
E.
Two (2) interchangeable extrusion dies, (Max. size
11/2") one for a rod and one for a tube, shall be
supplied with the unit.
F.
Plug Mill shall be made by the American Art Clay Co.
12.176
REAR-END - AUTOMOBILE
A.
The rear-end shall be a new, current year, passenger
car unit, independently supported.
B.
The unit shall consist of a complete differential
comprised of the gear mechanism, axle, bearings, and
housing; both rear wheels with new tires (inflated),
including brake shoes and wheel cylinders.
The unit
shall
be
lubricated
as
per
the
manufacturer's
specifications, and shall be in complete working
order.
C.
Rear-end shall be of standard General Motors, Ford, or
Chrysler manufacture. Include complete manufacturer's
parts and service list and service manual for unit.
D.
Complete unit shall be supported clear of
two (2) steel pyramid-type stands; the
rigidly bolted thereon, and the stands
bolted to the floor.
This contractor
shop drawings for the stands.
12.177
NYSCA
the floor on
axle housing
leveled and
shall submit
AIR METER AND HOSE
A.
Air meter shall be an automatic cut-off air meter
designed for wall mounting, with provision for setting
meter to desired pressure.
Mechanism shall be
completely housed in a metal enclosure, having easily
read dial settings.
B.
Air meter shall be complete, adjusted, and ready for
use, and shall be furnished with chuck and 25 feet of
red rubber hose, as provided by the manufacturer of
the unit.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 215
05/14/04
C.
12.178
DESIGN NO. _____
Air meter shall be John Wood
Division, ECO Tireflator Model 97.
Co.,
Bennett
Pump
POWER DRIVE AND STAND - PORTABLE
A.
The unit shall be a self-contained, portable, floor
model power drive for cutting, threading and reaming
pipe.
The power drive shall contain the following
features:
One-piece cast aluminum housing; gears
fully heat-treated and hardened; all metal one-piece
hand wheel; all steel rocker action jaw inserts,
replaceable; three jaw tight grip rear centering
device to turn with and support pipe; two adjustable
heavy duty support bars; drive shaft of centerlessground steel tubing.
B.
The motor shall be 1/2 H.P.; 120 volt; single phase; 60
cycle; A.C. and shall have a 15-foot three wire oilresistant power cord (one grounding) with a plug to
match the receptacle in the room.
The power drive
shall be equipped with a bump-proof reversible switch
with a positive stop between forward and reverse.
C.
The portable power drive shall be equipped with the
following standard equipment (as furnished by the
manufacturer of the machine supplied):
One (1) Speed
insert jaws.
chuck
with
replaceable
rocker
action
One (1) rear centering device, three jaw (to turn with
chuck).
Two (2) heavy duty tool support bars.
One (1) gallon "Ridgid" thread cutting oil.
Three (3) Allen wrenches.
D.
The power drive shall be complete, adjusted and ready
to operate and shall be furnished with the following
additional
accessories
as
furnished
by
the
manufacturer of unit to fit the machine supplied. All
accessories supplied shall be complete sets where
needed.
One (1) Stand with integral folding legs and tray.
Legs held closed by chain lock.
Model No. 1206
"Ridgid", Ridge Tool Company.
One (1) Clip on tray. "Ridgid" Model No. 1452, Ridge
Tool Company.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 216
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
One (1) Carriage. Aluminum alloy carriage mounted on
support bars to hold die head, cutter and reamer.
Ridgid Model No. 311, Ridge Tool Company.
Two (2) Universal Quick Opening Die Heads. One (1) for
R.H. Universal Pipe and Bolt Dies and one (1) for L.H.
Universal Pipe Dies, Universal Quick Opening Die Heads,
Ridge Tool Co.
One (1) Cutter and wheels. Full floating, wheel type
cutter with wide rolls.
Capacity: 1/8" to 2" pipe;
1/4" to 7/8" rod with No. 1 and No. 2 wheels; 5/16" to
1" rod with No. E-1032 Cutter Wheel. Ridgid Model No.
360, Ridge Tool Company.
One (1) Reamer. Five flute cone 1/8" to 2" capacity.
Ridgid Model No. 340, Ridge Tool Company.
One (1) Nipple Chuck that holds short and close nipples
or studs for threading. Nipple chuck shall be 1/2" to
2" with 5 adapters, patented carried and wrench.
Ridgid Model No. 19, Ridge Tool Company.
One (1) set of Pipe adapters. Sizes 1/8", 1/4", 3/8",
1/2", 3/4", 1", 11/4" and 11/2". Pipe Adapters, Ridge
Tool Co. to fit nipple chuck No. 19.
One (1) set of Stud Adapters. Sizes 1/4" through and
including 2" N.C. and 1/4" through and including
11/2", N.F. Stud Adapters shall be Ridge Tool Company
to fit nipple chuck No. 19.
Two (2) Nipple Chuck Wrenches.
fit nipple chuck No. 19
Ridge Tool Company to
One (1) complete set of Universal R.H. High Speed Steel
Pipe Dies: 1/8", 1/4 to 3/8", 1/2 to 3/4" and 1" to 2".
Universal High Speed Steel Pipe Dies shall be by the
Ridge Tool Co.
One (1) complete set of Universal L.H. High Speed Steel
Pipe Dies: 1/4 to 3/8", 1/2 to 3/4" and 1" to 2".
Universal High Speed Steel Pipe Dies shall be by the
Ridge Tool Co.
One (1) complete set of Universal R.H. High Speed Steel
Bolt Dies N.C. (U.S.S.): 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16",
1/2", 9/16", 5/8", 3/4", 7/8", 1", 11/8", 11/4", 13/8",
11/2", 13/4" and 2".
Universal High Speed Steel Bolt
Dies shall be by Ridge Tool Co.
One (1) complete set of Universal R.H. High Speed Steel
Bolt Dies N.F. (S.A.E.): 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16",
1/2", 9/16", 5/8", 3/4", 7/8", 1", 11/8", 11/4", 13/8"
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 217
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
and 11/2". Universal High Speed Steel Bolt Dies shall
be by the Ridge Tool Co.
One (1) Carriage Lever to fit R.H. support bar and
center of No. 311 Carriage.
Ridgid Kit 312 Carriage
Lever by the Ridge Tool Company.
One (1) Die Head Rack. Six compartments for Universal
Die Heads.
Ridgid Model No. 6U by the Ridge Tool
Company.
E.
12.179
NYSCA
Power drive shall be Model No. 300 by the Ridge Tool
Company.
ONE CYLINDER - TWO CYCLE GASOLINE ENGINE
A.
One cylinder-two cycle gasoline engine shall be a
small, air cooled unit with vertical crankshaft,
intended
for
demonstration
of
engine
operation
principles.
B.
Engine shall have the following characteristics: (min.)
1.
Bore:
2.094"
2.
Stroke:
1.5"
3.
H.P.:
2.75"
4.
Crankshaft length:
3.156"
5.
Starter:
Recoil
6.
Gas Tank (max.):
2 qts.
C.
Engine shall be supplied lubricated, complete with all
standard accessories, ready to run, except for
fueling.
Provide complete manufacturers instruction
manual and parts list. Mount as shown on Drawing.
D.
For the engine furnish, the following additional
accessories shall be supplied of a type approved by
manufacturer of engine:
1.
Six (6) Overhaul gasket set
2.
Two (2) Carburetor repair kits
3.
Two (2) Spark plugs
4.
Two (2) Piston ring sets (Standard size)
5.
Two (2) Breaker point and condenser sets
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 218
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
E.
12.180
One cylinder-two cycle engine shall be a Model AV520 No. 800100, Tecumseh Products, Tecumseh, Mich.
ONE CYLINDER-FOUR CYCLE GASOLINE ENGINE
A.
One cylinder-four cycle gasoline engine shall be a
small, air cooled unit with horizontal crankshaft,
intended
for
demonstration
of
engine
operation
principles.
B.
Engine shall have the following characteristics: (min.)
1.
Bore:
2.375"
2.
Stroke:
1.50"
3.
H.P.:
2.0"
4.
Displacement:
6.65 cu. in.
5.
Starter:
Recoil
6.
Gas Tank (max.):
2 qts.
C.
Engine shall be supplied lubricated, complete with all
standard accessories,
ready to run, except for
fueling.
Provide complete manufacturers instruction
manual and parts list. Mount as shown on Drawings.
D.
For the engine furnish, the following additional
accessories shall be supplied of a type approved by
manufacturer of engine:
E.
12.181
1.
Six (6) Overhaul gasket set
2.
Two (2) Carburetor repair kits
3.
Two (2) Spark plugs
4.
Two (2) Piston ring sets (Standard size)
5.
Two (2) Breaker point and condenser sets
One cylinder-four cycle engine shall be a Series 601020015 (with Vacujet Carburetor), Briggs Stratton Corp.,
Milwaukee, Wisc.
HYDRAULIC CRANE - MOBILE
A.
NYSCA
Two (2) Quarts two cycle engine oil
The unit shall be a 2000 pound capacity, mobile
hydraulic floor crane and shall have the following
characteristics:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 219
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Overall length approx. 7' and overall width
approx. 37"; and overall height approx. 6'-4".
2.
Boom height, lowest
position 8'-11".
3.
Crane is to be equipped with an extension boom
having the following characteristics:
position,
3'
and
highest
Boom travel 5'-11" with extension boom lowest
position 1' and extension boom highest position
10'-11".
4.
B.
Additional features of the hydraulic floor crane shall
be:
1.
Single and double acting multi-speed hand pump,
and completely sealed hydraulic system.
2.
Forged steel load chain and large forged steel
load hook.
3.
Positive steering assembly.
4.
Load lowering control valve to permit load to be
lowered slowly or rapidly or held positively at
any desired height.
C.
Unit to be painted with a suitable enamel finish to
prevent rusting.
D.
Hydraulic floor cranes shall be Ruger Equipment Co.,
Model HP-18A.
12.182
NYSCA
6" rubber tired steering wheels and load bearing
wheels to be equipped with heavy duty roller
bearings or oilite bearings.
UNIVERSAL ENGINE STAND - MOBILE
A.
The engine stand shall be a mobile unit capable of
holding for assembly and disassembly, between two
upright supports, standard current year and past years
American made automobile engines, both 6 cylinder inline and V-8 cylinder engines.
B.
The engine stand shall be equipped with a positive lock
to hold the rotating arms at desired working angles.
The unit shall also be provided with a geared down
hand lever to permit slow and effortless safe rotation
of the arms while holding an engine.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 220
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
The unit shall be equipped with four locking type
rubber tired swivel casters having 360o rotation.
Casters shall be heavy duty with anti-friction
bearings.
D.
The engine stand shall come complete with standard
attachments as provided by manufacturer, and in
addition furnish the following accessories:
4 Angle clips.
4 Eye bolts.
4 Long studs.
4 Short studs.
2 Short suspension bars.
E.
Entire stand and accessories shall have a rust resistant paint finish.
F.
Universal engine stand with standard attachments and
additional accessories as specified above, complete
and ready to operate, shall be:
Kent-Moore Engine Stand J-23935 with:
Adapter with Arms:
Stand:
Adapter:
No. J-23925
No. J-23931
No. J-22846
or
Owatonna Engine Stand Mod. 1730-B
W/2 extra arms:
12.183
OUTBOARD MOTOR TEST BARREL
A.
NYSCA
No. 1718
Outboard motor test barrel shall be an open top
standard 55 gallon steel drum with supplementary items
affixed as follows:
1.
One (1) 3/4" hose bibb valve as drain, welded
approx. 4" from bottom of barrel (between
casters).
2.
Two (1) 5" x 11/2" heavy duty ball bearing casters
welded to the side (not to bottom of barrel) with
wheel edge approx. 1" from bottom of barrel and in
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 221
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
such a manner as to permit empty barrel to be
tipped and wheeled around.
3.
B.
Barrel and supplementary exposed ferrous metal parts
shall be given one coat of epoxy primer and one coat
of epoxy gray finish paint.
C.
Supply a 25 foot length of plastic garden hose with a
male fitting on one end and a female fitting on other
sized to fit the room hose bibb and the barrel drain
hose bibb.
12.184
4
OUTBOARD MOTOR STAND
A.
Stand shall be constructed in accordance with detail as
shown on Drawings. Wood shall be stress grade douglas
fir.
B.
The end pieces and center
constructed that the whole
assembled, but may be readily
sections.
All pieces shall
washers and lock washers as
nails.
C.
Exposed metal parts shall be given one coat of epoxy
primer and one coat of epoxy gray finish paint. Wood
parts shall be given one coat of primer and one coat
of gray enamel finish.
12.185
section shall be so
unit is rigid when
dis-assembled in three
be bolted, using flat
required.
Do not use
OUTBOARD MOTOR - 5-10 HP
A.
NYSCA
One (1) wood motor mounting board of white pine,
approx. 2" thick by 111/2" wide by 18" long, given
two coats of Cuprinol wood marine preservative,
and bolted to top outside of drum on side away
from casters.
Use six (6) 11/2" x 12" long,
plated RH wood screws with washers under heads.
Outboard motor shall have the following features:
1.
Manual Starting Mechanism.
2.
Horsepower-Acceptable Range 5-10 HP.
3.
Shift-Gear Type-Neutral-Forward-Reverse Position.
4.
Standard Shaft model.
5.
Cylinders-Two.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 222
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Motor shall be supplied with the following accessories:
C.
12.186
Remote gas tank and hose with compatible fittings
to engine. Tank capacity to be 5 gallon maximum.
2.
Outboard
test
wheel
compatible with engine.
(propeller
replacement)
Outboard motor shall be Johnson Motors Sea Horse Model
10R75.
OUTBOARD MOTOR - 15-20 HP
A.
B.
C.
12.187
NYSCA
1.
Outboard motor shall have the following features:
1.
Electric Starting Mechanism.
2.
Horsepower-Acceptable Range 15-20 HP.
3.
Shift-Gen. Type-Neutral-Forward-Reverse Position.
4.
Standard Shaft model.
5.
Cylinders-Two.
Motor shall be supplied with the following accessories:
1.
Remote gas tank and hose with compatible fittings
to engine. Tank capacity to be 5 gallon maximum.
2.
Outboard
test
wheel
compatible with engine.
(propeller
replacement)
Outboard motor shall be Johnson Motors Sea Horse Model
15E75.
TWO TON SAFETY STAND - PORTABLE
A.
Stand shall be a self-contained, portable floor model,
garage horse of sturdy all-steel construction, with
reinforced joints, load lock handle that locks jack in
extended position until load is off, and wide area
safety type saddle to fit all cars and/or trucks.
Garage horse shall be painted with a weather resistant
enamel.
B.
The design
following:
characteristics
Capacity:
2 ton
Low Height:
11"
Maximum Height:
171/2"
shall
conform
to
the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 223
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Base:
C.
12.188
Two ton garage horse shall be Blackhawk Mfg. Co. Model
No. AX-2.
FIVE TON SAFETY STAND - PORTABLE
A.
Stand shall be a self-contained, portable floor model,
garage horse of sturdy all-steel construction, with
reinforced joints, load lock handle that locks jack in
extended position until load is off, and wide area
safety type saddle to fit all cars and/or trucks.
Garage horse shall be painted with a weather resistant
enamel.
B.
The design
following:
C.
12.189
NYSCA
8" x 9"
characteristics
shall
Capacity:
5 ton
Low Height:
143/4"
Maximum Height:
241/2"
Base:
103/4" x 123/4"
conform
to
the
Five ton garage horse shall be Blackhawk Mfg. Co. Model
No. AX-5; Hein-Werner Mod. 07320.
LIVE ENGINE STAND - MOBILE
A.
The live engine stand shall consist of a mobile steel
frame capable of firmly holding common types of
automotive engines while being test operated.
B.
The engine stand frame shall consist of the following:
1.
An engine mounting frame constructed from 11/2" x
4" x 1/4" channel iron to form a usable engine
mounting space of 48" x 26". On both 48" sides,
1/2" holes are to be drilled at 6" intervals for
engine mount brackets. Mounting frame to be set
30" from floor in stand.
2.
Stand to be provided with four (4) 2" x 2" x 1/4"
angle iron motor mount brackets. Brackets are to
form a right angle 7" long at one arm and 12" long
at the other. The 45o joint of the bracket to be
welded and 1/2" mounting holes to be drilled in
bracket at 4" intervals.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 224
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
The legs and cross pieces of the engine stand
frame to be made of 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron
welded.
4.
Lower platform of stand to be made of 2" x 1/4"
mild steel. Platform to be mounted 8" from floor
with 3 cross braces attached.
Lower platform
shall hold muffler support and battery shelf.
5.
Battery shelf on lower platform to be 3/16" black
iron steel plate 12" wide and 22" long bolted or
welded on lower platform. Ends of battery shelf
to have a 1/4" x 1" slotted hole at each end of
plate, 12" apart lengthwise. Battery shelf shall
be capable of accommodating two (2) BCI Size 2, 6
volt storage batteries.
6.
A standard size muffler with 6 foot flexible metal
exhaust pipe to be firmly mounted on lower
platform.
7.
Stand to be mounted on 11/2" x 4" 360o swivel and
locking type casters with oil resistant rubber
ball bearing wheels. Each caster to be attached
to a 4" x 4" mounting plate attached to legs of
frame.
8.
A 14 quart minimum capacity radiator with standard
drain valve to be mounted at one end of stand.
Radiator to be equipped with two (2) 16" lengths
of flexible upper and lower radiator hose secured
to radiator with adjustable clamps.
Adjustable
clamps to be provided at free end of each radiator
hose.
Provide steel mesh protective grille in
front of radiator.
9.
Instrument panel mounted on frame to consist of a
3/4" plywood varnished with two coats, 26" wide
and 8" high.
Panel to be mounted on outside of
frame, and shall contain the following:
Oil pressure gauge.
Water temperature gauge.
Ammeter + 60 Amps. range.
Tachometer.
Ignition switch with 2 keys.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 225
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Entire engine stand to be supported with braces to
avoid vibrations, and primed and painted with 2 coats
of engine gray paint.
D.
See Drawings for details.
E.
Model VWS 2000 engine stand supplied by Vowell Assoc.,
Canandaigua, N.Y. or Brompton Model BE-1240, meeting
above specification will also be accepted.
F.
Submit shop drawings for the stand.
4
12.190
SIX CYLINDER ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION - OPERABLE
A.
The engine and transmission shall be a new current year
6 cylinder passenger car unit.
B.
The engine assembly shall be complete, including the
radiator, fan, starter, alternator, distributor, coil,
spark plugs, fuel pump, carburetor, air and oil
filters, exhaust pipe and muffler, power steering, and
automatic transmission, all as supplied as standard
equipment. Provide a 2 gallon gasoline tank, mounted
on the rear portion of the chassis frame.
C.
The engine shall be supported on the front part of a
standard chassis frame.
Front end of frame shall support the radiator and front
suspension assembly including front wheels and new
tires (inflated), the steering mechanism, and the
transmission unit . On the rear portion on the frame,
provide a metal enclosure, housing an ammeter, oil
pressure gauge, temperature gauges, ignition switch
with two (2) keys, and a rigid support for the steering
wheel column. Also, provide a hand throttle.
The arrangement of these components shall be such,
that, after the engine and accessories are disconnected
and removed, the engine unit may be unbolted and
hoisted out of the frame by means of a portable crane.
NYSCA
D.
The chassis frame shall be rigidly supported on steel
legs or framework, welded to the main frame, and
bolted to the floor. The height of the supports shall
be such as to permit the front wheels to rotate
freely, and the entire frame shall be leveled.
The
supports shall be of such strength and structure as to
safely support, and withstand the vibrations set up
while the engine is running.
E.
The complete unit shall be as described above, wired,
hooked-up adjusted, lubricated, and ready to operate;
all as per the manufacturer's specifications.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 226
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Complete engine and transmission unit and accessories
shall be as supplied by General Motors, Ford, or
Chrysler.
Unit shall be provided complete with all
computer control modules and all associated sensors.
Provide complete manufacturers' parts list and service
manuals.
G.
Provide two (2) 6 volt heavy duty storage batteries BCI
size 2 (with series connector), DELCO No. 917, DEKA
No. 902 , together with battery leads of sufficient
length to reach the batteries on the floor.
12.191
GALLEY CABINET
A.
Galley cabinet shall be an all steel unit approximately
44" wide x 141/2" deep x 381/2" high. The cabinet shall
contain 100 galleys, divided into four tiers of 25
galleys each. Galleys shall be approx. 83/4" x 13".
B.
Each galley shall be double wall, rust resisting steel
construction.
The galleys shall be identified by
consecutive numerals, starting on the upper left tier,
and continuing down.
C.
Galley cabinet shall be made by the Hamilton Mfg. Co.,
Model No. 17C62.
12.192
JOGGER - PORTABLE
A.
The jogger shall be portable table top model with
single bin and capable of aerating 11/2 reams of paper
81/2" x 11" to 81/2" x 14" in size.
B.
Jogger shall be an all-metal, self-contained unit,
mounted on four vibration dampening feet, and having
an on-off switch. It shall be capable of aerating and
producing one-at-a-time feeding without the sheets
adhering to one another. The unit shall also be
capable of handling a variety of paper forms,
including small cards.
C.
Unit shall be UL Listed and operate on single phase,
120 volts, 60 Hz, A.C., 1.5 amps, and shall come
equipped with a heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
cord, and a plug to match receptacle.
D.
Jogger - Portable shall be Model "Marathon", Challenge
Machinery Company, Grand Haven, MI.
12.195
EXHAUST EQUIPMENT FOR LIVE ENGINES - AUTOMOBILE
A.
NYSCA
Connections shall consist of heavy, flexible, crush
proof neoprene rubber tubing of 3" nominal diameter,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 227
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
with a universal adapter on one end to fit the exhaust
systems of the live engines, and on the other end a
fitting to be connected to the existing ceiling or
floor exhaust outlets.
B.
Complete exhaust connections shall be furnished, each
of which shall be of such length as will be required
to reach between an engine and the nearest ceiling or
floor outlet, allowing sufficient slack.
C.
The Contractor shall inspect the premises to determine
the exact location and type of the existing exhaust
outlets to insure a complete and positive exhaust
take-off when an engine is running.
If exhaust
outlets are on the ceiling, provide pull-up hardware
consisting of pulleys, hose clamps, wall cleats and
1/4" nylon rope, as required. See Drawings.
D.
Exhaust equipment as specified above shall be Model X80E, Engwald Corp.
4
12.196
PAINT SPRAY BOOTH INSTALLATION
A.
Paint spray booth installation shall consist of a
spraybooth, air compressor unit with piping and
solenoid, spray gun and accessories and various other
components
supplied
and
installed
by
other
contractors,
except
if
indicated
otherwise
on
Drawings. Spray booth installation shall be fully in
accordance with all regulations of the N.Y.C.Board of
Standards and Appeals, Building Code of N.Y.C., the
Fire
Department
and
all
other
agencies
having
jurisdiction.
The Contractor shall file for and
procure all certificates, permits, etc. required by
agencies having jurisdiction over installation and
leave
entire
installation
in
proper
operating
condition.
B.
The following paint spray booth installation components
shall be provided by the Contractor.
1.
Spray Booth
a.
NYSCA
Spray booth shall be a paint arrestor filter,
floor stand type with approx. 48"W X 48"H x
36"D working space. Outlet shall be at top
of booth or alternatively at back or side of
unit if so shown on Drawings. Booth shall be
of
18
ga.
(min.)
all
steel
welded
construction with floor approx. 30" above
building floor.
Unit shall have spray gun
hook approx. 50" above floor on right side of
booth.
Booth outlet shall be connected to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 228
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
exhaust duct roughing provided by others with
fire resistant connection. A sprinkler head
of approved type shall be installed inside
spray booth at the top front center and
connected to the sprinkler branch provided by
others adjacent to booth. Spray Booth shall
be Model DF-564 as supplied by the DeVilbiss
Co., Toledo, Ohio; Model BF-4-T as supplied
by the Binks Mfg. Co., Chicago, Ill.
2.
NYSCA
b.
Provide
oil,
dirt,
and
water
extractor/pressure regulator unit at booth,
the DeVilbiss Type
HB-50.
Provide booth
with bench type, 24" dia. non-tilting work
turntable, the Binks Mod. 28-122.
c.
Provide booth with draft gauge, DeVilbiss
Mod.
DF-483,
and
one
(1)
carton
of
replacement paint arrestor filter pads of a
type approved by manufacturer of booth.
Air Compressor Unit and Piping
a.
Air compressor unit shall be a 100 psig, aircooled, single stage, horizontal tank type
unit complete with electric motor, automatic
pressure stop-start switch, V-belt drive with
totally enclosed guard, intake filter and
muffler, pressure gauge, filter, regulator,
safety valve, tank drain cock and all other
components required for proper operation.
b.
Compressor shall be of cast iron construction
with precision bored cylinders, dynamically
balanced crankshaft mounted in ball or roller
bearings,
automatic
lubrication,
easily
accessible
oil
level
and
filler
plug,
balanced flywheel and load-free starting.
Unit shall be rated at approx. 3.8 CFM a 100
psig. Automatic pressure switch shall be set
at 80 psig on 100 psig. off. Electric motor
shall have adjustable mounting to allow Vbelt tension adjustment.
c.
Air compressor unit tank shall be 30 gallon
capacity, with ASME certification, mounted on
vibration absorbing pads having a 10% (max.)
transmissibility.
Mounting pads shall be a
No. 22818-161 as supplied by the DeVilbiss
Co. Tank shall be equipped with a shut-off
valve, 150 psig (max.) pressure gauge, ASME
type safety relief valve set for 110 psig and
a line oil/moisture separator, No. HRE-501 as
supplied by the DeVilbiss Co.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 229
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
C.
d.
Air compressor unit shall be a Model UDL-5030
as supplied by the DeVilbiss Co.; Model 331014 as supplied by the Binks Mfg. Co.
e.
Air compressor unit motor shall be 1 HP,
208 volt, 60 HZ, 3 phase and of totally
enclosed ball bearing design, completely
wired to the internal controls of air
compressor unit.
f.
Air compressor unit shall be provided with a
push button magnetic type started located in
a convenient location. Electrical connection
from wall to compressor shall be flexible
conduit.
g.
Piping from compressor to spray booth shall
be 1/2" NPT Schedule 40 black steel pipe
routed as shown on Drawing.
Provide a
flexible section between compressor and
piping system, Binks No. 37-707. Provide
solenoid (normally closed) in air line
outside of spray room as shown on Drawing.
Electrically connect solenoid to solenoid
junction box installed in Work of other
Sections.
Solenoid valve shall be an ASCO
No. 8210C7. All holes cut in finishing rooms
walls by Contractor for passage of pipe or
electrical conduit shall be patched so as to
maintain full fire rating and be near
original appearance as possible.
Spray Gun and Accessories: Spray Gun shall be of
the external mix type, constructed of aluminum
alloy complete with finger control, mixture
adjust-ment knobs and suction feed cups.
Spray
gun shall be a Type P-TGA-501-90F with one (1)
each type P-KR-552 and P-KS-524 suction feed cups.
Supply one (1) six ft., 1/4" ID.
200 psig
neoprene hose assembly, DeVilbiss No. P-H-56 56.
Supply
the
following
spray
booth
installation
components unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
1.
Exhaust Fan System
a.
NYSCA
Exhaust
fan
installations
discharging
directly outside with minimum static pressure
may be of the propeller type. Unit shall be
approx. 18" dia., of the outside-of-duct type
rated at approx. 2300 CFM at 1800 RPM.
Propeller shall be of balanced, one piece
cast aluminum construction located at the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 230
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
terminus of exhaust duct except if indicated
otherwise on Drawing. Exhaust fan shall be a
No. JF-4819 as supplied by DeVilbiss Co.; No.
30-600 as supplied by the Binks Mfg. Co.
NYSCA
b.
Fan motor shall be a ball bearing totally
enclosed unit of 0.25 HP (min.) rating,
120 V, 60 HZ, 1 phase. Bearings shall be of
the life-sealed type. Motor shall be a MO5179 as supplied by the DeVilbiss Co.
c.
All shafts shall be mounted in life-sealed
ball bearings. Pulleys and V-belts shall be
enclosed in vapor tight housings.
All Vbelts shall be of the non-sparking type,
provided with easy means of belt tension
adjustment.
d.
Exhaust fan installations utilizing ductwork
through intermediate floors or with static
pressure in excess of 0.25" W.P., shall be of
the centrifugal type approved for paint spray
use. Exterior type units shall be of fully
weatherproof construction.
Submit complete
plans and data for Authority approval before
installation.
e.
Exhaust fan push-button starter shall be of
the key operated magnetic type located
outside finishing room, adjacent to door, as
shown on Drawing. Starter shall have two (2)
auxiliary contacts, one to start the make-up
air unit and one to open the solenoid in the
paint spray air line when door switch is
closed.
2.
Make-Up Air Unit:
Provide make-up air unit to
supply all outside air to finishing room.
Air
shall be filtered and tempered to 65oF (min.) and
95% to 100% of the capacity of the exhaust. Makeup unit shall be interlocked with exhaust fan so
as to operate simultaneously.
3.
Door Switch: An explosion proof switch shall be
installed in jamb of finishing room door and wired
into exhaust fan control so that when door is
opened air line solenoid is de-energized and air
supply is cut off to spray gun.
4.
Light Fixture:
Light fixture for finishing room
shall be a coiling mounted pendant type of explosion
proof
design
with
300
watt
(min.)
incandescent
bulb
and
p
porcelain
enamel
reflector.
Provide explosion proof switch in
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 231
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
convenient location in finishing room to control
light fixture.
Light fixture shall be a Model
LEP-503 as supplied by the DeVilbiss Co.
12.197
HYDRAULIC SADDLE JACK - 1-1/2 TON, MOBILE
A.
Jack shall be a two saddle, one end hydraulic lift with
rigid steel construction frame.
B.
Jack shall have a hydraulic pump system, enclosed, with
positive mechanical safety locks in position unless
released and held by operator. Jack handle shall have
neoprene grip.
C.
The unit shall have a low saddle height of 9" and a
maximum lift of 23", and a saddle adjustment width of
from 14" to 52"; a high height of 32", and a clearance
upright to saddle of 14".
D.
Saddle jack shall be equipped with two (2) six-inch oil
resistant rubber tired anti-friction roller or ball
bearing wheels.
E.
The unit shall have a suitable baked enamel finish to
protect it from corrosion, gasoline, and grease.
F.
The unit shall be furnished complete, and ready to
operate.
G.
Hydraulic saddle jack shall be Model SJ-26, Blackhawk
Mfg. Co.
12.198
3
NYSCA
EXHAUST HOOD
A.
The hood shall be constructed of 18 gage black sheet
steel, and have flue openings, and shall be as
indicated
on
Drawings.
Dimensions
shall
be
as
indicated, and shall be checked at the building before
fabrication.
B.
The bottom edge of the hood (on two sides and front)
shall be reinforced with 4" x 3" x 5/16" angle iron
with the horizontal leg turned out.
All seams shall
be angle reinforced standing seams, using 1" x 1" x
1/8" angle iron.
Where the hood meets the wall,
reinforce the edge with 3" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron,
with 3" leg against the wall. Front and sides of hood
shall be sloped at a 45o angle, approx.
The back of
the hood shall be secured to the wall with toggle
bolts for hollow wall construction, or Board of
Standards and Appeals approved expansion shields
through the 3" leg of the 3" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron.
The front of the hood shall be leveled and supported
by 5/8" rods threaded on both ends, and fastened to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 232
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
the 4" x 3" x 1/4" angle with double nuts and washers,
and secured to the slab with 5/8" Board of Standards
and Appeals approved expansion shields.
Rods shall
not exceed 36" on centers, full thread rods shall not
be used.
C.
The hood shall be provided with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle
iron (by the Contractor) for connecting to the duct
work provided by others.
D.
The unit shall be given two (2) coats of "Hot Pipe"
aluminum paint.
E.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings.
12.199
FILM STORAGE CABINET AND FILM CUTTER
A.
Unit shall have 30" wide x 28" deep x 42" high steel
cabinet base with a toe space at bottom and 40" wide x
28" deep formica laminated top; the overhang being on
the right. On the left side of the top shall be
mounted a 24" film cutter.
B.
Cabinet shall be of 18 gage minimum, all steel welded
construction. The upper part of the cabinet shall have
four (4) light-tight drawers, approx. 20" x 24", two
(2) of which shall have center partitions. Drawers
shall slide on ball bearings. The lower part of the
cabinet shall have a storage area, with hinged doors.
The unit shall be free of all sharp edges. Film
Storage Cabinet And Film Cutter shall be delivered
complete, set up and ready for use.
C.
Film Storage Cabinet And Film Cutter shall be Model
FS24C, nuArc Company, Inc., Chicago, IL.
12.199A
NYSCA
PLATE AND NEGATIVE STORAGE CABINET
A.
Plate And Negative Storage Cabinet shall be an all
steel, two tier, unit mounted on casters, suitable for
the storage of 11" width plates and negatives. Cabinet
shall be of sturdy construction with hinged top cover,
bottom storage shelf compartment, supplied complete
with 300-13" clip hangers and 600 clips. Unit shall be
completely finished with rust resisting enamel finish
per manufacturers standard specifications.
B.
Plate And Negative Storage Cabinet shall be Foster
Model No. 715-C13 as supplied by American Printing
Equipment And Supply Company, Long Island City, N.Y.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 233
05/14/04
12.200
DESIGN NO. _____
OUTBOARD MOTOR TEST TANK
A.
The test tank shall be an all aluminum, three sectional
unit, consisting of a tank and exhaust hood, mounted on
a dolly; suitable for outboard motors within a range of
5 to 20 horsepower. See Drawings.
B.
The tank shall be constructed of 1/8" sheet aluminum.
The top shall be reinforced by welded 2" x 1/8"
straps; the bottom by 11/4" x 11/4" x 1/8" aluminum
angles welded.
The sides shall be reinforced and
welded. The tank shall be completely water-tight and
capable of holding the required volume of water
without bulging.
C.
A water drain shall be provided in the bottom, terminating with a 3/4" brass gate valve and hose bibb.
D.
On the front of the tank, provide a 2" x 6" white pine
mounting board, treated with two coats of Cuprinol,
marine wood preservative, fastened with 3/8" cadmium
plated bolts, using flat and lock washers.
E.
On the back of the tank, provide four (4) welded
brackets of sufficient strength and rigidity to
accommodate the easy installation and removal of the
exhaust hood assembly.
F.
The exhaust hood assembly shall consist of a 36" wide x
40" long x 1/8" thick back; the hood to be 36" wide x
12" deep x 10" high, open at the bottom. On the right
side provide an 8" min. opening to which shall be
welded a 1" x 1/8" thick collar. Provide a 1" x 1/8"
support on each side of the hood.
4
On the rear of the back provide two (2) 2" wide x 52"
long x 1/4" thick rails, and an appropriate bracket
arrangement for winding up the electrical cord. On the
bottom of the back provide a 11/4" x 11/4" x 1/8"
horizontal stop angle.
NYSCA
G.
Under the right side of the hood provide a 1/6 horsepower, 120 volt A.C. motor with fan attached, rigidly
supported, but easily removable. A bushed opening in
the rear shall be provided for a 3-wire heavy duty
cord, 8'-0" long, with a grounding plug on one end to
fit receptacle in the room, and the other end
connected to a toggle switch mounted on the front of
the hood to control the motor.
H.
Provide a removable exhaust transition coupling to fit
over the hood collar, and to accommodate the exhaust
hose.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 234
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Hose shall be flexible neoprene tubing with an adapter
on one end to fit the transition piece, and on the
other end a fitting to be connected to the existing
ceiling or floor exhaust outlet, allowing sufficient
slack.
Hose and fittings shall be by the Engwald Corp. as
required.
I.
The Contractor shall inspect the premises to determine
the exact type and location of the existing floor or
ceiling exhaust outlet, to insure a complete and
positive exhaust take-off when the unit is in
operation.
J.
The dolly shall be constructed of 2" x 2" x 1/4"
aluminum angle, turned up and welded, to comfortably
accommodate the tank.
An aluminum mounting plate
shall be securely welded at each of the four corners
to accommodate casters.
K.
Provide
casters
casters
and the
four (4) 6" dia. heavy duty polyurethane tired
having a 2" wide tread.
The two (2) front
shall be ball bearing, locking swivel type,
two (2) rear casters shall be rigid type.
Casters shall be for 500 lb. capacity, as made by the
Bassick Co., and shall be mounted with cadmium plated
flat-head counter-sunk machine screws, with flat and
lock washers.
L.
12.201
12.202
NYSCA
The complete assembly shall be free of all sharp edges,
and ready for use. Submit shop drawings.
TEACHER'S DEMONSTRATION BENCH
A.
The bench shall be a sturdily constructed all-purpose
unit, consisting of a work bench top and eight (8)
drawers.
Construction of the unit shall be of solid
maple with birch paneling.
B.
The top shall be of laminated hard maple strips, free
of defects, 52" long x 22" wide, and 21/4" thick. Each
drawer shall be approx. 151/4" wide x 16" deep and 5"
high, and equipped with drawer pulls.
C.
Drawers shall be provided with locks and master keyed.
D.
The entire unit shall have a durable lacquer finish.
E.
Demonstration bench shall be Brodhead-Garrett Co. Model
T8-OV.
PORTABLE SHOP UNIT
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 235
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
A.
The portable shop unit shall consist of a welded steel,
folding, A-frame assembly, mounted on casters, having
two (2) woodworking tops with vises, together with
certain built-in features.
It shall be so designed
and constructed that when opened, two (2) shop work
projects can be conducted simultaneously; and when
closed, it can be rolled away and stored.
B.
The main frame shall be of square tubular steel,
approx. 58" high x 32" wide x 17" deep when folded,
and 72" from vise to vise when open.
C.
Each bench top shall be of solid maple, approx. 30"
wide x 25" deep x 11/2" thick, and shall be approx. 27"
high when in use. The tops shall be rigidly hinged to
the A-frame, and supported on a steel, locking-type
collapsible outer frame.
The woodworking vises shall
be continuous action screw, 3" x 6" jaw, with solid
maple blocks and wood handle, Ridge Tool Co. No. W-6C.
D.
The lower part of the A-frame shall hold two (2)
pegboard tool boards, approx. 291/2" x 231/4" x 1/4"
thick, plus an assortment of tool clips.
E.
A utility shelf, approx. 10" x 311/4" x 1/2" thick
shall be placed between the A-frame, and shall
collapse when the unit is folded.
F.
Two (2) metal racks, approx. 291/4" x 3" x 23/8", for
holding supplies, shall be built into the frame.
G.
The unit shall be mounted on four (4) retractable
swivel-type casters, with step-down foot control.
H.
All metal work shall have a durable enamel finish; the
wood tops shall have a clear lacquer finish.
I.
Each unit shall be furnished with the following:
Two (2) No. 54 super junior clamps.
Two (2) No. 55 super junior clamps.
Two (2) No. C-1 panel saws - 16" long.
Two (2) No. 10 coping saws.
One (1) No. 610 hand drill.
Two (2) No. 20 screwdrivers - 21/2" blade.
Four (4) No. 53 hammers - 7 oz.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 236
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Five (5) lbs. assorted brads.
Four (4) No. 118 Block planes.
One (1) No.. 22 wood screw assortment.
One (1) 8 oz. tube of glue.
Two (2) No. 20 try-square, 6".
One (1) No. 341/4 wood bench rule, 12".
Two (2) No. 65 marking gauges.
One (1) pair No. L 28 combination pliers.
One (1) pair No. 20 flat nose pliers.
One (1) pair No. 1671 needle nose pliers.
One (1) doz. assorted wood files with handles.
One (1) crestoloy wrench 6".
One (1) No. 78 bench duster.
One (1) No. H 1250 brace.
One (1) set No. 22R5 auger bits.
One (1) file card.
J.
12.203
shall
be
made
by
Creative
complete with all items as
PLASTIC FORMING MACHINE
A.
NYSCA
Portable
shop
unit
Environments, Inc.,
specified above.
The unit shall be a bench mounted, all metal machine
complete with all standard equipment, and shall be
capable of making three-dimensional signs, molds, and
packaging prototypes. Plastic Forming Machine shall
conform to the following specifications:
1.
Plastic Sheet Size:
12" x 20"
2.
Sheet Thickness:
up to 1/8"
3.
Forming Area:
101/2" x 181/2"
4.
Depth Of Draw:
33/4"
5.
Control:
Semi-Automatic
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 237
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
Watts:
2900
7.
Vacuum:
11/2 HP
8.
Vacuum Air Pressure:
3/4 HP
B.
The unit shall be designed to operate on single phase,
120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 25 amps (Solid Connection).
C.
The following accessories shall be furnished with the
unit (EMCO model numbers given):
1.
One (1) Supply Kit,
Model 1220-SK.
2.
One (1) Set: Gothic Style Font of 3" high letters,
numerals, and characters Model 300GM.
3.
One (1) Set: Classic Style Font of 3" high
letters, numerals, and characters Model 300CM.
4.
Sixteen (16) boxes of plastic forming sheets, 12"
x 20", with 25 sheets per box, consisting of the
following colors:
Four (4) Boxes Green
Four (4) Boxes Red
Four (4) Boxes Black
Four (4) Boxes Blue
D.
12.204
NYSCA
Plastic Forming Machine shall be Model 1220 of EMCO,
Stock No. 480461 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett Co.
CHALKBOARD DRAFTING MACHINE
A.
The
drafting
machine
shall
be
a
wall
mounted
instrument, capable of demonstrating drafting methods
and procedures.
B.
The unit shall consist of a horizontal track mounted
above a chalkboard, together with a vertical track and
head, a 24" scale, and necessary mounting brackets.
Board size shall be 48" x 96".
C.
Drafting
drafting
Model 2.
machine shall be Vemco V-track chalkboard
machine,
Brodhead-Garrett
Co.,
Mark 10,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 238
05/14/04
12.205
DESIGN NO. _____
DRAFTING MACHINE - PORTABLE
A.
The drafting machine shall be a drawing board type
instrument capable of making specific drawings and for
general all around drafting.
B.
The unit shall consist of 16" arms (board coverage 24"
x 36"), and a drafting head with automatic indexing,
and shall have ball joint flexibility.
The protractor shall be machine divided to one degree,
double vernier readings to 5 minutes, and a single row
of figures on the protractor by quadrants. Provide the
following aluminum scales in 12" and 18" length.
12.206
NYSCA
1.
Full, half and quarter size.
2.
1/8" = 1';
1/4" = 1';
1/2" = 1';
1" = 1'.
WELDING BENCH - ARC
A.
Bench shall be of heavy gage, all steel, welded
construction, approx. 36" x 36" x 33" high, with a
shelf, drawer, metal vise, and a three-sided steel
glare shield, approx. 36" high.
B.
The bench shall be of panel of four-leg design with a
12 gauge top surface, on which shall be mounted a vise
stand, vise, and power arm capable of 360o rotation
horizontally, and 90o vertically. The metal vise shall
have a 21/2" opening with 2" serrated jaws.
C.
The shelf shall be full length, turned up, and
partitioned, and of a depth sufficient to accommodate
standard welding rods.
The drawer shall be approx.
14" wide x 20" deep x 5" high, and provided with a
lock and two (2) keys.
D.
The unit shall have a baked gray enamel finish.
E.
All accessories, as supplied by the manufacturer,
including fire brick, shall be furnished with the
unit.
F.
Welding bench, complete and ready for use, shall be
Brodhead-Garrett Co., Model 4191, Paxton Patterson Model # AW3636-WSBR.
G.
Provide a complete fume exhaust system, the AceSycamore. The motor shall be 1/2 horsepower T.E.F.C.
3450 R.P.M., and shall be designed to operate on
single phase 120 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
Supply
universal support arm for exhaust tube.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 239
05/14/04
H.
Provide a magnetic starter on the wall,
wired to the motor with approved materials.
I.
Provide a rigid 4" duct, suspended form the ceiling,
between the exhauster and the top of the exhaust hood,
or other means of exhaust provided in Work of other
Sections.
J.
The exhaust system shall be installed complete and left
in operating order.
12.206A
completely
WELDING BENCH - GAS
A.
Bench shall be of heavy gage, all steel, welded
construction, approx. 60" x 36" x 33" high, with a
shelf, drawer, metal vise, and a three-sided steel
glare shield, approx. 36" high.
B.
The bench shall be of panel of four-leg design with a
12 gage top surface, on which shall be mounted a vise
stand, vise, and power arm capable of 360o rotation
horizontally, and 90o vertically. The metal vise shall
have a 21/2" opening with 2" serrated jaws.
C.
The shelf shall be full length, turned up, and
partitioned, and of a depth sufficient to accommodate
standard welding rods.
The drawer shall be approx.
14" wide x 20" deep x 5" high, and provided with a
lock and two (2) keys.
D.
The unit shall have a baked gray enamel finish.
E.
All accessories, as supplied by the manufacturer,
including fire brick, shall be furnished with the
unit.
F.
Welding bench, complete and ready for use, shall be
Brodhead-Garrett Co., Model 4281, Paxton-Patterson Model # SLE-18FB.
12.207
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
WELDING SCREEN - MOBILE
A.
The screen shall be a three-section unit, constructed
of tubular steel and fire-proof material, mounted on
casters.
B.
The frame shall be of heavy tubular steel, slip-joint
construction, and have a durable rustproof black oxide
finish, or the equivalent. The height of the sections
shall be approx. 5'-0".
The center section shall be
approx. 5'-0" wide and each wing shall be approx. 5'0" wide.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 240
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
The panels shall be fire resistant, UL approved, green
colored fabric. The unit shall be mounted on four (4)
casters.
D.
Welding screen, complete and ready for use, shall be
the Brodhead-Garrett Co., Model No. 380050, PaxtonPatterson - Model # 25-0362.
12.208
ARC WELDER - MOBILE
A.
Arc welder, mobile, shall be a cart mounted unit with
handle
bar,
intended
for
general
arc
welding
operations with continuous arc current adjustment over
the 30 to 225 ampere range.
B.
Welder shall be a sturdily constructed unit housed in a
heavy gage steel cabinet with two rear mounted heavy
duty solid rubber tire wheels.
Unit shall have high
and low are amperage ranges with continuous control,
plug-in electrode cable jacks, interior forced draft
cooling, 15 ft. No. 4 conductor electrode cable with
heavy duty rod clamp, 10 ft. No. 4 conductor ground
clamp
cable
and
all
other
parts
required
for
operation. Welder shall handle mild steel rods of at
least 0.125" diameter and weld steel plate at least
.375" thick.
Supply the following accessories as
approved by the manufacturer of the welder:
One (1) welding helmet
2.
Ten (10) lbs. of AC/DC mild steel rod. 125" dia.
3.
One (1) Instruction/Parts manual
C.
Welder shall be designed for 208 V, 60 HZ, 1 ph
operation.
Provide 10 ft. (min.) heavy duty three
conductor (one grounding) line cord with plug to match
receptacle.
D.
Welder shall be a Thunderbolt 225 V as supplied by the
Miller Electric Mfg. Co. Appleton, Wisconsin.
12.209
NYSCA
1.
IGNITION SYSTEM SIMULATOR
A.
The simulator shall be a compact unit, housed in a
bench type, portable metal enclosure, capable of
performing the operation of a typical automobile
ignition system; to demonstrate ignition faults, and
to permit the use of testing equipment in locating
trouble.
B.
The panel shall have all of the standard ignition
components mounted thereon, with all wiring to the
various items run exposed. A motor speed control, onSECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 241
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
off switch, and
also be mounted
switches shall be
conditions in the
NYSCA
power supply indicator light shall
on the panel.
Six (6) ignition
placed on the panel to insert fault
system.
C.
All moving parts shall be enclosed in the cabinet,
except a small section of the distributor drive shaft.
The distributor shall have adjustment through 180o of
rotation, and a distributor window shall provide for
external adjustment of dwell. An adjustable spark gap
shall simulate the various stages of spark plug
conditions.
D.
The power supply shall be enclosed within the cabinet,
and energized through a heavy duty 3-wire (one
grounding) cord, and plug into a 120 volt, 60 cycle
A.C. receptacle.
The ignition system power supply
shall be from a 12 volt automobile battery on the
floor, and connected to the battery terminals on the
panel by means of two (2) cables of sufficient length,
having identified clips on both ends.
E.
The metal mounting plates for the distributor power
control and fault switches shall be grounded to the
power supply connector.
F.
The ignition fault switches shall
inserting fault conditions such as:
be
capable
1.
Ignition by-pass of ballast resistor.
2.
Excessive resistance of primary circuit.
3.
Reversed coil polarity.
4.
Coil winding leakage.
5.
Condenser leakage or resistance.
6.
Coil
grounding
resistance,
distribution ground.
contracts,
of
and
G.
An instruction booklet, wiring diagram, etc., as
recommended and supplied by the manufacturer of the
unit, shall be provided.
H.
Ignition simulator shall be the Snap-on Tools Corp.
Model VE-14; Marquette Model 45-102, complete as
specified above.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 242
05/14/04
12.210
DESIGN NO. _____
CASTER-CAMBER SIMULATOR
A.
This apparatus shall be a bench type unit composed of a
baked enamel steel base and back to which is attached
the spindle, and knee action components, and a gauge.
B.
The entire unit shall be so constructed that shim pack,
eccentric
washer,
sliding
cross
shaft
and
the
eccentric bolt in the king pin adjustment methods can
be demonstrated and their effects observed.
C.
Caster-camber simulator shall be Snap-on Tools Corp.,
Model VE-10D.
D.
Furnish with the above specified unit an adjustment
tool kit, consisting of the following items:
Two (2) 3/4" - 7/8" ratcheting box sockets.
One (1) 3/8" square drive ratchet.
One (1) 9/16" double hexagon socket.
One (1) 1/4" hexagonal head driver.
One (1) metal tool box.
One (1) magnetic gauge.
One (1) Caster/Camber Gauge-Snap-On No. WA-40A.
One (1) Caster, Camber Adjustment Chart-Snap-On No. SS601.
The above items shall be of the same manufacture as the
simulator.
12.211
NYSCA
WAX COATER - PORTABLE
A.
The wax coater shall be an electric powered portable
table top unit designed for the application of uniform
solid wax coatings on surface materials from 1/2"
square in size, up to 12" width by any length in size.
B.
Unit shall be an all-metal, self-contained machine,
mounted on four rubber feet, and having an on-off
heater switch, pilot light, and a roller switch. Wax
coater shall have silent, self-lubricating gears and
ball
bearing
mounted
shafts;
a
wax
reloading
compartment, and easy wax pan removal. The finish
shall be baked enamel with working surfaces of
aluminum or stainless steel. Unit shall be delivered
complete and ready for use, with all accessories as
supplied by the manufacturer of the wax coater.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 243
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Motor for wax coater shall be fractional horsepower,
continuous duty. The heater shall be rated at 600
watts. Wax coater shall be designed to operate on
single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 6 amps. Unit
shall be equipped with a heavy duty three wire (one
grounding) cord and plug to match receptacle.
D.
Wax coater shall be furnished with a 10 lb. carton of
polymer adhesive wax, packaged in 4 oz. bars. Wax
shall be compatible with the wax coater, and approved
for use with the unit by the manufacturer of the wax
coater.
E.
Wax Coater - Portable shall be a 12" Motor Drive unit
of M.P. Goodkin Co., Stock No. 297577 as supplied by
Brodhead-Garret Co.
12.212
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER
A.
Communications receiver shall be an all solid state
SSB,
CW,
AM,
FM
mode
radio
receiver
with
digital/analog controls, designed for reception over
the 150 KHZ-30 MHZ frequency range. Unit shall be of
table top type, weighing about 13 pounds.
B.
Receiver shall provide USB, LSB, CW and FM mode
capability over the 150 KHZ-30 MHZ range in 30 bands
with no gaps.
Unit shall have digital VFO's, ten
memories storing band, mode and frequency information,
memory scan, 24 hour quartz dual clocks with timer,
"UP" conversion PLL circuit, recording jack, internal
speaker and all other components required for full
operation. Audio output shall be 1.5 watts (min.).
C.
Supply one (1) service/instruction manual with unit.
D.
Power requirements shall be 120 V, 60 HZ, 16 watts.
Provide six (6) ft. three conductor (one grounding)
heavy duty line cord.
E.
Communications receiver shall be a Kenwood Mod. R-2000
as supplied by Trio-Kenwood Corp., Compton, Cal.
12.212A
A.
NYSCA
ELECTRONICS KIT
Electronics kit shall consist of two portable, selfcontained carrying cases (Case No. 1 and No. 2) each
containing sufficient electronic components to set up
approximately 34 basic electronic experiments.
Each
case shall be of sturdy construction, with hinged
cover and carrying handle, designed for vertical use.
Each case to be furnished complete with laboratory
experiment manual and instructor's guide.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 244
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Electronics kit case No. 1 shall contain a minimum of
the following electronic components:
Resistors
Potentiometers
Ceramic, Tubular and Electrolytic Capacitors
Variable Capacitors
Coils
Electron Tubes
Chokes
Tube Sockets
Toggle & Pushbutton Switches
Silicon & Germanium Diodes
Relay
IP Amplifier
Frequency Reference Crystal
Photoelectric Diodes
Speaker
Earphone
Power Transformer
Audio Output Transformer
Blank Mounting Bases
Interconnecting Leads
Power Input Cord
FET Transistors
Neon & Miniature Lamps
C.
Electronics Kit Case No. 1 shall be Model AA-502A as
supplied by Lab-Volt, Div. of Buck Engineering Co.,
Farmingdale, N.J.; or Philco-Ford, Philadelphia, Pa.
D.
Electronics kit case No. 2 shall contain a minimum of
the following electronic components:
Resistors
Potentiometers
Ceramic, Tubular and
Variable Capacitors
Coils
Chokes
Sockets
FET Transistor
Unijunction
Transistor
Miniature Lamp
Relay
Speaker
Earphone
Driver
Output Transformer
Zener Diode
Tunnel Diode
Photoelectric Cell
NYSCA
Electrolytic Capacitors
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 245
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Thermistor
Strain Gauge
Humidity Sensor
NPN & PNP Transistors
Toggle & Pushbutton Switches
Silicon & Germanium Diodes
Silicon Controller Rectifier
Integrated Circuit Assembly
Interconnecting Leads
Power Input Cord
Interstage Transformer
E.
12.213
Electronics kit case No. 2 shall be Model AA-503A as
supplied by Lab-Volt, Div. of Buck Engineering Co.,
Farmingdale, N.J.; Philco-Ford, Philadelphia, Pa.
PLASTIC INJECTION PRESS AND COMPRESSOR - MOBILE
A.
Plastic injection press shall be an air operated bench
type press, capable of operating on 100 psi minimum,
complete with air cylinder, 4-way air valve, exhaust
valve, exhaust muffler, thermo-switch, temperature
control, temperature indicator, cast aluminum heater,
nozzle shut-off valve, hopper and all other standard
equipment. Press shall have an injection capacity of
9 grams, temperature range of 100-550oF, ram diameter
of 9/16", maximum molding area of 21/4" x 21/4" x 5".
One (1) blank mold shall be furnished with above
press.
B.
The compressor unit shall be a portable 1/2 horsepower
oil-less type, securely mounted on mobile cart. Unit
shall be rated at 100psi, 1.7 cfm, and have air
regulator, air filter, and extra air valve for
auxiliary air power use. Compressor shall be fully
compatible with the plastic injection press.
C.
The press shall be 400 watt heat capacity and designed
to operate on single phase 110 volts, 60 Hz A.C. Unit
shall be equipped with a heater switch and heavy duty
three wire cord (one grounding) and plug to match
receptacle.
The motor for the compressor shall be fully enclosed,
at least 1/2 horsepower, designed to operate on
single phase, 110 volts, 60 Hz A.C., equipped with a
heavy duty three wire cord (one grounding) and plug to
match receptacle.
D.
NYSCA
Provide in a convenient location on the unit a magnetic
starter completely wired to motor with approved
materials. Unit shall have separate switches for heat
and air power.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 246
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Plastic injection press and compressor shall be mounted
on a steel cart with four (4) 5" rubber wheeled
casters. Compressor shall be mounted on a completely
enclosed lower shelf with the injection press mounted
on the top shelf of the cart. The compressor base
shall be set on a vibration-absorbing pad, and held
rigid by means of a metal strap across the width of
the base and firmly secured to the shelf. The two
units shall be connected by means of a durable rubber
hose rigidly clamped at both ends. The plastic
injection press and compressor shall be completely
checked, adjusted and ready to operate.
F.
Furnish the following additional molds:
1.
One (1) Screwdriver Handle mold.
2.
One (1) Golf Tee mold.
3.
One (1) Telephone Dial mold.
4.
One (1) Bottle Cap mold.
5.
Four (4) Blank molds.
All molds supplied shall have polished surfaces.
G.
12.214
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, H.S.
A.
NYSCA
Plastic Injection Press And Compressor - Mobile shall
be Honajector Model 201AC-S of Honatech, Inc.,
Yonkers, N.Y.
Engraving machine shall consist of portable, table top,
pantograph type unit, designed for the machine
engraving of plastic or metal nameplates, badges and
signs or similar items. Machine shall be of heavy duty
construction, with universal motor, having sealed ball
bearings, pulley and drive system, cutter spindle with
sealed, preloaded ball bearings. Linkage arms to be of
rigid construction with preloaded joints constructed
to resist looseness. Engraver shall conform to the
following specifications:
1.
25 engraving ratios from 2:1 to 7:1.
2.
Pivot pantograph arm.
3.
Maximum Vice Opening:
19" minimum.
4.
Maximum Work Range:
3-1/2" x 15" minimum at
2:1 ratio.
5.
Copy Table:
6" x 16" graduated.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 247
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
11/64" dia. rotating cutter spindle with bottom
micrometer assembly; rotating depth settings in
increments of 0.001".
7.
Accept standard New Hermes work holding jig.
B.
Motor for engraver shall be at least 0.17 horsepower,
18,000 RPM, designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty three
conductor (one grounding) cord and plug to match
receptacle.
C.
Furnish
with
the
engraver
the
following
extra
accessories as furnished by the manufacturer of
engraver (New Hermes model number where noted):
1.
a.
Four (4) 0.625" x 18" (33-047-00).
b.
One (1) 2.75" x 26.5" (33-267-01).
2.
Copy slide converter, 26.5" (33-360-00).
3.
Engraving cutters, Carbide, 0.172" shank, six (6)
each in the following sizes:
a.
For Gravoply: 0.015", 0.020", 0.030", 0.090",
0.125" (42-007-000).
b.
For Acrylics: 0.010", 0.015", 0.020", 0.030",
0.045", 0.060" (42-054-000).
4.
One (1) diamond graver, 1/8"
5.
One (1) each of the following master copy type
sets (brass) (condensed block):
6.
NYSCA
Copy holding slides with end stops and centering
scales:
(40-036-020).
a.
5/8" on 5/8" blank, large font (35-018-01)
with supplement (35-018-15).
b.
5/8" on 11/4" blank, reverse standard font
(35-714-01).
c.
1" on 11/4" blank, standard font (35-020-01)
with supplement (35-020-15).
d.
2" on 23/4" blank, large font
with supplement (35-022-15).
(35-022-01)
One (1) Instruction/parts manual.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 248
05/14/04
D.
12.214A
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
7.
One (1) Accessory box and dust cover.
8.
Three (3) Cleaning brushes
9.
Three (3) extra drive belts (30-215-00).
10.
One (1) roll double sided adhesive tape, 1" x 25
yards (30-447-00).
11.
Twelve (12) Engravocolor sticks, assorted colors,
(30-465-00).
12.
One (1) foot switch (31-081-00).
13.
One (1) plastic nameplate assortment (approx. 112
pieces) (999-280).
(30-408-00).
Engraving Machine, complete with all of the individual
devices which constitute this unit shall be Model No.
ITF-V Engravograph of New Hermes, Inc., Decatur, GA.
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, I.S.
Engraving machine shall consist of portable, table top,
pantograph type unit, designed for the machine
engraving of plastic or metal nameplates, badges and
signs or similar items. Machine shall be of heavy duty
construction, with universal motor, having sealed ball
bearings, pulley and drive system, cutter spindle with
sealed, preloaded ball bearings. Linkage arms to be of
rigid construction with preloaded joints constructed
to resist looseness. Engraver shall conform to the
following specifications:
1.
25 engraving ratios from 2:1 to 7:1.
2.
Pivot pantograph arm.
3.
Maximum Vise Opening:
4.
360o rotating work vise.
5.
Maximum Work Range:
3" x 8" minimum at 2:1
ratio.
6.
Copy Table:
6" x 16" graduated.
7.
1/8" dia. rotating cutter spindle with bottom
micrometer assembly; rotating depth settings in
increments of 0.001".
8.
Maximum Workpiece
Thickness:
5-3/4" minimum.
1-3/4"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 249
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
9.
Accept standard New Hermes work holding jig.
B.
Motor for engraver shall be at least 0.1 horsepower,
18,000 RPM, designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty three
conductor (one grounding) cord and plug to match
receptacle.
C.
Furnish
with
the
engraver
the
following
extra
accessories as furnished by the manufacturer of
engraver (New Hermes model number where noted):
1.
One (1) Cutter head wrench.
2.
One (1) Allen wrench.
3.
One (1) Roll of double faced adhesive tape.
4.
One (1) Instruction/parts manual.
5.
One (1) Accessory box and dust cover.
6.
One (1) Cleaning brush.
7.
One (1) Carbide engraving cutter with .030" tip.
8.
Practice material.
9.
Copy holding slides with centering scales:
a.
Four (4) 0.625" x 18" (33-047-00).
b.
One (1) 2.75" x 26.5" (Double Grooved) (33267-01).
10.
Copy slide Converter, 26.5" (33-360-00).
11.
Engraving Cutter, Carbide, .125" shank, six (6)
each in the following sizes:
a.
(For Gravoply), .015", .020", .030", .090",
.125", (40-307-00).
b.
(For Acrylics), .010", .015", .020", .030",
.045", .060", (40-354-00).
12.
One (1) diamond graver (40-436-02).
13.
One (1) each of the following master copy type
sets (brass) (condensed block):
a.
NYSCA
5/8" on 5/8" blank, large font (35-018-01)
with supplement (35-018-15).
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 250
05/14/04
D.
12.214B
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
b.
5/8" on 11/4" blank, reverse standard font
(35-714-01).
c.
1" on 11/4" blank, standard font (35-020-01)
with supplement (35-020-15).
d.
2" on 23/4" blank, large font
with supplement (35-022-15).
(35-022-01)
14.
Three (3) extra drive belts (30-215-00).
15.
One (1) roll double sided adhesive tape, 1" x 25
yards (30-447-00).
16.
Three (3) cleaning brushes (30-408-00).
17.
Twelve (12) Engravocolor sticks, assorted colors,
(30-465-00).
18.
One (1) foot switch (31-081-00).
19.
One (1) plastic nameplate assortment (approx. 112
pieces) (999-280).
Engraving Machine, complete with all of the individual
devices which constitute this unit shall be Model No.
IM-3 Engravograph of New Hermes, Inc., Decatur, GA.
ENGRAVING MACHINE - PORTABLE, P.S.
A.
Engraving machine, portable, shall be a bench top type,
pantograph type unit with adjustable from 2.5 to 7.1,
19 copy ratios, designed for the machine engraving of
plastic or metal nameplates, badges and signs or
similar items.
B.
Machine shall be of heavy duty construction, with
universal motor, having sealed ball bearings, pulley
and drive system, copy table, cutter spindle with
sealed, preloaded ball bearings designed for .125" dia
cutters and linkage arms of rigid construction with
preloaded joints constructed to resist looseness.
C.
Unit shall have 4.5" x 16" graduated copy table with
13.75" long copy converter slide including stops, work
holding vise with 4" (max.) jaw opening, 4" vise
centering
movement
and
micrometer
cutter
depth
adjustment on cutter spindle.
Maximum size workpiece
that may be engraved in one set up at 2.5:1 ratio
shall be 3.375"w x 16"L. Maximum workpiece thickness
accommodated shall be 0.75". Engraver shall accept a
standard New Hermes work holding jig.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 251
05/14/04
D.
DESIGN NO. _____
Supply one (1) each
accessories of a type
machine:
following standard
by manufacturer of
1.
Cutter head wrench.
2.
Allen wrench.
3.
Roll of double faced adhesive tape.
4.
Instruction/parts manual.
5.
Accessory box and dust cover.
6.
Cleaning brush.
7.
Carbide engraving cutter with .030" tip.
8.
Practice material.
E.
Engraving machine motor shall be 0.1 HP, 10,000 RPM,
120 volts, 60 HZ, 1 phase. Provide 6 ft (min.) heavy
duty three conductor (one grounding) line cord with 3
prong plug to match receptacle.
F.
Provide the following additional parts/accessories of a
type approved by the manufacturer of the machine in
the quantity indicated: (New Hermes Nos. given)
1.
NYSCA
of the
approved
Engraving Cutter, Carbide, .125" shank, one (1)
each in the following sizes:
a.
(For Gravoply), .015", .020", .030", .090",
.125", (40-307-00).
b.
(For Acrylics), .010", .015", .020", .030",
.045", .060", (40-354-00).
2.
One (1) diamond graver (40-436-02).
3.
One (1) each of the following master copy type
sets (brass) (condensed block)
a.
5/8" on 11/4" blank, standard font (35-019-0)
with supplement (35-018-15).
b.
5/8" on 11/4" blank, standard font (35-71401).
c.
1" on 11/4" blank, standard font (35-020-01).
d.
11/2" on 23/4" blank, standard font (35-02001).
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 252
05/14/04
G.
12.215
4.
Three (3) extra drive belts (30-215-00).
5.
One (1) roll double sided adhesive tape, 1" x 25
yards (30-447-00).
6.
Three (3) cleaning brushes (30-408-00).
7.
Twelve (12) engravocolor sticks, assorted colors,
(30-465-00).
8.
One (1) foot switch (31-081-00).
9.
One (1) plastic nameplate assortment (approx. 112
pieces) (999-280).
Engraving machine, portable, shall be a Model IN2 as
supplied by the New Hermes, Inc., N.Y.C., N.Y.
LAMINATOR - PORTABLE
A.
The laminator shall be a self-contained metal enclosed,
portable, table top unit, capable of sealing paper and
cards up to 350 per hour.
B.
The unit shall have solid state digital control, builtin puller-cooler, and shall accommodate sheet sizes up
to 4" wide and any length. The heat rollers shall be
teflon coated. Machine shall be designed to operate on
individual plastic pouches enclosing the card to be
laminated, which are processed through the rollers in
reusable carriers. Unit shall be furnished with
Instruction/Parts manual.
C.
Provide the following starting equipment with the
laminator of a type approved by the manufacturer of
the unit:
1.
Two thousand (2000) 2.562" x 3.750" size (10 mil)
plastic pouches.
2.
One hundred (100) pouch carriers.
D.
The unit shall operate on single phase, 120 Volts, 60
Hz A.C., 700 watts, and shall be provided with a three
wire (one grounding) cord and plug to match the
receptacle. Laminator shall be U.L. Listed.
E.
The unit shall operate through controls for preheat,
run, and stop, and shall have an indicating light.
F.
Laminator - Portable shall be Model 362LM "Mini-Lam" of
General Binding Corporation, Northbrook Illinois.
12.215A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
LAMINATOR - 9", PORTABLE
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 253
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
A.
Laminator shall be a portable table top unit designed
to laminate documents, etc., up to 9" wide, any
length, with transparent plastic film from 0.0015" to
0.010" in thickness.
B.
Unit shall be of the heavy duty type designed for the
continuously encapsulation of documents from two rolls
of plastic film in machine passing over heated
rollers. Laminator shall have a variable speed drive
having speeds up to 13.5 ft/min., with feed guide and
automatic side trim. Unit shall be furnished with
Instruction/Parts manual.
C.
Provide the following starting equipment with the
laminator of a type approved by manufacturer of the
unit:
Two (2) rolls of 9" wide plastic film, 0.010"
thick, 1000 ft long.
2.
Four (4) rolls of 9" wide plastic film, 0.003"
thick, 1000 ft long.
D.
Unit shall be designed to operate on 120 volts, 60 HZ,
1 phase, 900 watts. Provide 6" long heavy duty three
conductor (one grounding) line cord with plug to match
receptacle. Laminator shall be U.L. Listed.
E.
Unit shall have speed, drive, heat, cooling, on-off,
and all other required controls.
F.
Laminator - 9", Portable shall be Model 501LM
"Protector Laminator" of General Binding Corporation,
Northbrook Illinois.
12.216
NYSCA
1.
BINDING MACHINE - PORTABLE
A.
The binding machine shall be a self-contained, metal
enclosed, hand operated, combination hole punching and
binding unit, capable of punching a predetermined
number of holes, from 2 to 21, in paper sheets in
widths of from 2" to 12", and binding them in a
plastic holder.
B.
Machine shall be provided with standard size hole dies
and shall be easily adaptable to accept wide or "T"
slot dies. The unit shall be so constructed that the
holes be punched in the same position in all sheets
once the side guide is locked in position. A back
guide shall permit setting the punched holes in
relation to the thickness of the sheets for 3/16" to
2" binders. A separate operation shall permit the
binding of the sheets into a plastic bound booklet.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 254
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Binding machine shall be furnished with the following
accessories and supplies in the quantities indicated:
D.
12.217
NYSCA
1.
500-1/4" Blue Wideback 19 Ring Binders.
2.
500-3/8" Green Wideback 19 Ring Binders.
3.
500-1/2" Brown Wideback 19 Ring Binders.
4.
500-5/8" White Wideback 19 Ring Binders.
5.
One (1) Variety Pack of 100 Plastic Binding Covers
for 81/2" x 11" paper stock.
Binding Machine - Portable shall be Duo Punch
Binder Model 300 of NSC International Corp.,
Springs, Arkansas.
And
Hot
PAPER DRILL - PORTABLE
A.
Paper drilling machine shall be a sturdily constructed,
motorized, hand actuated, bench type unit, capable of
drilling a full two inches of sheet paper stock at one
time. The unit shall be equipped for cornering,
slitting, and slotting operations.
B.
Table size shall be at least 18" x 18", have a maximum
drill to side guide of 12", and a maximum drill to
backgage of 23/4". Cornering and slit/V slot capacity
shall be 1/2". Unit shall be equipped with the
following as supplied by manufacturer of paper drill:
1.
Side guide with six (6) movable stops.
2.
Locking Backgage
3.
Corner, Slit, and Slot Attachments.
4.
Two (2) 1/4" hollow paper drills.
5.
Twelve (12) drilling blocks.
6.
Hollow drill sharpener, and all necessary tools.
D.
The motor shall be at least 1/4 horsepower, universal
type designed to operate on single phase, 120 volts,
60 Hz A.C., 5.4 amps (15 amp service size), and shall
be equipped with a heavy duty three wire (one
grounding) cord and plug to match receptacle.
E.
Paper Drill - Portable shall be Model "JO", Challenge
Machinery Co., Grand Haven, Mich.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 255
05/14/04
12.217A
PAPER DRILL
A.
Paper drilling machine shall be a sturdily constructed,
motorized, foot actuated, floor mounted unit, capable
of drilling a full two inches of sheet paper stock at
one time. The unit shall be equipped for cornering,
slitting, and slotting operations.
B.
Unit shall be mounted on a heavy gage steel cabinet
with storage cabinet and foot pedal actuator. Table
size shall be at least 191/2" x 311/2", have a maximum
drill to side guide of 181/2", and a maximum drill to
backgage of 4". Cornering and slit/V slot capacity
shall be 1/2". Unit shall be equipped with the
following as supplied by manufacturer of paper drill:
1.
Side guide with six (6) movable stops.
2.
Locking Backgage
3.
Corner, Slit, and Slot Attachments.
4.
Two (2) 1/4" hollow paper drills.
5.
Twelve (12) drilling blocks.
6.
Hollow drill sharpener, and all necessary tools.
D.
Provide in place on paper drill one (1) complete lamp
attachment as supplied by the manufacturer of the
paper drill. Lamp attachment shall be complete with
shade, socket, 115 volt 40 watt electric light bulb,
cord, mounting brackets, flexible gooseneck, etc.
E.
The motor shall be at least 1/4 horsepower, universal
type designed to operate on single phase, 120 volts,
60 Hz A.C., 5.4 amps (15 amp service size, Solid
Connection).
F.
Provide in a convenient location on Paper Drill, a
magnetic starter wired with approved materials to the
motor.
G.
Paper Drill shall be Model "JF", Challenge Machinery
Co., Grand Haven, Mich.
12.218
FOLDING MACHINE - PORTABLE
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
The paper folding machine shall be a sturdily
constructed table top unit capable of handling single
and double paper folds, and also scale, slit and
perforate with or without folding.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 256
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
The unit shall handle cut sheets 3" x 31/4" min. to 14"
x 24" max., with paper weights of 16 lbs. to 90 lbs.
Bristol. Peak operating speed shall be 12,500 lettersize sheets per hour. Machine shall produce single,
parallel letter, accordion, and double parallel folds.
Unit shall fold up to 5 sheets of 20 lb. bond at one
time.
C.
The machine shall be designed to operate on single
phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., and shall be equipped
with a heavy duty three wire (one grounding) cord and
plug to match receptacle.
D.
Machine
shall
accessories as
unit:
E.
12.219
NYSCA
be
furnished
with
the
following
supplied by the manufacturer of the
1.
One (1) Reset Counter Attachment
2.
One (1) Reverse Stacking Attachment
3.
One (1) Feeder Extension
Folding Machine - Portable shall be Model 1860 Foldamax
of Pitney Bowes, Stamford, Conn.
LABORATORY OVEN - PORTABLE
A.
The oven shall be a bench type of steel construction,
mounted on rubber feet, and having double walls with
heat resistant insulation.
The inside shall be of
stainless steel, approx. 12" wide x 10" high by 10"
deep.
The door shall be hung on a full piano hinge,
fully gasketed, and positively latched.
The outside
shall be of light gray hammerloid baked enamel.
B.
The
unit
shall
be
capable
sterilizing, evaporating, heat
testing, etc.
C.
The unit shall have fan-forced air circulation,
stainless steel shelves, sheathed heating elements,
pilot light heat indicator, mercurial thermometer, and
automatic thermo control.
D.
The oven shall have a temperature range to
(200oC), and controller sensitivity of + 1oC.
E.
The unit shall be rated at 800 watts, 120 volts,
60 cycle A.C., and shall be provided with a heavy duty
three wire (one grounding) cord and plug to match
receptacle.
of
drying,
baking,
treating, annealing,
392oF.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 257
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Laboratory oven shall be the Quincy Mfg. Co. Model No.
10-392.
G.
If unit is specified or shown to be mounted on a stand
instead of on a bench, provide a stand of the same
manufacture as the oven.
12.220
EXHAUST EQUIPMENT FOR LIVE ENGINES - UTILITY
A.
The system shall consist of an overhead muffler and
flexible hose connections.
See sketch on Details
No. SE-103.
B.
The muffler shall be rigidly mounted high above the
bench top, and between the muffler and the bench top,
a metal "Y" connector shall be mounted.
Both units
shall be held away from the wall by means of pipe
clamp supports.
C.
Between the muffler and the "Y" connector, and between
the muffler and the ceiling exhaust outlet, flexible
neoprene hose connections, having the proper fittings,
shall be firmly installed.
D.
Two (2) flexible, removable, neoprene hose connections,
having the proper fittings on both ends, shall connect
the engines to the "Y" connector.
Allow sufficient slack for all hose connections, as
required.
E.
All flexible exhaust connections and fittings shall be
by the Engwald Corp.
Muffler shall be by the Walker Marketing Corp.
F.
12.221
FOUR POST CHASSIS LIFT
A.
NYSCA
The Contractor shall inspect the premises to determine
the exact type and location of the existing ceiling
exhaust outlets, to insure a complete and positive
exhaust take-off when the engines are running.
The four post lift shall be operated by individual
cables at each supporting post, and shall meet the
following specification:
1.
Capacity:
9000 lbs.
2.
Overall Length at Ground:
15'-1"
3.
Overall Width at Ground:
9'-6"
4.
Overall Height at Front:
8'-3 1/2"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 258
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
5.
Height of Rise:
5'-6"
6.
Distance between lift beams,
parallel:
2'-6"
7.
Required ceiling height:
12'-0"
B.
Both sides of the lift frame shall be equipped with
electrical safety stops to prevent platform from
rising when car doors are left open or when there are
other obstructions which might be damaged by the upper
horizontal support posts.
C.
The lift shall be supplied with a front saddle jack and
rear axle block supports. Twin sets of flippers shall
be built into the front saddle jack.
The narrow set
shall be for small cars, and the wider set shall
extend to hold large cars. Flippers on the jack shall
be capable of being placed in an erect position to
allow
clearance
for
straight
axle
front
end
suspension.
D.
The rear axle blocks shall have an operating rod to
raise the blocks, and an automatic trip finger to
lower the blocks to down position when the automobile
backs off the lift.
Two free wheel ramps shall be
provided for smooth wheel movement over the rear cross
beam.
E.
The lift shall be powered by a one (1) horsepower high
torque, intermittent duty, three phase, 208 volts,
60 cycle A.C. motor.
The motor shall be directly
connected to the geared drive, with a centrifugal
governor to act as an automatic safety brake.
When
the platform reaches the top position, the motor shall
stop automatically, and safety locks shall lock the
platform in position.
F.
Provide a magnetic starter and all necessary wiring
from the source of supply, making all connections
complete.
G.
The lift shall be completely finished in a suitable oil
and weather resistant enamel, and shall be completely
assembled and installed, and in operating condition.
H.
Four post chassis
Weaver-Kidde Co.,
complete with all
manufacturer.
lift shall be
or Mod. TR-3
accessories as
Model AFH-T90 of
of Grand, Inc.,
specified by the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 259
05/14/04
12.221A
DESIGN NO. _____
AUTO LIFT - TWO POST, SURFACE MOUNTED
A.
Auto lift, two post, surface mounted, shall consist of
the complete furnishing and installation of an auto
lift designed to raise passenger cars and light trucks
a minimum of 71" above the floor for service of
underbody components.
B.
Lift shall be of heavy duty, industrial type design,
consisting of two floor mounted columns each having
hydraulic cylinders actuating lift carriages with
telescoping, horizontally swinging arms capable of
accommodating a full range of vehicle sizes.
Unit
shall have column mounted hydraulic pump unit with
foil safe mechanism, dual locking latch mechanism,
completely covered hydraulic lines, rubber car door
guards, and all other necessary parts.
Lift shall
have no exposed chains, rollers, sprockets, threaded
shafts, etc or other moving drive train elements.
Column bases shall have extended mounting areas to
insure stability. Installer shall provide lift height
limiter when shop clearance conditions so dictate.
C.
Lift columns must be located exactly in position as
shown on Drawing.
Before installation, the mounting
area under the column must be inspected by the
Contractor to determine if the following conditions
exist:
1.
Each column mounting area must be level and flat
within 1/64th of an inch per foot.
2.
Each column mounting area must be in the same
plane within 1/32nd of an inch.
3.
Column mounting areas shall be tight, hard
surfaced and free of all cracking, spalling or
other evidence of surface defects.
If above conditions are not found at the mounting
site, the floor if to be surface rough chiseled
out and patch-ing cement screed coat laid to
attain above conditions.
Shimming is not
permitted. Column base shall be lagged in place
with 3/4" anchor bolts set 4" deep with at least
six (6) bolt threads below top of floor base.
Final installation with a 2800 lb (min.) elevated
passenger car shall show no evidence of excessive
rocking.
D.
NYSCA
Lift shall be completely finished in a rust resisting
enamel per manufacturers' standard specification.
Moving lift arms shall be finished in bright chrome
yellow.
Lift shall comply with all requirements of
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 260
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
American National Standard ANSI B153 (National Bureau
of Standard).
E.
1.
Capacity: 7000 lbs.
2.
Column inside face clearance: 108"
3.
Lift: 71"
4.
Lift Speed: 45 sec.
5.
Motor Power: 1 HP.
6.
Adapter Height: 4.5"
F.
Electric requirements for lift shall be 1 HP, 208 V,
60 HZ, 1 ph. Contractor shall make hard conduit power
drop from ceiling junction box to top of lift column.
Key operated magnetic type electric controls shall be
located on adjacent building column face as shown on
Drawings. All controls shall be above 48" from floor.
G.
Auto lift shall be a Mod. SP-84 as supplied by Dover
Corp., Rotary Lift Div, Memphis, Tenn.
12.222
NYSCA
Lift shall meet the following minimum specifications:
DRYING CABINET - LOW
A.
Drying cabinet shall be a 3l" high all steel cabinet
unit with expanded metal sides and doors intended for
the storing and air drying of ceramics and other shop
projects.
B.
Drying cabinet shall be 36"W x 18"V x 31"H in size,
constructed of 3/4" x 16 ga. expanded, flattened steel
sides, back and doors with 13 ga. steel angle corner
supports.
Top and bottom pans shall be 16 ga. steel
fully welded and reinforced.
Cabinet shall have two
18"W x 24"H (approx.) doors with heavy duty hinges and
1"x 14 ga. angle frames with welded corners.
Doors
shall be of the flush recessed type having full 90o
swing even when cabinets are butted closely together,
side by side. Door handles shall be of the heavy duty
T type with the right hand door having a locking
handle with disc cylinder lock and two (2) keys.
C.
Furnish each cabinet with two (2) full size removable
shelves. Each shelf shall be constructed of 3/4"x 16
ga. flattened expanded steel with edges framed in l"x
20 ga. U sections welded in place on all four sides.
Masonite or equivalent type shelves are unacceptable.
Shelves shall be supported on three sides by l"x l6
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 261
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
ga. bent
supports.
D.
12.222A
welded
in
place
between
corner
Drying cabinet shall be model 925OM of Debcor, Inc.,
Alsip, Ill.
DAMP-PROOF CABINET - LOW
A.
Damp-proof cabinet shall be a 3l" high all steel unit
with air tight interior intended for the storage of
ceramic or other shop projects requiring high humidity
conditions.
B.
Damp-proof cabinet shall be 36"W x 18"D x 31"H in size
with doors and all walls of double wall construction
with 19 ga anodized aluminum interior and 19 ga steel
exterior.
Top and bottom pans shall be 16 ga steel
fully welded and reinforced. Corner supports shall be
13 ga steel angles.
Cabinets shall have 18"W x 24"H
(approx.) doors with heavy duty hinges and 1"x 14 ga
angle frames with welded corners.
Doors shall be of
the flush recessed type having full 90o swing even when
cabinets are butted closely together, side by side.
Door handles shall be of the heavy duty T type with
right hand door having a locking handle with disc
cylinder lock and two (2) keys.
Doors shall be
equipped with foam rubber gaskets around their entire
periphery to maintain high interior humidity.
C.
Furnish each cabinet with two (2) full size removable
shelves. Each shelf shall be constructed 3/4" x 14 ga
flattened anodized aluminum with edges framed in 1"x
2O ga aluminum U section welded in place on all four
sides. Masonite or equivalent type shelves are
unacceptable. Shelves shall be supported on three
sides by 1"x 18 ga bent angles welded in place between
corner supports.
Entire cabinet shall be fully
deburred to remove all sharp edges and corners. Finish
cabinet in beige/gray rust resisting enamel.
D.
Damp-proof cabinet
Inc., Alsip, Ill.
12.223
shall
be
Model
9150M
of
Debcor,
FLOOR MAINTAINER
A.
NYSCA
angles
Floor maintainer shall be a self-contained, ball
bearing, gear head, motor driven unit with a brush
diameter of 15".
The unit shall be capable of and
equipped to do the following operations:
wet
scrubbing; dry scrubbing; waxing; polishing; steel
wooling;
buffing;
shampooing;
disc
sanding
and
grinding.
The floor maintainer shall have the
following features:
One-piece, die cast, polished
aluminum or chrome plated housing; precision planetary
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 262
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
type gear unit with oversized ball bearings plus
hardened alloy steel and meehanite gears; chromeplated, tubular steel, fully adjustable handle to lock
securely (in any position) in 90o arc; handle grips of
non-slip plastic; non-marking vinyl bumper; lifetime
lubricated wheels equipped with solid neoprene tires
and oil-less bearings mounted in main frame.
The
floor maintainer shall be dual lever actuated (trigger
type), controlled with either or both hands. Machine
is to stop when pressure is released.
B.
The motor shall be a heavy duty 1 HP, designed to
operate on 120 volt, 60 cycles A.C. There shall be a
fully automatic switch with high overload capacity
installed on the machine.
C.
The floor maintainer shall be provided with a fifty
foot, three wire cord (one grounding), with plugs on
each end to match the receptacles provided. The power
cord shall be protected with a "Kellems" three wire
cord grip, Hubbell H-600 Series.
D.
The floor maintainer shall be complete, adjusted and
ready to operate and shall be fully equipped with
motor,
gears,
etc.,
as
hereinbefore
specified;
including manufacturers' standard accessories such as
wood back scrubbing and polishing brush, etc.
E.
Furnish and deliver with the floor maintainer
following
additional
equipment
as
supplied
manufacturer to fit the machine furnished:
the
by
One (1) wood back brush for scrubbing and polishing.
Three (3) lambs wool polishing pad.
One (1) wood backed steel wire brush.
One (1) grinding disc assembly.
Three (3) each coarse, medium and fine sanding discs.
One (1) felt covered
sanding discs.
aluminum
assembly
for
holding
One (1) butcher wire brush - wood backed.
One (1) steel wool pad holder.
One (1) box of fine steel wood pads.
One (1) solution tank assembly.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 263
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
F.
Floor maintainer shall be Model No. FM-1500 HD, Clarke
Floor Machine Div., Studebaker Corporation,
12.224
NYSCA
LATHE/MILLER
A.
Lathe/miller shall be a precision built lathe with
milling attachment designed for medium duty, high
accuracy machining operations.
Unit shall weigh
approximately 130 lbs. and be supplied mounted on a
heavy gauge steel cabinet base.
B.
Lathe/miller shall consist of a ruggedly built 8"
(nom.) swing lathe with a cross-slide mounted milling
attachment.
Lathe bed shall be of rigid cast iron
construction with precision machined V-ways.
Spindle
headstock shall be of the toothed-belt-pulley drive
type having six speed settings, with spindle supported
in precision ball or roller bearings that limit runout
to .0002" maximum. Leadscrew drive gear box at left of
headstock shall be of the fully enclosed type with
thread/feed - gear position chart in frontal position
on headstock. Saddle with cross and top slides shall
be of cast iron construction with V guideways fitted
with gibs to take up wear. Control hand wheels shall
be large diameter with easily read collar graduations.
Lathe shall be supplied complete with change gear set,
tailstock, automatic power feed unit with universal
quadrant, driving pin, lathe dog, tool holder and all
other components required for full operation.
C.
Milling attachment shall be of rugged cast iron
construction, mounting on top carriage cross-slide.
Unit shall be supplied with elevating lead screw, 2.4"
W x 2.4" opening vise, clamping shoe with bolts and
all other parts necessary for full use of the
attachment.
D.
The lathe unit
specifications:
shall
meet
the
following
minimum
1.
Swing over bed: 8"
2.
Center distance: 17.7"
3.
Spindle hole: 0.8"
4.
Headstock taper: No. 3 MT.
5.
Tailstock taper: No. 2 MT.
6.
Spindle speeds:100/250/350/500/800/1700 RPM
7.
Longitudinal feeds: 0035,.070 in./rev.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 264
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
8.
Thread range: 10-44 thds/in
E.
Lathe/miller shall be furnished complete with all
standard equipment, fully adjusted; ready to run.
Machine shall be mounted on a heavy duty steel cabinet
base with chip pan and storage cabinet w/lock. Provide
manufacturers instruction manual/parts list.
F.
Lathe motor shall be 0.5 HP, 120 volts, 60 HZ, 1 phase.
Provide in a convenient location on the convenient
location on the lathe a "forward, stop and reverse"
type button station and a reversing type magnetic
starter with thermal overload and under voltage
protection completely interwired and connected to
motor.
The reversing type magnetic starter shall be
shall be as manufactured by General Electric Co.,
Allen-Bradley, Square-D.
Provide receptacle mounted
in a convenient location on lathe for use of work
light.
Furnish the following accessories with lathe/miller of
a type approved by the manufacturer of the machine:
NYSCA
1.
One (1) 4.3" universal chuck w/2 x 3 jaws, matched
to spindle, ready for use.
2.
One (1) 5.9" independent chuck, 4 jaw, matched to
spindle ready for use.
3.
One (1) set of 6 change gears w/bushing.
4.
One (1) Jacobs chuck, w/MT-2 shank.
5.
One (1) Taper adaptor, MT 2/MT3.
6.
One (1) 4 way tool holder.
7.
One (1) set of 6 turning tools.
8.
One (1) extra center No. MT-2.
9.
One (1) each of the following carbide insert tool
holders:
a.
Right hand facing
b.
Roughing
c.
Side cutter
10.
Ten (10) carbide indexing inserts L.H.
11.
Ten (10) carbide indexing inserts R.H.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 265
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
12.
One (1) chip guard.
13.
One (1) lathe dog.
14.
One (1) face plate.
15.
One (1) single tool holder w/cutting tool.
16.
One (1) collet chuck.
17.
One (1) set of 17 E-25 collets .062" to .562".
18.
One (1) operating and spare parts manual.
19.
One (1) polyvinyl protective cover.
20.
Five (5) each H.S. spiral end mills in
following sizes: .125", .187", .375", .500".
21.
One (1) grease gun.
22.
One (1) set of wrenches.
23.
One (1) work light.
the
All chuck keys shall be of the Miracle self-ejecting
type.
G.
12.226
NYSCA
Lathe/miller shall be a Compact 8 as supplied by EMCOLUX Corp., Columbus, Ohio; Mod LB-817/1, Do-All Co.,
Des Plaines, Ill.
ROTATIONAL MOLDING MACHINE
A.
Rotational Molding Machine shall consist of a heated
oven with a rotating mold holder mounted within. Unit
shall be designed to produce hollow plastic castings
up to approx. 8" x 14" in size. Machine shall be bench
or cabinet mounted as indicated on plans.
B.
Oven section shall have interior dimensions of approx.
20"W. x 15"D. x 17"H. and be equipped with an interior
120 Volt, 60 Hz A.C. 40 watt light, glass panel door
and visible interior thermometer. Oven shall have dual
backmounted 120/208 Volts, 60 Hz, A.C. heaters with
2000 watt capacity, and made of Nichrome coiled wire.
Heaters shall be easily accessible for service. Oven
door shall be provided with positive acting catch, and
hasp with padlock equal to Chicago Lock Co. Model
1741. Machine shall have insulation surrounding oven
including door, sufficient to prevent temperature rise
exceeding 140 0F at any exterior point for the longest
cycle of time, at the highest set temperature. Provide
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 266
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
galvanized steel shelf in oven to prevent drippings
from reaching oven floor.
C.
Mold holder shall be of the dual quick disconnect type
that will readily accommodate all shapes of molds
including
square,
rectangular,
cylindrical
and
irregular. Mold holder shall be rotated by a heavy
duty gear and chain drive, with 0.1 HP, 110 Volts, 60
Hz, A.C. gear motor which provides twin axis rotation.
Drive shall be smooth and continuous, free of erratic
motion, over the full range of the machine's speed
control.
D.
Rotational Molding Machine shall have front mounted
control panel with heater shut-off and pilot light,
thermostat control to 550 0F, 0-30 RPM mold holder
electronic speed control, and automatic cycle timer
which signals end of cycle and turns heaters off.
E.
The unit shall be designed to operate on single phase,
120/208 Volts, 60 Hz, A.C. (Solid Connection).
F.
The following accessories shall be furnished with the
unit, of a type approved by the manufacturer of the
Rotational Molding Machine:
1.
One (1) Coaster Mold.
2.
One (1) Wiffle Ball Mold.
3.
One (1) Golf Head Mold.
4.
One (1) Piggy Bank Mold (10").
5.
One (1) Coin Case Mold.
6.
One (1) Ball Mold (27/8").
7.
Two (2) Water Canteen Molds.
8.
Two (2) Salt and Pepper Shaker Molds.
9.
Two (2) Wheel Molds (41/4" x 11/4").
10.
Two (2) Dual Mold Holders.
11.
Five (5) gal. Liquid Vinyl Plastisol.
12.
Twelve (12) units of powdered colorants for each
type polyethylene, in the following colors:
Two (2) Units Red
Two (2) Units Green
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 267
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Two (2) Units Blue
Two (2) Units White
Two (2) Units Yellow
Two (2) Units Black
13.
Thirty (30) 4 oz. bottles of color dispersions for
vinyl plastisol in the following colors:
Five (5) Bottles Red
Five (5) Bottles Green
Five (5) Bottles Blue
Five (5) Bottles White
Five (5) Bottles Yellow
Five (5) Bottles Black
14.
Two (2) pr. Insulated Gloves.
15.
One (1) Water Spray Bottle.
16.
One (1) Instruction Booklet.
17.
Twenty Six (26) 20 oz. Spray Cans Mold Release.
18.
100 lbs. Low Density Polyethylene.
19.
100 lbs. High Density Polyethylene.
All molds supplied shall be cast and polished.
NYSCA
G.
When the unit is not shown on the drawings as bench
mounted, but is free standing, furnish an all-steel
double door base cabinet. The cabinet shall be approx.
36"W. x 21"D. x 31"H. in size with an adjustable shelf
within. Cabinet shall have a fixed steel angle on each
side on top to provide anchoring for Rotational
Molding Machine. The doors shall be provided with a
cylinder lock and three keys. Lock and keys shall be
as per Art. 2.03C. The base cabinet shall be Model No.
DD-5 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
H.
Rotational Molding Machine shall be Model 812 of EMCO,
Stock No. 440963 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 268
05/14/04
12.227
ELECTRIC KICK WHEEL
A.
The kick wheel unit shall be sturdily constructed of
11/4" welded tubular steel, and equipped with a
machined and balanced cast iron kick wheel approx. 28"
in dia., mounted on a 11/4" steel shaft.
B.
Wheel head shall be aluminum, flat type, 14" in
diameter with concentric circles machined on top
surface. The drip pan shall be approx. 17" in dia. by
7" high, of spun aluminum, and easily removable. The
unit shall be provided with an operator's seat,
adjustable as to height and nearness to wheel head.
C.
The motor shall be a 1/3 horsepower, designed to
operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle A.C., and shall be
equipped with a heavy duty, three wire (one grounding)
cord and plug to match the receptacle.
The motor
shall be hinge-supported between the tubular uprights.
D.
A foot lever shall control the power unit as to
starting and stopping the motor, and engaging the
drive wheel. The drive wheel on the motor shall be of
composition rubber.
E.
Electric kick wheel shall be the Stewart Clay Co.,
Model No. RL-1 with flat-head.
12.228
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
GLASS DRILLING MACHINE - PORTABLE
A.
The drilling machine shall be a two-speed, direct motor
drive unit capable of drilling holes in glass or
ceramics. The base shall have two (2) rubber feet and
a rubber suction pad, to hold the unit in place, which
shall be controlled by a handle located near the
bottom of the column.
B.
The drill shall have a gear type chuck capacity of
1/18" to 3/8" dia. for use with 1/2" to 5" dia. tube
drills, and 1/8" to 1/2" carbide drills.
In lieu of
the standard chuck key, furnish a safety-type selfejecting key as made by the Miracle Instrument Co.
C.
The unit shall have an arm-type handle for raising and
lowering the drill, and four (4) ball bearing steel
wheels riding in two (2) vertical slots in the column.
D.
The motor shall be designed to operate on 120 volts,
60 cycle A.C., drawing 2.5 Amps, and shall be provided
with a three wire (one grounding) cord and plug to
match the receptacle.
A three position switch shall
be provided for low speed, high speed, and off.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 269
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Glass drilling
Machine Works.
machine
shall
be
Model
41,
Baldwin
F.
The following accessories as made by or recommended by
the manufacturer of the machine, shall be provided:
One (1) rubber base metal ring 11/2"
One (1) rubber base metal ring 3"
One (1) rubber base metal ring 41/2"
One (1) each 1/2" shank x 4" long steel tube drills of
the following sizes:
1/2", 5/8", 3/4", 7/8", 1",
11/4", 11/2" and 2".
One (1) each Carboloy glass drills of the following
sizes: 1/4", 3/8", and 1/2".
12.229
ELECTRIC STAPLER - PORTABLE
A.
Stapler shall be a portable, self contained machine
which shall operate automatically and instantaneously
when work is inserted, without skipping, repeating, or
jamming. It shall be capable of stapling up to 25
sheets of 20 lb. paper. The unit shall be of metal
construction and mounted on four (4) rubber feet. It
shall have an adjustable depth of from 1/4" to 41/4",
shall be easily reloaded with standard 1/4" staples,
and shall have a baked enamel finish.
B.
The unit shall have a solenoid drive, operating on
single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., and shall be
provided with an on-off toggle switch and three wire
cord
(one
grounding)
with
plug
to
match
the
receptacle.
C.
The unit shall be delivered complete and in operating
condition, and furnished with two (2) boxes of 1/4" x
9/32" leg staples (5000 staples per box).
D.
Electric Stapler - Portable shall
Staplex Company, Brooklyn, N.Y.
12.230
NYSCA
be
Model
S-54,
ABRASIVE BELT GRINDER
A.
The grinder shall be a bench-mounted, wet abrasive type
glass or ceramic finishing machine, housed in an all
steel enclosure, approx. 24"W x 12"D.
B.
The machine shall be motor driven thru an "O" ring belt
drive, with all moving parts enclosed.
The tilting
rest, approx. 6" x 8", shall be mounted so that it can
be locked in any position by means of a thumb screw.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 270
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
The belt shall be 4"W x 48"L. The idler pulley shall
be enclosed in a box-type guard.
The platen shall
have 5" wide sponge rubber.
C.
A full height access door shall be provided for access
to motor and drive for servicing.
A clear plastic
hose shall be connected between the sump and idler
pulley housing.
The sump shall be provided with a
drain cock for emptying the unit.
The unit shall be
rigidly fastened to the bench top with through bolts,
flat and lock washers.
D.
The belt grinder shall be driven by a 3/4 horsepower
motor designed to operate on three phase, 208 volts,
60 cycle A.C.
E.
Provide in a convenient location a magnetic starter
completely wired to the motor with approved materials.
F.
The machine shall be complete and ready for operation,
and shall be furnished complete with the following
accessories:
G.
12.231
One (1) glass working platen.
2.
One (1) plastic working platen.
3.
One (1) miter head table, complete.
4.
One (1) pkg. of three (3) wet or dry abrasive
belts 100 grit.
5.
One (1) pkg. of three (3) wet or dry abrasive
belts 200 grit.
6.
One (1) pkg. of three (3) wet or dry abrasive
belts 400 grit.
7.
One (1) pkg. of three (3) cork belts for fine
glass polishing.
Abrasive belt grinder shall be a Model 48AGLPL as
supplied by the Baldwin Glass and Plastics Machinery
Corp of Baldwin, N.Y.
CASTING TANK - MOBILE
A.
NYSCA
1.
The casting tank shall be a two-speed, complete slip
mixing and casting unit, consisting of a rugged steel
frame supporting a sturdy fibre-glass tank having a
capacity of 20 gals.
The unit shall be supported on
two (2) fixed and two (2) large heavy duty,
permanently lubricated ball bearing type casters.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 271
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
The unit shall have a stainless steel, heavy duty pump,
V-belt driven by a two-speed motor.
The pump shall
deliver the slip from the casting tank to the casting
mold. An 8-foot length of clear hose with a triggertype nozzle of stainless steel shall control the flow
of the slip from no-flow to full capacity of the pump.
The main tank shall be approx. 62"L x 25" W. and have
large radius corners.
It shall have an outlet for
draining without the use of the pump. The top of the
tank shall be approx. 32" above the floor, and shall
have three (3) removable stainless steel roller racks.
On the outside of the unit, a removable nozzle storage
tank shall be provided for cleaning and refilling, and
for keeping the slip from drying within the hose.
C.
The agitator shall have two (2) stainless steel
propellers, V-belt driven.
The bearings, seal and
shaft shall be enclosed to protect them from contact
with the slip. The agitator shall be provided with a
grease cup for adding high quality water seal grease.
D.
The pump motor shall be a single speed 1/3 horsepower
motor, and the agitator motor shall be a two speed 1/3
horsepower motor.
Both motors shall be designed to
operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle A.C.
E.
Provide in a convenient location on the casting tank
two (2) watertight NEMA 3-4 enclosure starters and a
power rated watertight enclosure speed selector switch
for the agitator motor. Starters and switch shall be
completely
wired
to
the
motors
with
approved
materials.
Provide an 8-foot heavy duty, three wire
(one grounding) cord and plug to match the receptacle.
F.
Casting tank shall be Mod. CT-425M
Lehman Mfg. Co. Kentland, Ind.
G.
A durable sign shall be affixed to the outside of the
unit, reading "DO NOT PLACE HANDS IN TANK" in 1" high
capital letters.
H.
The entire unit shall be warranted for one (1) year,
covering
materials
and
workmanship
by
the
manufacturer.
12.233
NYSCA
as
supplied
by
COMPACT ENLARGER - PORTABLE
A.
Enlarger shall be a compact, manually focused unit
designed to produce photographic 16" x 20" prints on
the baseboard, from 35 mm or 21/4" x 21/4" negatives.
B.
Enlarger's head shall rotate horizontally for wall
projection of large size prints. Film and lens stages
shall
shift
to
allow
perspective
control
in
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 272
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
architectural and art photography. The bellows shall
be extra long (6" minimum) for image reductions.
Condenser lamphouse shall have 3" filter drawer for
use with color printing or variable contrast filters.
Condenser shall be three-part glass type for even
light distribution. Enlarger shall be furnished with
two (2) 39mm standard Leica thread lens mounts for
multi-position lens mounting, two (2) mixing chambers
for 35mm and 120 film sizes, three light attenuators
to control density, swing-away red safety filter,
large knob controlled friction bellows drive, and
counterbalanced carriage.
Column shall be extra long
(50") type, made of aluminum alloy of rigid section.
Baseboard shall be of extra large 18" x 22" x 11/4"
size, made of warp-resistant material with phenolic
facing on both top and bottom surfaces. Condenser lamp
shall be 75 watt, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Enlarger shall
be delivered set up and ready for use.
NYSCA
C.
Enlarger shall be furnished with Rodenstock-Omegaron
f/3.5-50mm and f/4.5-75mm lenses with illuminated f
stops
and
proper
lensboards,
and
all
related
accessories supplied by manufacturer as standard.
D.
Enlarger shall be furnished with the following
accessories as supplied by the manufacturer of the
enlarger (Omega Arkay model numbers given):
1.
One (1) 110 Glassless Negative Carrier #423-401.
2.
One (1) 126 Glassless Negative Carrier #423-402.
3.
One (1) 35mm Half Frame Glassless Negative Carrier
#423-403.
4.
One (1) 35mm Glassless Negative Carrier #423-404.
5.
One (1) 35mm Mounted Transparency
Negative Carrier #423-405.
Glassless
6.
One (1) 6 x 4.5 cm (21/4"
Negative Carrier #423-406.
Glassless
7.
One (1) 6 x 6 cm (21/4" x 21/4") Glassless Negative
Carrier #423-407.
8.
One (1) Extra Opal Lamp 75W/120V #471-038
9.
One (1) Omega "4-in-1" Easel
10.
One (1) Transparent dust cover
11.
One (1) Parts/Instruction Manual
x
15/8")
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 273
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., and equipped with 8' (min.) long
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) cord with plug
to match receptacle.
E.
Compact Enlarger - Portable shall be Model C760-XL of
Omega Arkay, Westminster, MD.
12.234
NYSCA
ENLARGER - PORTABLE
A.
Enlarger shall be a portable manually focused unit
designed
to
produce
black
and
white
or
color
photographic enlargements greater than 24X on the
baseboard from 35mm film with a 50mm lens.
B.
Enlarger shall have twin E-channel, centerbraced
vertical column with adjustable counterbalanced lift
mechanism providing a stationary projected image
center when image magnification is changed. Unit shall
accept
various
lightsources,
film
carriers
and
accessories
including
Beseler
45M
Condenser
Lightsource, Omega D series Condenser Lamphouse, all
beseler
Colorheads,
Super
Chromega
Dichroic
II
Colorhead, Aristo 4" x 5" Coldlight, Ilfospeed
Multigrade 500 Enlarger head and Beseler 8" x 10"
Conversion Kit with Coldlight. Enlarger shall accept
Beseler 45 series lensboards and film carriers, Omega
D series sandwich type carriers and Omega oval lens
mounting plates. Carriage shall have left and right
hand focus controls with lock. Film and lens stages
shall
shift
to
allow
perspective
control
in
architectural and art photography. The bellows shall
be extra long for image reductions. Enlarger shall
have adjustable filterholder for variable contrast,
red safety and special effects filters. Unit shall be
equipped with a 23" x 30" x 11/2" high pressure
laminated baseboard. Enlarger shall accept lenses with
39mm standard Leica thread mounts.
C.
Unit shall be of die-cast construction with twin 61/2"
optical glass condensers to provide illumination of
negatives up to 4" x 5" in size. Lamphouse shall have
built-in filter drawer which accepts 6" x 6" CP
filters, built-in heat absorbing glass, and 150 watt
lamp output.
D.
Unit shall have mechanical filter adjustment with a
filtration range of 0-200 Y-M-C. Light source shall be
a single 250 watt 82 volt wide-beam Quartz Halogen
lamp with single diffusion mixing chamber, 4" x 5"/6"
x 7"/35mm mixing chambers and built-in cooling fan.
Color head shall have built-in voltage stabilization.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 274
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Lenses shall have 39mm standard Leica thread mounts.
Enlarger shall be furnished with the following lenses
and all related lensboards and accessories supplied by
manufacturer as standard (Beseler catalog numbers
given):
NYSCA
1.
50mm f/2.8 Beseler HD Cat. #8640.
2.
75mm f/4 Rodenstock APO-Rodagon D Cat. #8650.
F.
Analyzer shall be solid state unit with photomultiplier
light
detector.
Minimum
light
level
sensitivity shall be 0.0002 foot candles and density
range shall be over 4.00. Unit shall have null type
differential voltmeter and cyan, yellow, magenta,
white program control knobs. Analyzer shall have
internal voltage stabilization and operate on 117
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 10 watts.
G.
Enlarger shall be furnished with the following
accessories as supplied by the manufacturer of the
enlarger (Beseler model numbers given):
1.
One (1) 35mm Glassless Negative Carrier #8304.
2.
One (1) 35mm Glassless Negative Carrier #8302.
3.
One (1) 6 x 4.5 cm (21/4"
Negative Carrier #8334.
4.
One (1) 6 x 6 cm (21/4" x 21/4") Glassless Negative
Carrier #8312.
5.
One (1) Extra Lamp 150W/120V #8100.
6.
One (1) Extra Lamp 250W/82V #8108.
7.
One (1) 20" x 24" Four Bladed Masking Easel #8502.
8.
One (1) "4-in-1" Easel
9.
One (1) Transparent dust cover
10.
One (1) Parts/Instruction Manual
x
15/8")
Glassless
H.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., and equipped with 8' (min.) long
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) cord with plug
to match receptacle.
I.
Enlarger - Portable shall be Model 45V-XL, with Model
45M Condenser, Model Dichro 45S Colorhead, and Model
pm1A Color Analyzer all of Charles Beseler Company,
Linden, NJ.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 275
05/14/04
12.235
PRINT DRYER - PORTABLE
A.
Unit shall be an electrically heated photographic print
dryer with twin 12" x 17" chrome plated drying
surfaces, each capable of producing either glossy or
matte prints up to 11" x 14" in size.
B.
Print dryer shall have a non-adjustable type body
heater producing a uniform temperature over its entire
drying area. Heater shall have a temperature range of
up to 195oF. Apron shall be made of heavy duty canvas
duck with chain stitched edges. Unit shall be provided
with an apron support rack with an adjustable tension
rod. Body shall be all welded steel with baked enamel
finish (excluding platen), and provided with four
rubber feet.
C.
Print dryer shall be provided with an on-off switch and
temperature control. Unit shall operate on single
phase, 120 Volts, 60 HZ, 3 amps, and shall come
equipped with a heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord a minimum of six (6) feet long with plug to
match receptacle.
D.
Print Dryer - Portable shall be Model T2C of Omega
Arkay, Westminster, MD.
12.236
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
EXPOSING UNIT - PORTABLE
A.
Exposing unit, portable, shall consist of a carbon arc
light source, vacuum actuated plate holding frame, and
vacuum pump unit.
Unit shall be capable of exposing
offset plates up to 17" x 22" size.
B.
The carbon arc unit shall be housed in a metal
enclosure, with reflector, and be provided with a
large knob at rear to manually adjust arc gap.
Carbons shall be mounted horizontally and produce arc
light uniformly covering vacuum frame without hot
spots or undercutting.
C.
The vacuum frame shall be of sturdy construction,
designed to be loaded in the horizontal position and
exposed in the vertical position. Frame shall have a
one piece resilient rubber blanket with molded-in
beading and glass frame with clamps capable of holding
plate and film in tight contact.
D.
Vacuum pump with motor shall be of the lightweight
integral type, provided complete with filter and
vacuum line to connect to vacuum frame.
Furnish
complete operating instruction and service manual with
unit.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 276
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Carbon arc and vacuum pump unit shall be designed for
operation on a 120 volts 60 HZ power source.
Arc
shall be rated at 1 KW and vacuum pump shall be
1/4 HP. Provide both units with heavy duty three wire
(one grounding) 6 ft. (min.) linecord with plug to
match receptacle.
F.
Exposing unit shall be a Model 26-1K supplied by the
NuArc Co., Chicago, Ill.
G.
Provide six (6) additional arc carbons of
approved by the supplier of the exposing unit.
12.237
a
type
HEAT SEALING MACHINE
A.
Heat sealing machine shall be a cabinet mounted, foot
pedal operated unit, with lock, designed to seal
polyethylene plastic sheeting up to .040" total
stacked height by means of a thermal impulse.
Unit shall produce air and liquid tight seals in
plastic films using a heat impulse of 900 watts (min.).
Heater bar shall be 0.5" wide, 1" thick and 14" long,
with teflon covered face, and shall be provided without
seal cutoff device. Unit shall have an electronic heat
impulse timer adjustable from 0.5 to 4 seconds. Furnish
complete operating instruction and service manual with
unit.
B.
Heat sealer shall
phase,
120 volts,
1200 watts.
Unit
switch and a six
(one
grounding)
receptacle.
C.
Furnish the following accessories with the heat sealing
machine of a type approved by the manufacturer of the
unit:
D.
NYSCA
be designed to operate on single
60 HZ
A.C.
and
be
rated
at
shall be equipped with an on-off
foot (min.) heavy duty three wire
line
cord
with
plug
to
match
1.
Three (3) heater elements (.009" Dia. Nichrome).
2.
Twelve (12) teflon covers for heater bar.
3.
Two (2) terminal blocks with springs for heater
bar.
4.
One (1) Silicone rubber heater bar pad.
Heat sealer shall be Model No. 14A/SP/CAB of Vertrod
Corp, Brooklyn, N.Y.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 277
05/14/04
12.238
5
PLANT GROWING UNIT "A"
A.
Plant growing unit "A" shall be a fluorescent lighted,
two shelf steel bench, approx. 48" wide, 18" deep and
60" high, intended for the indoor growing of plants
under simulated outdoor conditions.
B.
Fluorescent cycle timer shall be wired to control
individual benches or groups of benches as shown on
Drawings.
Location of cycle timer shall be as shown
on Drawings.
C.
Plant growing unit "A" shall be constructed as shown on
Drawings.
12.239
5
PLANT GROWING UNIT "B"
A.
Plant growing unit "B" shall be a fluorescent lighted,
two shelf steel bench, approx. 48" wide, 32" deep and
60" high, intended for the indoor growing of plants
under simulated outdoor conditions.
B.
Fluorescent cycle timer shall be wired to control
individual benches or groups of benches as shown on
Drawings.
Location of cycle timer shall be as shown
on Drawings.
C.
Plant growing unit "B" shall be constructed as shown on
Drawings.
12.241
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
PLASTIC WELDER - PORTABLE
A.
Plastic Welder - Portable, shall be a completely self
contained outfit capable of welding all common
thermoplastics. All parts of welder are to be
contained within rugged metal carrying case, with
handle. Unit is to consist of a compressor with
regulator, filter and pressure gauge, torch, hosing
and all other parts required for proper operation.
Supply instruction/parts manual with unit. Torch shall
have insulated plastic handle with interchangeable
welding tip. Plastic welder shall be capable of
attaining a 450oF - 1300oF (min.) heat range. Torch
shall be supplied with 12 ft. (min.) of connecting
plastic air hose and electric cord. Compressor shall
be rated at 2.5 cfm at 3 psi (min.) and be supplied
complete
with
intake
muffler/filter
and
quick
disconnect coupling. On-off switches shall be provided
for compressor and torch, interlocked to prevent
operation of torch without compressor.
B.
Torch shall be rated at 450 watts (min.) and compressor
at 0.1 HP (min.), both 120 volts, 60 HZ, single phase.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 278
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Provide 6' (min.) heavy duty three conductor (one
grounding) line cord with plug to match receptacle.
C.
D.
12.242
1.
Twelve (12) 12" x 24" x .125" rigid PVC sheets.
2.
Twelve (12) 12" x 24" x .187" rigid PVC sheets.
3.
Ten (10) pounds .125" dia. PVC welding rod.
4.
Twelve (12) one foot pieces of 11/4" x 11/4" x .187
PVC angle.
5.
One (1) Pint - PVC solvent cement.
Plastic Welder - Portable shall be Model 30-200 of
Laramy, Stock No. 304218 as supplied by Brodhead
Garrett.
PLASTIC STRIP HEATER - PORTABLE
A.
Plastic strip heater shall consist of a portable,
electrically
heated
unit
designed
to
soften
thermoplastic sheet up to 1/2" thick for forming.
Heater shall be a heavy duty unit, with 34" wide
working space, square end gauges, non-mar type top
surface, pilot light, replaceable type heater element
and all other parts required for proper operation.
Supply instruction/parts manual with unit and three
(3) extra heating elements.
B.
Electrical requirements for unit shall be single phase,
120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C. Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty
three conductor (one grounding) cord and plug to match
receptacle.
C.
Furnish with the plastic strip heater, a bending
fixture designed to hold repetitive bends. Unit shall
have an effective bending area of 18" minimum. Bending
Fixture shall be Model No. 25-250-00 of New Hermes,
Inc., Decatur, GA.
D.
Plastic Strip Heater shall be Model No. 23-160, Stock
No. 304039 as supplied by Brodhead Garrett.
12.243
FLEXIBLE SHAFT GRINDER - PORTABLE
A.
NYSCA
Provide the following accessories with plastic welder
of a type approved by manufacturer of welder:
Flexible shaft grinder, portable, shall be a miniature
power tool with 36" flexible shaft with handpiece,
designed to hold small mounted stones or burrs for use
in grinding, carving or similar operations.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 279
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Grinder shall be of rugged construction with motor
swivel mounted on small, four legged stand with rubber
feet.
Unit shall be equipped with a foot operated
carbon pile type rheostat giving speed control over a
full 0-14,000 RPM (min.) speed range. Flexible shaft
shall be enclosed in a neoprene sheath and shall
operate silently over entire speed range.
Handpiece
shall be of the collet type, with grease sealed ball
bearings.
Supply collet kit with 0.032", 0.063",
0.125" dia. collets. Machine shall be supplied fully
lubricated, ready for use, with parts/instruction
manual.
C.
Supply following accessories with grinder of a type
approved by manufacturer of grinder:(Foredom Nos.
given).
One (1) Kit of 16 Vanadium Steel Burrs (#60)
2.
One (1) Kit of 13 Mounted Abrasive Points (#40)
3.
Two (2) Kits of 7 Mounted Brushes (#70)
4.
One (1) Kit of 24 Mounted Stones (#150)
D.
Electrical requirements for unit shall be 120 volts,
60 HZ, single phase.
Provide 6' (min.) heavy duty
three conductor (one grounding) line cord with plug to
match receptacle.
E.
Flexible shaft grinder shall be a Model DD-8 with Model
CFL-15 foot switch as manufactured by the Foredom
Electric Co., Bethel, Conn.
12.244
NYSCA
1.
KEY CUTTING MACHINE
A.
Key cutting machine shall be a portable unit suitable
for duplicating all standard cylinder, flat steel and
bit type keys.
Unit shall have a manually traversed
carriage and be designed for bench top use.
B.
Machine shall be of a heavy duty construction with two
large clamping thumb screws, single milling cutter,
wire brush wheel and a plastic hood enclosing all
rotating parts.
Unit shall be supported on four
rubber feet.
C.
Drive motor shall be 0.125 HP (min.), 120 volts, 60 HZ,
1725 RPM, single phase, with 6' (min.) heavy duty
three conductor (one grounding) line cord with plug to
match receptacle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 280
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Key cutting machine shall be and ILCO "Convertible"
Model No. H2584CV as made by the Independent Lock Co.,
Fitchburg, Mass.
E.
Supply the following accessories
manufacturer of machine:
12.245
approved
by
1.
Key Blank Assortment (500 Keys) w/board No. 120EZA
2.
Two (2) extra milling cutters - No. 34MC
3.
Ford Adapter - No. FOA-1
4.
Schlage Adapter - Nos. SCA-1 and SCA-2
5.
Instruction/Parts List Manual.
BUTTON PRESS - 2.25"
A.
Button press shall be a hand lever operated, bench
mounted unit designed to make 2.25" dia. campaign type
pin-on buttons.
B.
Press shall be of heavy duty construction with
actuated ram.
Unit shall be supplied with three
2.25" dia. button assembly dies, sliding lower
mount, photo cutter and all other parts required
proper operation.
C.
Supply the following accessories with press of a type
approved by supplier of press:
D.
12.247
NYSCA
as
cam
(3)
die
for
1.
One thousand (1000) sets of parts for 2.25" dia.
buttons.
2.
One thousand (1000) sets of parts for 2.25" dia.
mirrors.
Button press shall be a Model BDSL4 as supplied by B-D
Printing Corp. Brooklyn, N.Y.
PLASTIC FORMER AND COMPRESSOR
A.
Plastic Former And Compressor shall be a floor type
machine, cabinet mounted, with a 14" x 20" forming
area designed for skin packaging and vacuum forming of
thermoplastic film and sheet. Unit shall be provided
with a separate portable compressor to provide blister
blow-off.
B.
Plastic Former shall be a heavy duty industrial type
machine with semi-automatic cycling, over-head swing
arm type heater, internal vacuum system, timer
control, counter, cooling fan, blow-off, frame and
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 281
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
suction surface, side roll feed, front mounted control
panel, and all other components required for proper
operation. Unit shall meet the following minimum
specifications:
NYSCA
1.
Plastic Size:
16" x 22"
2.
Form Area:
14" x 20"
3.
Maximum Draw:
5"
4.
Plastic Gauge:
up to 0.125"
5.
Vacuum Motors:
Two (2) at 3/4 HP each.
6.
Rod Heaters:
3200 watts
7.
Total Input Power:
4320 watts
C.
Plastic Former shall be supplied with a small separate
oil-less type portable 1/2 HP air compressor with a
rating of 3 cfm at 40 psig, complete with quick
disconnect type air hose.
D.
Provide on the Plastic Former, a cage guard enclosing
heating unit that will prevent incidents of contact
burns on the part of the operator and nearby
personnel.
Cage
guard
shall
comply
with
OSHA
regulations.
E.
The Plastic Former shall be designed to operate on
single phase, 208 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 20 Amps. and
shall be provided with a magnetic starter completely
wired to the unit with approved materials. Plastic
Former shall be provided with 10 ft. heavy duty four
conductor (one grounding) cord and twist-lock plug to
match the receptacle. The Compressor shall be designed
to operate on single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz A.C.
Provide Compressor with 10 ft. heavy duty three
conductor (one grounding) cord and plug to match
receptacle.
F.
The following accessories and supplies shall be
furnished with the Plastic Former of a type approved
by manufacturer of the machine:
1.
Three (3) Extra Heating Elements.
2.
Two (2) rolls of Surlyn Film, 16" wide, 0.005"
thick.
3.
Two (2) rolls of Surlyn Film, 16" wide, 0.010"
thick.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 282
05/14/04
G.
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
One (1) gallon Surlyn Liquid.
5.
One Hundred (100) precoated card stock, 16" x 22"
x 0.024" thick.
6.
One Hundred (100) pieces of High Impact Styrene
Sheet, 16" x 22" x 0.060" thick.
7.
One Hundred (100) pieces of ABS Sheet, 16" x 22" x
0.060" thick.
8.
One (1) Instruction/Parts Manual.
Vacuum Former shall be Model No. 1521-A of Orbit Inc.,
Demining, NM.
Compressor
shall
be
Model
No.
4LCB
Manufacturing Corporation, Carlstadt, N.J.
12.248
NYSCA
of
Gast
SIGN MAKER
A.
Sign maker shall be a hand inked, stand mounted unit
designed to produce paper or cardboard signs up to 14"
x 11" in size.
B.
Unit shall have heavy glass ink platen, type rack of
all steel construction, register roll with dial
controlled pressure control, type holders and spacers,
and 30" high steel stand with shelf. Mechanism shall
be constructed of sturdy
cast or extruded aluminum
components, fully enclosed with all rotating parts
ball bearing mounted.
C.
Sign Maker shall be supplied complete with the
following standard equipment of a type approved by
manufacturer of machine: (Line-O-Scribe Nos. given).
1.
One (1) Leatherette Machine Cover
2.
One (1) Type Rack Cover
3.
One (1) Set Lining Bars
4.
One (1) Set Spacing Furniture
5.
One (1) Set Locking Wedges
6.
One (1) Card Rack
7.
Two (2) Tubes Fast-Dri Ink (One red, one black)
8.
Two (2) XTRON Composition Ink Roller, 2" and 3"
9.
One (1) Justifier (No. F57)
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 283
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
10.
One (1) Gallon Type & Roller Cleaner (No. 60)
11.
One (1) Quart Hand Cleaner (No. F58)
12.
Five (5) Pads of Sign Requisition Forms
13.
One (1) Extra Layout Sheet
14.
One (1) Font 24 Point Capitals (20th Century Bold
Style)
15.
One (1) Font 24 Point Lower Case (20th Century
Bold Style)
16.
One (1) Font 24 Point Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
17.
Two (2) Font 36 Point Capitals (20th Century Bold
Style)
18.
Two (2) Font 36 Point Lower Case (20th Century
Bold Style)
19.
Two (2) Font 36 Point Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
20.
Two (2) Font 48 Point Capitals (20th Century Bold
Style)
21.
One (1) Font 48 Point Lower Case (20th Century
Bold Style)
22.
One (1) Font 48 Point Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
23.
One (1) Font 72 Point Capitals (20th Century Bold
Style)
24.
One (1) Font 72 Point Lower Case (20th Century
Bold Style)
25.
One (1) Font 72 Point Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
26.
One (1) Font 8 Line Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
27.
One (1) Font 12 Line Figures (20th Century Bold
Style)
28.
Four (4) Lbs. of assorted spacers for above type.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 284
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Provide the following additional supplies with Sign
Maker of a type approved by Manufacturer of machine:
(Line O-Scribe Nos. given)
E.
12.249
NYSCA
1.
Two (2) Pkgs. (100 per pkg.) Cardboard, 6 ply, 11"
x 14", No. 61 White.
2.
Two (2) Pkgs. (100 per pkg.) Cardboard, 6 ply, 7"
x 11", No. 61 White.
3.
Two (2) Pkgs. (100 per pkg.) Cardboard, 6 ply, 11"
x 14", No. 62 Buff.
4.
Two (2) Pkgs. (100 per pkg.) Cardboard, 6 ply, 11"
x 14", No. 63 Green.
5.
Two (2) Pkgs. (100 per pkg.) Cardboard, 6 ply, 11"
x 14", No. 68 Yellow.
6.
Two (2) 1 Lb. Cans Fast-Dri Ink, Red, No. F 56.
7.
Two (2) 1 Lb. Cans Fast-Dri Ink, Yellow, No. F 56.
8.
Two (2) 1 Lb. Cans Fast-Dri Ink, Green, No. F 56.
9.
Two (2) 1 Lb.Cans Fast-Dri Ink, Dark Blue, No.
F 56.
10.
Two (2) 1 Lb. Cans Fast-Dri Ink, Black, No. F 56.
11.
Six (6) 1 Gal.Cans Type and Roller Cleaner No.
F 60.
12.
One (1) 1/2 Pint Can Fast-Dri Justifier No. F 57
13.
Twelve (12) 1 Quart Cans Hand Cleaner No. F 58.
14.
One (1) Sign Drying Rack 3.75 " x 29" No. 515.
Sign maker shall be a Line-O-Scribe Model MRS1411 as
manufactured by the Morgan Sign Machine Co., Chicago,
Ill.
HORIZONTAL BAND CUT-OFF SAW
A.
Horizontal band cut-off saw shall be floor mounted
continuous band type machine designed to cut metal
stock up to 7" x 10" in size.
B.
Machine shall be of sturdy, all steel construction with
easily elevated band saw head, variable speed or step
pulley drive, fully enclosed transmission, quick
acting swiveling vise, feed rate control, bar stock
stop and automatic shutoff. Band saw head shall have
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 285
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
blade guide system, blade guards, chip removal brushes
and an easily replaced band blade. Provide unit with
coolant system complete with pump, tubing, control
valve, chip pan and electric receptacle on side of
machine to plug coolant pump into.
C.
shall
1.
Stock Capacity:
7" x 10"
2.
Blade length:
89"
3.
Blade width:
0.5" or 0.625"
4.
Speed range:
80 to 144 FPM
meet
the
D.
Machine
shall
be
furnished
completely
adjusted,
lubricated, ready for use, with a full complement of
standard equipment as specified by the manufacturer in
his catalog.
Provide operating instruction/parts
manual.
E.
Drive motor of machine shall be 0.5 HP (min.)
120 volts, 1 phase, 60 HZ.
Coolant pump shall be
0.25 HP, 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 HZ.
Provide on a
convenient position on machine a push button starter
with thermal protection.
Controls shall be wired so
that cutting off power to machine also turns off
coolant pump power.
F.
Supply the following additional accessories/supplies as
approved by manufacturer of machine:
G.
NYSCA
Horizontal band cut off machine
following minimum specifications:
1.
Four (4) Saw Blades 0.5" wide-10TPI
2.
Four (4) Saw Blades 0.625" wide-10TPI
3.
Four (4) Saw Blades 0.5" wide-8 TPI
4.
Four (4) Saw Blades 0.625" wide-8 TPI
5.
Two (2) Chip Removal Brushes
6.
Two (2) Sets-Roller Guide and Blade Back-Up
7.
Five (5) Gallons Coolant.
Horizontal band cut-off saw shall be Mod. 7V, No. 20900 as supplied by Delta International Machinery
Corporation; Kalamazoo Mod. 7AW as supplied by KTS
Industries, Kalamazoo, Mich.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 286
05/14/04
12.250
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
VERTICAL MILLING MACHINE
A.
Vertical milling machine shall be a medium duty,
variable speed, knee type, precision machine tool
designed for rough and fine finish milling, drilling,
boring and other machining operations.
B.
Machine shall be of rugged cast iron construction with
ram mounted head, worm and gear drives for all angular
settings, column, knee and table mounted in wide ways
with adjustable taper gibs, 1.25" (min.) dia. knee
elevating screw, anti-friction type bearings, head
mounted reversing switch, and all other components
required for proper operation. Horizontal ways, gibs,
X and Y lead screws shall be hard chrome plated.
Spindle drive shall be of the continuously variable
speed type.
C.
Table longitudinal, crossfeed and elevation controls
shall be fitted with large diameter, easily read dials
graduated in 0.001" divisions. Spindle quill shall be
equipped with lever for rapid movement, hand wheel for
slow movement and a power up and down feed with micrometer depth stop graduated in 0.001" divisions.
D.
Vertical milling machine
minimum specifications:
shall
meet
the
following
1.
Table Work Area:
9" x 42"
2.
Longitudinal Table Travel:
26.5"
3.
Cross Table Travel:
12"
4.
Vertical Knee Travel:
16"
5.
Quill Travel:
5"
Work Clearance (Spindle
nose to Table Top):
18"
7.
Throat Distance:
18"
8.
Table Top T-Slot Width:
(3)-0.625"
Spindle Speed Range
(RPM):
60-4200 RPM
10.
Spindle Head Swivel
(Vertical Plane):
+ 45o
11.
Spindle Taper:
R-8
12.
Quill Power Feeds
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 287
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
(Per Spindle Rev.):
E.
Machine
shall
be
furnished
completely
adjusted,
lubricated, with full complement of standard equipment
as specified by the manufacturer in his catalog.
Provide operating instruction/parts manual.
F.
Motor of milling machine shall be 2 HP (min.)
continuous
duty,
208 volts,
2 phase,
60 HZ
of
reversing type.
Provide on a convenient position on
machine, a push-button magnetic type starter with
thermal protection.
G.
Provide one (1) each of the following accessories as
approved by manufacturer of machine:
H.
1.
Power longitudinal table feed with 0.75 to 35" per
min. drive rate (infinitely variable) and trip
dogs.
2.
"One Shot" pressurized lubrication system
3.
Set of R-8 spindle collets from 0.125" to 0.75"
size in 0.062" steps.
4.
Swivel base vise with 6" jaw width and 5" jaw
opening.
5.
8" differential dividing head with right angle
bracket, tailstock, and index plate set.
6.
Hold down bolt and nut set with blocks and clamps.
7.
Adjustable boring head taking 0.375" dia. boring
cutters, shanks, all necessary wrenches, mounting
block and case.
8.
Jacobs ball bearing drill chuck, capacity 0-1/2"
with R-8 shank adaptor and self ejecting type key
as supplied by the Miracle Instrument Co.
9.
Work light with 120 volt duplex receptacle mounted
on machine in convenient position to light plug.
10.
Collet tool and accessory tray.
Furnish five (5) each of the following:
1.
NYSCA
0.0015", 0.003",
0.006"
High speed RH spiral end mills (double end) in the
following sizes: 0.125", 0.187", 0.312", 0.500",
0.625", 0.750".
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 288
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
I.
12.251
NYSCA
High speed Woodruff key cutters, 1/2" dia., in the
following face widths: 0.062", 0.094", 0.125",
0.187".
Vertical Milling Machine shall be a Model Series 1 12BR2J
as
manufactured
by
Bridgeport
Machines,
Bridgeport, Conn.
BRAKE SERVICE UNIT
A.
Brake service unit shall consist of a cabinet mounted
brake drum/disc lathe, brake shoe grinder and other
components designed for passenger car and light truck
brake service.
B.
Drum/disc lathe shall be a rugged constructed unit with
large diameter spindle supported in heavy duty
precision bearings, capable of resurfacing brake drums
from 6" to 13" dia. (min.).
Unit shall have three
spindle speeds in the range light, calibrated control
dials, oil bath gear drive with provision for oil
level checking, spindle/bearing protector boots, and
all other parts required for proper operation. Lathe
shall be a AMMCO Model 4000. Supply one (1) each of
the following accessories of a type approved by lathe
manufacturers: (AMMCO Nos. given)
1.
Drum Adapter Kit
(17 pieces):
No. 4347
2.
Disc Twin Cutter Tool:
No. 6900
3.
L.H. Tool bit Assembly:
No. 10701
4.
R.H. Tool bit Assembly:
No. 10702
5.
Boring Bar Assembly:
No. 3134
6.
Tool bit Assembly:
No. 9872
7.
Silencer Band:
No. 6920
8.
Drum Silencer Band:
No. 5280
9.
Wrenches:
No. 3022 & 3218
10.
0.687" dia. Arbor Set:
No. 9708
11.
Tapered Hub Adaptor:
No. 7325
12.
Disc rotor micrometer:
No. 2250
13.
Drum micrometer:
No. 8500
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 289
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
14.
Safety Shield:
No. 9481
C.
Cabinet shall be of heavy gage steel, approx. 30" D x
60" wide with storage shelves below and tool accessory
board mounted at top, rear.
Unit shall have chip
catcher mounter at left end of cabinet and be
completely finished in manufacturers' standard color.
Entire Brake Service Unit shall be fully assembled,
wired and secured to floor at location shown on
Drawings. Provide Parts/Instruction Manual for entire
unit.
D.
Motor of the Brake Service Unit shall be of the totally
enclosed type of the following ratings:
Drum/Disc Lathe 1.0 HP (min.) 208 V, 60 HZ, 3 phase.
Provide stop-start button type magnetic starter mounted
in a convenient position on the unit.
E.
Brake service unit shall be a Model 40E of AMMCO Tools,
Inc., North Chicago, Ill.; Model B-61 of John Bean,
Div. of FMC Corp., Conway, Ark.
F.
Include vehicle wheel/drum asbestos collection unit of
approved type (Clayton) BCE-1500.
12.252
NYSCA
WHEEL BALANCER - MOBILE
A.
Wheel balancer shall be a mobile unit consisting of an
electrically driven wheel spinner and allied unbalance
detection equipment designed for "on the car" wheel
balancing.
B.
Unit shall be of heavy duty construction, with wheel
spinner, adapter rings for 13", 14" and 15" tires,
balancing head, weight tool, mobile cart with handle
and wheel weight storage bin, and all other parts
required for proper operation.
Include selection of
forty-eight (48) wheel weights consisting eight (8)
most frequently used types in six (6) different
weights each. Provide Parts/Instruction manual.
C.
Wheel Balancer shall be equipped with a 4 HP (min.),
208 V, 60 HZ, single phase motor with a twenty (20)
foot three wire (one grounding) heavy duty line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
D.
Wheel balancer shall be Model 504, John Bean Div., FMC
Corp., Conway, ARK.; Mod. 1-E, Hunter Engineering Co.,
Bridgeton, Missouri; Bear Mod. 812, Applied Power
Inc., Rock Island, Ill.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 290
05/14/04
12.253A
DIESEL ENGINE
A.
Diesel engine shall be a small, four cycle, air cooled
unit of approx. 3.5 HP, intended to demonstrate
principles of engine operation.
B.
Engine shall be a precision
following specifications:
made
unit
1.
Displacement:
18.5 cu in
2.
Compression ratio:
17 to 1
3.
Fuel:
No. 2 diesel
(ASTM975/20)
4.
Weight:
120 lbs.
5.
Lubricating Oil Cap.:
6 pints
meeting
the
C.
Engine shall be complete with engine mounted 11 pint
fuel tank, oil bath air cleaner, speed control,
starter and all other parts required for proper
operation. Supply one (1) Instruction/Parts Manual.
D.
Engine shall be securely mounted on bench and connected
to exhaust yoke system as shown on Drawings.
Unit
shall be left completely ready for operation exclusive
of fueling.
E.
Engine shall be a Petter Mod. AC1Z diesel, stock No.
186485.
12.254
WASTE OIL DRAINER - MOBILE
A.
Waste oil drainer shall be a mobile, cabinet type unit
intended for the collection and storage of lubricants
drained
from
automotive
vehicles
during
service
operations.
B.
Drainer shall be supplied complete with internal sump
tank, funnel adjustable to at least 66" in height,
drain valve, level indicator, and steel dolly base
with four (4) casters.
Unit shall be complete and
ready for use.
C.
Waste oil drainer, mobile, shall be Model 8531, Alemite
Co., Chicago, Ill.; Model 615-007, ARO Corp., Bryan,
Ohio.
12.255
SMALL ENGINE DYNAMOMETER
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Small engine dynamometer shall be a mobile, cabinet
mounted, hydraulically operated unit designed to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 291
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
measure the torque-speed output
combustion engines up to 15 HP.
small
internal
B.
Dynamometer shall be a sturdily constructed unit with a
completely enclosed hydraulic system accommodating
horizontal shaft engines up to 0.75" dia. (min.), that
will measure speed in the range 0-6000 RPM (min.), and
torque in the range 0-20 ft.-lbs.(min.)
Unit shall
have
console
with
scales
actuated
by
electric
tachometer and torque electric load cell, both with
recorder
outputs,
precise
hydraulic
load
valve
control, internal battery power supply, integral
engine mounting platform with adjustable height, self
lubrication and all other required parts. Entire unit
shall be mounted on a mobile steel cabinet approx. 20"
x 40" x 27" H in size, with four (4) lockable heavy
duty casters and cabinet door with cylinder lock and
(2) keys.
C.
Include the following accessories in the quantities
indicated
of
a
type
approved
by
supplier
of
dynamometer:
D.
12.256
NYSCA
of
1.
One (1) coupler bushing set
sizes: 0.5", 0.625", and 1".
in
the
following
2.
Five (5) gallons (extra) of Type "A" or No. 1
hydraulic oil.
3.
Two (2) extra batteries.
4.
One (1) Instruction/Parts manual.
5.
Ten (10) Student Activity Manuals with experiment
section.
6.
Five (5) Instructor Guide Manuals.
Small engine dynamometer shall be a Model SE-25 of
Technical Systems, Inc., St. Paul, Minnesota.
AUTO A/C SERVICE UNIT - MOBILE
A.
Auto A/C service unit shall be a completely self
contained cart mounted assembly designed for testing
and servicing of auto air conditioner systems.
B.
Unit
shall
consist
of
an
electrically
heated
refrigerant tank, high capacity vacuum pump, color
coded hoses, all required gauges, fast flow manifold,
valves, fittings, tools and all other components
needed to provide full air conditioner service.
All
equipment shall be mounted on a sturdy, all steel hand
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 292
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
cart equipped with heavy duty, large diameter, nonskid wheels.
C.
Vacuum pump shall be designed for 120 V, 60 HZ, 0.33 HP
(min.) single phase operation. Provide a twelve (12)
ft. three conductor (one grounding) heavy duty power
cord with plug to match receptacle.
Supply two (2)
extra 15 lb. tanks of R-12 refrigerant.
D.
Auto A/C service unit shall be
Model J-24410, KentMoore Corp. Warren, Michigan; Model 2044-ACT, Snap-On
Tools Corp., Kenosha, Wisc.
12.258
NYSCA
CENTRIFUGAL CASTING UNIT
A.
Centrifugal casting unit shall consist of a steel
cabinet with Transite top fitted with casting machine
well, and a jewelry casting outfit, both intended for
the production of jewelry and similar small castings.
B.
Cabinet shall be of sturdy 16 ga. (min.) reinforced
steel construction, with louvered single door with
lock, toe base, green enamel finish and vibration
absorbing mounting. Top shall be 0.50" thick Transite
fitted with stainless steel casting machine guard and
rim. Gas and air hosecocks in lower cabinet shall be
connected to roughing provided.
C.
Jewelry casting outfit shall be supplied with the
following components: Casting machine listed shall be
equipped with heavy duty driving spring and heavily
weighted base.
1.
One (1) Centrifugal Casting Machine
2.
One (1) Mixer
3.
One (1) Vibrator
4.
One (1) Electric Wax Kiln
5.
One (1) Spatula
6.
One (1) Triple Beam Scale
7.
Two (2) Rubber bowls
8.
Seven (7) Hand forged tools
9.
One (1) Book entitled "Lost Wax"
10.
Two (2) Crucible (small)
11.
One (1) Crucible (large)
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 293
05/14/04
D.
E.
12.259
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
12.
Five (5) Lbs. Pattern Wax
13.
One (1) Assortment of Rod Wax
14.
One (1) Wax Shape, Ring
15.
One (1) Debubblizer
16.
Twenty (20) Lbs. Cristobalite investment
17.
Five (5) Lbs. Vel-Mix Stone Compound
18.
One (1) Gas/Air blow pipe w/2 tips (B & G No.
11266) including 10' gum rubber tubing.
Cabinet assembly shall consist of the following
components as supplied by the Coe Laboratories, Inc.,
Chicago, Ill. :
1.
No. 405 Casting
Transite Top
Machine
Cabinet
with
0.50"
2.
No. 459 Toe Base
3.
No. 309S Stainless Steel Casting Machine Guard
4.
No. 309R Stainless Steel Guard Rim
5.
No. 201 Gas and Air Hosecocks.
Jewelry casting outfit shall be Mod. No. 11432 (Stock
No. 309317) as supplied by the Brodhead-Garrett Co.
JEWELER'S VISE - SWIVEL
A.
Jeweler's vise, swivel, shall consist of a 2" precision
jewelers' vise mounted on a ball and socket base with
clamping lever to lock vise in any regular position.
B.
Vise shall be of rugged malleable iron or semi-steel
construction with smooth faced steel jaws of the
replaceable type.
Mounting base shall be of cast
aluminum with cadmium plated steel parts.
C.
Jeweler's vise, swivel, shall be a No. 341 Junior Combination consisting of a No. 20N jeweler's vise and a
No. 343 Pow Rarm work positioner as supplied by the
Wilton Tool Mfg. Co. of Schiller Park, Ill.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 294
05/14/04
12.260
DRILL PRESS - SENSITIVE, PORTABLE
A.
Drill press, sensitive (portable) shall be a small,
precision, foot controlled drill press designed for the
high speed drilling of small holes.
B.
Unit
shall
meet
the
following
specifications.
Quantities listed are minimum acceptable:
1.
Speed Range:
2000-17,000 RPM
2.
Chuck Capacity:
0.156"
3.
Table Feed Distance:
1.625"
4.
Max. Work Height:
4"
Spindle Axis to
Column Distance:
3"
5.
Table Diameter:
3 1/2"
6.
Motor Horsepower:
0.062
7.
Motor Voltage:
120 volts AC/DC 1 ph.
C.
Drill press shall be of rugged construction with direct
drive drilling head and elevating work table, both
easily adjusted in position on vertical support column
and clamped in place by means of large knurled knobs.
Unit shall be supplied complete with foot operated
carbon pile rheostat to control speed over specified
range.
D.
Drill press chuck shall be a geared key type, with
chuck key supplied to be of the safety self-ejecting
type as made by the Miracle Instrument Co.
E.
The unit shall be equipped with a 6 ft. (min.) heavy
duty three wire line cord (one grounding) with plug to
match receptacle.
F.
Drill press shall be a No. 16-011 with rheostat No. 2247 as supplied by the Dumore Co. of Racine, Wisc.
12.261
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL MILLING MACHINE
A
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
Vertical/horizontal milling machine shall be a floor
mounted medium duty, variable speed head, precision
built vertical milling machine with horizontal milling
attachment,
designed
for
general
vertical
and
horizontal milling and related machining operations.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 295
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
Machine shall be of rugged cast iron construction with
heavily ribbed column, ram mounted head with + 45o
tilting adjustment, ball/roller bearing spindle, heavy
knee supported in wide ways, saddle with table having
three full length T slots, adjustable gibs on all
slideways to take up wear, large diameter quill,
infinitely variable speed head with front panel
mounted controls, and all other components required
for full operation.
C.
D.
All elevating, longitudinal and cross feed controls
shall be fitted with large diameter cranks with easily
read dials graduated in .OO1" increments.
Spindle
quill shall be equipped with slow movement handwheel,
rapid motion lever and fine leadscrew quill up and down
power feed. Table shall be equipped with infinitely
variable speed longitudinal power feed with controls
and trip dogs. Horizontal milling attachment shall be
of rugged design with spindle driven right angle power
drive, arbor, full set of arbor spacers and nut, and
outboard arbor support.
Vertical/horizontal milling machine
following minimum specifications:
1.
NYSCA
Table Size:
8" X 32"
Longitudinal Table
Travel:
21"
3.
Cross Table Travel :
8"
4.
Vertical Knee Travel:
15"
5.
Quill Travel:
4"
6.
Work Clearance (Spindle
nose to table top):
17"
7.
Throat Distance:
16"
8.
Number of table to
slots: (.688"Wide):
3
9.
Motor Speed (RPM):
900
10.
Spindle Speed range
(RPM):
275-2250
11.
Spindle Collet taper:
R-8
12.
Quill power feed
(in.Per min.):
0.5-3
shall
meet
the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 296
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
13.
Longitudinal table feed
(in. per min.):
0.75-25
14.
Horiz. milling arbor
dia.:
1.0"
E.
Machine shall be furnished fully adjusted, lubricated,
ready for use, with a full complement of standard
accessories as specified by the manufacturer in his
catalog. Provide full operating Instruction/Parts
manual.
F.
Spindle motor shall be 1 HP (min.) for operation on
208 volts, 3 phase, 60 HZ.
Provide in a frontal
position of the headstock of machine a magnetic type
starter.
G.
Provide one (1) each of the following accessories as
approved by manufacturer of machine:
H.
1.
Power longitudinal table feed.
2.
Power quill feed.
3.
One shot lubrication with grease gun and fittings.
4.
Swivel base
openings.
5.
Cold down bolt and nut kit.
6.
Tray and collet kit, R-8 (11 collets, 0.125" to
0.75" by 16 ths.)
7.
Saddle shear wipers.
8.
Jacobs drill chuck, 0-0.5" cap. with R-8 shank
adaptor and self-ejecting type key as supplies by
the Miracle Instrument Co.
9.
Work light.
10.
Horizontal milling right angle attachment with 1"
arbor complete with all spacers and nut, and
outboard support attachment.
11.
Work light with receptacle mounted on machine in a
convenient position to plug light into.
with
6"
jaw
width
and
5"jaw
Furnish three (3) each of the following size H.S. four
lipped, RH, double end, spiral end mills:
.125"
.187"
NYSCA
vise
.375"
.500"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 297
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
.250"
.312"
I.
.625"
.750"
Furnish three (3) each of the following Type H.S. R.H. milling cutters:
1.
Woodruff key type:
0.375"
0.500"
0.625"
0.750"
1.000"
2.
Dia.
Dia.
Dia.
Dia.
Dia.
0.062"
0.125"
0.125"
0.187"
0.250"
Width
Width
Width
Width
Width
Horizontal milling type
(1" hole):
3.0" Dia. 0.25" Width (side cutting)
3.0" Dia. 0.375" Width (side cutting)
4.0" Dia. 0.50" Width (side rutting)
4.0" Dia. 0.750" Width (side cutting)
J.
12.262
NYSCA
Vertical/horizontal milling machine shall be a Burke/
Millrite as manufactured by Powermatic-Houdaille,
McMinnville, Tenn.
FILM DRYING CABINET
A.
Film drying cabinet shall provide current of warm dry,
filtered air that circulates for film drying 80 rolls
of 36 exposure 35mm film or 20 rolls of 120 film at a
uniform rate in a dust-free environment.
B.
Cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with
grey, chemical resistant epoxy powder paint finish and
measure approximately 23"D. x 21"W. x 78"H. (outside
dimensions). Door shall be reversible and have two (2)
tempered glass viewing windows, piano-hinge, and heavy
duty latch. Unit shall be equipped with replaceable
fiberglass air filters, stainless steel drip pans, two
(2) slide out wire racks for film hangers or film
clips, and adjustable leveling legs. Cabinet interior
shall be illuminated with film safelight. Unit design
shall allow fan/heater module to be easily removed for
field repair.
C.
Cabinet shall have 0-120oF adjustable thermostat, pilot
light, and variable 60 minute timer with two (2)
settings for automatic shutoff or continuous run.
D.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 120
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 13 amps, 5300 BTU/hr. Cabinet shall
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 298
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
be fitted with heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
E.
F.
12.263
1.
One (1) Package of 12 filters CD-80-FIL.
2.
Two (2) Clip Rods (5 clips) CD-5-CR.
3.
Four (4) Clip Rods (10 clips) CD-10-CR.
4.
One (1) Cut Film Hanger (holds four 4" x 5" films)
454-FH.
5.
One (1) Cut Film Hanger (holds single 8" x 10"
film) 810-FH.
Film
Drying
Cabinet
shall
Omega/Arkay, Westminster, MD.
be
Model
CD-80
of
PLASTIC SAW
A.
Plastic saw shall be portable, electrically driven unit
designed for sawing plastic sheet up to 0.25" thick
into nameplate blanks and similar sizes. Plastic saw
shall have 24", non-slip, calibrated table with
vertically mounted motor sliding on glides capable of
full 24" minimum cross cut. Unit shall have integral
dust and chips collection system with reusable dust
bag. Cutter saw blade shall be carbide tipped and
provided with a large horizontal plate cutter guard,
making finger approach to cutter impossible. Supply
one (1) extra carbide cutter saw blade, dust cover,
and all standard equipment.
B.
Motor for saw shall be at least 0.2 horsepower,
designed to operate on single phase, 120 volts, 60 Hz
A.C. Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty three conductor
(one grounding) cord and plug to match receptacle.
C.
Plastic Saw, complete with all of the individual
devices which constitute this unit shall be Model No.
25-600-00 of New Hermes, Inc., Decatur, GA.
12.264
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING TRAINER
A.
NYSCA
The following accessories shall be furnished with the
Film Drying Cabinet (Omega/Arkay model numbers given):
Computer aided drafting trainer shall consist of a
video screen, computer, plotter and other bench
mounted equipment designed to provide instruction in
two
dimensional
computer
aided
drafting
(CAD)
techniques.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 299
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
B.
CAD trainer shall have a minimum of the following
capability/functions as defined in manufacturer's
standard literature:
Points
Lines
Line Edit
Zoom
Line Widen
Crosshatch
Arcs
Arc Edit
Rotate/Scale
Alignment
Copy/Repeat
File Groups
Group Edit
C.
D.
NYSCA
Text
Typewriter
Text Edit
English or Metric
Zoom up 2X
Zoom down 2X
Full Window
Plot
Drawing Default
Deactivate
Diagnostics
Built in Command
Coordinate
Save drawing
Pan
Dwg. Management
Area/Perimeter
Ellipses
Fillet/Chamfers
Fastener Index
Coil Springs
Drill/Groove
Balloons
Mech Dimensions
ANSI Symbols
Grid Lines
CAD trainer shall consist of the following components:
1.
Computer w/software.
2.
Graphic Tablet
3.
Hard disk (CORVUS) drive unit.
4.
Plotter
5.
Base cabinet
6.
Protective cover
CAD system components shall meet the following minimum
specifications:
1.
Computer w/software:
Computer shall be an
Apple IIe with 256K capability, complete with
standard ASC 11 keyboard and 12" amber anti-glare
CRT monitor screen having a 24 line x 80
characters/line display area.
Computer shall be
provided with cascade II RAM cord and all required
McGraw-Hill/Cascade II graphic design CAD software
with interfacing and hook-up cabling.
2.
Graphic tablet: Graphic tablet shall have 11" x
11" digitalizing area designed for a cartesian
coordinate system with a selectable origin. Unit
shall have 7" x 2.75" x 0.5" size controller card,
6" pen w/36" cable and be capable of handling a
data rate up to 120 coordinate pairs per second.
Tablet shall have all required ROM firmware and be
supplied with RS-23 interface cable, and all other
parts necessary for full operation. Unit requires
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 300
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
three low voltage DC power supplies that shall be
provided with unit.
E.
3.
Hard disk (CORVUS) drive unit:
Hard disk unit
shall be of the CORVUS type handling 2 disks with
a total of 4 data surfaces, each having 144
tracks. Disks shall rotate at 4800 RPM and have a
capacity of 5.65 Mb with an average access time of
125 ms.
Unit shall provide permanent memory
programming for full operation of CAD trainer.
Include all required power supplies, interfacing,
cabling and other components.
4.
Floppy disk unit:
Floppy disk drive shall be
designed to handle a single 5.25" disk with one
data surface having 35 tracks.
Disk capacity
shall be one drawing with an access time of 250
msec and transfer rate of 250k sec. Unit shall be
supplied with power supply, and all required
cabling and interfacing.
5.
Plotter:
Plotter shall be a Houston Instruments
Mod DPM 41D which will handle prints up to 22" x
34" in size.
Unit shall be complete with
replaceable pens, X and Y axes drive and all other
components necessary to produce hard copies of CAD
made drawings.
Also include shall be all
necessary cabling and interfacing.
6
Base Cabinet: Base cabinet shall consist of a 30"
x 72" laminated maple top of 1.75" thickness
supported by two steel base cabinets, each 18"w x
21"d x 31"h in size.
Left hand cabinet shall
consist of four drawers. Right hand cabinet shall
be a single door cabinet with interior adjustable
shelf.
All drawers or doors shall be equipped
with locks.
7.
Protective Cover: CAD trainer shall be furnished
with a protective cover approx. 30" x 72" x 20"h
in size, which shall be designed to cover all CAD
system components on base cabinet. Cover shall be
fabricated of 20 gauge stainless steel and have
rubber strip gasket at its lower support edge
where it contacts cabinet bench. Provide a hasp
and padlock at each end to provide security.
Cover shall have handles on each end to facilitate
removal. Provide 3" x 36" (approx.) clearance cut
at rear edge of cover to allow passage of electric
line cords. Submit shop drawings.
Warranties
Supplier of trainer will provide the following:
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 301
05/14/04
F.
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Three day training session at the installation at
time set up by school principal.
2.
Complete
fifteen
(15)
month
warrantee
on
installation including all hardware and software.
3.
Maintenance contract with a three (3) year term,
providing 24 hr. parts and service.
Contract
shall
commence
on
last
day
of
training/demonstration session.
Contract shall
contain provisions for renewal.
Electric requirements
Electric requirements for CAD trainer components range
from 10 to 100 watts, 120 V, 60 HZ, 1 ph.
System
requires four (4) 115 V-15 A duplex receptacle 42"
above floor spaced 4" apart (approx.) on wall behind
cabinet.
G.
H.
12.265
Furnish the following supplies with CAD system of a
type approved by manufacturer:
1.
One hundred fifty (150) floppy disks.
2.
One (1) Installation manual.
3.
One (1) Manufacturers/parts manual.
4.
Ten (10) Student resource manuals.
5.
Five (5) Extra graphic tablet covers.
6.
Twenty (20)
diskettes.
preformatted
5.25"
dia.
drawing
Base cabinet shall be Modular Bench Mod 8407-Stock No.
454843 as supplied by Brodhead-Garrett Co. Computer
Aided Drafting Trainer shall be a Cascade II as
supplied by Gregg/ McGraw-Hill, N.Y.C., N.Y.
COMPUTERIZED ROBOTIC ARM
A.
General
Unit shall be a bench top mounted computer integrated
mechanical arm for the demonstration of industrial
robotic principles. All of the individual devices which
constitute this system shall be as listed below,
together with detailed descriptions which specify the
minimum
equipment
types,
quality
and
quantity,
educational coverage and performance standards to which
any approved equal shall apply.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 302
05/14/04
B.
DESIGN NO. _____
Bench
Size of bench top shall be as indicated on the Drawings
and constructed as specified in Art. 2.03. Bench top
shall be mounted on steel cabinets as specified in Ref.
No. 12.04.
C.
Computer Table
Table shall be 40" wide x 30" deep with 1-3/4" thick
maple top and solid maple base. Top shall have slot to
permit computer cable pass-through. Unit design shall
comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements for disabled accessibility.
D.
Robotic Arm System
System shall be wired and programmed bench mounted
system to demonstrate a computer controlled, fully
automated series of robot arm processes. Equipment
shall be secured to the bench. Each piece of equipment
in the system shall be readily unplugged and released
from the bench for alternative demonstration purposes.
Use of each component individually and in concert shall
be fully documented. Items of equipment shall include
the following:
1.
Robot Arm to be vertical articulated, designed for
use with CNC machines. Unit shall conform to the
following specifications:
a.
NYSCA
Number of axes:
1)
Mechanical
arm:
5 plus gripper
2)
Controller:
7 plus gripper
b.
Simultaneously
controlled axes:
8 (7 plus gripper)
c.
Reach:
24" from column center.
d.
Speed:
Max. 330mm/sec., 10
speeds.
e.
Repeatability:
0.5mm
f.
Actuators:
D.C. servo motors with
closed loop control.
g.
Feedback:
Optical encoders on all
axis.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 303
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
3.
NYSCA
h.
Gripper:
Jaw opening 75mm. Lead
screw/lead nut gripper
mechanism.
i.
Payload:
1 Kg at full reach.
j.
Transmission:
Gears, timing belts and
leadscrew.
k.
Interface:
RS232C
l.
Elbow and wrist axes to be timing-belt driven
with backlash control.
m.
All joints to be ball-bearing supported.
n.
Base axis shall have anti-backlash gearing
system.
Controller shall provide integration of Robot Arm
with all types of CNC machines and sensors in FMS
cells and support the Teach Pendant. Unit shall
conform to the following specifications:
a.
Control axes:
8 (5 arm, 1 gripper, 2
external).
b.
Status indicators:
LED type for each of 8
inputs and 8 outputs.
c.
Interface:
RS232C
d.
Inputs / Outputs:
8 inputs
8 outputs (4 with relays,
4 with open collectors).
e.
EPROM:
f.
Safety:
4K bytes
Unit motors shall stop
automatically should
robot arm strike obstacle
without loss of data from
memory. Design shall
permit user to stop robot
immediately without loss
of data. Encoders and all
"live" components are to
be totally enclosed.
Teach Pendent to be hand held computer, cabled to
controller and providing direct control of robot
arm.
Unit
shall
conform
to
the
following
specifications:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 304
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
5.
NYSCA
a.
Positions in space: 100
b.
Command lines:
250
c.
LCD display:
2 lines, 32 characters.
d.
Thirty (30) multi-function keys in 6 rows.
e.
Color coded keys for Teach, Edit and Mode.
f.
Modes:
Teach
Edit
Run
Home
Save
Load
g.
Interface:
RS232C
Conveyor shall be belt drive linear conveyor
controlled by Controller and compatible with Robot
Arm. Unit shall be capable of stand-alone
operation or computer control for use with Robot
Arm or CNC machine. Computer control of motor
shall permit either continuous or incremented
drive by a number of steps or a defined distance.
Conveyor
shall
conform
to
the
following
specifications:
a.
Belt Speed:
180mm/sec.
b.
Actuator:
D.C. servo motor with optical
encoder.
c.
Eight (8) Location ports for proximity and
optical sensors.
Linear Slide Base shall be gear drive, dual rail
linear
slide
controlled
by
Controller
and
compatible with Robot Arm. Unit shall be capable
of stand-alone operation or computer control for
use with Robot Arm or CNC machine. Computer
control of motor shall permit either continuous or
incremented drive by a number of steps or a
defined distance. Linear Slide Base shall conform
to the following specifications:
a.
Maximum speed:
2.2" per second.
b.
Overall Travel:
39"
c.
Accuracy:
0.002"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 305
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
d.
E.
Driving Unit:
DC servo closed loop
motor with ball
screw/ball nut
combination drive, 5.9:1
gear ratio and optical
encoder to provide
feedback.
6.
Rotary Table is to be a solid platen driven by a
geared down DC-servo stepper motor and controlled
by Controller. Unit shall be capable of standalone operation or computer control for use with a
Robot Arm. Computer control of motor shall permit
continuous or incremented drive by a number of
steps or positions. Direction and resolution are
to be controllable. Rotary Table shall have a
computer controlled speed of 0 - 120 deg./sec.
7.
Computer interface to be compatible with IBM PC,
XT, AT, and similar computers running MS DOS via
RS232 (COM 1 or COM 2). Provide all required
computer leads for connection of computer to
Robotic Arm System equipment, and manuals to
explain the operation of the interfaces and source
codes of the software.
8.
Gripper Accessories for use with Robot Arm shall
include the following (Eshed Robotec model numbers
given):
a.
Pneumatic Syringe Dispenser A-18
b.
Pneumatic Vacuum Gripper (one suction cup) A15
c.
Pneumatic Vacuum Gripper (three suction cup)
A-16
d.
Pneumatic Spray Painting System A-17
e.
Adjustable Control System (regulated) A-13
Electrical
Electric requirements for Robotic Arm System shall be
provided for with three (3) 60 Hz, 1 phase, 120V, 15
amp duplex receptacles approximately 36" above floor.
All required power converters or supplies shall be
included as part of the Robotic Arm System.
F.
Manuals
Supply two (2) copies each of the following as approved
by robot arm manufacturer (Eshed Robotec titles given):
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 306
05/14/04
G.
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Textbook 1 - Fundamentals of Robotics
2.
Textbook/Lab
Experiments
3.
Textbook 4 - Robotic Structure
4.
Workbook 1 - Fundamentals of Robotics
5.
Workbook 3 - Robotics Laboratory Experiments
6.
Workbook 4 - Robotic Structure
7.
Advanced Lab Experiments Booklet 1
8.
Advanced Lab Experiments Booklet 2
9.
Instructor's Manual for Textbooks/Workbooks 1, 3,
4.
Manual
3
-
Robotics
Laboratory
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of robotics, CNC and CAD/CAM devices as well
as providing the device for presentation of the Control
Software material and the interfacing to the Robotic
Arm System. The unit is to be installed, and formatted
to be consistent with the Control Software and hardware
system including compensation for the real time timing
circuit, scale factors required for the memory to be
compatible with the software. The Computer shall
include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 307
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not less
than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz refresh
rates. Card shall be provided with drivers for
Microsoft Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 with not less than 16.7 million colors at a
refresh rate no slower than 72Hz. Monitor shall
have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be
compatible with the Super VGA card and shall not
exceed an electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas
when measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a
latest release MS-DOS Disk Operating System,
latest release Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft
Windows compatible word processing package, and
manuals. Installed and resident on the hard disk
will be the Control Software which shall include
all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts and
processing software to be compatible with the
Control Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Robotic Arm System.
H.
NYSCA
Control Software
1.
Software
package
shall
include
a
robotic
programming environment combined with a graphic
on-line/off-line display of Robotic Arm System
components. Graphic software shall include modules
for
manipulating
a
three
dimensional
representation of the system components, teaching
positions, running simulated programs and tracking
of real time robot activities. Built in post
processor shall allow for execution of programs
with physical Robotic Arm System components.
2.
Software shall be industrial type, compatible with
the Computer, menu driven in three (3) skill
levels, with each level providing step by step
instruction in robotic skills. Include off-line
programming for off-line running and real time
control permitting Robotic Arm System to be shared
by a group of users.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 308
05/14/04
I.
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
Definable
positions
shall
include
XYZ,
cylindrical, spherical, absolute or relative robot
coordinates. Software shall permit users to
emulate various robotic structures, to program in
variables, and to control a complete manufacturing
cell.
Programming
languages
supported
shall
include Basic, C, Assembly and Pascal.
4.
Collision protection shall provide instantaneous
shut down to the motors in case of collision.
5.
On-line tracking capability for graphic display of
actual robot movements, including end of gripper
path display.
6.
Program
execution
module
to
include
three
dimensional graphic simulation of robots for full
off-line simulation of program execution.
7.
Teach module to include three dimensional graphic
simulation of robots for teaching of positions by
moving the robot's image to the desired positions.
8.
Simulation screen to include:
a.
Three dimensional dynamic image of robots,
with display options which include View Point
Selection, Perspective, and Zoom.
b.
Two dimensional image (upper view) of robots
c.
On-line Cartesian/robot coordinates display
d.
Orientation grid.
Protection
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the Robot
Arm consisting of 20 gage stainless steel hood that
completely encloses robot arm in place on bench. Tamper
proof protection shall be provided for the Computer
consisting of a 20 gage stainless steel hood that
completely encloses the computer. Each hood shall have
folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip gasket
where table top contact is made. Hood design shall
include handles to facilitate hood removal and slot for
passage of electric power and computer lines. Provide
each hood with two hasps and padlocks. Submit shop
drawings.
J.
NYSCA
Maintenance
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 309
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Robotic Arm
System and Computer shall be used. Local call-back
emergency service shall be available during regular
working hours and days. Furnish a listing of the
service agent's name, address and local phone number.
K.
Demonstration
Supplier of Computerized Robotic Arm
full demonstration of installation at
by the Chairperson Of Technology
Demonstration shall be performed
representative of the manufacturer.
L.
shall provide a
time agreed upon
of the school.
by a certified
Manufacturers
Robotic Arm System, complete with all of the individual
devices as listed above (except Computer), shall be
Model SCOREBOT - ER III Fully Integrated Robotics
Training System of Eshed Robotec Inc., Princeton, N.J.
12.266
NYSCA
NUMERICAL CONTROL TRAINING CENTER
A.
Numerical control training center shall consist of a
small lathe, computer, and allied equipment intended
to demonstrate the principles of contour numerical
control (CNC) of machine tools.
B.
Numerical control training center shall consist of the
following major components:
1.
Lathe
2.
Video monitor
3.
Computer with keyboard
4.
Controller Cartridge
5.
Software
6.
Power supply
7.
Bench unit
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 310
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
8.
Manuals
9.
Warranties
Training center system components
following minimum specifications:
1.
shall
meet
the
Lathe: Lathe shall be a precision made unit with
a 3.5" swing, 0.2 HP spindle drive motor, 8"
between centers, designed for the turning of
aluminum alloy parts. Unit shall have a 0.75" x
16 threaded spindle nose, 0.40" hole through
headstock, .001" handwheel graduations, and a
continuously variable spindle drive operating over
the 200 to 2000 RPM range. Lathe shall be fitted
with precision D.C. stepper servo motors (1.8
deg/pulse) to control carriage and cross-slide
cutting motion (x and y axes).
Unit shall be
fully equipped with clear plastic guards and
mounted on a portable angled baseboard for ease of
viewing. Provide all necessary cabling.
Include one (1) each of the following accessories
(except if indicated otherwise) of a type approved
by manufacturer of unit:
2.
NYSCA
a.
Three jaw chuck w/key.
b.
Tailstock w/center
c.
Drill chuck w/arbor
d.
Live center
e.
Threaded arbors
f.
Tool bits (Qty 6)
g.
Face plate
h.
Draw bolt
i.
Tool (accessory holding block)
Video Monitor: Video monitor shall be a portable
console mounted 14" EGA monitor.
Unit shall be
capable of displaying 16 lines of 32 characters
each and graphically representing the part program
input showing actual cutting tool path.
Monitor
shall be providing complete with interfacing and
all required connecting cabling.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 311
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
Computer With Keyboard:
Computer shall be a
Packard-Bell 386-SX. Unit shall provide complete
control for the two CNC lathe axes from part
program cartridge en-try or direct keyboard
control. Keyboard shall be of the standard 53 key
type allowing complete programming and editing
capability.Provide all necessary interfacing and
required connecting cabling.
4.
Software: Computer software package shall consist
of proprietary ROM and programmed magnetic tape
cassettes necessary to demonstrate full CNC
operation.
Include twelve (12) extra blank
cassettes.
5.
Power Supply:
Power supply unit shall provide
12 V-DC-3 amp power output, 120 V 6O HZ input to
supply excitation for lathe stepper motors. Unit
shall
be
voltage
regulated
with
overload
protection, pilot lamp, on-off switch, and all
required interconnecting cable.
6.
Bench Unit:
Bench unit shall be 36" x 72" in
size, with upper compartmented cabinet for storage
of
all
system
components.
Bench
shall
be
constructed of solid hard maple framing with
phenols laminate covered work surface.
Upper
cabinet shall be provided with a complete frontal
closure panel with locks to provide security for
system when not in use. Bench shall be equipped
with heavy duty maple side legs with crossbar, and
internal electric power strip with circuit breaker
to provide electrical receptacle to plug in system
components.
7.
Manuals: Supply two (2) copies of the following
publications with trainer:
8.
a.
Users Manual
b.
Computer Instruction Manual.
Warranties:
Provide all trainer components,
including hardware and software, with full parts
and service warrantee for a period of one year
commencing on the last day of demonstration.
Contract shall include terms for renewal.
Supplier of numerical control training center
shall provide a one (1) day demonstration of the
installation at the school at a time agreeable to
the Chairman of Industrial Arts.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 312
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Numerical control training center will require one
120 V-15 A solid electrical junction box on wall 30"
above finished floor or equivalent.
E.
Numerical control training center shall be as supplied
by the Paxton/Patterson Co.
12.267
COMPUTERIZED METAL LATHE
A.
General
Computerized Metal Lathe shall be bench type metal
lathe with 486DX4 computer and CAD/CAM software,
designed to provide instruction in the principles of
computer numerical control (CNC) as applied to the
automatic production of lathe turned pieces using FANUC
control language.
B.
C.
Computerized metal lathe shall consist of the following
major components:
1.
Metal Lathe
2.
Compressor
3.
Computer
Metal Lathe
Metal Lathe shall have key operated emergency stop
button, "power on" indicator, electronic shear key
built into spindle controller and spindle motor
overload protection. Unit shall be equipped with
interlocked sliding safety guard which covers bed and
work area, axis limit switch, and work light.
Connection to computer shall be through RS232C link.
Metal Lathe shall be furnished with a FANUC compatible
facsimile key pad for manual data input. Metal Lathe
shall include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
Swing Over Bed:
10"
2.
Maximum Turning
Diameter:
6-1/4"
3.
Maximum Turned Length
Without Tailstock:
7"
4.
Spindle Bore No. 3MT:
13/16"
5.
Spindle Nose A2 Type:
1-5/8"
6.
Spindle Speeds:
0 - 5000 rpm
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 313
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
7.
Feedrates:
0 - 1200 mm/min.
8.
X Axis Travel:
3-3/8"
9.
Z Axis Travel:
8"
10.
Programmable Six (6) Station Turret:
a.
External Tool Size: 1/2" x 1/2"
b.
Internal tool Size: 1"
c.
Index Time Station/Station:
0.65 Seconds
d.
Index Time Full Revolution:
1.75 Seconds
11.
Bed Hardened and Ground and of Slant Design. High
Precision Anti-Backlash Ballscrews fitted to both
Axis.
12.
Programmable Pneumatic Tailstock
13.
Mechanical Resolution:
0.01 mm (0.0004")
14.
Spindle Motor:
0.75 Kw/1 H.P. A.C.
variable speed
15.
Axes Stepper Motors:
200 Steps/Rev D.C.
16.
Electrical:
60 Hz - 1 phase - 110
Volts, 16 amp.
Unit shall be equipped with a six foot (minimum)
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
17.
D.
Metal Lathe shall include all required computer
interface cards and connecting cables which shall
be fully compatible with the Computer.
Machine Tool Package
The Metal Lathe shall be provided with the following
machine tools as supplied by the lathe manufacturer and
fully compatible with the lathe (Denford model numbers
given):
NYSCA
1.
One (1) LH Tool Holder - 5/80o.
2.
One (1) RH Tool Holder - 5/800.
3.
Ten (10) HX Grade Carbide Inserts - 5o.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 314
05/14/04
E.
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
One (1) RH Tool Holder - 3/55o.
5.
One (1) LH Tool Holder - 3/55o.
6.
Ten (10) Grade HX Carbide Inserts - 3o.
7.
One (1) RH Boring Bar .50 Min.
8.
One (1) RH Boring Bar .625 Min.
9.
Ten (10) HX Grade Carbide Inserts.
10.
One (1) RH O.D. Threading Tool Holder.
11.
Ten (10) K20 Grade Carbide
Threading Tool Holder.
12.
One (1) RH I.D. Threading Tool Holder.
13.
Ten (10) K20 Grade Carbide
Threading Tool Holder.
14.
One (1) Cut-Off Tool Holder
15.
Ten (10) Carbide Inserts for Cut-Off Tool Holder.
16.
One (1) No. 2MT/J33 Taper.
17.
One (1) J33 Keyed Chuck.
18.
One (1) Center Drill Bit.
19.
One (1) 3" Manual 3 Jaw Self Centering Chuck.
20.
Machinable wax cylinders, three (3) each, in the
following sizes: 2"D x 12"L, 3"D x 12"L.
Inserts
Inserts
for
O.D.
for
I.D.
Air Compressor
Provide a UL listed air compressor to provide the
required
power
for
the
programmable
pneumatic
tailstock. Air compressor shall be compatible with the
Metal Lathe. Unit shall include regulator, tank
pressure gage, outlet pressure gage, 1/4" x 25' hose
and fittings. Compressor shall comply with the
following specifications:
NYSCA
1.
One (1) HP oiless.
2.
115 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz thermal protected
induction motor.
3.
4-1/2 gallon tank, pancake type ASME certified.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 315
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
2.5 CFM displacement at 100 psi.
Air Compressor shall be equipped with a six foot
(minimum) heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
F.
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) devices
as well as providing the device for presentation of the
Control Software material and the interfacing to the
Metal Lathe. The unit is to be installed, and formatted
to be consistent with the Control Software and hardware
system including compensation for the real time timing
circuit, scale factors required for the memory to be
compatible with the software. The Computer shall
include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not less
than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz refresh
rates. Card shall be provided with drivers for
Microsoft Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 with not less than 16.7 million colors at a
refresh rate no slower than 72Hz. Monitor shall
have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be
compatible with the Super VGA card and shall not
exceed an electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 316
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
when measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a
latest release MS-DOS Disk Operating System,
latest release Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft
Windows compatible word processing package, plus
Lathe Cam Designer Parametric CAM software and
manuals. Installed and resident on the hard disk
will be the Control Software which shall include
all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts and
processing software to be compatible with the
Control Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Metal Lathe.
G.
Control Software
Unit shall permit the full computer programming and
computer disk storage of various turned metal parts
involving all standard machining operations which
include the following:
NYSCA
1.
Simultaneously controlled axes X and Y.
2.
Full circular interpolation.
3.
Combined use of absolute and incremental in same
block.
4.
Internal/External screwcutting.
5.
Inch or Metric programming.
6.
Diameter or radius programming.
7.
Subprogram with repeat facility/program call.
8.
Canned turning cycles.
9.
Roughing and finishing cycles.
10.
Tool offsets for 10 tools.
11.
Dry run facility.
12.
Single block and auto execution.
13.
Chamfer/corner rounding.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 317
05/14/04
H.
DESIGN NO. _____
14.
Tool nose radius compensation.
15.
Datum shift.
16.
Comprehensive toolpath graphics including 3D
simulation, tool path plot, and machining process
simulation and tool motion with accurate tool
geometry representation.
17.
Zoomed views.
18.
Edit and simulate modes.
19.
Directory listing and program merging facility.
20.
Programmable spindle speeds of 0 to 5000 r.p.m.
Spindle speed override 0-150%.
21.
Programs stored on floppy or hard drive.
22.
Full G and M code listings with help instructions
which are context sensitive.
23.
Context sensitive help.
24.
Comprehensive error messages.
25.
Cycle time display. Cycle start/feed hold.
26.
Overtravel limits and emergency stop.
27.
Dwell facility.
28.
Tool wear compensation.
29.
Software shall permit integration into Local Area
Networks.
Protection
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the Metal
Lathe and Computer consisting of 20 gage stainless
steel hoods that completely enclose mill and computer.
Hoods shall have folded lip at bottom edge with rubber
strip gasket where bench top contact is made. Provide
each hood with two hasps and padlocks. Submit shop
drawings.
I.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including
software with full maintenance parts and
period of one (1) year with provision
commencing on the date of demonstration.
NYSCA
hardware and
service for a
for renewal,
Service shall
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 318
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Metal Lathe and
Computer shall be used. Local call-back emergency
service shall be available during regular working hours
and days. Furnish a listing of the service agent's
name, address and local phone number.
J.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
computerized lathe installation at time agreed upon by
the
Chairperson
Of
Technology
of
the
school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
K.
Manufacturers
Metal Lathe complete with all of the individual devices
which constitute this unit (except Computer) shall be
Model Mirac P.C. with Turret and Programmable Pneumatic
Tailstock of Denford Machine Tools, Medina, Ohio.
12.268
COMPUTERIZED PLASTICS ENGRAVER
A.
General
Computerized plastics engraver shall consist of a
programmable computer with keyboard combined with an
engraving machine designed to produce single pieces or
volume production of plastic name plates, signs and
similar items.
Unit shall be portable, suitable for
table top use.
B.
Engraver
Engraver with electronically controlled spindle and
workholding vise shall conform to the following
specifications:
NYSCA
1.
Engraving Area in
One Pass:
2.
Maximum Accessibility:
X= Unlimited
Y= 8"
1/2" Maximum Z Stroke
3.
Z Clearance with Vise:
5-1/4"
4.
Opening of Self
8" x 10"
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 319
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
Centering Vise:
8"
5.
Linear Engraving Speed:
1"/sec.
6.
Origin Control:
Self-setting origin via
limit switches.
7.
Spindle Diameter:
11/64"
8.
Rotating Speed:
10,000 - 12,000 RPM.
9.
Motor:
A.C. Induction Type, 90
Watt.
Computer And Software
Unit shall permit full programming of a desired
engraving layout to be composed on a video screen and
used immediately, or stored in a memory unit to send
command signals to the cutting tool spindle control
axes to produce the desired engraving. Controller unit
shall be an Intel 16 bit microprocessor with a multibus CPU. Software shall be of the user friendly type
with easy data entry and text editing capabilities.
Standard program shall include auto, manual and visual
layout
modes
with
character
management
(slant,
sub/super
script,
underline,
etc.)
columnizing,
intercharacter spacing, kerning, and badge processing.
Unit to have full override safeties on all axes of
motion. Furnish complete instruction/maintenance/parts
manuals. Computer and software shall conform to the
following specifications:
D.
NYSCA
1.
Video:
12" Monochrome Monitor.
Electronic radiation shall not
exceed 250 nanoteslas when
measured at a distance of 20
inches from the monitor.
2.
Job Storage:
Cartridge
3.
Job Capacity:
50 Lines by 80 Characters Per
Job.
4.
Fonts On Line:
6
5.
Standard Fonts:
Single Line Block included in
engraving program.
6.
Keyboard:
Detachable, 84 keys, PC style.
Electrical
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 320
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Motor for engraver shall be at least 0.1 horsepower,
designed to operate on single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz
A.C. Both engraver and computer unit shall operate from
a 120V-60HZ-15A duplex receptacle. Provide six (6) ft.
heavy duty three conductor (one grounding) cords and
plugs to match receptacle.
E.
Accessories
Furnish
with
the
engraver
the
following
extra
accessories as furnished by the manufacturer of
engraver (New Hermes model number where noted):
F.
1.
Three (3) extra carbide cutters w/wrench
2.
Three (3) extra depth regulator noses
3.
Four (4) extra lettering fonts as selected by the
Chairman of Industrial Arts of the school.
4.
One
(1)
plastic
nameplate
approximately 112 pieces.
5.
One (1) plastic dust cover for computer.
6.
One (1) Job Save Memory No. 22-900-00
7.
One (1) Chip removal system with pump No. 22-47500.
8.
One (1) Vacuum Table for holding flat pieces when
engraving.
assortment
of
Protection
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the
engraver and computer consisting of 20 gage stainless
steel hoods that completely enclose engraver and
computer. Hoods shall have folded lip at bottom edge
with rubber strip gasket where bench top contact is
made. Provide each hood with 1.5" high slot at rear to
provide for passage of line cords, two hasps and
padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
G.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 321
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer of the Computerized
Plastics Engraver shall be used. Local call-back
emergency service shall be available during regular
working hours and days. Furnish a listing of the
service agent's name, address and local phone number.
H.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Computerized Plastics Engraver installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school. Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
I.
Manufacturers
Computerized Plastics Engraver complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this unit shall be
Model Vanguard 3000 of New Hermes, Inc., Decatur, GA.
12.270A
A.
Appliance lift truck "A" shall be a manually propelled,
double wheeled vehicle of 750 lbs. capacity, designed
for the lifting and transporting of kitchen and
similar type appliances.
B.
Lift truck shall have a sturdy 17" wide x 60" high
padded steel frame with 5" x 24" angle nose plate and
6" dia. x 2" wide rubber tired wheels with self
lubricating bearings.
Unit shall be equipped with
roller bearing stair crawling mechanism, two piece
middle buckling safety belt with rachet tightener and
automatic belt recoil.
Truck shall be finished in
rust resisting enamel.
C.
Appliance lift truck "A" shall be a Mod. SRT supplied
by the Standard Handling Devices Corp., Medford, Mass.
12.270B
NYSCA
APPLIANCE LIFT TRUCK "A"
APPLIANCE LIFT TRUCK "B"
A.
Appliance lift truck "B" shall be a manually propelled,
vehicle of 700 lbs. capacity, with two large double
wheels designed for the lifting and transporting of
kitchen and similar type appliances.
B.
Lift truck shall have a sturdy 27" wide x 54" high
padded steel frame with 5" x 25" angle nose plate and
12 dia. x 3.5" wide pneumatic tired wheels with ball
bearings axles.
Unit shall be equipped with 2" wide
web safety strap 12' long, and stair runners.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 322
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
C.
Appliance lift truck "B" shall be a Mod. L-1 supplied
by the Standard Handling Devices Corp., Medford, Mass.
12.271
6
COMPUTERIZED PHOTO-TYPESETTING SYSTEM
A.
General
Computerized Photo-typesetting System shall consist of
several desk/console components of laser/electronic
equipment and related software designed for full
computerized composition of printed pages, including
graphic insertions, copy storage and all standard
imaging and typesetting operations, leading to the
production of high resolution master copies ready for
publication. All of the individual devices and software
which constitute this system shall be as listed below,
together with detailed descriptions which specify the
minimum
equipment
types,
quality
and
quantity,
educational coverage and performance standards to which
any approved equal shall apply.
B.
Components
Computerized Photo-typesetting System shall be fully
compatible with Apple Macintosh 8100/80AV and Apple
Macintosh 7100/66AV computer systems. System shall be
complete and ready for full operation and include art
scanners, on line font selector with size control,
Postscript software raster image processor, laser
imagesetter unit and output photo-processor set-up for
master
copies.
Include
all
necessary
connection
cabling, bases where required, and chemicals used in
output processor. All necessary software shall be
furnished with this equipment. System shall consist of
the following subcomponents:
C.
1.
PostScript Laser Imagesetter
2.
PostScript Software RIP
3.
Scanner
4.
Scanner Software
5.
Photo-typesetting Processor
PostScript Laser Imagesetter
Imagesetter shall produce high-quality PostScript color
separations using solid-state imaging technology with
20 micron laser spot size. Unit shall include the
following features:
1.
NYSCA
Fonts:
System to include 35
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 323
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Postscript fonts on
line. Point sizes 4
- 999 in half point
- increments.
2.
Page Size:
78 pica maximum page
width. (13.3
inches). 162 pica
maximum page depth
expandable to 54".
3.
Resolution:
1200 and 2400 dpi
(user-selectable)
for text and
graphics.
4.
Imaging Speed:
99.75 square inches
per minute at 1200
dpi resolution.
49.875 square inches
per minute at 2400
dpi resolution.
D.
5.
Shades and tints:
0% - 100%.
6.
Output Media:
Infrared-sensitive.
7.
Repeatability (over 18"):
+1 mil typical. +2
mil maximum.
8.
Take-Up Cassette Capacity:
Up to 100 feet (80
feet max. for film).
9.
Electrical:
60 Hz - 1 phase 115
volts, 8 amp.
PostScript Software RIP
PostScript Software RIP shall serve as PostScript
interpreter for PostScript Laser Imagesetter. Software
shall be based on Adobe Configurable PostScript
Software Interpreter (CPSI). PostScript Software RIP
shall include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
Page Description Language:
Adobe CPSI
PostScript Level 1
(upgradeable to
level 2).
2.
Fonts:
35 PostScript fonts
included.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 324
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
E.
Platform Requirements:
Compatible with
Macintosh 8100/80AV
and Macintosh
7100/66AV systems.
Scanner
Unit shall be a high speed flatbed color CCD scanner,
capable of scanning three (3) colors in one pass.
Scanner shall have automatic control system which
adjusts its density range to match original's density
range. Unit shall be provided with intelligent software
drivers for application programs. Software shall permit
operator to optimize color and output quality. Scanner
shall
be
multifunctional
unit
imaging
line-art,
halftone, continuous tone and color images for both
reflective and transmissive originals. Unit shall
include the following features:
1.
Resolutions:
600 Horizontal x 1200 Vertical dpi,
optical.
1200 Horizontal x 1200 Vertical dpi
through software interpolation.
2.
Sample Depth:
10 bit precision for 1024 grey
levels.
30 bit precision for one (1)
billion colors.
3.
Scanning Area: Minimum - one (1) line, two (2)
pixels in greyscale and color, 16
pixels in line-art.
Maximum - 8" x 11.8" scanning area.
F.
4.
Image Memory:
Two (2) Mbyte.
5.
Interface:
SCSI-2 interface.
6.
Electrical:
60 Hz - 1 phase 115 volts, 40 watts
max.
Scanner Software
Scanner Software shall provide automatic density
control function which determines the correct exposure
parameters
during
a
prescan.
Software
shall
automatically calculate correct scanning resolution
allowing for output screen ruling and scaling factor.
White balance control shall adjust for photographic
paper colorcasts. Color and greymap controls shall
allow for screen color correction, with electronic
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 325
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
densitometer working in RGB or CMY modes to measure
changes instantly on the monitor. Software shall
provide color calibration for complete color control
when outputting on PostScript printers and enable the
user to compensate for dot gain and press gain on the
PostScript Laser Imagesetter. It shall also allow fine
tuning of the tone and grey balance of color
separations.
Scanner
Software
shall
include
the
following features:
G.
1.
Resolution:
Up to 2400 dpi.
2.
Scan Modes:
Line-art, halftone,
greyscale, color, for
reflective and
transmissive originals.
3.
Toolbox:
B/W
and
color
paint
tools. Histogram (B/W and
color).
Noise
removal
(B/W).
Automatic
calculation of required
scan resolution. Sharpen
and
descreen
filter.
Greymap
and
colormap
control.
Electronic
densitometer in RGB and
CMY.
4.
Platform Requirements:
Compatible with Macintosh
8100/80AV and Macintosh
7100/66AV systems.
Photo-typesetting Processor with Table Unit
Photo-typesetting Processor shall be a table mounted
four (4) bath processor with automatic replenishment
system. Unit shall be equipped with a built in heater
and adjustable dryer. Controls shall include a manual
replenishment switch for pumping out spent chemistry
and then adding fresh chemistry. Photo-typesetting
Processor shall include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
Three (3) baths:
developer, fixer and
wash.
2.
Process ZGS, ZHP, ZRC and Laser Imagesetter films.
3.
Processing Speed:
4.
Temperature controls.
5" to 25" per
minute, eight (8)
preset processing
speeds.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 326
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
5.
Daylight loading.
6.
Built-in dryer.
7.
Handle 13.3" cassettes.
8.
Material Feed Requirements:
Width: 14" max.
Length: 7" min.
9.
H.
Electrical:
60 Hz 1 phase 120
volts, 12 amps.
Supplies
Include the following additional supplies with the
system in the quantities indicated of a type approved
by system manufacturer:
I.
1.
Six (6) rolls, of photo-laser paper, each 150 ft.
long 13.3" wide.
2.
Five (5) 2.5 litre containers of developer.
3.
Five (5) 2.5 litre containers of fixer.
4.
Ten (10) MF2HD, 3.5" floppy disks.
5.
Five (5) sets of full instruction manuals.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer of the Computerized
Photo-typesetting System shall be used. Local call-back
emergency service shall be available during regular
working hours and days. Furnish a listing of the
service agent's name, address and local phone number.
J.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Computerized Photo-typesetting System installation at
time agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 327
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
the school. Demonstration shall be performed
certified representative of the manufacturer.
K.
by
a
Manufacturers
Computerized Photo-typesetting System complete with all
of the individual devices which constitute this system
shall be:
ProSet 9550 PostScript Laser Imagesetter and cabinet
base of AGFA Compugraphic Division, Wilmington, MA.
9000SR PostScript Software RIP of AGFA Compugraphic
Division, Wilmington, MA.
ARCUS
Scanner
Wilmington, MA.
of
AGFA
Compugraphic
Division,
MC View Color Scanner Software of AGFA Compugraphic
Division, Wilmington, MA.
3700VS Phototypesetting Processor and Table of AGFA
Compugraphic Division, Wilmington, MA.
AGFA Local Representative: Mr. Glen Sturn, Agfa Corp.,
29 Pine Gate, East Patchogue, N.Y. 11772, Telephone No.
(516)758-4209.
12.272
NYSCA
CAMERA - MULTIPURPOSE
A.
Multipurpose camera shall be a portable, table top unit
using instant and standard films, designed for
copying, enlarging or other photographic applications.
B.
Camera shall be a professional quality unit mounted on
a 66" (min) high rotating column with millimeter
height
graduations
and
large
diameter
height
adjustment knob with lock. Column shall be mounted on
rear of a 23" W x 29" D (min.) white phenolic surfaced
baseboard
that
houses
all
electric
circuitry,
switches, and receptacles.
Fully adjustable lighting
assemblies containing two (2) 150 watt bulbs shall be
mounted on each side of baseboard. Camera head shall
be fully rotatable through 360o and be capable of being
locked in any position.
C.
Camera unit shall be equipped with a 135 mm f/4.5
Tessar type lens, eye level reflex viewer with hood,
sliding head with ground glass, self cocking shutter
with speeds from 1/125th of a second to one second
with "B" time exposure and "X" flash synchronization,
and all other parts required for proper operation.
Provide Instruction/Parts Manual.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 328
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
D.
Camera shall be supplied with six (6) ft. long three
conductor
(one grounding) heavy duty line cord
designed for 120 V, 60 HZ, 1 ph, 600 watt operation.
E.
Supply the following accessories and supplies with
camera of a type approved by manufacturer of unit:
(Polaroid Nos. given).
F.
12.273
One (1) Dust Cover
2.
One (1) Polaroid 31/4" x 41/4" film holder (No. 4446)
3.
One (1) Polaroid 4" x 5" film holder (No. 545).
4.
One (1) Half-Tone
including:
Accessory
Kit
(No.
a.
One (1) Variable aperture attachment.
b.
One (1) Exposure/Instruction guide
c.
One (1) Optical screen, 65 liner/in.
d.
One (1) Optical screen, 80 liner/in.
e.
One (1) Optical screen, 100 liner/in.
5.
One (1) Universal Camera Mount (No. 44-85)
6.
One (1) box of 6 films type 51
7.
One (1) box of 6 films type 52
8.
One (1) box of 6 films type 55P/N
44-89)
Multipurpose Camera shall be a Mod. MP-4XLR as
manufactured by the Polaroid Corp., Cambridge, Mass.
COMPUTERIZED WOOD LATHE
A.
NYSCA
1.
General
1.
Computerized wood lathe shall consist of a wood
turning lathe controlled by a computer, designed
to provide instruction in the principles of
computer numerical control (CNC) as applied to the
automatic production of turned wood pieces.
2.
System shall permit the full computer programming
and magnetic disc storage of complex circular
wooden shapes such as table legs or similar forms.
Programmed discs made up may be used to transmit
command signals to stepper drive motors of the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 329
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
controller unit to produce cutter motion on two
axes
to
produce
fully
finished
parts
automatically.
B.
C.
Computerized Wood Lathe shall consist of the following
major components:
1.
Wood Lathe
2.
Computer Unit
3.
Dust Vacuum System
Wood Lathe
1.
NYSCA
Wood lathe shall be equipped with cabinet base and
shall comply with the following specifications:
a.
Swing over controller
carriage:
6"
b.
Swing over bed:
12"
c.
Distance between
centers:
36"
d.
Spindle:
1" 8RH
e.
Spindle speeds:
900, 1750, 3200 RPM
f.
Tailstock taper:
No. 2 Morse
2.
Wood lathe shall be equipped with total enclosing
1/4" clear Lexan safety shield.
3.
Computerized wood lathe shall be provided with
full override safety protection and emergency shut
off switch. Provide complete instructions/parts
manuals.
4.
Entire unit shall be mounted on a 20"W. x 62"L. x
36"H. plastic laminate top. Top shall be supported
by cabinet units equipped with locks.
5.
Lathe spindle motor shall be 1/2 horsepower, 20
amp, designed to operate on single phase, 115
volts, 60 Hz A.C. Power controls shall be
frontally
mounted.
Provide
in
a
convenient
location on the Wood Lathe a magnetic starter
completely wired to the lathe with approved
materials. Unit shall be equipped with a six foot
(minimum) three wire (one grounding) line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 330
05/14/04
D.
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
Wood Lathe shall include all required computer
interface cards and connecting cables which shall
be fully compatible with the Computer Unit.
7.
Tamper-proof protection shall be provided for Wood
Lathe unit. This may consist of equipping the
clear Lexan cover with two hasps and padlocks.
Submit shop drawings.
8.
Controller
shall
specifications:
comply
with
the
following
a.
Maximum X travel:
6"
b.
Maximum Z travel:
36"
c.
Ram travel:
2-3/4"
d.
Stepper motors:
2
e.
Stepper motor torque:
85 oz.-in.
f.
Axis drive:
Acme thread lead
screw
g.
Maximum feed rate:
14 IPM
Computer Unit
1.
This system shall provide training in the
concepts, and operation of Computer Numerical
Control (CNC) devices as well as providing the
device for presentation of the Control Software
material and the interfacing to the Wood Lathe.
The unit is to be installed, and formatted to be
consistent with the Control Software and hardware
system including compensation for the real time
timing circuit, scale factors required for the
memory to be compatible with the software. The
Computer shall include the following features:
a.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
b.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory,
expandable to 128MB of on board memory.
c.
Two serial com ports and one parallel printer
port.
d.
Disk Drives:
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 331
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
e.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and
Super VGA resolutions of up to and including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not
less than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz
refresh rates. Card shall be provided with
drivers for Microsoft Windows and Autodesk
AutoCad.
f.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports
non-interlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to
1024 by 768 with not less than 16.7 million
colors at a refresh rate no slower than 72Hz.
Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or
less. Unit shall be compatible with the Super
VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at
a distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
g.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or
mouse.
h.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a
latest release MS-DOS Disk Operating System,
latest release Microsoft Windows, and a
Microsoft Windows compatible word processing
package, and manuals. Installed and resident
on the hard disk will be the Control Software
which shall include all necessary video
drivers,
graphic
fonts
and
processing
software to be compatible with the Control
Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Wood Lathe.
2.
NYSCA
Computer table shall be 40" wide x 30" deep with
1-3/4" thick maple top and solid maple base. Top
shall have slot to permit computer cable passthrough. Unit design shall comply with the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements
for
disabled
accessibility.
Tamper
proof
protection shall be provided for the Computer
consisting of a 20 gage stainless steel hood that
completely encloses the computer. Hood shall have
folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip gasket
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 332
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
where table top contact is made. Provide hood with
two hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
E.
Dust Vacuum System
Dust vacuum system shall be fully contained dust
collection system and shall capture wood dust/chips
generated by turning operation. System shall be
completely contained within the Wood Lathe cabinet
base.
F.
Control Software
Unit shall permit the full computer programming and
computer disk storage of various turned wood parts
involving all standard machining operations which
include the following:
G.
1.
Simultaneously controlled axes X and Y.
2.
Subprogram with repeat facility/program call.
3.
Canned turning cycles.
4.
Roughing and finishing cycles.
5.
Dry run facility.
6.
Zoomed views.
7.
Edit and simulate modes.
8.
Directory listing and program merging facility.
9.
Programmable spindle speeds of 900, 1750 and 3200
r.p.m.
10.
Programs stored on floppy or hard drive.
11.
Automatic Comprehensive error messages.
12.
Overtravel limits and emergency stop.
Accessories
The Wood Lathe shall be provided with the following
machine
accessories
as
supplied
by
the
lathe
manufacturer and fully compatible with the lathe
(Phoenix model designations given):
NYSCA
1.
Two (2) Cobalt Cutting Tools.
2.
One (1) Cobalt Replacement Tool Holder.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 333
05/14/04
H.
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
One (1) Quick Change Tool Post.
4.
One (1) RH Tool.
5.
One (1) LH Tool.
6.
One (1) Universal Tool.
7.
One (1) Parting Tool.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Wood Lathe and
Computer shall be used. Local call-back emergency
service shall be available during regular working hours
and days. Furnish a listing of the service agent's
name, address and local phone number.
I.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
computerized lathe installation at time agreed upon by
the
Chairperson
Of
Technology
of
the
school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
J.
Manufacturers
Wood
Lathe
complete
with
User
Manual/Courseware
Specifications and all of the individual devices which
constitute this unit (except Computer Unit) shall be
Model HQL-EZ of Phoenix, Stock No. 65-3190 as supplied
by Paxton/Patterson.
Control Software shall be EZ-CAD CAD/CAM of Phoenix,
Stock No. 65-3620 as supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
12.275
PLASTIC EDGE BEVELER
A.
NYSCA
Plastic edge beveler shall be a portable, direct motor
driven machine designed to bevel the edges of plastic
nameplate blanks and similar plastic sheet up to at
least 1/4" thickness. Plastic edge beveler shall have
a 17" x 3-3/4" (minimum) work table, built on a 15o
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 334
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
incline with tee square sliding in guide groove to
feed work across cutter. Machine shall have vertically
mounted motor with adjustable base and removable
carbide cutter head with micrometer depth adjustment
and cutter guard.
Provide unit with corner rounding
attachment, open end wrench, allen wrench, knurled
dowel pin and all other standard equipment. Unit shall
be provided with carrying case.
B.
Motor for engraver shall be at least 0.2 horsepower,
designed to operate on single phase, 120 Volts, 60 Hz
A.C. Provide six (6) ft. heavy duty three conductor
(one grounding) cord and plug to match receptacle.
C.
Furnish
with
the
beveler,
the
following
extra
accessories as furnished by the manufacturer of
beveler (New Hermes model number where noted):
D.
12.276
1.
One (1) bevel and corner rounding cutter 30o No.
43-510-000 (1/4" bevel).
2.
One (1) bevel and corner rounding cutter 45o No.
40-511-000 (1/8" bevel).
3.
One (1) bevel and corner rounding cutter 45o No.
43-512-250 (1/4" bevel).
4.
One (1) flat border cutter No. 43-512-000.
Plastic Edge Beveler, complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this unit shall be
Model No. B-6 Beveler of New Hermes, Inc., Decatur,
GA.
INSTRUCTOR STATION, MOBILE
A.
General
Unit
shall
be
a
complete
mobile
instructor
demonstration
and
testing
station.
All
of
the
individual devices which constitute this training
system shall be as listed below, together with detailed
descriptions which specify the minimum equipment types,
quality
and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance standards to which any approved equal shall
apply.
B.
Bench
Bench shall be a mobile full base bench composed of
maple top, four base cabinets, and three door
instrument console as follows:
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 335
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
2.
Base cabinet assembly shall be composed of two (2)
each One drawer One door cabinets, and two (2)
each One door cabinets. Construction shall be all
wood, glue and metal fastened with high pressure
laminate cover on all exposed surfaces and edges.
Drawers to be mounted on extension slides and to
be set 5" down from top of cabinet for full and
easy access when open, without interference from
table top overhang in front.
Drawer and Door
Cabinet shall have locks and shall be masterkeyed.
Cabinets shall have recessed kick panel at the
bottom, 2" D x 4" H. Table Top height is to be 363/4", compatible with sitting or standing. Overall
dimensions of each cabinet shall be 19" W x 25
1/2" D x 35" H. Base cabinet assembly shall be
mounted on four (4) non-marking, rubber tired,
swivel plate casters with grease fittings. Both
casters on operator's side shall be provided with
foot operated locks. Submit shop drawings.
3.
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match base cabinets. Mounting rails for trainers
are to have brass ferrules for machine screw
mounting. Service loops shall be provided for easy
servicing with power connected; all items shall be
removable from front. Security fasteners and
dividers shall be incorporated in the console to
secure the CAI computer, monitor and keyboard. The
keyboard shall be permanently mounted and all
items are to be locked in a covered and enclosed
console. The instrument console shall provide
secure storage for the Electricity - Electronics
Training System, Digital Logic and Applications
Training System, and CAI Computer System. Console
shall have three hinged plexiglass doors, each
with a masterkeyed lock. Design shall permit doors
to be individually opened to allow individual use
of electronics or digital trainers or CAI computer
or all items at the same time. Doors are not to be
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 336
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
removable from console during equipment operation.
Submit shop drawings.
4.
C.
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the training systems. It shall include
the outlet strips and the junction boxes and
master power switches, separate lines for the
computer with spike suppression and fans for
movement of air for cooling the CAI Computer
System. The package shall also include accessory
power outlets within the console as well as
externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Electricity - Electronics Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
electricity
and
electronics
circuit
and
systems
educational trainer and program. All components used
for all experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
NYSCA
1.
Resistor Bank consisting of 5% resistors to be
standard values ranging from 2.5 ohms to 4.7
Megohms.
2.
Inductor Bank with Inductors suitable for radio
tuned circuits, filters and chokes. Two inductors
are to have mutual coupling. Inductor D.C. current
capability shall exceed the maximum current
available during experimentation for burn-out
protection. R.F. Transformer Inductor is to be
selected for use in the A.M. frequency band to be
slug-tuned with tapped coil and feedback winding.
R.F. Transformer coil winding to be capable of
carrying all current available during experiments.
3.
Potentiometer Bank ranging from 1K to 1 Megohm,
one-turn
style
with
position
markings
and
indicator knobs. To be hermetically sealed, 1/2
watt, with MIL spec reliability.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 337
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
Transistor
and
Solid-State
Component
Bank;
Germanium and Silicon, NPN and PNP transistors,
MOSFET, Field Effect
Transistor, Unijunction
Transistor,
Silicon
Controlled
Rectifiers,
Germanium and Silicon Diodes, Zener, Varactor,
Diac, and Triac.
5.
Five switches including one Momentary and four
toggle types. Four incandescent lamps and one LED
are mounted on the panel.
6.
Built-in Function Generator on the panel with
Sine, Square and Triangle waveforms outputs,
Outputs to be simultaneously available. Sine
amplitude to be adjustable and to include high-low
ranges.
The frequency is to be calibrated and
continuously variable form 1 Hz to 100KHz in five
ranges and is also voltage controllable; VCO. The
voltage controllable range is to extend to 150kHz.
7.
Built-in Operational Amplifier with differential
inputs and high gain, internally adjusted offset
null, and with differential input and output pins
to be available.
8.
Built-in Power Amplifier with complementary class
B output is mounted on the panel with input and
output jacks.
9.
Built-in Power Supplies with Six Positive and
Negative fixed and variable DC power sources as
well as an AC power source is to be provided on
the panel.
Supplies are to be regulated and
current limited and burn-out protected.
10.
Built-in Analog Multimeter on the panel with 50
microampere sensitivity and with inputs for 50
microamps; shunts for 5ma, 10ma, 50ma, 100ma, and
0.5 volts, 5 volts, 10 volts, and 50 volt scales.
Meter movement is fully protected with diodes to
prevent damage to meter movement from incorrect
connection to any trainer voltages. AC voltmeter
inputs for AC power experiments and high impedance
input or AC range filter experiments. The analog
voltmeter response is to be flat to the full 150
kHz range and beyond. The meter must be analog to
demonstrate analog operation of voltage and
current and resistance meters.
11.
Integrated Circuit Socket for dual-in-line 14 or
16 pin ICs, 7 Pin Miniature Tube Socket, and 22
pin Printed Circuit Card Socket for system
expansion or PC Cards for Prototype projects and
repair experiments.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 338
05/14/04
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
12.
Photocell to be permanently mounted on the panel
for security and ease of operation.
13.
An array of banana jacks is to be included for use
with any desired external plug-in breadboard
components.
14.
Combination Earphone-Microphone
speaker are to be provided.
15.
A buzzer is mounted on the panel and operates
from any of the DC sources.
16.
Topical material within each manual set is to
include Basics and DC Circuits, AC circuits,
Rectifiers,
Transistor
Amplifiers,
Industrial
Control Circuits, Digital and Integrated Circuits,
Tubes and Special Semi-conductors, Pulse Circuits
and Waveshaping, Integrated Circuits, Operational
Amplifiers and Instrumentation, Telecommunication,
and other topics. The manuals are to contain over
300 individual experiments and are to include
information sheets. Certain experiments require
the use of optional modules which plug into the PC
card connector. One set of manuals is to be
provided with each unit.
17.
The hardware for experiments and accompanying
software is to cover all the electrical and
electronics topics for the full course including
Introduction
to
electronics,
exploratory
electronics,
DC
circuits
and
laws,
DC
measurements, DC calculations and circuits, DC
network
theory,
basic
and
advanced
DC,
introduction to ac, AC Components, AS Voltages and
Frequency, AC Measurements and Laws, inductors,
capacitors, transformers, RCL circuit resonance,
filters, L and C meter, frequency meter operation,
magnetism
and
BH
curves,
introduction
to
semiconductors, diodes , FET, UJT, Bipolars, SCR,
Zener, Diac, Triac, Automatic characteristic
curves, circuits, amplifiers, voltage amplifiers,
Class
A,
B,
AB,
and
C
power
amplifiers,
Operational
amplifier
basics,
operational
amplifier applications, Thyristor applications,
power
supplies,
regulated
power
supplies,
oscillators, intro to radio, am, fm, spectrum,
heterodyning,
sampling,
telecommunications,
multiplexing,
pam,
pwm,
analog
and
digital
conversion, digital codes, correction codes, push
pull transformer and complementary amplifiers, fm
discriminators, phase locked loops. Panel is to be
1/8" thick aluminum, painted with baked-on enamel
plus
an
8
ohm
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 339
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
and marked clearly with epoxy type paint for silk
screen
symbols
and
lettering.
Parts
interconnection is to be accomplished using full
size
stacking banana jacks
for multiple
connections to a single point. The trainer is to
be mounted inside a console as
specified. The
equipment shall be designed to operate again any
physical or electrical damage to any components
including the semiconductors even with incorrect
wiring by the student.
D.
18.
The trainer shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
19.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
Analog CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
connections required to interface the Electricity Electronics Training System with the CAI Computer
System. The system is to include the installation and
marking and cabling of the banana jacks to accommodate
data bus connections of digital data to enable two
simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow outputs of 16 bits
of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of address. One of
the busses shall be a bidirectional data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices. All bus lines shall
have isolation protection against damage to the trainer
and to the computer due to any incorrect wiring by the
student. In addition to the digital data lines, analog
data lines for incoming and outgoing data between the
computer shall also be provided. This shall include
the full size banana jack connections to high speed
analog to digital converters and digital to analog
converters together with the internal cabling and the
external connector and cable from the trainer to the
computer. The modifications to the trainer shall also
include the circuitry and installation
required to
accommodate computer connections and operation of the
computer as a DC voltmeter, ohmmeter, and AC high
impedance input voltmeter with AC voltmeter range to
150 kHz linear operation, and for connections so that
the computer can be used as a meter or an oscilloscope
with a floating ground and variable DC voltage levels.
The hardware and software allow for operation as an LC
meter and a frequency counter. The frequency generator
circuitry within the trainer shall be modified to
provide a linear operation of frequency output which
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 340
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
can be controlled by the computer DC output so that
automatic computer frequency response plotting can be
achieved. An input push button switch capability shall
be provided so that the student can manually signal the
computer or the instructor or step any of the CAI
instructions or programs as required. Various capacitor
and inductor components shall be replaced with higher
accuracy
devices
to
allow
for
closer
computer
calculations when compared to the marked values. All
of this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
E.
Digital Logic and Applications Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
digital logic and applications systems educational
trainer and program. All components used for all
experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
NYSCA
1.
A two digit LED display, a hexadecimal keyboard,
and circuit elements, including: Flip-Flops, AND
gates, NAND gates, NOR gates, OR and Exclusive OR
gates, Inverters (NOT), Single Shot with variable
width control input and with positive and negative
trigger capability, Very High, High and Low Speed
Clock with variable frequency electronically
controllable
to
achieve
automatic
frequency
control,
Digital
to
Analog
Converter,
Comparator/Operational Amplifier with power stage,
Emitter Follower with Voltage hold capability,
Diodes,
Resistors,
Switches,
Lamps,
Potentiometers, short circuit proof I.C. Power
source with positive and negative voltages for
external Integrated Circuits connections, P.C.
Card
Socket,
Line
Frequency
Clock,
Zener
Controlled Reference Voltage. The hexadecimal
keyboard has tri-state binary outputs, Enable,
Strobe and Delayed strobe control signals permit
keyboard interfacing to external circuits.
2.
Each Digital Logic Lab is to be furnished with two
manuals and a set of connection leads, a set of
loose components (including TTL, CMOS, linear and
timer ICs) which can be plugged into the IC socket
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 341
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
to run additional experiments. These elements and
the manual are to provide experiments in Digital
Logic, Digital Arithmetic, Analog and Digital
Conversion Systems, and Digital Solid-State and IC
Circuitry and Digital Frequency Control. The
student manual is to include experiments in:
Digital concepts and gates, number systems,
clocks, memory and registers, displays, keyboards,
problem
solving,
integrated
circuits,
troubleshooting, Boolean Algebra, theorems and
mapping,
adders,
analog
and
digital
representations, flip-flops, debouncing, glitches,
propagation delays, counters, registers, fourtrace display, digital probe and pulser, A to D
Conversion, digital music synthesizer, digital
voltmeter,
pulse
code
transmission,
multiplexed/scanned display, encoders/decoders,
multiplexers/demultiplexers,
memory
ICs,
arithmetic accumulators, bidirectional data bus,
tri-state devices, frequency counter,
digital
phase shift modem, alpha-numeric display on
oscilloscope and others. The unit shall be
compatible with the Microprocessor Module and to
demonstrate
microprocessor
applications
and
detailed logic implementation.
A complete
programmable microcomputer can be built with this
unit
and
the
Microprocessor
Module.
The
microcomputer shall be keyboard programmable to
run experiments in interfacing, programming and
troubleshooting.
NYSCA
3.
All integrated circuits shall be mounted in
sockets so that any faulty ICs can be replaced by
the school. Panel is to be 1/8" thick aluminum,
painted with baked-on enamel and marked clearly
with epoxy paint for silk screen symbols and
lettering.
Parts interconnection is to be
accomplished using full size banana leads and
jacks. Additional stacking full size banana leads
are also to be provided for multiple connections
to a single point.
4.
The trainer shall
instrument console.
5.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
be
mounted
inside
bench's
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 342
05/14/04
F.
DESIGN NO. _____
Digital CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
interconnections required to interface the Digital
Logic and Applications Training System with the CAI
Computer System. The system is to include the
installation and marking and cabling of the banana
jacks to accommodate data bus connections of digital
data to enable two simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow
16 bits of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of
address. One of the busses shall be a bidirectional
data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices
that use a matching protocol. All bus lines shall have
protection against damage to the trainer and to the
computer due to any incorrect wiring by the student. In
addition to the digital data lines, analog data lines
for incoming and outgoing data between the computer
shall also be provided. This shall include the full
size banana jack connections to high speed analog to
digital converters and digital to analog converters
together with the internal cabling and the external
connector and cable from the trainer to the computer.
The modifications to the trainer shall also include the
addition of precision 8 bit digital to analog and
analog to digital converters to be used in input output
control experiments where all digital and analog and
control signal wires shall be available on the panel at
banana jacks. There shall be no damage due to incorrect
wiring. Also to be added is a power amplifier to drive
precision servo motors directly with positive and
negative voltages in order that the motors can
be
operated in both directions. An input push button
switch capability shall be provided so that the student
can signal the computer or the instructor or step any
of the CAI instructions or programs as required. All of
this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
G.
Test Equipment
1.
Dual
Trace
Oscilloscope
following features:
a.
NYSCA
shall
include
the
Vertical Deflection: Bandwidth: DC to 20 MHz,
- 3 dB 5mv/div to 5V/div (at 8 div) AC 10Hz
to 20 MHz-3dB. Rinse Time: 17.5 n sec, 70 n
sec for 1mv/Div-2mv/div. Input Voltage: 500V
p-p or 300 V p-p (DC +AC peak at 1 KHz).
Input Coupling: AC, GND, DC (lever switch).
Input Impedance:
Direct; 1 m and 28 pf.
Operating Modes: CH-1, CH-2, ALT, CHOP, ADD,
CH-2 invert. X-Y Operation: CH-1 X-axis, CH-2
Y axis. Sensitivity: 1 mv/cm to 5V/cm Phase
Difference: Within 3 degrees, DC to 50 Khz.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 343
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Output: Buffered CH-1 output for external
measurements.
2.
NYSCA
b.
Horizontal Deflection: Trigger Modes: Auto,
Normal, TV-F, TV-L Trigger Source: Internal
(CH-1, CH-2, V-Mode), Line, Ext. Trigger
Coupling: AC TV Sync: TV sync separation
circuit. Trigger slope: + or -.
External
Trigger Input: Impedance - 1M and 35 pF,
maximum voltage 150 V P-P. Sweep Time: 0.5
sec/cm to 0.2 sec/cm + 3% in 20 calibrated
steps.
Continuous control between steps.
Sweep Time Magnifier: 10 times. Maximum Sweep
Time: 100 ns/cm.
c.
Internal Calibrator: Waveform: 1 KHz Square
wave. Voltage: 1V P-P + 3%.
Z-axis
(intensity modulation)
Input level: TTL
compatible.
Size;
6
inch
rectangular,
internal graticule, with % calibrations and
photographic bezel. Acceleration Potential:
2 KV
Trace Alignment: Front panel trace
rotation control.
d.
Power Requirement: AC
Approximately 29 watts.
e.
Supplied Accessories: Two Switchable X / X10
probes. One Instruction Manual.The system
shall include a series of Computer Aided
Instructions specifically related to the
front panel configuration of the oscilloscope
coupled to the trainer
panel layout and
drawings,
showing
interconnections
of
experiments
and
operation
for
student
experiments.
100/120/220/240
V,
The Digital Multimeter shall be a self- contained
multimeter with a 3 1/2 digit liquid crystal
display. The meter shall be protected from both
overload and overcurrent by a suitable, user
replaceable safety device. The meter shall provide
for seven user functions which are to include DC
Voltage, DC Current, AC Voltage, AC Current,
Resistance, Diode and Transistor Testing and
Audible continuity.
For each of the functions
described the following ranges and accuracies
shall be provided.
For DC Voltage, the meter
shall have the following ranges 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V,
200 V, and 1000 volts. Accuracy for the DC ranges
shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For AC
Voltage, the meter shall have the following ranges
200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 750 volts. Accuracy
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 344
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
for the AC ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For DC Current, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and
2 Amps, and 10 Amps
Accuracy for the DC current
ranges shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For
AC Current, the meter shall have the following
ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and 2 Amps,
and 10 Amps 1000 volts.
Accuracy for the DC
current ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For resistance, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 ohms, 2K ohms, 20 K ohms 200
K ohms, 2 Meg ohms and 20 Meg ohms. Accuracy for
the Resistance ranges shall be 0.5% of the reading
+ 1 digit. The diode test function of the meter
shall
provide
testing
for
all
types
of
semiconductor diodes as well as diode junctions of
transistors. The meter shall provide an open
circuit voltage of 3.2 Volts and the test current
shall not exceed 0.1 mA. The audible continuity
test shall provide an open circuit test voltage of
3.2 V maximum, with a test current not to exceed
0.2 mA. The meter shall have a threshold to signal
continuity not exceeding 30 ohms. This unit is to
be identical in panel configuration to the display
on the CAI software package. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 2
3.
NYSCA
Sine-Square Function Generator shall be for audio
and supersonic frequencies providing both lowdistortion sine waves and rapid-rise square waves
that
can
be
free
running
or
externally
synchronized. Unit shall include the following
features:
a.
Sine Wave: Sine Wave Range: 10 Hz to 1 MHz in
5 decade bands Accuracy: 10 Hz to 1 MHz + (5%
+ 2Hz); 100Hz to 1000KHz + (3% + 2Hz).
Output: impedance: 600 ohms: Voltage: 5vrms.
Flatness:
< =1.5dB at ref KHz. Distortion:
<0.5% (200Hz to 100 KHz).
b.
Square Wave: Square Wave Range: 10 Hz to
100KHz in 4 decade bands. Voltage Output: 5V
P-P. Rise Time: <200 nsec.
c.
Sync Signal: Input Impedance: 10K ohm.
d.
Maximum Input: 10vrms.
e.
This instrument is to be compatible with and
have the identical panel design that is on
the associated CAI experiments used with the
trainer.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 345
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
R.F. Signal Generator shall be a solid-state wide
band RF Signal Generator with FET oscillator
circuitry
for
high
stability
and
accuracy.
Frequency Range:
100 KHz to 130MHz in 6 ranges
(frequency to 390MHz calibrated by high harmonic)
RF output: 0.1 V rms (unloaded). Output control:
High-low
output
switch
and
fine
adjuster.
Modulation:
Internal 1 KHz; 1 Volt or more.
External Crystal Range:
1MHz-15MHz, crystal is
not supplied. This instrument is to be compatible
with and have the identical panel design that is
on the associated CAI experiments used with the
trainer.
5.
Digital Universal Counter shall provide frequency,
period,
frequency
ratio,
time
interval
and
totalize measurements. Unit shall include the
following features:
6.
NYSCA
a.
Frequency is measured from 5 Hz to 175 MHz.
Resolution may be selected from .1 Hz for
frequencies below 10 MHz to 1 HZ for
frequencies up to 175 MHz. The period mode
can be used to more accurately measure low
frequencies from 5 Hz to 2 MHz. In the time
interval mode, the counter measures the
elapsed interval from a selected edge of one
input signal to a selected edge of another.
b.
Frequency Characteristics: Channel A Range: 5
Hz to 175 MHz: 5 Hz - 10 MHz in kHz mode, 50
kHz - 175 MHz in the MHz mode. Resolution:0.1
Hz to 1 kHz, in decade steps. Accuracy:+/- 1
count +/-time base error. Display: kHz or MHz
with decimal point.
c.
Period Characteristics: Channel A Range: 0.5
microseconds
to
200,000
microseconds.
Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 2 MHz sine wave.
Resolution: 100 ps to 100 ns in decade steps.
Accuracy: +/- count +/- time base error +/trigger error. Display: Milliseconds or
microseconds with decimal point. Minimum
Pulse Width: 250 ns. Average:1, 10, 100 or
1000 cycles averaged, depending on resolution
setting.
d.
This instrument is to be compatible with and
have the identical panel design that is on
the associated CAI experiments used with the
trainer.
Eight Trace Scope Adaptor shall be powered from
115 VAC, accept up to eight TTL signals up to 3
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 346
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
MHz and multiplex them into one, which can then be
displayed on an oscilloscope. Front panel selector
shall allow selection of all eight channels or
first four or last four. The circuit loading shall
be that of one low power Schottky TTL load.
Channel spacing and pulse amplitude shall be
variable with front panel controls. The sampling
rate can be varied in cases where sampling
frequency generates a beat with the input
frequency. Inputs shall be through front panel
fitted numbered full size banana jacks and the
output is through a front panel BNC. The unit is
fitted with a carrying handle.
NYSCA
7.
Isolation Transformer shall have dual output and
provide both direct and isolated voltages.
The
Input requirement shall be 105-130 volts.
The
direct output Power Rating shall be 500VA
continuous.
The isolated output Power Rating
shall be 300VA continuous or 500VA intermittent.
The direct or isolated outputs shall be chosen by
selecting the correct duplex outlet on the front
panel. Two 3-position slide switches shall provide
9 combinations of output voltage from 90 to 140
volts (isolated) up to 350VA continuous or 500VA
intermittent. Unit shall have a self contained ONOFF switch and Power On pilot light. The
regulation from no load to full load (350VA) shall
be less than 4%. This instrument is to be
compatible with and have the identical panel
design that is on the associated CAI experiments
used with the trainer.
8.
LCR Meter shall measure capacitance, inductance,
resistance, the dissipation factor of capacitors
and 1/Q of inductors. The capacitance is measured
from the 200pF range to 2000 F in 8 ranges with
accuracies from + 1% to 3%. The inductance is
measured from the 200  H range to 200 H in 7
ranges with accuracies of + 3% to 5%. Resistance
is measured from the 20 ohm range to 20 megohms in
7 ranges with accuracies of + 0.5% to 3%. The
function and ranges are manually selected by a
single rotary switch and the results are presented
on a 3 1/2 digit LCD display. The display shall
also indicate Low Battery and Overload. The LCR
meter shall be fuse protected (100mA) and powered
by an internal 9 volt battery. This instrument is
to be compatible with and have the identical panel
design that is on the associated CAI experiments
used with the trainer.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 347
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
9.
Digital Pulser shall feature one shot pulse or 5
Hz pulse train: automatically sense logic state
and change state to complement: multi-family
compatible: high current drive: short duty cycle:
overload protected. Unit is to be mounted on a
protective case for security and protection
against
damage.
This
instrument
is
to
be
compatible with and have the identical panel
design that is on the associated CAI experiments
used with the trainer.
10.
FET Multimeter shall be a sensitive and versatile
electronic multimeter for laboratory application
and educational instruction. Unit is to be
compatible with the associated CAI software
package and identical in pictures to that given in
the instruction. FET Multimeter shall include the
following features:
11.
NYSCA
a.
DC Voltage: Ranges: 0-0.3, 1, 3, 10, 30, 100,
300, 1000 VDC.
Accuracy +3% full scale.
Input Resistance: 10 Megohms.
b.
AC Voltage: Ranges: 0-0.3, 1, 3, 10, 30, 100,
1000 VAC.
Accuracy: +4% full scale. Input
Resistance: 10 Megohms.
Frequency Ranges:
0.3V range 25Hz to 1MHz, +.5 dB. To 1000 V
range; 25Hz to 3MHz, +1 dB. dB calibration: 15 to +2dbm, Odb=1mw/600 ohms.
c.
DC Current: Ranges: 0 to 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1,
3, 10, 30, 100, 300MA.
Accuracy: +3% full
scale. Insertion Loss: 0.3V at full scale.
d.
AC Current: Ranges: 0 to 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1,
3, 10, 30, 100, 300MA.
Accuracy: +4% full
scale.
Insertion Loss; 0.3V at full scale.
Frequency Range: 40 to 400Hz.
e.
Resistance: Ranges in ohms: 0 to 10, 100, 1K,
10K, 1M, 10M midscale.
Test Voltage: 100mV
or 1.5V selectable LOW or HIGH.
Accuracy:
+3% of arc length.POWER: 115V/230V 50/60Hz.
f.
This instrument is to be compatible with and
have the identical panel design that is on
the associated CAI experiments used with the
trainer.
Digital Probe shall be for DC to 50 MHz, multi
digital family TTL, DTL, TRL, HTL, CMOS, MOS;
memory freeze pulse; pulse stretchers; Megohm
input impedance; detects pulses to 10 nanoseconds;
reverse polarity protection -50 volts.
The unit
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 348
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
is to be compatible with CAI pictures and
operation as provided. The unit is to have special
connection plugs that are compatible with the
power supplied at the trainer jacks.
H.
NYSCA
Modules
1.
The Servo-Motor Tach Module shall be an accessory
to the Electricity - Electronics training System.
This unit shall include a servo motor geared to a
tacho-generator unit. The servo motor is to be
driven from the power supply in the Electricity Electronics Training System. Servo Motor-Tach
Module is to interface with the 22 pin P.C.
connector in the training system. Experiments are
to
cover
motor
speed
control,
tachometer
calibration, servo motor drives, open loop speed
control, closed loop speed control, and motor
generator operation.
2.
Servo Motor-Potentiometer Module shall be an
accessory to the Electricity - Electronic Training
System. This unit shall be a Servo-Motor geared to
a continuously rotating potentiometer to provide
experiments in servo position control.
The unit
is to be a card mounted with a 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the Electricity Electronics
Training
System.
Electricity
Electronics Training System components shall be
used to implement the electronics for the control
systems.
The experiments shall cover motor
control, potentiometer position calibration, open
loop position control, and closed loop position
control with demonstration of variations in
amplifier characteristics affecting oscillations
and stability including proportional, integral and
differential control.
3.
Transducer Module shall be an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit
shall consist of a series of plug in units
electrically and physically compatible with the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Modules
are to include Photocell, Phototransistor, Optical
Isolator,
Thermistor,
Thermocouple,
Resistive
Transducers, Gas and Fume Detectors, Relays,
Pressure Sensor, Strain
Gauge, Light Emitting
Diodes, Timers, Alarm Circuits, Magnetic Sensors,
Hall Effect Sensors, Operational Amplifiers,
Instrumentation Amplifiers and Instrumentation
Bridge.
Each transducer is to be supplied with
connections compatible with electronic systems.
The Transducer Module is to include a student
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 349
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
experiment
manual
with
experiments
in
operation and application of each transducer.
NYSCA
the
4.
CAI
Interfacing Module shall be a complex
interfacing module which is inserted into a PC
expansion bus and consists of analog and digital
input and output devices so that the computer can
interface with the outside world, including the
training systems. The module shall provide for two
output data buses where one of the buses operates
as a bidirectional data bus. All circuits shall
provide buffering so that any incorrect external
connections will not damage the interface module
or the computer and so that random short circuits
will not affect the operation of the computer. The
module shall also contain high-speed analog to
digital and digital to analog converters together
with buffer amplifiers and scaling amplifiers. An
additional analog input multiplexing capability
and circuitry shall be provided. Address decoding
circuitry shall be included together with switch
selectable address field capability. All PC finger
contacts shall be gold plated to retard corrosion
and poor contact problems. The dual data buss
outputs shall be available on individual latches
to allow long cable runs for all high speed
parallel data at the full computer bus speed.
Filtering shall be provided at the analog inputs
to suppress and input noise or interchannel noise
from the digital lines to the analog lines. The
system inputs and outputs and software shall
incorporate digital lines to accommodate student
remote control of the computer and to provide
computer output control to fault circuitry inside
the
trainers
so
that
the
computer
can
automatically control any faults. There shall also
be provided a minimum of 5 spare lines to
accommodate any future control or communication
interconnections that may be desired between the
trainer and the computer or between the trainers
themselves. This system shall be compatible with
the Electricity - Electronics Training System and
the Digital Logic and Applications Training System
and all other trainers that use the banana jack
configurations. The unit is to be compatible with
386 and 486 based computer configurations.
5.
Microprocessor
Training
Module
shall
be
an
accessory to the Digital Logic and Applications
Training System. Unit shall consist of a plug in
module compatible with the printed circuit card
connectors on the training system. This unit is to
include the Microprocessor, Solid-State Memory,
Input Data Port and an 8 bit DMA Address Counter.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 350
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Address and data lines are to be connected on the
module and to the P.C. Card fingers compatible
with the internal connections on the training
system.
This module is to provide all the
additional hardware needed to build a complete
Microcomputer System using the training system.
The system is to include a student manual with
experiments on all aspects of microcomputer
operations and programming.
NYSCA
6.
Audio Transformer Module an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit be
glass epoxy printed circuit card, 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the printed circuit
receptacle on the training system. Module shall
contain
two
Audio
Transformers
mounted
and
connected so the primary and two secondaries of
each transformer are available at the connector
pins. These Audio Transformers are to be used to
build Audio Amplifiers, Push-Pull Amplifiers, to
study
Impedance
Matching,
and
as
Pulse
Transformers
for
Industrial
Electronics
experimentation.
7.
Relay Module shall be an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit
shall
be
Printed
Circuit
Mounted
Double
Pole/Double Throw Relay with Gold Plated P.C.
connector compatible with the P.C. connector on
the training system. Relay coil is to be designed
for drive from the training system power supply
and from the semiconductor outputs available from
the training system. Relay coil is to be provided
with circuitry to prevent high voltage Back EMF
from being developed to protect all semiconductors
on the model Electricity - Electronics Training
System from burn-out during switching.
Unit is
also to provide POWER OUTPUT jacks for the
operation of High Power AC Circuits. The module is
to cover student experiments on relay operation
and applications.
8.
Superheterodyne Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector designed to fit the
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Unit shall contain the tuning capacitor,
oscillator coil, I.F. transformers, and antenna
loop stick, required for fabrication of a
Superheterodyne AM Receiver. When used with the
Electricity - Electronics Training System, the
module shall permit, the student to wire,
troubleshoot, align, and operate a working AM
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 351
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Superhet Receiver. Student Lab manuals and CAI
software shall accompany this unit with theory and
lab experiments.
I.
9.
FM Communications Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be a glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connectors compatible with the
printed
receptacle
on
the
training
system.
Mounted on this card with all pins available at
the P.C. connector shall be the FM Ratio
Detector/Discriminator
Transformer,
I.F.
Transformer, and Citizen Band Crystal and singlesideband circuit. These components are to be used
in the FM Receiver experiments.
10.
Power Transformer Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector compatible with the
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Components mounted on this card shall
include two 60Hz transformers with center tapped
secondary with all connections available at the
P.C. card connectors.
Transformers are to be
compatible with the training system experiments,
DC to AC Inverter experiments, AC to DC Converter
experiments, Saturable Reactor, and Industrial
Electronics experiments.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The unit is to be installed, and
formatted to be consistent with the CAI software and
hardware training system including compensation for the
real time timing circuit, scale factors required for
the memory to be compatible with the software. The CAI
Computer System shall include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 352
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
NTSC 16 bit video card which can output to any
NTSC device such as a television or video
recorder.
7.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
8.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
9.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a MSDOS Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest
release, Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a
Microsoft Windows compatible word editing package,
plus interface and applications software and
manuals. Installed and resident on the hard disk
will be the CAI control software which shall
include all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts
and processing software to be compatible with the
CAI software. A quick install
program is to be
provided
to
allow
easy
installation
and
configuration of additional lesson material. This
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity,
electronics,
electrical
and
microprocessor training systems. The CAI Computer
System shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 353
05/14/04
J.
DESIGN NO. _____
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
an AT 286 or 386 type CPU system. The software package
is to be provided on floppy disks and installed on the
CAI Computer System's hard drive. The software package
can be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive
or on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software
Package shall contain experiments in the following
topics specifically for use with the electronics and
digital training systems that are provided and support
automatic analog and digital input and outputs with
processing programs with on screen graphics and
printouts:
Direct
Current,
Alternating
Current,
Filters,
Power
Control,
Transistors,
Amplifiers,
Operational Amplifiers, Opto-Electronics, Oscillators,
Telecommunications. Advanced electronic topics are to
be provided for in Digital logic, Sequential logic,
Digital
Systems,
D
and
A
Conversion,
and
Microprocessors This CAI sequence shall provide both
information
sheets,
experiments,
and
shall
have
provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
K.
CAI Printer
This printer is to provide direct compatibility with
CAI Computer System. The printer must accept an
industry standard Centronics Parallel printer cable as
its input, and contain a printer memory buffer of 32
kilobytes as a minimum. The printer shall provide for
both text and graphics mode of printing, with a minimum
column width of 80. The printer shall provide for near
letter quality output with a print head of 9 pins as a
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 354
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
minimum. The printer is to accept both form feed and
tractor fed paper. The printer shall be supplied on an
acrylic printer stand that shall allow for easy paper
handling as well as storage of additional paper below
the printer.
The printer shall have a built-in
diagnostic test mode and multiple fonts and the
internal control codes shall be compatible with all the
CAI software codes. The unit shall accommodate all the
CAI report formats, graphic print outs, and experiment
data print-outs and student progress printouts.
L.
Local Area Network
All of the CAI Computer Systems on the Student Stations
and the Instructor Station, Mobile are to be connected
via a local area network.
The network shall provide
for the sharing of computer resources such as a network
printer, network plotter and both local and remote hard
disks for file transfers. The network shall be based on
the netbios operating system and shall support both a
peer to peer and dedicated file server network. All
network communications shall be carried over standard
thin ethernet cable, supporting a sustained data
transfer rate of 10 MBps. The network hardware and
software shall support both IEEE 802.3 and 10BASET UTP
cabling. The network hardware shall be compatible with
specifications for Novell NetWare version 3.x or later.
Network software shall be installed and configured for
all fileservers and workstations installed on said
network. The software shall provide for password
security
restriction,
client
usage
tracking,
restriction by time or date, have a built in network
administration program for monitoring network usage as
well as for network diagnostics to solve problems
occurring by user or with the installed network
backbone. The network software shall provide for
network printers and support direct printer spooling to
conserve printing time. The software shall be supplied
on both 5 1/4" and 3 1/2" media, with installation and
operations manuals provided for network administrator
information.
M.
Voice Output Interfacing System
This system shall consist of a Talker Module based on
64 different phonemes together with a text translation
algorithm in ROM so that it can be driven by computer
entered text. The system is to provide a parallel
Centronics type interface connector using the ASCII
character set and shall be driven using the BASIC or
any high level programming language. Cabling is to be
accomplished using any external peripheral connector
panel such as that provided with the Printer and
Interfacing System. Other programmable features shall
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 355
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
include variations in inflection levels and musical
effects. Unit shall provide training in serial
transmission of data via an RS232C input. Baud rate is
to be adjustable from 75 to 9600. A 700 Character
buffer shall also be included. The unit is to include a
loudspeaker. This instrument is to be compatible with
and have the identical panel design that is on the
associated CAI experiments used with the training
systems.
N.
Occupational Prototype Kit
This kit is to be an accessory to the Electricity Electronics Training System and Digital Logic and
Applications Training System which provide the proper
power sources and system test capability. Kit shall
provide a breadboard capability for the learning of
occupational prototype skills using electronics and
solid-state circuits and integrated circuits. Unit
shall permit the student to work with the circuit
schematics and logic diagrams, with actual unmounted
components marked in the conventional industrial manner
and with component data sheets. The student prepares
the prototype card layout, makes pin assignments, wires
and tests the circuits. Circuits that can be tested
shall include amplifiers, oscillators, pulse and waveshaping circuits, industrial circuits, integrated
circuit digital counters, and digital control systems
as well as others. The Occupational Skills Trainer is
to include a prototype push-type solderless breadboard
card which accepts No. 22 gauge solid wire and
electronic component leads.
The card is to have a
standard 22 printed circuit finger connector, gold
plated with 0.156 inch spacing compatible with the
other training system connectors and a selection of
digital and linear integrated circuits, components
including resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors,
No. 22 gauge wires, pliers, wire stripper/cutter, and
descriptive written material and logic schematics and
specifications sheets. This trainer is to include over
50 hands-on student projects. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 8
O.
Student Tool Kit
This kit shall contain twenty tools frequently used in
Electronics. The tools are to be enclosed in a compact,
sturdy, plastic tool box with a carrying handle making
it completely portable. The tools shall permit the
student to undertake assembly and repair of electronic
circuits. The tool kit shall also have a 25 watt teller
soldering iron kit which includes a stand, protective
cover around the soldering iron, a sponge and a spare
replacement tip. A suction type desoldering tool and an
I.C. extractor are to be included to permit PC board
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 356
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
repairs. Other tools included shall be a set of
screwdrivers, cutters, strippers, nut drivers and
pliers which shall allow the student to perform the
mechanical tasks associated with electronics. A pair of
safety goggles shall also be provided for use when
performing mechanical jobs, soldering or desoldering.
The system is to include a manual describing the tools
and
is
to
be
compatible
with
the
associated
descriptions in the accompanying CAI package. QUANTITY
REQUIRED: 2
P.
Satellite System
This system is to consist of three fully assembled
printed circuit boards; Transmitter Station, Receiver
Station and the Satellite Station, three AC adapters, a
loudspeaker and an audio cassette recorder. The
complete Satellite Link shall transmit audio signals
over a visible light beam. Miniature reflective dishes
are to be used on the Satellite and Receiver Stations
to collect and focus the incoming signal. The
Transmitter and Satellite Stations shall include
controls to aid in the visual alignment procedure.
System design shall permit the Transmitter and Receiver
Stations to be used alone to demonstrate the concept of
a Microwave Link. The System is to include a Lab
Manual. The system is to be compatible with CAI lessons
provided.
Q.
Pneumatic Trainer
This trainer shall provide a complete technology
education program that is housed on a main frame and
panel that may also be wall mounted if required. The
main frame shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with
an
industrial
enamel
paint
finish.
The
front
instrumentation panel shall be constructed of 1/4"
industrial grade acrylic, green in color with all major
components identified. All working components shall be
hard mounted and identified to insure security and ease
of inventory. All components shall be fitted with
industrial grade quick disconnect fittings that allows
air hoses to be connected and disconnected without the
use of tools. The system shall be supplied with a 12VDC
power supply to be used for operation of the solenoid
valve. The system shall be powered by an outside air
source and be capable of a 150 PSI pressure rating.
Components shall consist of the following: one clear
acrylic
three
position,
closed
center
manual
directional valve, one clear acrylic electric solenoid
directional valve, two flow control valves, one acrylic
3/4" x 3" double acting cylinder, one 7/16" x 2" single
acting spring return cylinder, one pressure regulator,
two needle valves, one air indicator, one independent
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 357
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
filter unit, one independent lubricator unit, two 0-160
PSI test gauges, one flow meter, one cylinder mounting
bracket,
two
"T"
fittings,
one
venturi
vacuum
generator, one air
muffler, one electric momentary
switch, two balloons, 10 feet of air line. All
components must be fitted with quick disconnect
fittings. A spring clip storage system for all loose
components must be provided. Construction of the entire
trainer must meet or exceed industrial standards. The
entire trainer shall measure 16 1/2" x 20" x 3" and be
housed in a steel cabinet with a steel 10" base plate.
Trainer must include one student manual and one
instructor guide. The unit is to be identical to
instructional
material
on
the
accompanying
CAI
material.
R.
Hydraulic Trainer
This trainer shall provide a complete technology
education program that is housed on a free standing
main frame and panel that may also be wall mounted if
required. The main frame shall be constructed of 16
gauge welded steel with an industrial enamel paint
finish. The front instrumentation panel shall be
constructed of 1/4" industrial grade acrylic, blue in
color with all major components identified. All working
components shall be hard mounted and identified to
insure security and ease of inventory. All components
shall be fitted with quick disconnect fittings that
allow hoses to be connected and disconnected without
the use of tools. The system shall be an AIR OVER OIL
system that requires an outside air source for power.
No electric power source shall be required. Components
shall consist of the following: one clear acrylic three
position, closed center directional valve, one clear
acrylic 3/4" double acting cylinder, one loading
regulator, gauge & cylinder assembly, one flow control
valve, one clear acrylic check valve, one 7/16" x 2"
double acting cylinder with clevis, one lever arm, one
spring scale, one pressure regulator with gauge, one 060 PSI test gauge,one reservoir/accumulator, one needle
valve, one hydrometer, one viscosimeter, two "T"
fittings for oil, one "T" fitting for air, one
graduated liquid measuring container with cover, four
air lines, four pre-charged oil lines with quick
disconnect ball check
fittings. The entire system
shall be capable of a 60 PSI pressure rating. All oil
components shall be pre-charged with mineral oil to
avoid any safety concern to the student. A spring clip
storage system for oil hoses and loose components must
be provided. construction of the entire system must
meet or exceed industrial standards. The entire trainer
shall measure 16 1/2" x 20" x 3" and be housed in a
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 358
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
steel cabinet with a steel 10" base plate. Trainer must
include one student manual and one instructor guide.
S.
Electro-Mechanical Trainer
This trainer shall provide a complete technology
education program that is housed on a free standing
main frame and panel that may also be wall mounted if
required. The main frame shall be constructed of a 16
gauge welded steel with an industrial enamel paint
finish. the working panel shall be constructed of 1/4"
industrial grade acrylic, yellow in color with all
major components identified. The main work panel must
have adjustable gear mounting posts, pre-mounted
pulley, and a motor driven drive gear assembly. A
safety Switch device that disengages all gear movement
must be included in the system. The system shall be
powered by a 115 VAC power source and fuse safety
protected. The system shall have a six (6) foot
grounded line cord. Components shall consist of the
following: one motorized 50 tooth drive gear, seven 50
tooth spur gears, one 45 tooth spur gear, one 40 tooth
spur gear, one 30 tooth spur gear, one 25 tooth spur
gear, one 20 tooth spur gear, one 30 tooth sprocket
gear, one 20 tooth sprocket gear, one 10 tooth sprocket
gear, one roller chain assembly, one vee belt, three
ball bearing pulleys, one sleeve bearing pulley, one
block pulley assembly with cable, one inclined plane
assembly, one acceleration car assembly, sixteen
retainer collars, two
cone pulleys, one winch
assembly, one spring scale, four 8 oz. weights with
hardware, one 16 oz. weight with hardware, one
gyroscope
assembly
with
pedestal,
wire
cable
assemblies, one six position lever arm, one Allen
wrench, one limit switch assembly, four adjustable gear
train mounting posts, seven fixed gear mounting posts,
one inclined plane adjustable mounting post, one power
switch, one power indicator light, one fuse assembly,
and five storage mounting posts. Construction of the
entire system must meet or exceed industrial standards.
The entire trainer shall measure 19 1/2" x 20" x 3" and
be housed in a steel cabinet with a 10" steel base
plate. Trainer must include one student manual and one
instructor manual. The manufacturer shall provide a
minimum of a one (1) year warranty and grant a reprint
right to the purchaser for all laboratory manuals
without charge.
T.
Fluid Power Applications Trainer
This trainer shall be a replica of a CATERPILLAR
construction road excavation machine that is a detailed
scale model and has been fitted with pneumatic
cylinders, directional valves and flow controls. This
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 359
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
unit and all additional parts are mounted on a work
panel. Included on the work panel are the electrical
input binding posts, drive tracks, and lighting. The
drive tracks and interior lighting system is a 6 to 9
Vdc power source as must be located on the work panel.
The main frame shall be constructed of 16 gauge welded
steel with an industrial enamel paint finish. The
working panel shall be constructed of 1/4" industrial
grade acrylic, green in color, with all major
components identified. The work panel shall have one
electrical terminal strip, two directional valves, a
single air line tubing package to be connected,
electrical
lead
wires,
and
four
double
acting
cylinders. Maximum PSI rating is 40 PSI. Steel base
frame with acrylic panel must be 16 1/4" x 20" x 3
1/2". The Fluid power applications trainer must run in
coordination and interfacing with the Pneumatic Control
Trainer, and must be compatible to a computer control
unit for expansion purposes as well as a programmable
valve pack.
U.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
V.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Instructor Station, Mobile installation at time agreed
upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
W.
Manufacturers
Instructor Station, Mobile complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this station as
listed above, shall be Model 2285 of CES Industries,
Inc., Farmingdale, N.Y.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 360
05/14/04
12.277A
A.
DESIGN NO. _____
STUDENT STATION
General
Unit
shall
be
a
complete
training
station
to
accommodate two students. All of the individual devices
which constitute this training system shall be as
listed below, together with detailed descriptions which
specify the minimum equipment types, quality and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance
standards to which any approved equal shall apply.
B.
Bench
Bench shall be composed of maple top, two base
cabinets, and three door instrument console as follows:
NYSCA
1.
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
2.
Base cabinet assembly shall be composed of two (2)
each One drawer One door cabinets. Construction
shall be all wood, glue and metal fastened with
high pressure laminate cover on all exposed
surfaces and edges.
Drawers to be mounted on
extension slides and to be set 5" down from top of
cabinet for full and easy access when open,
without interference from table top overhang in
front. Drawer and Door Cabinet shall have locks
and shall be masterkeyed. Cabinets shall have
recessed kick panel at the bottom, 2" D x 4" H.
Table Top height is to be 36-3/4", compatible with
sitting or standing. Overall dimensions of each
cabinet shall be 19" W x 25 1/2" D x 35" H. Submit
shop drawings.
3.
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match base cabinets. Mounting rails for trainers
are to have brass ferrules for machine screw
mounting. Service loops shall be provided for easy
servicing with power connected; all items shall be
removable from front. Security fasteners and
dividers shall be incorporated in the console to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 361
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
secure the CAI computer, monitor and keyboard. The
keyboard shall be permanently mounted and all
items are to be locked in a covered and enclosed
console. The instrument console shall provide
secure storage for the Electricity - Electronics
Training System, Digital Logic and Applications
Training System, and CAI Computer System. Console
shall have three hinged plexiglass doors, each
with a masterkeyed lock. Design shall permit doors
to be individually opened to allow individual use
of electronics or digital trainers or CAI computer
or all items at the same time. Doors are not to be
removable from console during equipment operation.
Submit shop drawings.
4.
C.
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the training systems. It shall include
the outlet strips and the junction boxes and
master power switches, separate lines for the
computer with spike suppression and fans for
movement of air for cooling the CAI Computer
System. The package shall also include accessory
power outlets within the console as well as
externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Electricity - Electronics Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
electricity
and
electronics
circuit
and
systems
educational trainer and program. All components used
for all experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
NYSCA
1.
Resistor Bank consisting of 5% resistors to be
standard values ranging from 2.5 ohms to 4.7
Megohms.
2.
Inductor Bank with Inductors suitable for radio
tuned circuits, filters and chokes. Two inductors
are to have mutual coupling. Inductor D.C. current
capability shall exceed the maximum current
available during experimentation for burn-out
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 362
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
protection. R.F. Transformer Inductor is to be
selected for use in the A.M. frequency band to be
slug-tuned with tapped coil and feedback winding.
R.F. Transformer coil winding to be capable of
carrying all current available during experiments.
NYSCA
3.
Potentiometer Bank ranging from 1K to 1 Megohm,
one-turn
style
with
position
markings
and
indicator knobs. To be hermetically sealed, 1/2
watt, with MIL spec reliability.
4.
Transistor
and
Solid-State
Component
Bank;
Germanium and Silicon, NPN and PNP transistors,
MOSFET, Field Effect
Transistor, Unijunction
Transistor,
Silicon
Controlled
Rectifiers,
Germanium and Silicon Diodes, Zener, Varactor,
Diac, and Triac.
5.
Five switches including one Momentary and four
toggle types. Four incandescent lamps and one LED
are mounted on the panel.
6.
Built-in Function Generator on the panel with
Sine, Square and Triangle waveforms outputs,
Outputs to be simultaneously available. Sine
amplitude to be adjustable and to include high-low
ranges.
The frequency is to be calibrated and
continuously variable form 1 Hz to 100KHz in five
ranges and is also voltage controllable; VCO. The
voltage controllable range is to extend to 150kHz.
7.
Built-in Operational Amplifier with differential
inputs and high gain, internally adjusted offset
null, and with differential input and output pins
to be available.
8.
Built-in Power Amplifier with complementary class
B output is mounted on the panel with input and
output jacks.
9.
Built-in Power Supplies with Six Positive and
Negative fixed and variable DC power sources as
well as an AC power source is to be provided on
the panel.
Supplies are to be regulated and
current limited and burn-out protected.
10.
Built-in Analog Multimeter on the panel with 50
microampere sensitivity and with inputs for 50
microamps; shunts for 5ma, 10ma, 50ma, 100ma, and
0.5 volts, 5 volts, 10 volts, and 50 volt scales.
Meter movement is fully protected with diodes to
prevent damage to meter movement from incorrect
connection to any trainer voltages. AC voltmeter
inputs for AC power experiments and high impedance
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 363
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
input or AC range filter experiments. The analog
voltmeter response is to be flat to the full 150
kHz range and beyond. The meter must be analog to
demonstrate analog operation of voltage and
current and resistance meters.
NYSCA
11.
Integrated Circuit Socket for dual-in-line 14 or
16 pin ICs, 7 Pin Miniature Tube Socket, and 22
pin Printed Circuit Card Socket for system
expansion or PC Cards for Prototype projects and
repair experiments.
12.
Photocell to be permanently mounted on the panel
for security and ease of operation.
13.
An array of banana jacks is to be included for use
with any desired external plug-in breadboard
components.
14.
Combination Earphone-Microphone
speaker are to be provided.
15.
A buzzer is mounted on the panel and operates
from any of the DC sources.
16.
Topical material within each manual set is to
include Basics and DC Circuits, AC circuits,
Rectifiers,
Transistor
Amplifiers,
Industrial
Control Circuits, Digital and Integrated Circuits,
Tubes and Special Semi-conductors, Pulse Circuits
and Waveshaping, Integrated Circuits, Operational
Amplifiers and Instrumentation, Telecommunication,
and other topics. The manuals are to contain over
300 individual experiments and are to include
information sheets. Certain experiments require
the use of optional modules which plug into the PC
card connector. One set of manuals is to be
provided with each unit.
17.
The hardware for experiments and accompanying
software is to cover all the electrical and
electronics topics for the full course including
Introduction
to
electronics,
exploratory
electronics,
DC
circuits
and
laws,
DC
measurements, DC calculations and circuits, DC
network
theory,
basic
and
advanced
DC,
introduction to ac, AC Components, AS Voltages and
Frequency, AC Measurements and Laws, inductors,
capacitors, transformers, RCL circuit resonance,
filters, L and C meter, frequency meter operation,
magnetism
and
BH
curves,
introduction
to
semiconductors, diodes , FET, UJT, Bipolars, SCR,
Zener, Diac, Triac, Automatic characteristic
curves, circuits, amplifiers, voltage amplifiers,
plus
an
8
ohm
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 364
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Class
A,
B,
AB,
and
C
power
amplifiers,
Operational
amplifier
basics,
operational
amplifier applications, Thyristor applications,
power
supplies,
regulated
power
supplies,
oscillators, intro to radio, am, fm, spectrum,
heterodyning,
sampling,
telecommunications,
multiplexing,
pam,
pwm,
analog
and
digital
conversion, digital codes, correction codes, push
pull transformer and complementary amplifiers, fm
discriminators, phase locked loops. Panel is to be
1/8" thick aluminum, painted with baked-on enamel
and marked clearly with epoxy type paint for silk
screen
symbols
and
lettering.
Parts
interconnection is to be accomplished using full
size
stacking banana jacks
for multiple
connections to a single point. The trainer is to
be mounted inside a console as
specified. The
equipment shall be designed to operate again any
physical or electrical damage to any components
including the semiconductors even with incorrect
wiring by the student.
D.
18.
The trainer shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
19.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
Analog CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
connections required to interface the Electricity Electronics Training System with the CAI Computer
System. The system is to include the installation and
marking and cabling of the banana jacks to accommodate
data bus connections of digital data to enable two
simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow outputs of 16 bits
of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of address. One of
the busses shall be a bidirectional data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices. All bus lines shall
have isolation protection against damage to the trainer
and to the computer due to any incorrect wiring by the
student. In addition to the digital data lines, analog
data lines for incoming and outgoing data between the
computer shall also be provided. This shall include
the full size banana jack connections to high speed
analog to digital converters and digital to analog
converters together with the internal cabling and the
external connector and cable from the trainer to the
computer. The modifications to the trainer shall also
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 365
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
include the circuitry and installation
required to
accommodate computer connections and operation of the
computer as a DC voltmeter, ohmmeter, and AC high
impedance input voltmeter with AC voltmeter range to
150 kHz linear operation, and for connections so that
the computer can be used as a meter or an oscilloscope
with a floating ground and variable DC voltage levels.
The hardware and software allow for operation as an LC
meter and a frequency counter. The frequency generator
circuitry within the trainer shall be modified to
provide a linear operation of frequency output which
can be controlled by the computer DC output so that
automatic computer frequency response plotting can be
achieved. An input push button switch capability shall
be provided so that the student can manually signal the
computer or the instructor or step any of the CAI
instructions or programs as required. Various capacitor
and inductor components shall be replaced with higher
accuracy
devices
to
allow
for
closer
computer
calculations when compared to the marked values. All
of this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
E.
Digital Logic and Applications Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
digital logic and applications systems educational
trainer and program. All components used for all
experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
1.
NYSCA
A two digit LED display, a hexadecimal keyboard,
and circuit elements, including: Flip-Flops, AND
gates, NAND gates, NOR gates, OR and Exclusive OR
gates, Inverters (NOT), Single Shot with variable
width control input and with positive and negative
trigger capability, Very High, High and Low Speed
Clock with variable frequency electronically
controllable
to
achieve
automatic
frequency
control,
Digital
to
Analog
Converter,
Comparator/Operational Amplifier with power stage,
Emitter Follower with Voltage hold capability,
Diodes,
Resistors,
Switches,
Lamps,
Potentiometers, short circuit proof I.C. Power
source with positive and negative voltages for
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 366
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
external Integrated Circuits connections, P.C.
Card
Socket,
Line
Frequency
Clock,
Zener
Controlled Reference Voltage. The hexadecimal
keyboard has tri-state binary outputs, Enable,
Strobe and Delayed strobe control signals permit
keyboard interfacing to external circuits.
NYSCA
2.
Each Digital Logic Lab is to be furnished with two
manuals and a set of connection leads, a set of
loose components (including TTL, CMOS, linear and
timer ICs) which can be plugged into the IC socket
to run additional experiments. These elements and
the manual are to provide experiments in Digital
Logic, Digital Arithmetic, Analog and Digital
Conversion Systems, and Digital Solid-State and IC
Circuitry and Digital Frequency Control. The
student manual is to include experiments in:
Digital concepts and gates, number systems,
clocks, memory and registers, displays, keyboards,
problem
solving,
integrated
circuits,
troubleshooting, Boolean Algebra, theorems and
mapping,
adders,
analog
and
digital
representations, flip-flops, debouncing, glitches,
propagation delays, counters, registers, fourtrace display, digital probe and pulser, A to D
Conversion, digital music synthesizer, digital
voltmeter,
pulse
code
transmission,
multiplexed/scanned display, encoders/decoders,
multiplexers/demultiplexers,
memory
ICs,
arithmetic accumulators, bidirectional data bus,
tri-state devices, frequency counter,
digital
phase shift modem, alpha-numeric display on
oscilloscope and others. The unit shall be
compatible with the Microprocessor Module and to
demonstrate
microprocessor
applications
and
detailed logic implementation.
A complete
programmable microcomputer can be built with this
unit
and
the
Microprocessor
Module.
The
microcomputer shall be keyboard programmable to
run experiments in interfacing, programming and
troubleshooting.
3.
All integrated circuits shall be mounted in
sockets so that any faulty ICs can be replaced by
the school. Panel is to be 1/8" thick aluminum,
painted with baked-on enamel and marked clearly
with epoxy paint for silk screen symbols and
lettering.
Parts interconnection is to be
accomplished using full size banana leads and
jacks. Additional stacking full size banana leads
are also to be provided for multiple connections
to a single point.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 367
05/14/04
F.
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
The trainer shall
instrument console.
be
mounted
inside
bench's
5.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
Digital CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
interconnections required to interface the Digital
Logic and Applications Training System with the CAI
Computer System. The system is to include the
installation and marking and cabling of the banana
jacks to accommodate data bus connections of digital
data to enable two simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow
16 bits of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of
address. One of the busses shall be a bidirectional
data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices
that use a matching protocol. All bus lines shall have
protection against damage to the trainer and to the
computer due to any incorrect wiring by the student. In
addition to the digital data lines, analog data lines
for incoming and outgoing data between the computer
shall also be provided. This shall include the full
size banana jack connections to high speed analog to
digital converters and digital to analog converters
together with the internal cabling and the external
connector and cable from the trainer to the computer.
The modifications to the trainer shall also include the
addition of precision 8 bit digital to analog and
analog to digital converters to be used in input output
control experiments where all digital and analog and
control signal wires shall be available on the panel at
banana jacks. There shall be no damage due to incorrect
wiring. Also to be added is a power amplifier to drive
precision servo motors directly with positive and
negative voltages in order that the motors can
be
operated in both directions. An input push button
switch capability shall be provided so that the student
can signal the computer or the instructor or step any
of the CAI instructions or programs as required. All of
this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
G.
Test Equipment
1.
NYSCA
Dual
Trace
Oscilloscope
following features:
shall
include
the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 368
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
NYSCA
a.
Vertical Deflection: Bandwidth: DC to 20 MHz,
- 3 dB 5mv/div to 5V/div (at 8 div) AC 10Hz
to 20 MHz-3dB. Rinse Time: 17.5 n sec, 70 n
sec for 1mv/Div-2mv/div. Input Voltage: 500V
p-p or 300 V p-p (DC +AC peak at 1 KHz).
Input Coupling: AC, GND, DC (lever switch).
Input Impedance:
Direct; 1 m and 28 pf.
Operating Modes: CH-1, CH-2, ALT, CHOP, ADD,
CH-2 invert. X-Y Operation: CH-1 X-axis, CH-2
Y axis. Sensitivity: 1 mv/cm to 5V/cm Phase
Difference: Within 3 degrees, DC to 50 Khz.
Output: Buffered CH-1 output for external
measurements.
b.
Horizontal Deflection: Trigger Modes: Auto,
Normal, TV-F, TV-L Trigger Source: Internal
(CH-1, CH-2, V-Mode), Line, Ext. Trigger
Coupling: AC TV Sync: TV sync separation
circuit. Trigger slope: + or -.
External
Trigger Input: Impedance - 1M and 35 pF,
maximum voltage 150 V P-P. Sweep Time: 0.5
sec/cm to 0.2 sec/cm + 3% in 20 calibrated
steps.
Continuous control between steps.
Sweep Time Magnifier: 10 times. Maximum Sweep
Time: 100 ns/cm.
c.
Internal Calibrator: Waveform: 1 KHz Square
wave. Voltage: 1V P-P + 3%.
Z-axis
(intensity modulation)
Input level: TTL
compatible.
Size;
6
inch
rectangular,
internal graticule, with % calibrations and
photographic bezel. Acceleration Potential:
2 KV
Trace Alignment: Front panel trace
rotation control.
d.
Power Requirement: AC
Approximately 29 watts.
e.
Supplied Accessories: Two Switchable X / X10
probes. One Instruction Manual.The system
shall include a series of Computer Aided
Instructions specifically related to the
front panel configuration of the oscilloscope
coupled to the trainer
panel layout and
drawings,
showing
interconnections
of
experiments
and
operation
for
student
experiments.
100/120/220/240
V,
The Digital Multimeter shall be a self- contained
multimeter with a 3 1/2 digit liquid crystal
display. The meter shall be protected from both
overload and overcurrent by a suitable, user
replaceable safety device. The meter shall provide
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 369
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
for seven user functions which are to include DC
Voltage, DC Current, AC Voltage, AC Current,
Resistance, Diode and Transistor Testing and
Audible continuity.
For each of the functions
described the following ranges and accuracies
shall be provided.
For DC Voltage, the meter
shall have the following ranges 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V,
200 V, and 1000 volts. Accuracy for the DC ranges
shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For AC
Voltage, the meter shall have the following ranges
200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 750 volts. Accuracy
for the AC ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For DC Current, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and
2 Amps, and 10 Amps
Accuracy for the DC current
ranges shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For
AC Current, the meter shall have the following
ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and 2 Amps,
and 10 Amps 1000 volts.
Accuracy for the DC
current ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For resistance, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 ohms, 2K ohms, 20 K ohms 200
K ohms, 2 Meg ohms and 20 Meg ohms. Accuracy for
the Resistance ranges shall be 0.5% of the reading
+ 1 digit. The diode test function of the meter
shall
provide
testing
for
all
types
of
semiconductor diodes as well as diode junctions of
transistors. The meter shall provide an open
circuit voltage of 3.2 Volts and the test current
shall not exceed 0.1 mA. The audible continuity
test shall provide an open circuit test voltage of
3.2 V maximum, with a test current not to exceed
0.2 mA. The meter shall have a threshold to signal
continuity not exceeding 30 ohms. This unit is to
be identical in panel configuration to the display
on the CAI software package. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 2
H.
NYSCA
Modules
1.
The Servo-Motor Tach Module shall be an accessory
to the Electricity - Electronics training System.
This unit shall include a servo motor geared to a
tacho-generator unit. The servo motor is to be
driven from the power supply in the Electricity Electronics Training System. Servo Motor-Tach
Module is to interface with the 22 pin P.C.
connector in the training system. Experiments are
to
cover
motor
speed
control,
tachometer
calibration, servo motor drives, open loop speed
control, closed loop speed control, and motor
generator operation.
2.
Servo Motor-Potentiometer Module shall be an
accessory to the Electricity - Electronic Training
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 370
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
System. This unit shall be a Servo-Motor geared to
a continuously rotating potentiometer to provide
experiments in servo position control.
The unit
is to be a card mounted with a 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the Electricity Electronics
Training
System.
Electricity
Electronics Training System components shall be
used to implement the electronics for the control
systems.
The experiments shall cover motor
control, potentiometer position calibration, open
loop position control, and closed loop position
control with demonstration of variations in
amplifier characteristics affecting oscillations
and stability including proportional, integral and
differential control.
3.
NYSCA
CAI Interfacing
Module shall be a complex
interfacing module which is inserted into a PC
expansion bus and consists of analog and digital
input and output devices so that the computer can
interface with the outside world, including the
training systems. The module shall provide for two
output data buses where one of the buses operates
as a bidirectional data bus. All circuits shall
provide buffering so that any incorrect external
connections will not damage the interface module
or the computer and so that random short circuits
will not affect the operation of the computer. The
module shall also contain high-speed analog to
digital and digital to analog converters together
with buffer amplifiers and scaling amplifiers. An
additional analog input multiplexing capability
and circuitry shall be provided. Address decoding
circuitry shall be included together with switch
selectable address field capability. All PC finger
contacts shall be gold plated to retard corrosion
and poor contact problems. The dual data buss
outputs shall be available on individual latches
to allow long cable runs for all high speed
parallel data at the full computer bus speed.
Filtering shall be provided at the analog inputs
to suppress and input noise or interchannel noise
from the digital lines to the analog lines. The
system inputs and outputs and software shall
incorporate digital lines to accommodate student
remote control of the computer and to provide
computer output control to fault circuitry inside
the
trainers
so
that
the
computer
can
automatically control any faults. There shall also
be provided a minimum of 5 spare lines to
accommodate any future control or communication
interconnections that may be desired between the
trainer and the computer or between the trainers
themselves. This system shall be compatible with
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 371
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
the Electricity - Electronics Training System and
the Digital Logic and Applications Training System
and all other trainers that use the banana jack
configurations. The unit is to be compatible with
386 and 486 based computer configurations.
NYSCA
4.
Microprocessor
Training
Module
shall
be
an
accessory to the Digital Logic and Applications
Training System. Unit shall consist of a plug in
module compatible with the printed circuit card
connectors on the training system. This unit is to
include the Microprocessor, Solid-State Memory,
Input Data Port and an 8 bit DMA Address Counter.
Address and data lines are to be connected on the
module and to the P.C. Card fingers compatible
with the internal connections on the training
system.
This module is to provide all the
additional hardware needed to build a complete
Microcomputer System using the training system.
The system is to include a student manual with
experiments on all aspects of microcomputer
operations and programming.
5.
Audio Transformer Module an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit be
glass epoxy printed circuit card, 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the printed circuit
receptacle on the training system. Module shall
contain
two
Audio
Transformers
mounted
and
connected so the primary and two secondaries of
each transformer are available at the connector
pins. These Audio Transformers are to be used to
build Audio Amplifiers, Push-Pull Amplifiers, to
study
Impedance
Matching,
and
as
Pulse
Transformers
for
Industrial
Electronics
experimentation.
6.
Relay Module shall be an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit
shall
be
Printed
Circuit
Mounted
Double
Pole/Double Throw Relay with Gold Plated P.C.
connector compatible with the P.C. connector on
the training system. Relay coil is to be designed
for drive from the training system power supply
and from the semiconductor outputs available from
the training system. Relay coil is to be provided
with circuitry to prevent high voltage Back EMF
from being developed to protect all semiconductors
on the model Electricity - Electronics Training
System from burn-out during switching.
Unit is
also to provide POWER OUTPUT jacks for the
operation of High Power AC Circuits. The module is
to cover student experiments on relay operation
and applications.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 372
05/14/04
I.
DESIGN NO. _____
7.
Superheterodyne Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector designed to fit the
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Unit shall contain the tuning capacitor,
oscillator coil, I.F. transformers, and antenna
loop stick, required for fabrication of a
Superheterodyne AM Receiver. When used with the
Electricity - Electronics Training System, the
module shall permit, the student to wire,
troubleshoot, align, and operate a working AM
Superhet Receiver. Student Lab manuals and CAI
software shall accompany this unit with theory and
lab experiments.
8.
FM Communications Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be a glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connectors compatible with the
printed
receptacle
on
the
training
system.
Mounted on this card with all pins available at
the P.C. connector shall be the FM Ratio
Detector/Discriminator
Transformer,
I.F.
Transformer, and Citizen Band Crystal and singlesideband circuit. These components are to be used
in the FM Receiver experiments.
9.
Power Transformer Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector compatible with the
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Components mounted on this card shall
include two 60Hz transformers with center tapped
secondary with all connections available at the
P.C. card connectors.
Transformers are to be
compatible with the training system experiments,
DC to AC Inverter experiments, AC to DC Converter
experiments, Saturable Reactor, and Industrial
Electronics experiments.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The unit is to be installed, and
formatted to be consistent with the CAI software and
hardware training system including compensation for the
real time timing circuit, scale factors required for
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 373
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
the memory to be compatible with the software. The CAI
Computer System shall include the following features:
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The
system
must
provide
for
assembly
language
programming and the software is to include a MS-DOS
Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest release,
Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a Microsoft Windows
compatible word processing package, plus interface and
applications software and manuals. Installed and
resident on the hard disk will be the CAI control
software which shall include all necessary video
drivers, graphic fonts and processing software to be
compatible with the CAI software. A quick install
program is to be provided to allow easy installation
and configuration of additional lesson material. This
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 374
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity, electronics, electrical and microprocessor
training systems. The CAI Computer System shall be
mounted inside the bench's instrument console.
J.
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
an AT 286 or 386 type CPU system. The software package
is to be provided on floppy disks and installed on the
CAI Computer System's hard drive. The software package
can be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive
or on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software
Package shall contain experiments in the following
topics specifically for use with the electronics and
digital training systems that are provided and support
automatic analog and digital input and outputs with
processing programs with on screen graphics and
printouts:
Direct
Current,
Alternating
Current,
Filters,
Power
Control,
Transistors,
Amplifiers,
Operational Amplifiers, Opto-Electronics, Oscillators,
Telecommunications. Advanced electronic topics are to
be provided for in Digital logic, Sequential logic,
Digital
Systems,
D
and
A
Conversion,
and
Microprocessors This CAI sequence shall provide both
information
sheets,
experiments,
and
shall
have
provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
K.
CAI Printer
This printer is to provide direct compatibility with
CAI Computer System. The printer must accept an
industry standard Centronics Parallel printer cable as
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 375
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
its input, and contain a printer memory buffer of 32
kilobytes as a minimum. The printer shall provide for
both text and graphics mode of printing, with a minimum
column width of 80. The printer shall provide for near
letter quality output with a print head of 9 pins as a
minimum. The printer is to accept both form feed and
tractor fed paper. The printer shall be supplied on an
acrylic printer stand that shall allow for easy paper
handling as well as storage of additional paper below
the printer.
The printer shall have a built-in
diagnostic test mode and multiple fonts and the
internal control codes shall be compatible with all the
CAI software codes. The unit shall accommodate all the
CAI report formats, graphic print outs, and experiment
data print-outs and student progress printouts.
L.
Local Area Network
All of the CAI Computer Systems on the Student Stations
and the Instructor Station, Mobile are to be connected
via a local area network.
The network shall provide
for the sharing of computer resources such as a network
printer, network plotter and both local and remote hard
disks for file transfers. The network shall be based on
the netbios operating system and shall support both a
peer to peer and dedicated file server network. All
network communications shall be carried over standard
thin ethernet cable, supporting a sustained data
transfer rate of 10 MBps. The network hardware and
software shall support both IEEE 802.3 and 10BASET UTP
cabling. The network hardware shall be compatible with
specifications for Novell NetWare version 3.x or later.
Network software shall be installed and configured for
all fileservers and workstations installed on said
network. The software shall provide for password
security
restriction,
client
usage
tracking,
restriction by time or date, have a built in network
administration program for monitoring network usage as
well as for network diagnostics to solve problems
occurring by user or with the installed network
backbone. The network software shall provide for
network printers and support direct printer spooling to
conserve printing time. The software shall be supplied
on both 5 1/4" and 3 1/2" media, with installation and
operations manuals provided for network administrator
information.
M.
Occupational Prototype Kit
This kit is to be an accessory to the Electricity Electronics Training System and Digital Logic and
Applications Training System which provide the proper
power sources and system test capability. Kit shall
provide a breadboard capability for the learning of
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 376
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
occupational prototype skills using electronics and
solid-state circuits and integrated circuits. Unit
shall permit the student to work with the circuit
schematics and logic diagrams, with actual unmounted
components marked in the conventional industrial manner
and with component data sheets. The student prepares
the prototype card layout, makes pin assignments, wires
and tests the circuits. Circuits that can be tested
shall include amplifiers, oscillators, pulse and waveshaping circuits, industrial circuits, integrated
circuit digital counters, and digital control systems
as well as others. The Occupational Skills Trainer is
to include a prototype push-type solderless breadboard
card which accepts No. 22 gauge solid wire and
electronic component leads.
The card is to have a
standard 22 printed circuit finger connector, gold
plated with 0.156 inch spacing compatible with the
other training system connectors and a selection of
digital and linear integrated circuits, components
including resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors,
No. 22 gauge wires, pliers, wire stripper/cutter, and
descriptive written material and logic schematics and
specifications sheets. This trainer is to include over
50 hands-on student projects. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 8
N.
Student Tool Kit
This kit shall contain twenty tools frequently used in
Electronics. The tools are to be enclosed in a compact,
sturdy, plastic tool box with a carrying handle making
it completely portable. The tools shall permit the
student to undertake assembly and repair of electronic
circuits. The tool kit shall also have a 25 watt teller
soldering iron kit which includes a stand, protective
cover around the soldering iron, a sponge and a spare
replacement tip. A suction type desoldering tool and an
I.C. extractor are to be included to permit PC board
repairs. Other tools included shall be a set of
screwdrivers, cutters, strippers, nut drivers and
pliers which shall allow the student to perform the
mechanical tasks associated with electronics. A pair of
safety goggles shall also be provided for use when
performing mechanical jobs, soldering or desoldering.
The system is to include a manual describing the tools
and
is
to
be
compatible
with
the
associated
descriptions in the accompanying CAI package. QUANTITY
REQUIRED: 2
O.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including
software with full maintenance parts and
period of one (1) year with provision
commencing on the date of demonstration.
NYSCA
hardware and
service for a
for renewal,
Service shall
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 377
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
P.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Student Station installation at time agreed upon by the
Chairperson Of Technology of the school. Demonstration
shall be performed by a certified representative of the
manufacturer.
Q.
Manufacturers
Student Station complete with all of the individual
devices which constitute this station as listed above,
shall
be
Model
2120
of
CES
Industries,
Inc.,
Farmingdale, N.Y.
12.277B
A.
STUDENT STATION FOR DISABLED
General
Unit
shall
be
a
complete
training
station
to
accommodate two students with provision for disabled
students.
All
of
the
individual
devices
which
constitute this training system shall be as listed
below, together with detailed descriptions which
specify the minimum equipment types, quality and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance
standards to which any approved equal shall apply.
B.
Bench
Bench shall be composed of maple top, pedestal support
base, and three door instrument console as follows:
1.
NYSCA
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 378
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
C.
2.
Pedestal support legs and rear panel assembly
shall be 60 inches wide, 34 inches deep, and 32
inches high or as required for use by the
disabled. Construction shall be all wood, glue and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Submit shop
drawings.
3.
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match pedestal support legs. Mounting rails for
trainers are to have brass ferrules for machine
screw mounting. Service loops shall be provided
for easy servicing with power connected; all items
shall be removable from front. Security fasteners
and dividers shall be incorporated in the console
to secure the CAI computer, monitor and keyboard.
The keyboard shall be permanently mounted and all
items are to be locked in a covered and enclosed
console. The instrument console shall provide
secure storage for the Electricity - Electronics
Training System, Digital Logic and Applications
Training System, and CAI Computer System. Console
shall have three hinged plexiglass doors, each
with a masterkeyed lock. Design shall permit doors
to be individually opened to allow individual use
of electronics or digital trainers or CAI computer
or all items at the same time. Doors are not to be
removable from console during equipment operation.
Submit shop drawings.
4.
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the training systems. It shall include
the outlet strips and the junction boxes and
master power switches, separate lines for the
computer with spike suppression and fans for
movement of air for cooling the CAI Computer
System. The package shall also include accessory
power outlets within the console as well as
externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Electricity - Electronics Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
electricity
and
electronics
circuit
and
systems
educational trainer and program. All components used
for all experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 379
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
NYSCA
1.
Resistor Bank consisting of 5% resistors to be
standard values ranging from 2.5 ohms to 4.7
Megohms.
2.
Inductor Bank with Inductors suitable for radio
tuned circuits, filters and chokes. Two inductors
are to have mutual coupling. Inductor D.C. current
capability shall exceed the maximum current
available during experimentation for burn-out
protection. R.F. Transformer Inductor is to be
selected for use in the A.M. frequency band to be
slug-tuned with tapped coil and feedback winding.
R.F. Transformer coil winding to be capable of
carrying all current available during experiments.
3.
Potentiometer Bank ranging from 1K to 1 Megohm,
one-turn
style
with
position
markings
and
indicator knobs. To be hermetically sealed, 1/2
watt, with MIL spec reliability.
4.
Transistor
and
Solid-State
Component
Bank;
Germanium and Silicon, NPN and PNP transistors,
MOSFET, Field Effect
Transistor, Unijunction
Transistor,
Silicon
Controlled
Rectifiers,
Germanium and Silicon Diodes, Zener, Varactor,
Diac, and Triac.
5.
Five switches including one Momentary and four
toggle types. Four incandescent lamps and one LED
are mounted on the panel.
6.
Built-in Function Generator on the panel with
Sine, Square and Triangle waveforms outputs,
Outputs to be simultaneously available. Sine
amplitude to be adjustable and to include high-low
ranges.
The frequency is to be calibrated and
continuously variable form 1 Hz to 100KHz in five
ranges and is also voltage controllable; VCO. The
voltage controllable range is to extend to 150kHz.
7.
Built-in Operational Amplifier with differential
inputs and high gain, internally adjusted offset
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 380
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
null, and with differential input and output pins
to be available.
NYSCA
8.
Built-in Power Amplifier with complementary class
B output is mounted on the panel with input and
output jacks.
9.
Built-in Power Supplies with Six Positive and
Negative fixed and variable DC power sources as
well as an AC power source is to be provided on
the panel.
Supplies are to be regulated and
current limited and burn-out protected.
10.
Built-in Analog Multimeter on the panel with 50
microampere sensitivity and with inputs for 50
microamps; shunts for 5ma, 10ma, 50ma, 100ma, and
0.5 volts, 5 volts, 10 volts, and 50 volt scales.
Meter movement is fully protected with diodes to
prevent damage to meter movement from incorrect
connection to any trainer voltages. AC voltmeter
inputs for AC power experiments and high impedance
input or AC range filter experiments. The analog
voltmeter response is to be flat to the full 150
kHz range and beyond. The meter must be analog to
demonstrate analog operation of voltage and
current and resistance meters.
11.
Integrated Circuit Socket for dual-in-line 14 or
16 pin ICs, 7 Pin Miniature Tube Socket, and 22
pin Printed Circuit Card Socket for system
expansion or PC Cards for Prototype projects and
repair experiments.
12.
Photocell to be permanently mounted on the panel
for security and ease of operation.
13.
An array of banana jacks is to be included for use
with any desired external plug-in breadboard
components.
14.
Combination Earphone-Microphone
speaker are to be provided.
15.
A buzzer is mounted on the panel and operates
from any of the DC sources.
16.
Topical material within each manual set is to
include Basics and DC Circuits, AC circuits,
Rectifiers,
Transistor
Amplifiers,
Industrial
Control Circuits, Digital and Integrated Circuits,
Tubes and Special Semi-conductors, Pulse Circuits
and Waveshaping, Integrated Circuits, Operational
Amplifiers and Instrumentation, Telecommunication,
and other topics. The manuals are to contain over
plus
an
8
ohm
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 381
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
300 individual experiments and are to include
information sheets. Certain experiments require
the use of optional modules which plug into the PC
card connector. One set of manuals is to be
provided with each unit.
NYSCA
17.
The hardware for experiments and accompanying
software is to cover all the electrical and
electronics topics for the full course including
Introduction
to
electronics,
exploratory
electronics,
DC
circuits
and
laws,
DC
measurements, DC calculations and circuits, DC
network
theory,
basic
and
advanced
DC,
introduction to ac, AC Components, AS Voltages and
Frequency, AC Measurements and Laws, inductors,
capacitors, transformers, RCL circuit resonance,
filters, L and C meter, frequency meter operation,
magnetism
and
BH
curves,
introduction
to
semiconductors, diodes , FET, UJT, Bipolars, SCR,
Zener, Diac, Triac, Automatic characteristic
curves, circuits, amplifiers, voltage amplifiers,
Class
A,
B,
AB,
and
C
power
amplifiers,
Operational
amplifier
basics,
operational
amplifier applications, Thyristor applications,
power
supplies,
regulated
power
supplies,
oscillators, intro to radio, am, fm, spectrum,
heterodyning,
sampling,
telecommunications,
multiplexing,
pam,
pwm,
analog
and
digital
conversion, digital codes, correction codes, push
pull transformer and complementary amplifiers, fm
discriminators, phase locked loops. Panel is to be
1/8" thick aluminum, painted with baked-on enamel
and marked clearly with epoxy type paint for silk
screen
symbols
and
lettering.
Parts
interconnection is to be accomplished using full
size
stacking banana jacks
for multiple
connections to a single point. The trainer is to
be mounted inside a console as
specified. The
equipment shall be designed to operate again any
physical or electrical damage to any components
including the semiconductors even with incorrect
wiring by the student.
18.
The trainer shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
19.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 382
05/14/04
D.
DESIGN NO. _____
Analog CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
connections required to interface the Electricity Electronics Training System with the CAI Computer
System. The system is to include the installation and
marking and cabling of the banana jacks to accommodate
data bus connections of digital data to enable two
simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow outputs of 16 bits
of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of address. One of
the busses shall be a bidirectional data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices. All bus lines shall
have isolation protection against damage to the trainer
and to the computer due to any incorrect wiring by the
student. In addition to the digital data lines, analog
data lines for incoming and outgoing data between the
computer shall also be provided. This shall include
the full size banana jack connections to high speed
analog to digital converters and digital to analog
converters together with the internal cabling and the
external connector and cable from the trainer to the
computer. The modifications to the trainer shall also
include the circuitry and installation
required to
accommodate computer connections and operation of the
computer as a DC voltmeter, ohmmeter, and AC high
impedance input voltmeter with AC voltmeter range to
150 kHz linear operation, and for connections so that
the computer can be used as a meter or an oscilloscope
with a floating ground and variable DC voltage levels.
The hardware and software allow for operation as an LC
meter and a frequency counter. The frequency generator
circuitry within the trainer shall be modified to
provide a linear operation of frequency output which
can be controlled by the computer DC output so that
automatic computer frequency response plotting can be
achieved. An input push button switch capability shall
be provided so that the student can manually signal the
computer or the instructor or step any of the CAI
instructions or programs as required. Various capacitor
and inductor components shall be replaced with higher
accuracy
devices
to
allow
for
closer
computer
calculations when compared to the marked values. All
of this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
E.
Digital Logic and Applications Training System
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
digital logic and applications systems educational
trainer and program. All components used for all
experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 383
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Components
and features provided shall include the following:
NYSCA
1.
A two digit LED display, a hexadecimal keyboard,
and circuit elements, including: Flip-Flops, AND
gates, NAND gates, NOR gates, OR and Exclusive OR
gates, Inverters (NOT), Single Shot with variable
width control input and with positive and negative
trigger capability, Very High, High and Low Speed
Clock with variable frequency electronically
controllable
to
achieve
automatic
frequency
control,
Digital
to
Analog
Converter,
Comparator/Operational Amplifier with power stage,
Emitter Follower with Voltage hold capability,
Diodes,
Resistors,
Switches,
Lamps,
Potentiometers, short circuit proof I.C. Power
source with positive and negative voltages for
external Integrated Circuits connections, P.C.
Card
Socket,
Line
Frequency
Clock,
Zener
Controlled Reference Voltage. The hexadecimal
keyboard has tri-state binary outputs, Enable,
Strobe and Delayed strobe control signals permit
keyboard interfacing to external circuits.
2.
Each Digital Logic Lab is to be furnished with two
manuals and a set of connection leads, a set of
loose components (including TTL, CMOS, linear and
timer ICs) which can be plugged into the IC socket
to run additional experiments. These elements and
the manual are to provide experiments in Digital
Logic, Digital Arithmetic, Analog and Digital
Conversion Systems, and Digital Solid-State and IC
Circuitry and Digital Frequency Control. The
student manual is to include experiments in:
Digital concepts and gates, number systems,
clocks, memory and registers, displays, keyboards,
problem
solving,
integrated
circuits,
troubleshooting, Boolean Algebra, theorems and
mapping,
adders,
analog
and
digital
representations, flip-flops, debouncing, glitches,
propagation delays, counters, registers, fourtrace display, digital probe and pulser, A to D
Conversion, digital music synthesizer, digital
voltmeter,
pulse
code
transmission,
multiplexed/scanned display, encoders/decoders,
multiplexers/demultiplexers,
memory
ICs,
arithmetic accumulators, bidirectional data bus,
tri-state devices, frequency counter,
digital
phase shift modem, alpha-numeric display on
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 384
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
oscilloscope and others. The unit shall be
compatible with the Microprocessor Module and to
demonstrate
microprocessor
applications
and
detailed logic implementation.
A complete
programmable microcomputer can be built with this
unit
and
the
Microprocessor
Module.
The
microcomputer shall be keyboard programmable to
run experiments in interfacing, programming and
troubleshooting.
F.
3.
All integrated circuits shall be mounted in
sockets so that any faulty ICs can be replaced by
the school. Panel is to be 1/8" thick aluminum,
painted with baked-on enamel and marked clearly
with epoxy paint for silk screen symbols and
lettering.
Parts interconnection is to be
accomplished using full size banana leads and
jacks. Additional stacking full size banana leads
are also to be provided for multiple connections
to a single point.
4.
The trainer shall
instrument console.
5.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the unit at the school and
promptly return the unit to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
be
mounted
inside
bench's
Digital CAI Interface
This unit shall provide the circuitry, cabling and
interconnections required to interface the Digital
Logic and Applications Training System with the CAI
Computer System. The system is to include the
installation and marking and cabling of the banana
jacks to accommodate data bus connections of digital
data to enable two simultaneous 8 bit outputs to allow
16 bits of data or 8 bits of data and 8 bits of
address. One of the busses shall be a bidirectional
data bus to allow
interconnections to other devices
that use a matching protocol. All bus lines shall have
protection against damage to the trainer and to the
computer due to any incorrect wiring by the student. In
addition to the digital data lines, analog data lines
for incoming and outgoing data between the computer
shall also be provided. This shall include the full
size banana jack connections to high speed analog to
digital converters and digital to analog converters
together with the internal cabling and the external
connector and cable from the trainer to the computer.
The modifications to the trainer shall also include the
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 385
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
addition of precision 8 bit digital to analog and
analog to digital converters to be used in input output
control experiments where all digital and analog and
control signal wires shall be available on the panel at
banana jacks. There shall be no damage due to incorrect
wiring. Also to be added is a power amplifier to drive
precision servo motors directly with positive and
negative voltages in order that the motors can
be
operated in both directions. An input push button
switch capability shall be provided so that the student
can signal the computer or the instructor or step any
of the CAI instructions or programs as required. All of
this circuitry shall be protected against damage by
incorrect wiring.
G.
Test Equipment
1.
NYSCA
Dual
Trace
Oscilloscope
following features:
shall
include
the
a.
Vertical Deflection: Bandwidth: DC to 20 MHz,
- 3 dB 5mv/div to 5V/div (at 8 div) AC 10Hz
to 20 MHz-3dB. Rinse Time: 17.5 n sec, 70 n
sec for 1mv/Div-2mv/div. Input Voltage: 500V
p-p or 300 V p-p (DC +AC peak at 1 KHz).
Input Coupling: AC, GND, DC (lever switch).
Input Impedance:
Direct; 1 m and 28 pf.
Operating Modes: CH-1, CH-2, ALT, CHOP, ADD,
CH-2 invert. X-Y Operation: CH-1 X-axis, CH-2
Y axis. Sensitivity: 1 mv/cm to 5V/cm Phase
Difference: Within 3 degrees, DC to 50 Khz.
Output: Buffered CH-1 output for external
measurements.
b.
Horizontal Deflection: Trigger Modes: Auto,
Normal, TV-F, TV-L Trigger Source: Internal
(CH-1, CH-2, V-Mode), Line, Ext. Trigger
Coupling: AC TV Sync: TV sync separation
circuit. Trigger slope: + or -.
External
Trigger Input: Impedance - 1M and 35 pF,
maximum voltage 150 V P-P. Sweep Time: 0.5
sec/cm to 0.2 sec/cm + 3% in 20 calibrated
steps.
Continuous control between steps.
Sweep Time Magnifier: 10 times. Maximum Sweep
Time: 100 ns/cm.
c.
Internal Calibrator: Waveform: 1 KHz Square
wave. Voltage: 1V P-P + 3%.
Z-axis
(intensity modulation)
Input level: TTL
compatible.
Size;
6
inch
rectangular,
internal graticule, with % calibrations and
photographic bezel. Acceleration Potential:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 386
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2 KV
Trace Alignment:
rotation control.
2.
NYSCA
Front
panel
trace
d.
Power Requirement: AC
Approximately 29 watts.
100/120/220/240
V,
e.
Supplied Accessories: Two Switchable X / X10
probes. One Instruction Manual.The system
shall include a series of Computer Aided
Instructions specifically related to the
front panel configuration of the oscilloscope
coupled to the trainer
panel layout and
drawings,
showing
interconnections
of
experiments
and
operation
for
student
experiments.
The Digital Multimeter shall be a self- contained
multimeter with a 3 1/2 digit liquid crystal
display. The meter shall be protected from both
overload and overcurrent by a suitable, user
replaceable safety device. The meter shall provide
for seven user functions which are to include DC
Voltage, DC Current, AC Voltage, AC Current,
Resistance, Diode and Transistor Testing and
Audible continuity.
For each of the functions
described the following ranges and accuracies
shall be provided.
For DC Voltage, the meter
shall have the following ranges 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V,
200 V, and 1000 volts. Accuracy for the DC ranges
shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For AC
Voltage, the meter shall have the following ranges
200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 750 volts. Accuracy
for the AC ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For DC Current, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and
2 Amps, and 10 Amps
Accuracy for the DC current
ranges shall be .5% of the reading + 1 digit. For
AC Current, the meter shall have the following
ranges 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, and 2 Amps,
and 10 Amps 1000 volts.
Accuracy for the DC
current ranges shall be 1% of the reading + 3
digits. For resistance, the meter shall have the
following ranges 200 ohms, 2K ohms, 20 K ohms 200
K ohms, 2 Meg ohms and 20 Meg ohms. Accuracy for
the Resistance ranges shall be 0.5% of the reading
+ 1 digit. The diode test function of the meter
shall
provide
testing
for
all
types
of
semiconductor diodes as well as diode junctions of
transistors. The meter shall provide an open
circuit voltage of 3.2 Volts and the test current
shall not exceed 0.1 mA. The audible continuity
test shall provide an open circuit test voltage of
3.2 V maximum, with a test current not to exceed
0.2 mA. The meter shall have a threshold to signal
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 387
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
continuity not exceeding 30 ohms. This unit is to
be identical in panel configuration to the display
on the CAI software package. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 2
H.
NYSCA
Modules
1.
The Servo-Motor Tach Module shall be an accessory
to the Electricity - Electronics training System.
This unit shall include a servo motor geared to a
tacho-generator unit. The servo motor is to be
driven from the power supply in the Electricity Electronics Training System. Servo Motor-Tach
Module is to interface with the 22 pin P.C.
connector in the training system. Experiments are
to
cover
motor
speed
control,
tachometer
calibration, servo motor drives, open loop speed
control, closed loop speed control, and motor
generator operation.
2.
Servo Motor-Potentiometer Module shall be an
accessory to the Electricity - Electronic Training
System. This unit shall be a Servo-Motor geared to
a continuously rotating potentiometer to provide
experiments in servo position control.
The unit
is to be a card mounted with a 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the Electricity Electronics
Training
System.
Electricity
Electronics Training System components shall be
used to implement the electronics for the control
systems.
The experiments shall cover motor
control, potentiometer position calibration, open
loop position control, and closed loop position
control with demonstration of variations in
amplifier characteristics affecting oscillations
and stability including proportional, integral and
differential control.
3.
CAI Interfacing Module shall be a complex
interfacing module which is inserted into a PC
expansion bus and consists of analog and digital
input and output devices so that the computer can
interface with the outside world, including the
training systems. The module shall provide for two
output data buses where one of the buses operates
as a bidirectional data bus. All circuits shall
provide buffering so that any incorrect external
connections will not damage the interface module
or the computer and so that random short circuits
will not affect the operation of the computer. The
module shall also contain high-speed analog to
digital and digital to analog converters together
with buffer amplifiers and scaling amplifiers. An
additional analog input multiplexing capability
and circuitry shall be provided. Address decoding
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 388
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
circuitry shall be included together with switch
selectable address field capability. All PC finger
contacts shall be gold plated to retard corrosion
and poor contact problems. The dual data buss
outputs shall be available on individual latches
to allow long cable runs for all high speed
parallel data at the full computer bus speed.
Filtering shall be provided at the analog inputs
to suppress and input noise or interchannel noise
from the digital lines to the analog lines. The
system inputs and outputs and software shall
incorporate digital lines to accommodate student
remote control of the computer and to provide
computer output control to fault circuitry inside
the
trainers
so
that
the
computer
can
automatically control any faults. There shall also
be provided a minimum of 5 spare lines to
accommodate any future control or communication
interconnections that may be desired between the
trainer and the computer or between the trainers
themselves. This system shall be compatible with
the Electricity - Electronics Training System and
the Digital Logic and Applications Training System
and all other trainers that use the banana jack
configurations. The unit is to be compatible with
386 and 486 based computer configurations.
NYSCA
4.
Microprocessor
Training
Module
shall
be
an
accessory to the Digital Logic and Applications
Training System. Unit shall consist of a plug in
module compatible with the printed circuit card
connectors on the training system. This unit is to
include the Microprocessor, Solid-State Memory,
Input Data Port and an 8 bit DMA Address Counter.
Address and data lines are to be connected on the
module and to the P.C. Card fingers compatible
with the internal connections on the training
system.
This module is to provide all the
additional hardware needed to build a complete
Microcomputer System using the training system.
The system is to include a student manual with
experiments on all aspects of microcomputer
operations and programming.
5.
Audio Transformer Module an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit be
glass epoxy printed circuit card, 22 pin P.C.
connector compatible with the printed circuit
receptacle on the training system. Module shall
contain
two
Audio
Transformers
mounted
and
connected so the primary and two secondaries of
each transformer are available at the connector
pins. These Audio Transformers are to be used to
build Audio Amplifiers, Push-Pull Amplifiers, to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 389
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
study
Impedance
Matching,
and
Transformers
for
Industrial
experimentation.
NYSCA
as
Pulse
Electronics
6.
Relay Module shall be an accessory to the
Electricity - Electronics Training System. Unit
shall
be
Printed
Circuit
Mounted
Double
Pole/Double Throw Relay with Gold Plated P.C.
connector compatible with the P.C. connector on
the training system. Relay coil is to be designed
for drive from the training system power supply
and from the semiconductor outputs available from
the training system. Relay coil is to be provided
with circuitry to prevent high voltage Back EMF
from being developed to protect all semiconductors
on the model Electricity - Electronics Training
System from burn-out during switching.
Unit is
also to provide POWER OUTPUT jacks for the
operation of High Power AC Circuits. The module is
to cover student experiments on relay operation
and applications.
7.
Superheterodyne Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector designed to fit the
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Unit shall contain the tuning capacitor,
oscillator coil, I.F. transformers, and antenna
loop stick, required for fabrication of a
Superheterodyne AM Receiver. When used with the
Electricity - Electronics Training System, the
module shall permit, the student to wire,
troubleshoot, align, and operate a working AM
Superhet Receiver. Student Lab manuals and CAI
software shall accompany this unit with theory and
lab experiments.
8.
FM Communications Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be a glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connectors compatible with the
printed
receptacle
on
the
training
system.
Mounted on this card with all pins available at
the P.C. connector shall be the FM Ratio
Detector/Discriminator
Transformer,
I.F.
Transformer, and Citizen Band Crystal and singlesideband circuit. These components are to be used
in the FM Receiver experiments.
9.
Power Transformer Module shall be an accessory to
the Electricity - Electronics Training System.
Module shall be glass epoxy printed circuit card
with 22 pin P.C. connector compatible with the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 390
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
printed circuit card receptacle on the training
system. Components mounted on this card shall
include two 60Hz transformers with center tapped
secondary with all connections available at the
P.C. card connectors.
Transformers are to be
compatible with the training system experiments,
DC to AC Inverter experiments, AC to DC Converter
experiments, Saturable Reactor, and Industrial
Electronics experiments.
I.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The unit is to be installed, and
formatted to be consistent with the CAI software and
hardware training system including compensation for the
real time timing circuit, scale factors required and
the memory allocation tables set to be compatible with
the software.
The CAI Computer System shall include
the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time SCSI-2 bit controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 391
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a MSDOS Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest
release, Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a
Microsoft Windows compatible word processing
package, plus interface and applications software
and manuals. Installed and resident on the hard
disk will be the CAI control software which shall
include all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts
and processing software to be compatible with the
CAI software. A quick install
program is to be
provided
to
allow
easy
installation
and
configuration of additional lesson material. This
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity,
electronics,
electrical
and
microprocessor training systems. The CAI Computer
System shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
J.
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
an AT 286 or 386 type CPU system. The software package
is to be provided on floppy disks and installed on the
CAI Computer System's hard drive. The software package
can be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive
or on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software
Package shall contain experiments in the following
topics specifically for use with the electronics and
digital training systems that are provided and support
automatic analog and digital input and outputs with
processing programs with on screen graphics and
printouts:
Direct
Current,
Alternating
Current,
Filters,
Power
Control,
Transistors,
Amplifiers,
Operational Amplifiers, Opto-Electronics, Oscillators,
Telecommunications. Advanced electronic topics are to
be provided for in Digital logic, Sequential logic,
Digital
Systems,
D
and
A
Conversion,
and
Microprocessors This CAI sequence shall provide both
information
sheets,
experiments,
and
shall
have
provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 392
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
K.
CAI Printer
This printer is to provide direct compatibility with
CAI Computer System. The printer must accept an
industry standard Centronics Parallel printer cable as
its input, and contain a printer memory buffer of 32
kilobytes as a minimum. The printer shall provide for
both text and graphics mode of printing, with a minimum
column width of 80. The printer shall provide for near
letter quality output with a print head of 9 pins as a
minimum. The printer is to accept both form feed and
tractor fed paper. The printer shall be supplied on an
acrylic printer stand that shall allow for easy paper
handling as well as storage of additional paper below
the printer.
The printer shall have a built-in
diagnostic test mode and multiple fonts and the
internal control codes shall be compatible with all the
CAI software codes. The unit shall accommodate all the
CAI report formats, graphic print outs, and experiment
data print-outs and student progress printouts.
L.
Local Area Network
All of the CAI Computer Systems on the Student Stations
and the Instructor Station, Mobile are to be connected
via a local area network.
The network shall provide
for the sharing of computer resources such as a network
printer, network plotter and both local and remote hard
disks for file transfers. The network shall be based on
the netbios operating system and shall support both a
peer to peer and dedicated file server network. All
network communications shall be carried over standard
thin ethernet cable, supporting a sustained data
transfer rate of 10 MBps. The network hardware and
software shall support both IEEE 802.3 and 10BASET UTP
cabling. The network hardware shall be compatible with
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 393
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
specifications for Novell NetWare version 3.x or later.
Network software shall be installed and configured for
all fileservers and workstations installed on said
network. The software shall provide for password
security
restriction,
client
usage
tracking,
restriction by time or date, have a built in network
administration program for monitoring network usage as
well as for network diagnostics to solve problems
occurring by user or with the installed network
backbone. The network software shall provide for
network printers and support direct printer spooling to
conserve printing time. The software shall be supplied
on both 5 1/4" and 31/2" media, with installation and
operations manuals provided for network administrator
information.
M.
Occupational Prototype Kit
This kit is to be an accessory to the Electricity Electronics Training System and Digital Logic and
Applications Training System which provide the proper
power sources and system test capability. Kit shall
provide a breadboard capability for the learning of
occupational prototype skills using electronics and
solid-state circuits and integrated circuits. Unit
shall permit the student to work with the circuit
schematics and logic diagrams, with actual unmounted
components marked in the conventional industrial manner
and with component data sheets. The student prepares
the prototype card layout, makes pin assignments, wires
and tests the circuits. Circuits that can be tested
shall include amplifiers, oscillators, pulse and waveshaping circuits, industrial circuits, integrated
circuit digital counters, and digital control systems
as well as others. The Occupational Skills Trainer is
to include a prototype push-type solderless breadboard
card which accepts No. 22 gauge solid wire and
electronic component leads.
The card is to have a
standard 22 printed circuit finger connector, gold
plated with 0.156 inch spacing compatible with the
other training system connectors and a selection of
digital and linear integrated circuits, components
including resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors,
No. 22 gauge wires, pliers, wire stripper/cutter, and
descriptive written material and logic schematics and
specifications sheets. This trainer is to include over
50 hands-on student projects. QUANTITY REQUIRED: 8
N.
Student Tool Kit
This kit shall contain twenty tools frequently used in
Electronics. The tools are to be enclosed in a compact,
sturdy, plastic tool box with a carrying handle making
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 394
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
it completely portable. The tools shall permit the
student to undertake assembly and repair of electronic
circuits. The tool kit shall also have a 25 watt teller
soldering iron kit which includes a stand, protective
cover around the soldering iron, a sponge and a spare
replacement tip. A suction type desoldering tool and an
I.C. extractor are to be included to permit PC board
repairs. Other tools included shall be a set of
screwdrivers, cutters, strippers, nut drivers and
pliers which shall allow the student to perform the
mechanical tasks associated with electronics. A pair of
safety goggles shall also be provided for use when
performing mechanical jobs, soldering or desoldering.
The system is to include a manual describing the tools
and
is
to
be
compatible
with
the
associated
descriptions in the accompanying CAI package. QUANTITY
REQUIRED: 2
O.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
P.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Student Station For Disabled installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school. Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
Q.
Manufacturers
Student Station For Disabled complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this station as
listed above, shall be Model 2120H of CES Industries,
Inc., Farmingdale, N.Y.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 395
05/14/04
12.278A
A.
DESIGN NO. _____
MICROCOMPUTER STATION
General
The Microcomputer Applications Station shall provide
for
comprehensive
coverage
and
learning
in
microcomputer
interfacing,
operation,
practices,
literacy, applications and maintenance as well as
supporting,
with
hardware
and
software,
other
microcomputer requirements in the shop or lab which may
include
robotics
control
including
control
of
associated peripheral devices, CAD/CAM, CADD, circuit
design and simulation, as well as any other applicable
data processing. Unit shall be a complete training
station to accommodate two students. All of the
individual devices which constitute this training
system shall be as listed below, together with detailed
descriptions which specify the minimum equipment types,
quality
and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance standards to which any approved equal shall
apply.
B.
Bench
Bench shall be composed of maple top, two base
cabinets, and three door instrument console as follows:
NYSCA
1.
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
2.
Base cabinet assembly shall be composed of two
each Four drawer cabinets. Construction shall be
all wood, glue and metal fastened with high
pressure laminate cover on all exposed surfaces
and edges. Drawers to be mounted on extension
slides and top drawer to be set 5" down from top
of cabinet for full and easy access when open,
without interference from table top overhang in
front. Drawer Cabinets shall have masterkeyed lock
on each drawer. Cabinets shall have recessed kick
panel at the bottom, 2" D x 4" H.
Table Top
height is to be 36-3/4", compatible with sitting
or standing. Overall dimensions of each cabinet
shall be 19" W x 25 1/2" D x 35" H. Submit shop
drawings.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 396
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match base cabinet and pedestal support leg.
Mounting rails for trainers are to have brass
ferrules for machine screw mounting. Service loops
shall be provided for easy servicing with power
connected; all items shall be removable from
front. Security fasteners and dividers shall be
incorporated in the console to secure the CAI
computer, monitor and keyboard. The keyboard shall
be permanently mounted and all items are to be
locked in a covered and enclosed console. The
instrument console shall provide secure storage
for the Microcomputer Station and CAI Computer
System. Console shall have three hinged plexiglass
doors, each with a masterkeyed lock. Design shall
permit doors to be individually opened to allow
individual use of electronics or digital trainers
or CAI computer or all items at the same time.
Doors are not to be removable from console during
equipment operation. Submit shop drawings.
4.
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the trainers. It shall include the
outlet strips and the junction boxes and master
power switches, separate lines for the computer
with spike suppression and fans for movement of
air for cooling the Microcomputer Station and CAI
Computer System. The package shall also include
accessory power outlets within the console as well
as externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Microcomputer
1.
NYSCA
Station
The Microcomputer Systems Interfacing Trainer
shall be designed to provide training in the
concepts, operation, installation and interfacing
of microcomputers. It is to consist of a standard
AT 486DX CPU system including full keyboard,
display SVGA color monitor, memory with 8 Mbyte
RAM, control, arithmetic unit, a 5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte
floppy disk drive, a 3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk
drive, a 340 Mbyte hard disk, and an interface
systems panel. The software is to include a MS-DOS
Disk Operating System and BASIC plus interface and
applications software and manuals. The interface
panel is to contain full-size professional banana
jack connections to the three computer buses for
interface and test purposes. The panel and system
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 397
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
is to be compatible with both a standard IBM PC
XT, AT computer. Also mounted on the panel are to
be two 44 pin PC connectors with associated full
size banana jacks for interconnection to external
PC cards for various optional applications. The
interface and test connections and all devices on
the panel are to be designed to protect the system
and
computer
against
damage
due
to
any
interconnections that can be made on the panel or
to exposed IC pins. The following other mounted
logic elements are included on the panel and are
also all protected against damage by any wiring
that can be made by the student on the panel or to
any exposed IC pins;
a data bus directional
buffer and input port, an address decoder, a tristate 8 bit latch, 8 bit D to A and A to D tristate converters, 18 logic elements including ORs,
Inventors, NANDs, tri-state drivers, Flip-Flops,
and 2 op-amps, two digit hex display, optical
sensor, dual direction traffic light simulator,
peripheral connector for use with a printer cable,
16 address toggle switches, 8 data toggle
switches, 4 extra toggle switches and 2 momentary
switches. The system shall be able to be connected
to other trainers such as the Electricity Electronics Training System and Digital Logic and
Applications Training System specified in Ref. No.
12.277A of this section. The system shall be
capable of peripheral control of external optional
items such as the robots, printers, voice
synthesizers, and AC controllers. The system is to
include the necessary cables, accessories, plus
experiment manuals, and disk software. The panel
is to be a one-eighth inch aluminum panel, size 13
1/2 by 22 1/2 inches, with professional quality
full size banana jacks and mounted in a wooden
console with high pressure laminate covering. All
components are to be protected behind the panel.
2.
NYSCA
Printer Interfacing Trainer shall consist of a
dot-matrix printer using the Centronics-type
parallel interface and is designed to be used for
general purpose use and for troubleshooting
purposes. The printer shall have 4 non-destructive
faults installed, which when combined with the
printer repair troubleshooting manual, simulate 4
of the most common problems associated with the
dot matrix printer. As supplied, the printer is to
function as a normal 9 pin, near letter quality
printer for use with the Microcomputer Systems
Interfacing Trainer. Provide with the printer a
supply of paper, plastic printer stand, ribbon and
dust cover.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 398
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
NYSCA
Diagnostic and Maintenance package of materials
shall
be
provided
to
enable
the
periodic
maintenance and diagnostics for hardware and
software problems for all computers in the
laboratory or shop. This package shall include the
following items:
a.
Checking Program to analyze all parts of the
computer including the control, arithmetic,
and ROM and RAM IC memories as well as the
hard drive, memory drivers and peripheral
subsystems. This shall include both on screen
and hard copy data presentation.
b.
Logic Hardware diagnostic card and test ROM
shall be provided in order to test all the
hardware with out the necessity for having
proper functioning disk drives or hard drive,
monitor, keyboard.
A display on the card
shall present an alphanumeric code which is
keyed to a manual that indicates locations of
IC's.
c.
Maintenance Program shall be included which
is to provide the ability to recover
defective, damaged, erased or deleted files.
Maintenance
Program
shall
be
Norton
Utilities.
d.
Diagnostic Program shall be included to
provide the ability to recover, reformat,
maintain, organize, and diagnose hard disk
subsystem problems. Diagnostic Program shall
be PCTools.
4.
Troubleshooting Package is to include a complete
set of tools, probes, and other test devices and
spare parts and cables required to teach standard
troubleshooting practices and to be able to
support the maintenance and repair of computers in
the shop or laboratory as well as other computers.
The spare parts are to include at least one set of
all the replaceable major components. Provisions
for instructor insurable simulated faults shall be
included.
5.
Disk Drive Alignment Trainer shall be a disk drive
exerciser and alignment trainer for testing,
troubleshooting, and aligning all popular size
floppy disk drives in order to teach the operation
and function of the disk drive system.
6.
EPROM Programming Trainer shall be a completely
operational EPROM/EEPROM programming unit with
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 399
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
reading, writing, editing hardware and software
ability for the PC industry standard EPROM/EEPROM
family. Included in the package shall be an
ultraViolet EPROM erasing unit.
D.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The system is to be installed,
and formatted to be consistent with the CAI software
and hardware training system including compensation for
the real time timing circuit, scale factors required
for the memory to be compatible with the software. The
CAI Computer System shall include the following
features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 400
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a MSDOS Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest
release, Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a
Microsoft Windows compatible word processing
package, plus interface and applications software
and manuals. Installed and resident on the hard
disk will be the CAI control software which shall
include all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts
and processing software to be compatible with the
CAI software. A quick install
program is to be
provided
to
allow
easy
installation
and
configuration of additional lesson material. This
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity,
electronics,
electrical
and
microprocessor training systems. The CAI Computer
System shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
E.
CAI Interfacing Module
Unit shall be a complex interfacing module which is
inserted into a PC expansion
bus and consists of
analog and digital input and output devices so that the
computer can interface with the outside world,
including the training systems. The module shall
provide for two output data buses where one of the
buses operates as a bidirectional data bus. All
circuits shall provide buffering so that any incorrect
external connections will not damage the interface
module or the computer and so that random short
circuits will not affect the operation of the computer.
The module shall also contain high-speed analog to
digital and digital to analog converters together with
buffer amplifiers and scaling amplifiers. An additional
analog input multiplexing capability and circuitry
shall be provided. Address decoding circuitry shall be
included together with switch selectable address field
capability. All PC finger contacts shall be gold plated
to retard corrosion and poor contact problems. The dual
data buss outputs shall be available on individual
latches to allow long cable runs for all high speed
parallel data at the full computer bus speed. Filtering
shall be provided at the analog inputs to suppress and
input noise or interchannel noise from the digital
lines to the analog lines. The system inputs and
outputs and software shall incorporate digital lines to
accommodate student remote control of the computer and
to provide computer output control to fault circuitry
inside
the
trainers
so
that
the
computer
can
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 401
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
automatically control any faults. There shall also be
provided a minimum of 5 spare lines to accommodate any
future control or communication interconnections that
may be desired between the trainer and the computer or
between the trainers themselves. This system shall be
compatible with the Electricity - Electronics Training
System and the Digital Logic and Applications Training
System specified in Ref. No. 12.277A of this section
and all other trainers that use the banana jack
configurations. The unit is to be compatible with 386
and 486 based computer configurations.
F.
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
an AT 286 or 386 type CPU system. The software package
is to be provided on floppy disks and installed on the
CAI Computer System's hard drive. The software package
can be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive
or on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software
Package shall contain experiments in the following
topics specifically for use with the electronics and
digital training systems that are provided and support
automatic analog and digital input and outputs with
processing programs with on screen graphics and
printouts:
Direct
Current,
Alternating
Current,
Filters,
Power
Control,
Transistors,
Amplifiers,
Operational Amplifiers, Opto-Electronics, Oscillators,
Telecommunications. Advanced electronic topics are to
be provided for in Digital logic, Sequential logic,
Digital
Systems,
D
and
A
Conversion,
and
Microprocessors This CAI sequence shall provide both
information
sheets,
experiments,
and
shall
have
provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 402
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
G.
Electro-Mechanical Control Training System
1.
The Robotics Trainer is to provide for student
experiments in the concepts, components, and usage
of robotics. Trainer design shall permit student
to interconnect all interfacing to experience a
wide
variety
of
applications
in
sensing,
manipulating and control. The system is to be
compatible with CAI descriptions and identical in
pictures and operational instructions. This system
is to include a Manipulator Arm (Robot), and
student
and
instructor
experiment
manuals.
Manipulator Arm (Robot) shall be a five-jointed
mechanical arm with (hand) gripper for robot
experiments. Each joint is to be controlled by a
stepper motor mounted on the body. Lifting
capacity of the hand shall be at least 8 ounces
when fully extended and at least 16 ounces when
half extended, and with maximum opening of 3
inches. A Switch Sensor is to be coupled to the
hand to sense closed position and to indicate when
the item has been gripped. Gripping force is to be
3 pounds maximum. Motors shall include Base (+90,
-90 degrees), Shoulder or Abduction (+144, -35
degrees), Elbow or Extension (+0, -149 degrees),
Wrist Pitch or Extension (+90, -90 degrees), and
Hand Gripper or Grasp, (+0, -3 inches). The unit
shall include the Manipulator Arm, the Power
Supply for the stepper motors, an operation manual
and
a
student
experiment
manual
providing
exercises in Robot control . Computer control of
the
arm
is
to
be
done
through
a
RS232
communications port. A teach pendant shall be
provided in a hand-held computer format designed
for path programming.
2.
Interfacing
Peripheral
Package
shall
be
a
selection of electro-mechanical devices including
a rotary table, a mechanical slide table, gravity
feeder,
conveyer
belt,
optical
sensors,
mechanical sensors, thermal sensors, and other
devices which can be controlled by computers.
H.
Installer
support
shall
be
provided
for
all
computer/network operation with a toll-free, 8 hour, 5
day availability.
I.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 403
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
J.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full
Microcomputer Station installation at
by the Chairperson Of Technology
Demonstration shall be performed
representative of the manufacturer.
K.
demonstration of
time agreed upon
of the school.
by a certified
Manufacturers
Microcomputer Station complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this station as
listed above, shall be Model 2322 of CES Industries,
Inc., Farmingdale, N.Y.
12.278B
A.
MICROCOMPUTER STATION FOR DISABLED
General
The Microcomputer Applications Station shall provide
for
comprehensive
coverage
and
learning
in
microcomputer
interfacing,
operation,
practices,
literacy, applications and maintenance as well as
supporting,
with
hardware
and
software,
other
microcomputer requirements in the shop or lab which may
include
robotics
control
including
control
of
associated peripheral devices, CAD/CAM, CADD, circuit
design and simulation, as well as any other applicable
data processing. Unit shall be a complete training
station to accommodate two students with provision for
disabled students. All of the individual devices which
constitute this training system shall be as listed
below, together with detailed descriptions which
specify the minimum equipment types, quality and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance
standards to which any approved equal shall apply.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 404
05/14/04
B.
DESIGN NO. _____
Bench
Bench shall be composed of maple top, base cabinet and
pedestal, and three door instrument console as follows:
NYSCA
1.
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
2.
Base cabinet and pedestal support leg assembly
shall be composed of one Four drawer cabinet and
one pedestal support leg. Construction shall be
all wood, glue and metal fastened with high
pressure laminate cover on all exposed surfaces
and edges. Drawers to be mounted on extension
slides and top drawer to be set 5" down from top
of cabinet for full and easy access when open,
without interference from table top overhang in
front. Drawer Cabinet shall have masterkeyed lock
on each drawer. Cabinet shall have recessed kick
panel at the bottom, 2" D x 4" H. Overall
dimensions of cabinet shall be 19" W x 25 1/2" D.
Pedestal support leg and cabinet shall be 32" high
or as required for use by the disabled. Submit
shop drawings.
3.
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match base cabinet and pedestal support leg.
Mounting rails for trainers are to have brass
ferrules for machine screw mounting. Service loops
shall be provided for easy servicing with power
connected; all items shall be removable from
front. Security fasteners and dividers shall be
incorporated in the console to secure the CAI
computer, monitor and keyboard. The keyboard shall
be permanently mounted and all items are to be
locked in a covered and enclosed console. The
instrument console shall provide secure storage
for the Microcomputer Station and CAI Computer
System. Console shall have three hinged plexiglass
doors, each with a masterkeyed lock. Design shall
permit doors to be individually opened to allow
individual use of electronics or digital trainers
or CAI computer or all items at the same time.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 405
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Doors are not to be removable from console during
equipment operation. Submit shop drawings.
4.
C.
Microcomputer
1.
NYSCA
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the trainers. It shall include the
outlet strips and the junction boxes and master
power switches, separate lines for the computer
with spike suppression and fans for movement of
air for cooling the Microcomputer Station and CAI
Computer System. The package shall also include
accessory power outlets within the console as well
as externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Station
The Microcomputer Systems Interfacing Trainer
shall be designed to provide training in the
concepts, operation, installation and interfacing
of microcomputers. It is to consist of a standard
AT 486DX CPU system including full keyboard,
display SVGA color monitor, memory with 8 Mbyte
RAM, control, arithmetic unit, a 5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte
floppy disk drive, a 3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk
drive, 340 Mbyte hard disk, and an interface
systems panel. The software is to include a MS-DOS
Disk Operating System and BASIC plus interface and
applications software and manuals. The interface
panel is to contain full-size professional banana
jack connections to the three computer buses for
interface and test purposes. The panel and system
is to be compatible with both a standard IBM PC
XT, AT computer. Also mounted on the panel are to
be two 44 pin PC connectors with associated full
size banana jacks for interconnection to external
PC cards for various optional applications. The
interface and test connections and all devices on
the panel are to be designed to protect the system
and
computer
against
damage
due
to
any
interconnections that can be made on the panel or
to exposed IC pins. The following other mounted
logic elements are included on the panel and are
also all protected against damage by any wiring
that can be made by the student on the panel or to
any exposed IC pins;
a data bus directional
buffer and input port, an address decoder, a tristate 8 bit latch, 8 bit D to A and A to D tristate converters, 18 logic elements including ORs,
Inventors, NANDs, tri-state drivers, Flip-Flops,
and 2 op-amps, two digit hex display, optical
sensor, dual direction traffic light simulator,
peripheral connector for use with a printer cable,
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 406
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
16 address toggle switches, 8 data toggle
switches, 4 extra toggle switches and 2 momentary
switches. The system shall be able to be connected
to other trainers such as the Electricity Electronics Training System and Digital Logic and
Applications Training System specified in Ref. No.
12.277B of this section. The system shall be
capable of peripheral control of external optional
items such as the robots, printers, voice
synthesizers, and AC controllers. The system is to
include the necessary cables, accessories, plus
experiment manuals, and disk software. The panel
is to be a one-eighth inch aluminum panel, size 13
1/2 by 22 1/2 inches, with professional quality
full size banana jacks and mounted in a wooden
console with high pressure laminate covering. All
components are to be protected behind the panel.
NYSCA
2.
Printer Interfacing Trainer shall consist of a
dot-matrix printer using the Centronics-type
parallel interface and is designed to be used for
general purpose use and for troubleshooting
purposes. The printer shall have 4 non-destructive
faults installed, which when combined with the
printer repair troubleshooting manual, simulate 4
of the most common problems associated with the
dot matrix printer. As supplied, the printer is to
function as a normal 9 pin, near letter quality
printer for use with the Microcomputer Systems
Interfacing Trainer. Provide with the printer a
supply of paper, plastic printer stand, ribbon and
dust cover.
3.
Diagnostic and Maintenance package of materials
shall
be
provided
to
enable
the
periodic
maintenance and diagnostics for hardware and
software problems for all computers in the
laboratory or shop. This package shall include the
following items:
a.
Checking Program to analyze all parts of the
computer including the control, arithmetic,
and ROM and RAM IC memories as well as the
hard drive, memory drivers and peripheral
subsystems. This shall include both on screen
and hard copy data presentation.
b.
Logic Hardware diagnostic card and test ROM
shall be provided in order to test all the
hardware with out the necessity for having
proper functioning disk drives or hard drive,
monitor, keyboard.
A display on the card
shall present an alphanumeric code which is
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 407
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
keyed to a manual that indicates locations of
IC's.
D.
c.
Maintenance Program shall be included which
is to provide the
ability to recover
defective, damaged, erased or deleted files.
Maintenance
Program
shall
be
Norton
Utilities.
d.
Diagnostic Program shall be included to
provide the ability to recover, reformat,
maintain, organize, and diagnose hard disk
subsystem problems. Diagnostic Program shall
be PCTools.
4.
Troubleshooting Package is to include a complete
set of tools, probes, and other test devices and
spare parts and cables required to teach standard
troubleshooting practices and to be able to
support the maintenance and repair of computers in
the shop or laboratory as well as other computers.
The spare parts are to include at least one set of
all the replaceable major components. Provisions
for instructor insurable simulated faults shall be
included.
5.
Disk Drive Alignment Trainer shall be a disk drive
exerciser and alignment trainer for testing,
troubleshooting, and aligning all popular size
floppy disk drives in order to teach the operation
and function of the disk drive system.
6.
EPROM Programming Trainer shall be a completely
operational EPROM/EEPROM programming unit with
reading, writing, editing hardware and software
ability for the PC industry standard EPROM/EEPROM
family. Included in the package shall be an
ultraViolet EPROM erasing unit.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The system is to be installed,
and formatted to be consistent with the CAI software
and hardware training system including compensation for
the real time timing circuit, scale factors required
for the memory to be compatible with the software. The
CAI Computer System shall include the following
features:
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 408
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 2568KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The
system
must
provide
for
assembly
language
programming and the software is to include a MS-DOS
Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest release,
Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a Microsoft Windows
compatible word processing package, plus interface and
applications software and manuals. Installed and
resident on the hard disk will be the CAI control
software which shall include all necessary video
drivers, graphic fonts and processing software to be
compatible with the CAI software. A quick install
program is to be provided to allow easy installation
and configuration of additional lesson material. This
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity, electronics, electrical and microprocessor
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 409
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
training systems. The CAI Computer System shall
mounted inside the bench's instrument console.
E.
be
CAI Interfacing Module
Unit shall be a complex interfacing module which is
inserted into a PC expansion
bus and consists of
analog and digital input and output devices so that the
computer can interface with the outside world,
including the training systems. The module shall
provide for two output data buses where one of the
buses operates as a bidirectional data bus. All
circuits shall provide buffering so that any incorrect
external connections will not damage the interface
module or the computer and so that random short
circuits will not affect the operation of the computer.
The module shall also contain high-speed analog to
digital and digital to analog converters together with
buffer amplifiers and scaling amplifiers. An additional
analog input multiplexing capability and circuitry
shall be provided. Address decoding circuitry shall be
included together with switch selectable address field
capability. All PC finger contacts shall be gold plated
to retard corrosion and poor contact problems. The dual
data buss outputs shall be available on individual
latches to allow long cable runs for all high speed
parallel data at the full computer bus speed. Filtering
shall be provided at the analog inputs to suppress and
input noise or interchannel noise from the digital
lines to the analog lines. The system inputs and
outputs and software shall incorporate digital lines to
accommodate student remote control of the computer and
to provide computer output control to fault circuitry
inside
the
trainers
so
that
the
computer
can
automatically control any faults. There shall also be
provided a minimum of 5 spare lines to accommodate any
future control or communication interconnections that
may be desired between the trainer and the computer or
between the trainers themselves. This system shall be
compatible with the Electricity - Electronics Training
System and the Digital Logic and Applications Training
System specified in Ref. No. 12.277B of this section
and all other trainers that use the banana jack
configurations. The unit is to be compatible with 386
and 486 based computer configurations.
F.
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
an AT 286 or 386 type CPU system. The software package
is to be provided on floppy disks and installed on the
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 410
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
CAI Computer System's hard drive. The software package
can be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive
or on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software
Package shall contain experiments in the following
topics specifically for use with the electronics and
digital training systems that are provided and support
automatic analog and digital input and outputs with
processing programs with on screen graphics and
printouts:
Direct
Current,
Alternating
Current,
Filters,
Power
Control,
Transistors,
Amplifiers,
Operational Amplifiers, Opto-Electronics, Oscillators,
Telecommunications. Advanced electronic topics are to
be provided for in Digital logic, Sequential logic,
Digital
Systems,
D
and
A
Conversion,
and
Microprocessors This CAI sequence shall provide both
information
sheets,
experiments,
and
shall
have
provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
G.
Electro-Mechanical Control Training System
1.
NYSCA
The Robotics Trainer is to provide for student
experiments in the concepts, components, and usage
of robotics. Trainer design shall permit student
to interconnect all interfacing to experience a
wide
variety
of
applications
in
sensing,
manipulating and control. The system is to be
compatible with CAI descriptions and identical in
pictures and operational instructions. This system
is to include a Manipulator Arm (Robot), and
student
and
instructor
experiment
manuals.
Manipulator Arm (Robot) shall be a five-jointed
mechanical arm with (hand) gripper for robot
experiments. Each joint is to be controlled by a
stepper motor mounted on the body. Lifting
capacity of the hand shall be at least 8 ounces
when fully extended and at least 16 ounces when
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 411
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
half extended, and with maximum opening of 3
inches. A Switch Sensor is to be coupled to the
hand to sense closed position and to indicate when
the item has been gripped. Gripping force is to be
3 pounds maximum. Motors shall include Base (+90,
-90 degrees), Shoulder or Abduction (+144, -35
degrees), Elbow or Extension (+0, -149 degrees),
Wrist Pitch or Extension (+90, -90 degrees), and
Hand Gripper or Grasp, (+0, -3 inches). The unit
shall include the Manipulator Arm, the Power
Supply for the stepper motors, an operation manual
and
a
student
experiment
manual
providing
exercises in Robot control . Computer control of
the
arm
is
to
be
done
through
a
RS232
communications port. A teach pendant shall be
provided in a hand-held computer format designed
for path programming.
2.
Interfacing
Peripheral
Package
shall
be
a
selection of electro-mechanical devices including
a rotary table, a mechanical slide table, gravity
feeder,
conveyer
belt,
optical
sensors,
mechanical sensors, thermal sensors, and other
devices which can be controlled by computers.
H.
Installer
support
shall
be
provided
for
all
computer/network operation with a toll-free, 8 hour, 5
day availability.
I.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
J.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Microcomputer Station For Disabled installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school. Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 412
05/14/04
K.
DESIGN NO. _____
Manufacturers
Microcomputer Station For Disabled complete with all of
the individual devices which constitute this station as
listed above, shall be Model 2322H of CES Industries,
Inc., Farmingdale, N.Y.
12.279
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS TRAINER
A.
To be completely self contained portable
instruction in Electrical Circuits.
B.
All components are to be mounted on a single panel.
Unit is to include Push Button Door Switches, One-Way
Switches, Two-Way Switches, Three-Way Switches, FourWay Switches, Key Switch, Rotary Switch, Thermostat
Simulation,
Relay,
A.C.
Service,
Low
Voltage
Transformer,
D.C.
Power
Supply,
Lights,
Motor,
Photocell, Buzzer, Bell, SCR, Diodes, Resistors,
Rheostat and Capacitors.
An External Interface
Printed Circuit Board Connector shall be provided to
allow
usage
of
external
project
cards.
Interconnections are to be made using full-size
Stacking Banana Leads.
Trainer is to provide wire
routing guides to make the connection of circuits
realistic when learning to follow an Electrical Plan
Diagram. Junction Boxes are provided and coded Tie
Points are used in following the Electrical Plan
Diagrams. The design is to be such that any incorrect
wiring on the panel shall not damage any of the
components.
C.
Student manuals are to provide the following jobs:
1.
Unit 1 Signalling Jobs:
a.
2.
Job
1:Bell
Circuit;Job
2:Door
Bell
Circuit;Job 3: Door signal with Buzzer; Job
4:Door Bell With Bell Feed; Job 5: Bell With
2 Buttons; Job 6: Parallel Bell Circuit; Job
7
Front
and
Rear
Signalling;
Job
8:
Maintained Action Switch; Job 9: Master
Switch Series; Job 10: Calling System; Job11:
Series Bell & Buzzer; Job 12: Bell Cut-Off;
Job: 13 Return Call System; Job Parallel CutOff; Job 15 Signal System Installation Jobs.
Unit 2 Lighting Jobs:
a.
NYSCA
trainer for
Job 16: light circuit; Job 17: One Way Light
Switch; Job 18: Two Parallel Light Circuits;
Job 19 Series Light Circuit; Job 20 Three-Way
Circuit; Job 22: Series Switch Circuit; Job
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 413
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
23: Master Control; Job 24: Parallel Switch
Circuit; Job 25: Series Parallel Circuit; Job
26: Automobile Electric System; Job 27:
Transfer Circuit; Job 28: Key Switch and
Power Buss; Job 29: Momentary Switch; Job 30:
Light Circuit.
3.
Installation Job Unit 3 Motor Relay Jobs:
a.
Job 31: A.C. Motor Control For a Lathe; Job
32: Motor and Light Monitor For Boat Anchor;
Job 33: D.C. Elevator Motor Reverse Direction
Control; Job 34: Two Hand Safety Switch Motor
Control; Job 35:Automatic Door Motor With Key
Control; Job 37: D.C. Relay Control of Remote
Machine A.C. Motor; Job 38: Relay Latch For A
Conveyer Belt Motor; Job 40: Normally Open
Burglar Alarm (Relay)Job 41: Normally Closed
Burglar
Alarm
(Relay);
Job
42:
Manual/Automatic Boat-Bilge Motor Control;
Job 43 Toll Booth Light & Gate Control; Job
44: /boiler Motor Control & Override; Job 45:
Magnetic Controller Installation Jobs.
D.
Components and Power Sources are to be fully protected
against burn-out caused by incorrect wiring. All Jobs
are to be performed at Low A.C. voltage to eliminate
shock hazard and danger to students. Components are to
be mounted behind 1/8" Thick Aluminum Panel and to be
provided in a portable suitcase with protective lid.
Suitcase is to include provision for the storage of
Leads and Student Manuals. Electrical Power required
is to be 110-120V A.C. 60Hz.
E.
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Electrical Circuits Trainer installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school.
Demonstration
shall
be
performed
by
a
certified representative of the manufacturer.
F.
Electrical Circuits Trainer complete with all of the
individual devices which constitute this station shall
be
Model
Ed-Lab
400
of
CES
Industries,
Inc.,
Farmingdale, N.Y.
12.280
COMPUTERIZED METAL MILL
A.
General
Computerized Metal Mill shall be bench type metal mill
with 486DX4 computer and CAD/CAM software, designed to
provide instruction in the principles of computer
numerical control (CNC) as applied to the automatic
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 414
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
production
language.
B.
C.
of
milled
pieces
using
FANUC
control
Computerized metal mill shall consist of the following
major components:
1.
Metal Mill
2.
Compressor
3.
Computer
Metal Mill
Metal Mill shall have key operated emergency stop
button, "power on" indicator and electronic shear key
built into spindle controller. Unit shall be equipped
with interlocked table guard, automatic tool retraction
and spindle stop for tool change, work light and
automatic lubrication system. Connection to computer
shall be through RS232C link. Metal Mill to be
furnished with a FANUC compatible facsimile key pad for
manual data input. Metal Mill shall include the
following features:
NYSCA
1.
Work Table Surface:
19.5" x 6 1/4"
2.
Longitudinal Travel:
11-1/2"
3.
Cross Travel:
7"
4.
Head Travel:
9-1/4"
5.
Spindle to Table:
11"
6.
Spindle to Column:
6-3/4"
7.
Spindle Taper for
Automatic Tool Changer:
BT35
8.
Three Tee Slots:
center
10 mm width, 31.5 mm on
9.
Z Axis Ballscrew:
16 mm dia. x 5 mm Pitch
10.
X Axis Ballscrew:
16 mm dia. x 5 mm Pitch
11.
Y Axis Ballscrew:
16 mm dia. x 5 mm Pitch
12.
Machine Resolution:
0.01 mm (0.0004")
13.
System Resolution:
0.005 mm (0.0001")
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 415
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
14.
Spindle Motor:
1 H.P.
speed
15.
Axis Motors:
Stepper
Motors
steps/rev. D.C.
16.
8 Inputs / 8 Outputs
17.
Automatic Six Station Tool Changer.
18.
Flood or mist spray coolant.
19.
Programmable Pneumatic Vise:
20.
A.C.,
variable
200
a.
Clamping Force:
1300 lbs. at 90 psi.
b.
Component Size:
1" dia. minimum to 2.75"
dia. Maximum.
Electrical:
60 Hz - 1 phase
volts, 16 amp.
110
Unit shall be equipped with a six foot (minimum)
heavy duty three wire (one grounding) line cord
with plug to match receptacle.
21.
D.
Metal Mill shall include all required computer
interface cards and connecting cables which shall
be fully compatible with the Computer.
Machine Tool Package
The Metal Mill shall be provided with the following
machine tools as supplied by the mill manufacturer and
fully compatible with the mill (Denford model numbers
given):
NYSCA
1.
Two (2) BT35 Collet Chucks.
2.
One (1) DF10 Collet 21 piece set.
3.
One (1) DF10 Collet 1/4".
4.
One (1) BT35 Collet Wrench.
5.
One (1) BT35 / J33 Jacobs Holder.
6.
One (1) J33 Keyed Chuck.
7.
One (1) BT35 Shell Mill Holder.
8.
One (1) HD Shell Mill 1.75" Dia.
9.
Two (2) BT35 Micro Collet Chuck.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 416
05/14/04
E.
DESIGN NO. _____
10.
One (1) DR16 Collet 9 piece set.
11.
One (1) BT35 M Collet Wrench.
12.
Six (6) Retention Knobs.
13.
One Milling Machine Vise.
14.
One Mitee Bite 3/8" Clamping Kit.
15.
HSS 2 Flute Single End Mill 6 piece set.
16.
HHS 4 Flute Single End Mill 6 piece set.
17.
HSS 2 Flute Single End Ball Nose End Mill 6 piece
set.
18.
Machinable wax blocks, three (3) each, in the
following sizes: 3" x 7" x 3", 4-1/2" x 7" x 3",
6" x 12" x 3".
Air Compressor
Provide a UL listed air compressor to provide the
required power for the programmable pneumatic vice. Air
compressor shall be compatible with the Metal Mill.
Unit shall include regulator, tank pressure gage,
outlet pressure gage, 1/4" x 25' hose and fittings.
Compressor
shall
comply
with
the
following
specifications:
1.
One (1) HP oiless.
2.
115 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz thermal protected
induction motor.
3.
4-1/2 gallon tank, pancake type ASME certified.
4.
2.5 CFM displacement at 100 psi.
Air Compressor shall be equipped with a six foot
(minimum) heavy duty three wire (one grounding)
line cord with plug to match receptacle.
F.
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) devices
as well as providing the device for presentation of the
Control Software material and the interfacing to the
Metal Mill. The unit is to be installed, and formatted
to be consistent with the Control Software and hardware
system including compensation for the real time timing
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 417
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
circuit, scale factors required for the memory to be
compatible with the software. The Computer shall
include the following features:
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with 16.7 million
colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card shall be
provided with drivers for Microsoft Windows and
Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 16.7 million colors at a refresh rate no
slower than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch
of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with
the Super VGA card and shall not exceed an
electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas when
measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a
latest release MS-DOS Disk Operating System,
latest release Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft
Windows compatible word processing package, plus
Mill Cam Designer Parametric CAM software and
manuals. Installed and resident on the hard disk
will be the Control Software which shall include
all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts and
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 418
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
processing software to be compatible with the
Control Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Metal Mill.
G.
Control Software
Unit shall permit the full computer programming and
computer disk storage of various milled metal parts
involving all standard machining operations which
include the following:
NYSCA
1.
Simultaneous three axes contouring control.
2.
Circular interpolation on any two axes with
linear interpolation on third axis.
3.
Plane switching.
4.
Continuous Path/Tangential speed control.
5.
Inch or Metric programming.
6.
Combined use of absolute and incremental in
same block.
7.
Tool diameter compensation.
8.
Mirror imaging.
9.
Program scaling.
10.
Manual and programmable machine stops.
11.
Float datum facility.
12.
Tool length offsets for up to 99 tools.
13.
Programmable dwell.
14.
24 auxiliary outputs and 24 auxiliary inputs.
15.
Program offset giving dry run facility.
16.
Full G and M code listings with help
instructions which are context sensitive.
17.
Single step or continuous program execution.
18.
Axis jog on all axis with variable feedrate.
19.
Programmable spindle speeds of 0 to
r.p.m. Spindle speed override 50-120%.
4000
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 419
05/14/04
H.
DESIGN NO. _____
20.
Programmable feedrate of
Feedrate override 0-150%.
21.
Comprehensive tool path graphics including 2D
and 3D color simulation.
22.
Tool animation.
23.
Zoomed and sectioned views with rotation.
24.
Directory
facility.
25.
Full edit mode allowing Alter, Delete, and
Insert.
26.
Programs stored on floppy or hard drive.
27.
Automatic error checking with messages.
28.
Cycle time display. Cycle start, feed hold.
29.
Software shall permit integration into Local
Area Networks.
listing
and
0-1500
program
mm/min.
merging
Protection
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the Metal
Mill and Computer consisting of 20 gage stainless steel
hoods that completely enclose mill and computer. Hoods
shall have folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip
gasket where bench top contact is made. Provide each
hood with two hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
I.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Metal Mill and
Computer shall be used. Local call-back emergency
service shall be available during regular working hours
and days. Furnish a listing of the service agent's
name, address and local phone number.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 420
05/14/04
J.
DESIGN NO. _____
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
computerized mill installation at time agreed upon by
the
Chairperson
Of
Technology
of
the
school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
K.
Manufacturers
Metal Mill complete with all of the individual devices
which constitute this unit (except Computer) shall be
Model Triac P.C. ATC of Denford Machine Tools, Medina,
Ohio.
12.281
HAND NOTCHER
A.
Notcher shall be hand operated machine for cutting
angles in sheet metal materials. Working pressure
shall be initiated by a hand operated lever and
transmitted through a roller cam mechanism to the ram.
Ram shall be triangular in design with adjustable
guide. Notcher frame shall be fabricated of machined
high grade casting.
B.
Hand Notcher shall include the following features:
C.
D.
NYSCA
1.
Max. 90 deg. Notch:
6" x 6"
2.
Max. Capacity,
Mild Steel:
16 Ga.
3.
Tonnage:
4 Tons
4.
Stroke of Ram:
5/8"
Notcher shall be provided with the following equipment:
1.
Two sets of cutting blades: triangular top blades
and bottom blades made of high grade tool steel,
reversible.
2.
Two adjustable materials gauges.
3.
Finger protection,
stripper.
4.
Wrenches, grease gun and operating instructions.
hold-down
bar
and
material
Where indicated on the plans, supply Hand Notcher with
stand fabricated by manufacturer of notcher. Stand
shall be welded, all steel construction specifically
designed to support the notcher.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 421
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
E.
Hand Notcher, with accessories as specified above
complete and ready to operate shall be Tennsmith, Inc.
Model 16-18; Walker/Gerver Model GH-1; Peck, Stow and
Wilcox Co. Model PS-66.
12.282
ROBOTIC WORK CELL
A.
General
Unit
shall
be
a
complete
computer
integrated
manufacturing
station
for
the
demonstration
of
robotics, CNC and CAD/CAM. All of the individual
devices which constitute this system shall be as listed
below, together with detailed descriptions which
specify the minimum equipment types, quality and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance
standards to which any approved equal shall apply.
B.
Bench
Bench top shall be 48" wide x 96" long and shall be
constructed as specified in Art. 2.03. Bench top shall
be mounted on steel cabinets as specified in Ref. No.
12.04.
C.
Computer Table
Table shall be 40" wide x 30" deep with 1-3/4" thick
maple top and solid maple base. Top shall have slot to
permit computer cable pass-through. Unit design shall
comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements for disabled accessibility. Tamper proof
protection
shall
be
provided
for
the
Computer
consisting of a 20 gage stainless steel hood that
completely encloses the computer. Hood shall have
folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip gasket
where table top contact is made. Provide hood with two
hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
D.
Bench Mounted System
System shall be wired, plumbed and programmed bench
mounted system to demonstrate a computer controlled,
fully automated series of manufacturing processes.
Equipment shall be secured to the bench. Electrical
supply shall be through a single lead which plugs into
a bench mounted distribution conduit on which IEC
sockets are fitted. Each piece of equipment in the
system shall be readily unplugged and released from the
bench for alternative demonstration purposes. Use of
each component individually and in concert shall be
fully documented. Items of equipment shall include the
following:
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 422
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
2.
NYSCA
SCARA Robot with 4 axes and gripper designed for
use with CNC machines. Vertical movement to be by
pneumatic cylinder, operating at adjustable speed
between moveable end stops. Unit shall conform to
the following specifications:
a.
Axis 1 (main arm): Angular movement 192 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 250mm.
b.
Axis 2 (fore arm): Angular movement 230 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 150mm.
c.
Reach:
550mm from column center.
d.
Speed:
Max. 300mm/sec.
e.
Repeatability:
1.0mm
f.
Axis 3
(wrist roll):
Angular movement 450 deg.
g.
Axis Z (up/down):
100mm
adjustable end-stops.
h.
Gripper:
pressure 20N.
Jaw
i.
Payload:
1500gm at full reach.
j.
Robot shall be provided with interchangeable
two finger pneumatic end effector and suction
cup gripper end effector.
travel
opening
between
50mm.
Jaw
Precision Robotic System with multiple microprocessors which control the articulated arm to
accurately place components in a CNC machine. Each
of 5 axis to be powered by a stepper motor with
potentiometer feedback to provide closed loop
control. Unit to be equipped with interchangeable
2 fingered gripper and vacuum gripper. System
shall conform to the following specifications:
a.
Axis 0 (waist):
Angular movement 270 deg.
Axle center from top to base 185 deg. Axis 1
axle to column center 50mm.
b.
Axis 1 (shoulder): Angular movement 180 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 225mm.
c.
Axis 2 (elbow):
Angular movement 300 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 225mm.
d.
Axis 3 (left
wrist axle):
Angular movement 320 deg.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 423
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
3.
NYSCA
e.
Axis 4 (right
wrist axle):
Angular movement 320 deg.
f.
Wrist Pitch:
Angular movement 140 deg.
g.
Wrist Roll:
Angular movement 320 deg.
h.
Gripper:
pressure 20N.
Jaw
i.
Repeatability:
0.5mm
j.
Payload Reach:
1000gm
640mm from column center.
opening
at
50mm.
full
Jaw
reach
Water-Hydraulic Robot with 6 axes and gripper each
under closed-loop control, rack and pinion system
and low pressure 8bar, totally sealed, water based
hydraulic system. Pressurized water to be supplied
by a power pack connected by flexible pipes and
plug-in connectors. Unit shall conform to the
following specifications:
a.
Axis 0 (waist):
Angular movement 180 deg.
Axle center from top of base 170mm.
b.
Axis 1 (shoulder): Angular movement 165 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 410mm.
c.
Axis 2 (elbow):
Angular movement 165 deg.
Arm length between axle centers 347mm.
d.
Axis 3 (wrist
pitch):
Angular movement 180 deg.
Length between axle centers 203mm.
e.
Axis 4 (wrist yaw): Angular movement 180 deg.
Height above axis 4 pitch line 67mm.
f.
Axis 5 (wrist
roll):
Angular movement 310 deg.
g.
Gripper:
pressure 40N.
Jaw
h.
Repeatability:
2mm.
i.
Payload:
2500gm at full reach.
j.
Reach:
center.
1120mm from axis 1 axle
opening
55mm.
Jaw
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 424
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
k.
4.
5.
NYSCA
Robot shall be provided with interchangeable
two finger end effector and three finger end
effector.
CNC Mill to be ISO format programmable bench top
machine using industry standard G and M codes.
Cutter of up to 6mm diameter, re-cyclable wax,
plastics and aluminum. Unit shall be equipped with
pneumatic vice and parts centralizer which operate
under program control for automatic loading and
unloading by robot. Mill software is to include
link to Autodesk AutoCad to allow manufacture of
CAD components. CNC Mill shall conform to the
following specifications:
a.
X Travel:
200mm
b.
Y Travel:
100mm
c.
Z Travel:
100mm
e.
Speed:
22mm/sec. maximum
f.
Mechanical
Resolution:
0.00625mm
g.
Programming
Resolution:
0.1mm
h.
Jog Buttons:
resolution.
2
speed
i.
Spindle Motor:
controller.
140W
with
j.
Spindle Speed:
0 - 3500rpm (8 speeds).
k.
Chuck:
6.5mm capacity.
l.
Vice Pressure:
reversed
950N
m.
Vice Stroke:
20mm
-
0.01mm
switch-mode
normal
530N
-
CNC Mill shall be provided with the following
machine tools as supplied by the mill manufacturer
and fully compatible with the mill:
a.
Two (2) - 2mm End Mills
b.
Two (2) - 3mm End Mills
c.
Two (2) - 4mm End Mills
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 425
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
NYSCA
d.
Two (2) - 5mm End Mills
e.
Two (2) - 6mm End Mills
f.
Two (2) - 2mm Ball End Mills
g.
Two (2) - 4mm Ball End Mills
Conveyors shall each use a rubber coated belt
driven by a geared down stepper motor. Units shall
be capable of stand-alone operation or computer
control for use with a robot or CNC machine.
Computer control of motor shall permit either
continuous or incremented drive by a number of
steps or a defined distance. Conveyors shall
conform to the following specifications:
a.
Free running
speed:
Fast - 28mm/sec.
b.
Free running
speed:
Medium - 14mm/sec.
c.
Free running
speed:
Slow - 7mm/sec.
d.
Computer controlled
speed:
0 - 50mm/sec.
e.
Resolution:
1/2 step mode 0.045mm
f.
Resolution:
full step mode 0.09mm
g.
Overall length
(basic unit):
620mm
h.
Usable belt travel: 530mm
i.
Belt width:
j.
Extension additional
length:
500mm
k.
Inputs:
100mm
TTL
7.
Conveyor accessories provided to include all
necessary infra-red sensors, automatic parts
dispensers, width and height gauges, and microswitches required for integrated system operation.
8.
Indexing Table is to be a solid aluminum platen
driven by a geared down stepper motor. Unit shall
be capable of stand-alone operation or computer
control for use with a robot. Computer control of
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 426
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
motor shall permit continuous or incremented drive
by a number of steps or a defined angle. Direction
and resolution are to be controllable. Indexing
table
shall
conform
to
the
following
specifications:
E.
a.
Free running
speed:
Fast - 40 deg./sec.
b.
Free running
speed:
Medium - 20 deg./sec.
c.
Free running
speed:
Slow - 10 deg./sec.
d.
Computer controlled
speed:
0 - 120 deg./sec.
e.
Resolution:
deg./step
full
f.
Resolution:
1/2 step
deg./sec.
g.
Inputs:
TTL
step
mode
-
1/4
mode
-
1/8
9.
Computer Interface Boards to be compatible with
IBM PC, XT, AT, and similar computers running MS
DOS. Boards shall be 8 bit, plug into the
computer's expansion bus slots, and process the
bus for transmission at a computer independent
rate down cables up to 10 meters in length.
Provide all required computer leads for connection
of computer to Bench Mounted System equipment, and
manuals to explain the operation of the interfaces
and source codes of the software.
10.
Bench Mounted System shall be provided with the
following machineable wax cylinder work pieces as
supplied by the system manufacturer and fully
compatible with the Bench Mounted System:
a.
Ten (10) - 1 1/8" dia. x 1 5/8" length.
b.
Ten (10) - 1 1/8" dia. x 1 3/16" length.
c.
Ten (10) - 1" dia. x 1 5/8" length.
d.
Ten (10) - 1" dia. x 1 3/16" length.
Electrical
Bench Mounted System shall be designed to operate on
single phase, 110 Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 30 amp circuit.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 427
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
All required power converters or supplies shall
included as part of the Bench Mounted System.
F.
G.
be
Control Software
1.
Software package shall include separate control
programs for each of the robots in the system. The
programs shall permit control of a single robot
and teaching modes including keyboard control,
simulator control, lead by the nose and pushbutton manual control. Position data shall be
stored as files on disc which can be edited and
sequentially played back.
2.
Work-cell
Amalgamated
Logical
Linguistic
Instructions (WALLI) software package shall be
high level language for controlling robotic
systems. Software shall permit single computer
operation of up to 8 robots together with CNC
machines, expansion boards, conveyors, indexing
tables, gauges and tables. WALLI is to be multitasking and permit main program plus up to 9
parallel sub-routines to run simultaneously.
Software system shall support RS232 and parallel
ports for control of various manufacturers'
equipment. CNC machines are to be programmed with
ISO format G and M codes. WALLI software shall be
compatible with Autodesk AutoCad generated design
components for CNC manufacture.
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of robotics, CNC and CAD/CAM devices as well
as providing the device for presentation of the Control
Software material and the interfacing to the Bench
Mounted System. The unit is to be installed, and
formatted to be consistent with the Control Software
and hardware system including compensation for the real
time timing circuit, scale factors required for the
memory to be compatible with the software. The Computer
shall include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 428
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not less
than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz refresh
rates. Card shall be provided with drivers for
Microsoft Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 with not less than 16.7 million colors at a
refresh rate no slower than 72Hz. Monitor shall
have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be
compatible with the Super VGA card and shall not
exceed an electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas
when measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The
system
must
provide
for
assembly
language
programming and the software is to include a latest
release MS-DOS Disk Operating System, latest release
Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft Windows compatible
word processing package, and manuals. Installed and
resident on the hard disk will be the Control Software
which shall include all necessary video drivers,
graphic fonts and processing software to be compatible
with the Control Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Bench Mounted System.
H.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Bench Mounted
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 429
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
System and Computer shall be used. Local call-back
emergency service shall be available during regular
working hours and days. Furnish a listing of the
service agent's name, address and local phone number.
I.
Demonstration
Supplier of Robotic Work Cell shall provide a full
demonstration of installation at time agreed upon by
the
Chairperson
Of
Technology
of
the
school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
J.
Manufacturers
Bench Mounted System for Robotic Work Cell, complete
with all of the individual devices as listed above
(except Computer), shall be Model T5 Turn-Key FMS of
Feedback Inc., Hillsborough, North Carolina.
12.283
COMPUTERIZED ROUTER
A.
B.
NYSCA
General
1.
Computerized Router shall consist of a router
controlled by a computer, designed to provide
instruction in the principles of CAD/CAM and
computer numerical control (CNC) as applied to the
automatic production of router cut pieces.
2.
System shall permit the full computer programming
and magnetic disc storage of complex wooden
shapes. Programmed discs made up may be used to
transmit command signals to stepper drive motors
of the controller unit to produce cutter motion on
three axes to produce fully finished parts
automatically.
Computerized Router
major components:
shall
1.
Router
2.
Base Cabinet and Vacuum
3.
Compressor
4.
Computer
5.
Computer Table
consist
of
the
following
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 430
05/14/04
C.
DESIGN NO. _____
Router
Router shall have emergency stop button, and "power on"
indicator. Unit shall be equipped with total enclosing
interlocked Lexan guard and vacuum hold down system.
Router shall include the following features:
D.
1.
X Travel (longitudinal): 20"
2.
Y Travel (cross slide):
18"
3.
Z Travel (vertical):
7"
4.
Motor RPMs:
25,000
5.
Electrical:
115V, 60 Hz, 15 amp.
6.
Motor Horsepower:
1-3/4 HP
7.
Feed Rate:
100 I.P.M.
8.
Stepper Motors:
450 oz./in.
9.
Collets:
1/4" and 3/8"
10.
Router
shall
include
all
required
computer
interface cards and connecting cables which shall
be fully compatible with the Computer.
11.
Tamper-proof protection shall be provided for
Router unit. This may consist of equipping the
clear Lexan guard with two hasps and padlocks.
Submit shop drawings.
Air Compressor
Computerized Router shall include an air compressor to
provided the required vacuum for router's vacuum hold
down system. Compressor shall have 115 volt 1/2 H.P.
motor that delivers a minimum of 2.0 CFM at 40 psi and
adjusts for 10 to 100 psi. Unit shall be equipped with
15 foot air hose, regulator, caulk gun, paint sprayer
and four piece inflator kit.
E.
Router Bit Assortment with Cabinet
Provide 23 piece carbide tipped assortment of router
bits with 1/4" shanks, which include the following:
NYSCA
1.
2 - 1/4" cutting width Straight
2.
2 - 1/2" cutting width Straight
3.
2 - 3/8" cutting width Straight
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 431
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
2 - 5/8" V-Groove
5.
1 - 1/4" Core Box
6.
1 - 1/4" Corner Round
7.
2 - 3/8" Corner Round
8.
1 - 1/4" Beading
9.
1 - 3/8" Cove
10.
1 - 1/2" Dovetail
11.
1 - 3/8" Rabbeting
12.
1 - 1/4" Roman Ogee
13.
1 - 45 deg. bevel Chamfering
14.
1 - 1/2" Mortising
15.
2 - 3/8" Flush/Bevel Combination
Storage cabinet for router bits shall be solid wood
construction with locking plexiglass front and rear
storage. Cabinet design shall permit unit to be wall or
bench top mounted.
F.
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) devices
as well as providing the device for presentation of the
Control Software material and the interfacing to the
Router. The unit is to be installed, and formatted to
be consistent with the Control Software and hardware
system including compensation for the real time timing
circuit, scale factors required for the memory to be
compatible with the software. The Computer shall
include the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 432
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
4.
Disk Drives:
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not less
than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz refresh
rates. Card shall be provided with drivers for
Microsoft Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 with not less than 16.7 million colors at a
refresh rate no slower than 72Hz. Monitor shall
have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be
compatible with the Super VGA card and shall not
exceed an electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas
when measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The
system
must
provide
for
assembly
language
programming and the software is to include a latest
release MS-DOS Disk Operating System, latest release
Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft Windows compatible
word processing package, and manuals. Installed and
resident on the hard disk will be the Control Software
which shall include all necessary video drivers,
graphic fonts and processing software to be compatible
with the Control Software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced Router.
G.
Computer Table
Table shall be 40" wide x 30" deep with 1-3/4" thick
maple top and solid maple base. Top shall have slot to
permit computer cable pass-through. Unit design shall
comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements for disabled accessibility. Tamper proof
protection
shall
be
provided
for
the
Computer
consisting of a 20 gage stainless steel hood that
completely encloses the computer. Hood shall have
folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip gasket
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 433
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
where table top contact is made. Provide hood with two
hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
H.
Control Software
Software shall permit the full computer programming and
computer disk storage of various router cut parts
involving all standard machining operations. Features
shall include the following:
I.
1.
CAD/CAM software
2.
Generate standard G Codes - RS274D
3.
Compatible with IBM computer system running MS
DOS.
4.
Compatible with Autodesk AutoCad R11.
5.
Fully functional CAD package.
6.
VGA color graphics.
7.
Mouse or keyboard control.
8.
True 3-D machining capability.
9.
Fully functional engraving package with variety of
type faces and styles.
10.
User Manual in format understandable by students
and including Hands-On tutorials.
Protection
Tamper-proof protection shall be provided for Router
unit. This may consist of equipping the Lexan cover
with two hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
J.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Router and
Computer shall be used. Local call-back emergency
service shall be available during regular working hours
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 434
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
and days. Furnish a listing of the service agent's
name, address and local phone number.
K.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Computerized Router installation at time agreed upon by
the
Chairperson
Of
Technology
of
the
school.
Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
L.
Manufacturers
Router including router CAD/CAM package, vacuum hold
down system, base cabinet, and vacuum shall be Phoenix
Model
HQR-GS,
Stock
#
65-3232
as
supplied
by
Paxton/Patterson.
Air compressor for use with vacuum hold down system
shall be Power Pal Model MT4109, Stock # 21-0318 as
supplied by Paxton/Patterson.
Router Bit Assortment with Cabinet shall be Stock # 605374 as supllied by Paxton/Patterson.
12.284
STRUCTURAL STRESS ANALYZER
A.
General
Unit shall be a computer interfaced bench mounted
structural stress analyzer for use in determining
ultimate
force
and
deflection
of
load-bearing
structures.
B.
Structural Stress Analyzer
Entire structural stress analyzer shall be constructed
of high quality steel and aluminum meeting latest
industrial standards. Metal surfaces shall be plated
and column bearings to be Teflon hard coated. Unit
shall utilize microprocessor control to measure force,
deflection,
and
tensile
strength.
All
internal
components shall be clearly visible. Force shall be
applied by the unit's lower platform. Forces which can
be applied to structures shall be 10 lbs. (minimum) to
510 lbs. (maximum) compression, and 10 lbs. (minimum)
to 1000 lbs. (maximum) tension. System shall be
protected from the application of greater forces.
Testing area shall accept structures up to 6" wide x
12" long x 18" high in size. Upper platform shall be
infinitely adjustable from 4" to 18" by means of quick
action clamps. Structural stress analyzer shall have
press-to-start button and large digital display which
indicates
the
applied
force
and
deflection
in
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 435
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
thousandths of an inch. Upon failure of tested
structure, the unit shall automatically stop and
display peak force and deflection. Unit shall be
furnished with safety guard, demonstration video,
operating manuals, and learning packet for student
activities and introductory courses. Structural stress
analyzer shall be delivered, set up and ready for use.
C.
Accessories
Structural stress analyzer shall be furnished with the
following accessories as supplied by the manufacturer
of the analyzer (Advanced Manufacturing Techniques,
Inc. model numbers given):
D.
1.
One (1) Adaptor for Road Bed Loading Test Method
2.
One (1) Tensile Tester Model TT-1000
3.
One (1) Microcomputer Interface Package
Computer
This system shall provide training in the concepts, and
operation of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) devices
as well as providing the device for presentation of the
structural stress analyzer's interface control software
material and the interfacing to the analyzer. The unit
is to be installed, and formatted to be consistent with
the control software and hardware system including
compensation for the real time timing circuit, scale
factors required for the memory to be compatible with
the software. The Computer shall include the following
features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX4 cpu with a clock speed of 100MHz and a
minimum write back SRAM cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 128MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 12 ms or faster
access time and SCSI-2 controller/interface
card.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 436
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
5.
PCI Local Bus Super VGA card with graphics
processor. Card shall support all VGA and Super
VGA
resolutions
of
up
to
and
including
noninterlaced 1024 by 768 pixels with not less
than 16.7 million colors and up to 74Hz refresh
rates. Card shall be provided with drivers for
Microsoft Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 with not less than 16.7 million colors at a
refresh rate no slower than 72Hz. Monitor shall
have a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less. Unit shall be
compatible with the Super VGA card and shall not
exceed an electronic radiation of 250 nanoteslas
when measured at a distance of 20 inches from the
monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a
latest release MS-DOS Disk Operating System,
latest release Microsoft Windows, and a Microsoft
Windows
compatible
word
processing
package.
Installed and resident on the hard disk will be
the control software which shall include all
necessary
video
drivers,
graphic
fonts
and
processing software to be compatible with the
control software. This computer system must be
compatible with the interfaced structural stress
analyzer.
E.
Protection
Tamper proof protection shall be provided for the
Computer consisting of a 20 gage stainless steel hood
that completely encloses the computer. Hood shall have
folded lip at bottom edge with rubber strip gasket
where bench top contact is made. Provide hood with two
hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings.
F.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 437
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturers of the Structural stress
analyzer and Computer shall be used. Local call-back
emergency service shall be available during regular
working hours and days. Furnish a listing of the
service agent's name, address and local phone number.
G.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
the Structural Stress Analyzer installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school. Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
H.
Manufacturers
Structural stress analyzer (except Computer) shall be
Model 510-CT of Advanced Manufacturing Techniques,
Inc., Clifton Park, N.Y.
12.285
STACKWAGON
A.
Unit shall be designed to carry paper stock in four (4)
stacking bins with sloped bases so that stock rests
firmly against two inner stacking walls. Stackwagon
shall be made of heavy 12 gage reinforced steel
construction. Unit shall be 44" high with four (4) 10"
x 16" center-sloped top stacking bins, each 22" high
and lower shelf with 15" carrier height. Stackwagon
shall be furnished with four (4) heavy duty rubber
wheeled swivel casters, two (2) with locks. Finish
shall be chip proof baked enamel. Unit shall be
delivered set up and ready for use.
B.
Stackwagon shall be Model 501 as supplied by American
Printing Equipment And Supply Co., Long Island City,
N.Y.
12.286A
A.
NYSCA
PLANER - PORTABLE
Planer shall be a portable unit for use in planing wood
stock and shall have powered automatic feed, V-belt
and pulley cutterhead drive with gearbox/chain and
sprocket feed roll drive, polyurethane infeed and
outfeed rolls, and stainless steel table platen with
detachable table extensions. Cutterhead shall be solid
steel 2-knife ball bearing which raises and lowers on
four precision ground steel columns. Unit design shall
permit planer to be bench mounted during use. Planer
shall conform to the following characteristics and
specifications:
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 438
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
1.
Capacity:
a.
Width:
12" minimum.
b.
Thickness:
6" maximum 1/8" minimum.
c.
Depth Of Cut:
3/16" maximum.
d.
Length Of
Unbutted Stock:
10" minimum.
2.
Feed Rate:
3.
Cutterhead:
26 FPM.
a.
Knives:
Two (2) double edged,
reversible.
b.
Speed:
8,000 RPM.
c.
Diameter:
2"
4.
Feed Rolls Diameter:
13/8"
5.
Table Size With
Extensions:
121/8" x 26"
Planer shall be complete, adjusted and ready to operate
and furnished with motor, belts, pulleys, dust chute,
2-knife cutterhead with high-speed steel double edged
and reversible knives, knife setting gage, wrenches,
polyurethane
feed
rolls,
two
detachable
table
extensions, and instruction manual.
B.
Motor for Planer shall be at least 15 amp,
operate on single phase, 120 volts, 60 Hz
shall be provided with on-off switch and
duty three conductor (one grounding) cord
match the receptacle.
C.
Furnish with the planer the following extra accessories
as furnished by the manufacturer of the planer:
D.
NYSCA
designed to
A.C. Planer
6 ft. heavy
and plug to
1.
Two (2) replacement drive belts.
2.
Two (2) sets of 2 double-edged reversible planer
knives.
3.
One (1) dust collector connector and 4" dia. x 90"
long hose with hose clamps.
Planer - Portable shall be Model No. 22-540 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 439
05/14/04
12.286B
A.
NYSCA
DESIGN NO. _____
PLANER
Planer shall be a stationary unit for use in planing
wood stock. Unit's frame shall be machined from extra
heavy one-piece cast iron with all bearing housings
line-bored for bearing alignment. Bed shall be heavy
rib-reinforced
cast
iron,
ground
to
a
satin
smoothness. Bed adjustment shall be by hand wheel and
Acme-thread screws with ball thrust bearings which
shall adjust bed through full range with 1/8" movement
for each complete turn of the hand wheel; Planer shall
have calibrated thickness gauge which is easily
visible from the operator's position. Cutterhead shall
be safety-type, milled from medium carbon steel and
fitted with high-speed knives. Cutterhead shall be
mounted
in
sealed
ball
bearings
and
shall
be
removable. Feed rolls shall include corrugated infeed
roller and smooth outfeed roller with 1" dia. journals
mounted in 3" shaft bearings. Rollers shall be driven
with extra heavy pitch gears. Feed roll pressure shall
be provided by springs which are fully visible and
adjustable. Stock feed shall be through positive
action V-belt drive. Planer shall have power feed
control with clutch lever to start and stop feed
instantly without stopping power to the unit. Planer
shall conform to the following characteristics and
specifications:
1.
Bed:
12" x 24"
2.
Feed Roll Diameter
(infeed and outfeed):
2"
3.
Table Roll Diameter:
11/2"
4.
Maximum Depth Of Cut:
1/4"
5.
Stock Thickness Range:
1/16" to 5"
6.
Widest Stock:
12"
7.
Shortest Planable Stock
(Not Butted):
71/2"
8.
Cutterhead:
a.
Knives:
Three (3)
b.
Speed:
5,300 RPM
c.
Cutting Arc:
31/8"
d.
Knife Cuts
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 440
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Per Inch:
9.
72
Rate Of Feed:
18 FPM
Planer shall be complete, adjusted and ready to operate
and furnished with motor, belts, pulleys, dust chute,
3-knife cutterhead with high-speed steel knives, knife
setting gage, wrenches, feed rolls, and instruction
manual.
B.
Motor for Planer shall be at least 3 horsepower with
TEFC enclosure, 3600 R.P.M., designed to operate on
three
phase,
208
volts,
60
Hz
A.C.
(Solid
Connection).
C.
Provide in a convenient location on planer a magnetic
starter wired to motor with approved materials.
D.
Furnish with the planer the following extra accessories
as furnished by the manufacturer of the planer:
Two (2) replacement drive belts.
2.
Two (2) sets of 3 high speed planer knives.
3.
One (1) shaving hood with dust collector connector
and 90" long hose with hose clamps.
4.
One (1) Bed and Feed Roll Gauge.
5.
One (1) Cutterhead Gauge.
6.
One (1) Knife Grinding Attachment, with indexing
mechanism.
E.
Furnish with the planer, two (2) heavy duty roller
stands. Each stand shall be fabricated with heavy wall
steel tubing, complete with five (5) 13/8" diameter,
18" long steel rollers. Rollers shall be ball bearing.
Stand design shall permit height adjustment with one
hand and with full load on stand. Each stand shall be
adjustable from 27" to 45" tall. Load capacity shall
be at least 550 lbs. for each stand. Roller stand
shall be Stock No. 804-816 as supplied by Woodworker's
Supply, Casper, Wyoming.
F.
Planer shall be Model
6472027
motor
McMinnville,Tennessee.
12.287
No.
all
1000016
of
with
Model No.
Powermatic,
PLATE PROCESSOR
A.
NYSCA
1.
Unit shall be UL listed, self-contained conversion
unit,
capable
of
automatically
conditioning
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 441
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
electrostatic offset master plates. Plate Processor
shall be suitable for use with the electrostatic
Platemaker specified in Ref. No. 12.154. Unit shall be
of the table top type.
B.
Plate Processor shall be complete with corrosion-proof
plastic base reinforced with metal base plate. Housing
shall be plastic and shall be removable to provide
access to the conversion trough. The conversion trough
and related parts shall be plastic. All gears and
bearings for rollers shall be nylon. Unit shall
conform to the following specifications:
1.
Constant speed, motordriven. Two (2) neoprene
squeegee
rollers,
stainless steel shafts.
Adjustable
pressure
between rollers.
2.
Maximum Master Size:
15" wide by any length.
3.
Processing Speed:
1/2" per second.
4.
Fluid Capacity:
One (1) quart.
Troughmarked for proper
level. Trough removable
forcleaning or draining.
C.
Unit shall be designed to operate on single phase, 115
Volts, 60 Hz A.C., 90 watts. Plate Processor shall be
equipped with a six foot heavy duty three wire (one
grounding) line cord with plug to match receptacle.
D.
Furnish four (4), one gallon containers of conversion
fluid with the Plate Processor of a type approved by
the manufacturer of the unit and compatible with the
Plate Processor provided.
E.
Plate Processor shall be Model
Company, Chicago, Illinois.
12.288
166A
of
A.B.
Dick
METAL DUST COLLECTOR
A.
NYSCA
Rollers:
Metal Dust Collector shall be self-contained cabinet
type, constructed of steel with removable gasketed
access doors and specifically designed for collecting
dry metal dust and chips. Dust collector shall be a
two-stage type unit with removable 0.34 cubic feet
capacity dust draw, fire resistant fabric filters,
foot operated filter shaker, and fan impeller on clean
air side. Motor shall be permanently lubricated, ball
bearing, continuous duty, totally enclosed and fan
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 442
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
cooled. The capacity and features
collector shall be as follows:
B.
the
dust
1.
Motor:
3/4 HP, 3450 RPM, 500 CFM
@ 3 1/2" of water static
pressure.
2.
Impeller:
Cast Aluminum
3.
Filter Area:
30 square feet
4.
Collection Efficiency:
99.9% on particles down
to two (2) micron.
5.
Intakes:
Two (2) 3" dia. each.
Dust Collector shall be complete, adjusted and ready
for use and equipped with the following accessories:
1.
Twenty four (24) Replacement Dust Filters.
2.
Two (2) Each: Tool Grinder Connectors, including
Y-Connector and Quick Disconnects.
3.
Two (2) Each: Disc Sander Connectors and Quick
Disconnects.
4.
Two (2) Each: Belt Sander Connectors and Quick
Disconnects.
5.
Two (2) Each:
Disconnects.
6.
Four (4) 3" Dia. x 60" Hoses, each with a set of
hose clamps.
Band
Saw
Connectors
and
Quick
C.
Motor for dust collector shall have TEFC enclosure and
shall be designed to operate on three phase, 208
volts, 60 Hz A.C. (Solid Connection).
D.
Provide in a convenient location on the dust collector
a magnetic starter wired to motor with approved
materials.
E.
Metal Dust Collector shall be Model 49-909 of Delta
International
Machinery
Corporation,
Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania.
12.289
ELECTRONICS COMMUNICATIONS STATION
A.
NYSCA
of
Unit
shall
be
a
complete
training
station
to
accommodate two students with provision for disabled
students.
All
of
the
individual
devices
which
constitute this training system shall be as listed
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 443
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
below, together with detailed descriptions which
specify the minimum equipment types, quality and
quantity,
educational
coverage
and
performance
standards to which any approved equal shall apply.
B.
Bench shall be composed of maple top, base cabinet,
pedestal support leg, and three door instrument
console as follows:
1.
Maple top shall be of laminated edge grain maple,
urea glued and lacquer finished. Dimensions shall
be 72" x 36" x 1-3/4".
Each top shall be bored
(not channelled) from edge to edge to receive
.438" steel reinforcing rods approximately 36" on
center, with the first and last rod near the ends
of the top. Rods shall be secured in place with
heavy nuts and washers counterbored beneath edge
surface with maple plugs fitted and glued into
each counterbored hole dressed off flush to edge
surface. Submit shop drawings.
2.
Base cabinet construction shall be all wood, glue
and metal fastened with high pressure laminate
cover on all exposed surfaces and edges. Cabinet
shall have a hinged door, handle, and master-keyed
cylinder lock. Cabinet shall have recessed kick
panel at the bottom, 2"D x 4"H. Overall dimensions
of cabinet shall be 19"W x 25 1/2"D x 32"H or as
required for use by the disabled. Submit shop
drawings.
Pedestal support leg assembly shall be 6"W, 34"D,
and 32"H or as required for use by the disabled.
Construction shall be all wood, glue and metal
fastened with high pressure laminate cover on all
exposed surfaces and edges. Submit shop drawings.
3.
NYSCA
Instrument console shall be all wood, glue, and
metal fastened with high pressure laminate cover
on all exposed surfaces and edges. Laminate shall
match pedestal support legs. Mounting rails for
trainer are to have brass ferrules for machine
screw mounting. Service loops shall be provided
for easy servicing with power connected; all items
shall be removable from front. Security fasteners
and dividers shall be incorporated in the console
to secure the CAI computer, monitor and keyboard.
The keyboard shall be permanently mounted and all
items are to be locked in a covered and enclosed
console. The instrument console shall provide
secure storage for the CAI Computer System and one
(1) of the two (2) required telecommunications
trainers.
Console
shall
have
three
hinged
plexiglass doors, each with a master-keyed lock.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 444
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Design shall permit doors to be individually
opened to allow individual use of trainer or CAI
computer or both items at the same time. Doors are
not to be removable from console during equipment
operation. Submit shop drawings.
4.
C.
Electrical Package shall provide the instrument
console with all of the electrical and mechanical
connections and hardware and installation to
accommodate the training systems. It shall include
the outlet strips and the junction boxes and
master power switches, separate lines for the
computer with spike suppression and fans for
movement of air for cooling the CAI Computer
System. The package shall also include accessory
power outlets within the console as well as
externally available outlets available to the
student with all the doors in a locked position.
Telecommunications Trainers
Unit design shall be for a completely self-contained
electronics
telecommunications
systems
educational
trainer and program. Unit shall be designed for
introductory, exploratory and basic core electricity
and electronics circuit, radio communications and
systems educational program.
All components used for
all experiments shall be mounted on a single panel.
Components or power supply or instruments will not burn
out due to any incorrect panel wiring. All components
shall be individual non-connected components so that
they can be connected in any manner required for any
experiment that is supplied or any experiment designed
by the students or from reference manuals or texts. All
components are to be permanently mounted. Connections
are to be made using only full size professional
quality banana jacks (1/8 inch diameter). Front panel
shall be fabricated from 1/8" thick aluminum with
baked-on enamel finish. All labels and markings shall
be clearly visible epoxy type paint for silk screen
symbols and lettering. Components and features provided
shall include the following:
1.
NYSCA
Test Instrumentation Section shall contain A.C.
power source, three D.C. power sources including
positive, negative and variable voltage; function
generator with sine, square and triangle output
waveforms. The sine amplitude shall be adjustable
including a high-low range switch. Frequency shall
be calibrated and continuously variable from 1 Hz
to 100kHz in five ranges shall also be voltage
controllable - VCO.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 445
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
2.
Communications
Input
Section
shall
contain
potentiometers from 1K to 1M with position marking
and indicator knobs, using military specification
quality sealed potentiometers; switches included
shall be four (4) double throw toggle switches and
one (1) double throw pushbutton switch.
3.
Communications Output Section shall contain a
loudspeaker, low voltage buzzer, LED, four (4)
incandescent lamps and photocell. Unit design
shall permit photocell to be used as an input
device and allow photocell to interact with lamp
outputs in control experiments.
4.
Process
Section
shall
contain
capacitors,
inductors, separate but mutually coupled, diodes
and semiconductors including NPN, PNP, Silicon,
Germanium, UJT and SCR types; slug tuned RF coil
for tuning the AM Broadcast Band. Coil shall be
tapped and have a second winding that can be used
for feedback. Section shall also include high gain
Op-Amp operational amplifier, and power amplifier
with low output impedance to match motors and
loudspeakers. Simulated industrial control process
is to be provided and shall include input, output,
input for load or disturbance and adjustable
process delays. Section shall have a panel mounted
removable wire insertion breadboard for student
experiments which include linear, digital, and
timing
ICs,
and
component
circuits.
Each
telecommunications trainer shall be furnished with
all necessary components, wires and tools.
Electronics
Communications
Station
shall
be
furnished
with
two
(2)
telecommunications
trainers; One (1) unit shall be mounted within the
instrument console and one (1) unit shall be
mounted in a portable suitcase with protective
lid. Unit design shall permit use of the portable
trainer in a remote location so that it may serve
as a transmitter or receiver and the console
mounted trainer may serve as a receiver or
transmitter during student experiments. Suitcase
is to include provision for the storage of Leads
and Student Manuals.
The supplier shall provide a 5 year unconditional
warranty to the school to repair any electrical or
mechanical damage to the equipment at no charge,
and shall pick up the units at the school and
promptly return the units to the school at the
customers request, at no charge.
D.
NYSCA
Accessories
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 446
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
The following accessories shall be furnished with each
telecommunications trainer of a type approved by the
manufacturer of the units:
E.
1.
External combination earphone - microphone which
may be used as an input or output device.
2.
External digital multimeter with D.C., A.C.,
volts, current and ohms indication and voltage
converter on front panel. Unit shall accurately
read A.C. voltage of frequencies exceeding 100kHz.
3.
External transformer-inductor module.
Manuals
Supply with each telecommunications trainer, two (2)
student
manuals.
Topical
material
covered
shall
include:
NYSCA
1.
Concepts of Electricity and Electronics
2.
D.C. Circuits
3.
Components; Controls, Transistors, Alarm Systems,
Diodes, Voltmeters, Current Meters, Ohmmeters, SCR
Lamp Dimmer, Transformers, PA System.
4.
Resistive Circuits
5.
Capacitors and Inductors in A.C. Circuits
6.
D.C. Power supplies
7.
A.C. generators
8.
Amplifiers
9.
Audio Oscillators
10.
Resonance
11.
RF Oscillator and Radio Transmitter / Receiver
12.
Digital Numbers and Logic
13.
Ohm's Law
14.
Power and Energy
15.
Process Control
16.
Quizzes
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 447
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
Manuals shall be written in basic introductory
manner
covering
all
electronic
components
including test equipment operation and describing
various electronics systems. Experiments shall be
presented in sequential order of increasing
difficulty.
Initial
presentation
of
the
information in most of the experiments shall be
without equations; electrical laws are to be
clearly explained in later experiments.
F.
Satellite System
This system is to consist of three fully assembled
printed circuit boards; Transmitter Station, Receiver
Station and the Satellite Station, three AC adapters, a
loudspeaker and an audio cassette recorder. The
complete Satellite Link shall transmit audio signals
over a visible light beam. Miniature reflective dishes
are to be used on the Satellite and Receiver Stations
to collect and focus the incoming signal. The
Transmitter and Satellite Stations shall include
controls to aid in the visual alignment procedure.
System design shall permit the Transmitter and Receiver
Stations to be used alone to demonstrate the concept of
a Microwave Link. The System is to include a Lab
Manual. The system is to be compatible with CAI lessons
provided.
G.
CAI Computer System
This system shall provide training in the concepts,
operation,
installation,
and
interfacing
of
microcomputers as well as providing the device for
presentation of the CAI material and the interfacing to
the training systems. The unit is to be installed, and
formatted to be consistent with the CAI software and
hardware training system including compensation for the
real time timing circuit, scale factors required and
the memory allocation tables set to be compatible with
the software.
The CAI Computer System shall include
the following features:
NYSCA
1.
486DX cpu with a clock speed of 33MHz or faster
and a minimum cache of 256KB.
2.
A minimum of 8MB, 70NS on board memory, expandable
to 64MB of on board memory.
3.
Two serial
port.
4.
Disk Drives:
com
ports
and
one
parallel
printer
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 448
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
a.
5 1/4" 1.21 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
b.
3 1/2" 1.4 Mbyte floppy disk drive.
c.
340 Mbyte SCSI hard disk with 15 ms or faster
access time SCSI-2 bit controller/interface
card.
5.
Super VGA card with graphics processor. Card shall
support all VGA and Super VGA resolutions of up to
and including non-interlaced 1024 by 768 pixels
with 256 colors and up to 74Hz refresh rates. Card
shall be provided with drivers for Microsoft
Windows and Autodesk AutoCad.
6.
15" flat screen color monitor which supports noninterlaced Super VGA resolutions of up to 1024 by
768 and 256 colors at a refresh rate no slower
than 70Hz. Monitor shall have a dot pitch of 0.28
mm or less. Unit shall be compatible with the
Super VGA card and shall not exceed an electronic
radiation of 250 nanoteslas when measured at a
distance of 20 inches from the monitor.
7.
Microsoft Windows compatible track ball or mouse.
8.
101 key Enhanced Keyboard.
The system must provide for assembly language
programming and the software is to include a MSDOS Disk Operating System version 6.0 or latest
release, Quick BASIC, Microsoft Windows and a
Microsoft Windows compatible word processing
package, plus interface and applications software
and manuals. Installed and resident on the hard
disk will be the CAI control software which shall
include all necessary video drivers, graphic fonts
and processing software to be compatible with the
CAI software. A quick install
program is to be
provided
to
allow
easy
installation
and
configuration of additional lesson material. This
system must be compatible with the CAI interfaced
electricity,
electronics,
electrical
and
microprocessor training systems. The CAI Computer
System shall be mounted inside the bench's
instrument console.
H.
CAI Software Package
This software package shall be a computer aided
instruction and interactive software package that
supports both training and integrated test instruments.
This software package shall be designed to operate with
a 486 type CPU system. The software package is to be
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 449
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
provided on floppy disks and installed on the CAI
Computer System's hard drive. The software package can
be executed from either disk drive or a hard drive or
on a local area network (LAN). The CAI Software Package
shall contain experiments in the topics specifically
for use with the electronics communications training
systems that are provided. The CAI software shall
provide both information sheets, experiments, and shall
have provision for progress reports. The software shall
allow for instructors to author and create CAI
experiments,
information
sheets,
and
exams.
The
Computer Aided Instruction master software shall have
the provision for instructor authoring of lessons,
experiments and quizzes. The program shall maintain a
data base of student progress, student data, data
entry, and automatic data entry, and recording.
Provisions shall be made for preserving the student
data on a student disc as well as a hard copy printout
of student performance. The CAI control software shall
be based on a graphical user interface which shall
support both keyboard and mouse based selection of
student response. The graphical serial interface shall
support the VGA standard with a minimum resolution of
640 by 480 pixels. CAI Software Package and lessons
must be compatible with the training systems and test
instruments
being
correlated to all circuits and
measuring instruments.
I.
CAI Printer
This printer is to provide direct compatibility with
CAI Computer System. The printer must accept an
industry standard Centronics Parallel printer cable as
its input, and contain a printer memory buffer of 32
kilobytes as a minimum. The printer shall provide for
both text and graphics mode of printing, with a minimum
column width of 80. The printer shall provide for near
letter quality output with a print head of 9 pins as a
minimum. The printer is to accept both form feed and
tractor fed paper. The printer shall be supplied on an
acrylic printer stand that shall allow for easy paper
handling as well as storage of additional paper below
the printer.
The printer shall have a built-in
diagnostic test mode and multiple fonts and the
internal control codes shall be compatible with all the
CAI software codes. The unit shall accommodate all the
CAI report formats, graphic print outs, and experiment
data print-outs and student progress printouts.
J.
Local Area Network
The CAI Computer System is to be furnished with a local
area network system. The network shall provide for the
sharing of computer resources such as a network
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 450
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
printer, network plotter and both local and remote hard
disks for file transfers. The network shall be based on
the netbios operating system and shall support both a
peer to peer and dedicated file server network. All
network communications shall be carried over standard
thin ethernet cable, supporting a sustained data
transfer rate of 10 MBps. The network hardware and
software shall support both IEEE 802.3 and 10BASET UTP
cabling. The network hardware shall be compatible with
specifications for Novell NetWare version 3.x or later.
Network software shall be installed and configured for
all fileservers and workstations installed on said
network. The software shall provide for password
security
restriction,
client
usage
tracking,
restriction by time or date, have a built in network
administration program for monitoring network usage as
well as for network diagnostics to solve problems
occurring by user or with the installed network
backbone. The network software shall provide for
network printers and support direct printer spooling to
conserve printing time. The software shall be supplied
on both 5 1/4" and 3 1/2" media, with installation and
operations manuals provided for network administrator
information.
K.
Maintenance
Provide all system components including hardware and
software with full maintenance parts and service for a
period of one (1) year with provision for renewal,
commencing on the date of demonstration. Service shall
include adjustment of all equipment, repair or
replacement of system components whenever this is
required during maintenance periods. Maintenance work
shall be performed during regular working hours and
days by competent personnel under the manufacturer's
supervision. Only genuine standard parts produced or
furnished by the manufacturer shall be used. Local
call-back emergency service shall be available during
regular working hours and days. Furnish a listing of
the service agent's name, address and local phone
number.
L.
Demonstration
Supplier of unit shall provide a full demonstration of
Electrons Communications Station installation at time
agreed upon by the Chairperson Of Technology of the
school. Demonstration shall be performed by a certified
representative of the manufacturer.
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 451
05/14/04
M.
DESIGN NO. _____
Manufacturers
Electrons Communications Station complete with all of
the individual devices which constitute this station as
listed above, shall be of CES Industries, Inc.,
Farmingdale, N.Y.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and that
installation of Shop Equipment may proceed.
Notify
the Authority in writing of conditions which adversely
effect the Work.
Do not proceed with installation
until conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Where the word "installed" is used in this
Section, it shall mean that the equipment
specified shall be shimmed with steel shims,
leveled and securely fastened in an approved
manner to the floor or on benches or cabinets in
locations as specified and/or shown on Drawings.
The location of machines shall be as nearly as
possible as specified and/or as shown on the
Drawings, but the right is reserved to change the
location
of
machines,
etc,
to
suit
local
conditions.
NYSCA
2.
Where equipment specified does not properly fit
location specified and/or shown on Drawings, the
Contractor shall notify the Authority and receive
from the Authority's representative new written
instructions for installation.
3.
Any damage to school property caused in connection
with Work under this Section shall be repaired,
and finished to match surrounding work.
4.
Unless otherwise specified, all Shop Equipment to
be provided shall be new and as specified.
The
quantity of equipment required and location for
delivery and installation shall be as specified
and/or as shown on the Drawings.
5.
Machines and or equipment delivered disassembled
shall be completely assembled including all
appurtenances and guards.
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 452
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
6.
B.
C.
Floor Equipment
1.
Where equipment is to be fastened to wood floors,
approved lag screws shall be used.
Lag screws
shall not be more than 1/16" in diameter smaller
than holes provided in bases of machines.
Lag
screws shall be of sufficient length to pass
through finished floor and securely fasten to
rough floor underneath.
2.
Where equipment is to be fastened to concrete
floors, approved expansion bolts or self drilling
anchors of best quality shall be used. Expansion
bolts shall not be more than 1/16" in diameter
smaller than the holes provided in bases of
machines. Expansion bolts shall be of the highest
grade
of
Ackerman-Johnson.
Self
drilling
anchor,"Red Head" type by Phillips Drill Co. may
be used. Expansion bolts and anchors shall have
BSA or MEA approval.
3.
Floor equipment of the following type shall be
shimmed, leveled and securely fastened to floor.
The following listing is not intended to be
complete, but only to serve as an indication of
type of equipment to be installed: Tool grinders,
floor drill presses, jig saws, polishing units,
kick wheels, electric potter's wheels, squaring
shears, brakes, engine lathes, shapers, milling
machines, circular saws, band saws, work benches,
woodworking benches, wedging tables, glue tables,
staining benches, cabinets for pilot presses,
printing presses, proof presses, etc.
4.
Shop benches with cabinet base shall be fastened
to floor with at least four steel clip angles per
bench securely fastened to cabinet and floor. Clip
angles shall not obstruct passageways and heads of
wood screws shall be countersunk.
Bench Equipment
1.
NYSCA
Machines and equipment shall be complete, adjusted
and equipped with all guards, wrenches, proper
size pulleys, belts, etc. to permit operation of
machines at speeds recommended by the respective
manufacturers.
Bench equipment of the following type shall be
shimmed, leveled, and securely fastened to bench
tops or tops of cabinets in locations shown on
Drawings and/or specified with approved through
bolts, lock washers and nuts.
The following
listing is not intended to be complete buy only to
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 453
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
serve as an indication of type of equipment to be
installed:
Bench drill presses, bench grinders,
bench brakes, bench shears, bench slip roll
formers, anvil bases, machinist vises, pilot
presses, bench bar folders, bench combination
rotary machines, etc.
D.
2.
Machinist vises shall be securely fastened to
bench tops (use minimum 11/2" diameter heavy lock
washers) with the fixed jaw of machinist vises
located directly above edge of bench and in same
plane as edge of bench.
3.
Woodworking vises shall be securely fastened to
bench tops with approved wood screws and lag
screws with minimum 11/2" diameter heavy lock
washer and nuts.
Woodworking vises shall be
installed flush with ends of bench.
The top of
metal jaw face shall be set 1/8" below bench top.
Wood jaw faces shall extend 1/8" above bench top.
4.
Bottom
of
bench
tops
shall
be
routed,
counterbored, etc. where required to provide for
proper operation of related equipment.
Wall & Ceiling Supports
Where apparatus, motors, etc., are specified to be
supported from side walls or placed on platforms hung
from ceiling and Drawings do not detail such support or
platform, shop drawings of all such construction of
steel angle frame work, platform, etc., as required to
suit special conditions of respective Shop Equipment
installation shall be submitted.
E.
NYSCA
Lubrication
1.
All new machines, motors, etc., shall have
suitable facilities for lubrication and seals to
retain lubricants and prevent dirt from entering
bearings.
All equipment shall be carefully
lubricated by Contractor in accordance with
manufacturer's
recommendations.
After
installation of equipment, Contractor shall cover
exposed machined surfaces with a light coat of
grease to prevent rust.
2.
Wherever
machines
have
reservoir
requiring
lubricants, cutting and/or cooling oils, etc.,
furnish and fill these reservoir with lubricants,
cutting and/or cooling oils, etc., of the grade
and the amount as recommended by the manufacturer
for initial operation of the machines and
Contractor
shall
provide
such
additional
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 454
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
lubricants and oils as specified in Part 2 of this
Section.
F.
Gas & Air Piping
See specific Ref. Nos. and paragraphs of Part 2 of this
Section and Division 15.
G.
Electrical Requirements
See specific Ref. Nos. and paragraphs of Part 2 of this
Section and Division 16, specifically Section 16480,
"Motors and Control Equipment."
3.03
7
NYSCA
REPLACEMENT, TRANSFERS, REMOVALS, ETC.
A.
General
1.
Where existing machines, equipment, etc., are
specified to be moved, all such equipment,
machines, etc., shall be carefully loosened from
floor or bench; disconnected from electric power,
gas and/or other services, as the case may be;
disassembled as required for safe and easy
handling with sliding or loose parts wired in
position;
separate
loose
parts
marked
for
identification and place in wood boxes; heavy
machines, leg machines, etc., shall be properly
mounted on heavy wood skids.
2.
Machines and/or equipment being relocated but not
specified to be repaired shall be carefully
examined
before
being
disconnected
and/or
disassembled. If found to be in need of repair(s)
and/or part(s) that would affect its operation or
use when it is reinstalled, the need for such
repair(s) and or part(s) shall be brought to the
attention of the Authority's Representative who
will confirm same and advise the Contractor how to
proceed.
3.
All moved machines, equipment, etc., shall be
fully assembled when delivered at new location,
complete in every respect as original, unless
otherwise specified.
4.
Relocated or moved machines, etc., shall be
repaired
where
so
specified,
then
cleaned,
adjusted, properly oiled, and left in good safe
operating condition.
5.
Where equipment is to be replaced, no removals or
transfers of existing equipment shall be made
until the replacement equipment is on the site and
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 455
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
is ready to be installed without undue delay
unless otherwise specified in the Specification.
6.
B.
Where it is specified that obsolete equipment to
be removed shall become the property of the
Contractor or shall be disposed of by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall consider the
value of this obsolete equipment when submitting
his bid.
Removal and Transfer Receipts
When equipment is to be transferred from one school
building to another, the Contractor shall have receipts
in triplicates signed by custodian of school of origin
and school or place of destination. One receipt to be
retained by each custodian and one to accompany
application for payment on Contract amount. Where
equipment is to be removed from premises for whatever
reason, the Contractor shall submit signed itemized
receipts for the equipment to the custodian of building
when making application for payment.
C.
Type Cabinet Replacement
Where existing type cabinets are to be replaced by new
type cabinets, the Contractor shall first deliver new
type cabinets and the existing type shall be carefully
transferred from the existing type cabinets to the new
type cabinets.
The transfer of type from old to new
cabinets shall be performed under the supervision of
the instructor of the Graphic Arts Shop and a duly
authorized representative of the Authority charged with
this supervision.
D.
NYSCA
Gas Equipment
1.
Gas pipe removal shall be performed by a Plumber
licensed by the City of New York.
2.
Where equipment to be moved is connected to gas
service piping, the Contractor shall unless other
specified, disconnect gas piping from equipment to
be moved and remove existing gas piping as
follows:
a.
Remove exposed branch piping, which becomes unused
as a result of equipment removals, back to
connection to active piping or back to existing
risers or headers.
b.
Concealed branch gas piping which becomes unused
as a result of equipment removals shall be cut
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 456
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
below finished surfaces where piping enters or
exits floor, wall or ceiling.
c.
E.
F.
3.04
8
instances shall
be left open.
and disconnected
gas tight by use
any discontinued line or
All resulting openings in
piping shall be plugged or
of threaded fittings.
Electric Equipment
1.
Electrical removals shall be performed by
Electrician licensed by the City of New York.
2.
Where equipment to be moved is connected to
electric service wiring, the Contractor shall
unless otherwise specified, disconnect electric
services wiring and conduit from equipment to be
moved, remove fuse at panel box, remove wiring
back to panel box, and cut conduit flush with
floor. Plug or cap resulting holes.
3.
Where it is specified that electric wiring and
conduit shall remain. The Contractor shall remove
fuse at panel box and tape ends of exposed wire.
an
Salvageable Items
1.
The Specification and/or Drawings indicate which
equipment, etc., if any is to remain the property
of the Board of Education.
2.
All salvageable items are to be carefully removed,
crated and tagged.
A quadruplicate (4) receipt
showing the Contractor, trade, Specification, and
items must accompany the delivery of the items to
the designated receiving offices and be signed by
the Board of Education's representative. One (1)
copy of the receipt must remain with the
representative.
Three (3) copies of the receipt
must be attached to bills submitted to the
Authority for payment.
All items are to be
delivered to the designated location within the
receiving office. A copy of that portion of the
Specification listing the items designated for
salvage must be presented to the Board of
Education's
representative
at
the
time
of
delivery.
EQUIPMENT REPAIRS
A.
General
1.
NYSCA
In no
outlet
active
capped
The Specification and/or Drawings indicate the
repairs which are required to be done on existing
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 457
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
equipment, machines, kilns, benches, etc. as part
of this Contract.
2.
B.
C.
Work Bench Repairs
1.
Wood tops on shop benches shall be planed and
sandpapered smooth. Bench woodworking vises to be
all reset 1/8" below top of bench and secured with
flat head screws. Tops of benches to be finished
with two (2) coats of hard oil, well rubbed in.
All rough and splintered solid wood parts shall be
rounded
off
by
planing
or
scraping
and
sandpapering to a smooth finish.
2.
All iron work shall be dusted clean and all rust
marks removed with wire brushes or steel wool then
refinished with one coat of flat paint and one
coat of enamel color as selected.
Electric Kiln Repairs
1.
NYSCA
Where machine repairs are specified, the machines
shall be carefully dissembled in an orderly manner
and parts cleaned and oiled. After necessary
repairs are completed, the machines shall be
carefully reassembled, cleaned, lubricated, and
adjusted for proper operation.
Remove the entire refractory lining from the
door(s), side walls, back wall, roof, and bottom
of the firing chamber and replace same with new
refractory materials made by machine dry press
method true and regular in shape and size and
shall have maker's brand molded in.
The
refractory material shall meet the following
requirements
based
on
the
latest
revised
Specifications of the American Society of Testing
Materials.
a.
Pyrometric cone Equivalent: Pyrometric cone
equivalent shall not be below Cone 311/2
(ASTM C24 test procedure).
b.
Linear Change: When triplicate specimens are
heated uniformly for a period of three (3)
hours to a temperature of 2550oF., maintained
at this temperature for five (5) hours and
cooled,
they
shall
show
an
average
contraction of the original length of not
more than 1.5 percent (ASTM C113 test
procedure).
c.
Spelling:
When subjected to Panel Spelling
Test (ASTM C107 test procedure), the average
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 458
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
spelling loss of 14 bricks shall not exceed
10%.
2.
d.
Alumina content shall be not less than 35
percent.
e.
Porosity shall not exceed 16 to 20 percent.
Approved Makes and Brands:
The following makes
and brands subject to the here-in-before specified
requirements are approved. No other make or brand
shall be used unless otherwise specified.
General Refractories Co..................... WYNN
Harbison-Walker Refractory Co......... WOODLAND X
J.H. France................................ ARMOR
Kaiser Refractories.................... IG SAVAGE
Lacklede-Christy Co..................... CLEAR CO
North American Refractories Co.......... CRESCENT
Quigley Co................................ UNITEX
3.
NYSCA
Remove all heating elements from firing chamber of
kiln and replace same with Kanthal A-1 heating
element as made by the C.O. Jelliff Mfg. Co. or
Hoskins Chromel Co. Elements shall be set into new
grooves cut into the new refractory material of
the two side walls, door, back wall (or two sides
and bottom) of the firing chamber of kiln. Heating
elements shall be adequately supported in place by
pins, porcelain or ceramic channels.
Leads from
elements shall pass through kiln wall through porcelain tubes, and these tubes shall be packed with
rockwool to prevent passage of heat from firing
chamber to outer terminal junction box. New elements shall be three in number and shall be
connected to existing terminals and control switch
when terminals and/or switch are found in good
condition. Control switch shall be cleaned up and
repaired with new contacts for good operating
condition.
New elements shall be of sufficient
length to develop sufficient heat in firing
chamber to provide approximately 2350oF under
normal working conditions. Where existing terminals for heating element connections are found
defective, then kiln shall be equipped with an
approved type terminal junction box in which shall
be installed a panel board of heat resisting nonconductor material on which shall be mounted the
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 459
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
required electrical binding posts to take heating
elements, leads, etc. Binding posts shall be of
brass and all interior and exterior electrical
connections shall terminate at the binding posts.
NYSCA
4.
Kiln shall be cleaned and door hinges and hardware
properly lubricated or replaced with new hardware,
if found defective. Kiln shall be given tow (2)
coats of heat resistant paint.
5.
Provide on casing of kiln in location for ease of
reading, one (1) new pyrometer complete with
thermocouple into firing chamber of kiln, all
properly connected for the reading of temperatures
within firing chamber during firing periods.
Pyrometer shall be made by the Hoskins Instrument
Co., Brown Instrument Co., Wheelco Co. or other
approved pyrometer.
6.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved pyrometer
cone heat shut-off device shall be "Kilngard"
electric control made by B. f. Drakenfeld Co.,
Jane Snead Ceramic Supply Co., Norman Ceramics.
Kilngard shall pro-vide control of firing chamber
temperature up to 2500oF. maximum and shall
operate through a switch to provide a temperature
limiting device for kiln.
7.
Thermocouple
a.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved
chromel-alumel thermocouple, Wheelco No. CASC-19F with a 12" long by 1/2 inch diameter
standard
drawn
nickel
of
similar
high
temperature
alloy
protecting
tube
and
adjustable flange and equipped with Wheelco
46-400 chromel-alumel No. 14 gauge (stranded)
heat-resistive covered lead wire.
b.
Kiln shall be equipped with an approved
indicating
and
limiting
pyrometer
or
controller calibrated to 2500oF, Wheelco
"Limitrol" Model No. 741-P controller shall
be designed to operate through a three pole
contactor.
If current per phase exceeds
25 Amps, a 3 pole, 60 ampere contactor,
Automatic Switch Co., Bulletin 1034, shall be
furnished. However, if current is less than
25 Amps, a 30 ampere contactor will be
accepted.
Magnetic Coil of such contactor
shall be designed to operate on 120 volt,
60 cycle alternating current and controller
shall be designed to automatically cut off
the power to kiln through the contactor when
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 460
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
any predetermined temperature
range has been reached.
c.
NYSCA
within
the
Controller shall be calibrated for operation
with thermocouple and lead wire hereinbefore
specified. Controller shall be equipped with
a means of opening power circuit to kiln,
when thermocouple circuit is broken (i.e.,
shall
have
T.C.
and
T.C.B.
leads).
Controllers shall be Model No. 741-P, made by
Whelco Instrument Co.; Brown Instrument Co.;
or Model JL made by West Instrument Company.
Controller shall be equipped with a means of
limiting the maximum setting of the limiting
operating mechanism so that it will be
impossible to heat kiln above the safe
maximum temperature of the kiln heating
elements as prescribed by the manufacturer of
kiln.
Controller shall be mounted on kiln
with spacers to provide air space between
controller and kiln casing. Controller shall
be further insulated by a panel composed of
two pieces of 1/8" thick transite board
separated by a 1" thick 85% magnesia block
insulation.
Panels shall be of sufficient
size to overlap sides and back of controller
by 1". Furnish electrically operated, manual
reset, synchronous motor operated interval
timer enclosed in a metal box equipped with a
lock.
Box with enclosed timer shall be
mounted on kiln and wired into control
circuit to automatically cut-off current
supply to kiln when predetermined time
setting has elapsed.
Timer shall be Model
No. RS-12H made by Industrial Timer Corp.; or
Model No. 2409 made by Paragon Elec. Co.
8.
Dismantle the existing temperature control unit
and remove defective parts, vacuum tube, etc.,
install a new vacuum tube, etc.
Clean up all
parts of instrument, lubricate moving parts,
recalibrate existing thermocouple and return
instrument to good operating condition ready for
school use.
9.
Repaired instrument shall be guaranteed for good
operation for a period of one (1) year and
Contractor shall service this instrument at all
times within the period of guarantee.
10.
When nameplate is missing,
equip kiln with
nameplate indicating repair date.
Contractor's
name, and electrical data: K.W. rating, current,
voltage, etc. Kiln should also be provided with
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 461
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
plate securely fastened to front of kiln door with
2" high letters, in red, spelling word "DANGER".
11.
The kiln shall be assembled complete with all its
electric connections by the Contractor, who shall
arrange for a competent person to test and operate
kiln after electric service has been provided.
Test shall be made in the presence of an
authorized person assigned by the Board of
Education and the authority to prove that
apparatus is complete and in good operating
condition.
END OF SECTION
Notes to Specifier (Delete from Specification)
1.
Reference Numbers should not be changed. Each equipment item
should always have the same Reference Number, for example, a
Box and Pan Brake will always be Ref. No. 12.70.
Equipment should be noted on the Drawings by the Reference
Numbers listed in this specification.
2.
See reference drawing SE-101. Incorporate applicable details
into Contract Documents.
3.
See reference drawing SE-102. Incorporate applicable details
into Contract Documents.
4.
See reference drawing SE-103. Incorporate applicable details
into Contract Documents.
5.
See reference drawing SE-104. Incorporate applicable details
into Contract Documents.
6.
Ref. No. 12.271, Computerized Photo-Typesetting System,
Verify that the Room Layout includes Apple Macintosh
8100/80AV computers (for High Schools) or Apple Macintosh
7100/66AV computers (for Intermediate Schools) and that these
computers are listed in the Room Layout's Bureau of Supplies
Items Schedule. The computer systems are available through
State Contract.
7.
Article 3.03, delete this article if removals or relocation
of existing equipment is not part of project.
8.
Article 3.04, delete this article if repairs to existing
equipment is not part of project.
AG:ag
NYSCA
* * *
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 462
05/14/04
DESIGN NO. _____
LIST OF SUBMITTALS
SUBMITTAL
DATE SUBMITTED
DATE APPROVED
Product Data:
_____________
____________
_____________
____________
_____________
____________
_____________
____________
Guarantees
_____________
____________
Project Closeout:
_____________
____________
1. Manufacturer's model number,
product description and
specification for each
equipment item.
Shop Drawings:
1. Room layouts with equipment
locations.
2. Model numbers, dimensions and
attachment details for each
item.
Samples:
1. Items submitted as an equal
for approval, for all pieces
of equipment
Quality Assurance:
1. Manufacturer's affidavit
certifying minimum 5 years
experience producing
products specified.
2. Installer's affidavit
certifying minimum 3 years
experience installing
equipment specified and
list of projects completed.
3. Manufacturer's OSHA and UL
certification for each item
1. Instruction/Parts manual for
each equipment item.
2. Lubrication data for each
machine.
* * *
NYSCA
SECTION 11500 SHOP EQUIPMENT - 463